JP7462966B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

For example, Patent Document 1 describes a gaming machine that displays a variable pattern according to game information.

JP 2020-163228 A

However, the problem with the gaming machines described in the above patent documents was that the gameplay was not very interesting.

The purpose of this invention is to increase the enjoyment of games.

The present invention, which achieves the above object, is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a first control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a second control means (e.g., a performance control unit 300) for controlling the presentation, the first control means obtains judgment information when a start condition is satisfied, and is capable of making a judgment related to a special game according to the judgment information, the second control means is capable of controlling a plurality of presentation modes including at least a first presentation mode, and is capable of executing a variable presentation in which a presentation pattern is changed and then stopped according to the result of the judgment, and when the start condition is satisfied , the information When the variable performance is not being performed, a specific image that can be displayed in an action (e.g., a customer waiting image 710) can be displayed . When the specific image is displayed , the specific image can be made non-displayable in response to the establishment of the start condition. In the first performance mode, a first information display (e.g., the reserved image 702 in a normal display mode) can be displayed. The first information display can be displayed in a specific mode (e.g., the completed display mode shown in FIG. 149(4)). In response to the establishment of the start condition, the first information display can be made non-displayable. When a display is displayed, the first information display in a specific display mode (e.g., an incomplete display mode of the first information display) can be displayed before the first information display in the specific mode is displayed, and when the start condition is met during the display of the specific image and the first information display is displayed (e.g., when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 at the timing shown in FIG. 217(1)), it is possible to make the first information display in the specific display mode difficult to see or to restrict its display, and the first information display in the specific mode corresponds to the determination information, and when the start condition is met when the specific image is displayed, there is a second presentation mode (e.g., a stage in the same game state as the first presentation mode but different from the first presentation mode, or a stage in a game state different from the first presentation mode) in which a second information display different from the first information display (e.g., an information display that can be displayed in the second presentation mode) is displayed in a predetermined display mode different from the specific display mode (e.g., an incomplete display mode of the second information display) and then the second information display can be displayed in a predetermined mode corresponding to the determination information (e.g., a stage in the same game state as the first presentation mode but different from the first presentation mode, or a stage in a game state different from the first presentation mode) .

The above symbols in this section are given as examples in explaining the present invention, and do not limit the scope of the present invention.

The present invention can increase the enjoyment of games.

1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine as seen from the rear. FIG. (a) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display disposed at the bottom left of the game board, (b) is a partial plan view of a pachinko game machine, and (c) is an enlarged view showing an example of a sub-information display disposed at the bottom left of the game board. A diagram showing the internal configuration of a control unit of a pachinko game machine of this embodiment. 2 is an explanatory diagram of an image/audio control unit and a lamp control unit of the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of a game control unit of the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the operation of basic processing by a game control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the operation of the game control unit during power interruption processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the main control processing of a game control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start port switch processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a gate switch process. A flowchart showing the contents of the second large prize winning port switch processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big win determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of processing during a stop. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a customer waiting setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of normal pattern processing. A flowchart showing the contents of the first large prize slot processing. A flowchart showing the contents of the second large prize winning port processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a game status setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of an electric tulip process. FIG. 13 is a schematic front view of a modified pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a modified example of special symbol processing. These figures show an example of the configuration of random numbers used in this embodiment, where (a) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot random number, (b) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot pattern random number, (c) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a small win pattern random number, (d) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a reach random number, and (e) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a winning random number. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing examples of the setting of the fluctuation patterns and tables used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. 1A and 1B are block diagrams illustrating an example of the configuration of a RAM of a game control unit, where (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a memory area, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in (a). 1A and 1B are block diagrams illustrating an example of the configuration of the RAM of the performance control unit, where (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the reserved memory area, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in (a). 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a pre-determination process. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating examples of pre-determination patterns and tables used in the pre-determination process; 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating examples of pre-determination patterns and tables used in the pre-determination 6A and 6B are diagrams illustrating an example of a pre-determination pattern and a table used in the pre-determination process; 6A and 6B are diagrams illustrating an example of a pre-determination pattern and a table used in the pre-determination process; 11A and 11B are flowcharts showing the operation of the performance control unit, where FIG. 11A is a diagram showing main processing, and FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a command receiving process. A flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination performance selection process and the performance selection process of Figure 39. A flowchart showing the contents of the big win effect selection process of Figure 39. 40 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending performance selection process of FIG. 39. 40 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting command receiving process of FIG. 39. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a specific time-saving related performance process. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect button processing. This is a pre-determined effect pattern table used in the normal gaming state. 13A is a pre-determined presentation pattern table used in a first special time-shortened gaming state, and FIG. 13B is a pre-determined presentation pattern table used in a second special time-shortened gaming state. This is a variable presentation pattern table used in normal game mode. This is a variable presentation pattern table used in normal game mode. (a) and (b) are variable presentation pattern tables used in the first special time-saving gaming state. (a) and (b) are variable presentation pattern tables used in the second special time-saving gaming state. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A figure showing a modified example of variable performance example 19. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a gate switch process according to the second embodiment; 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of normal pattern processing in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a hit determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the general map variation pattern selection process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of processing during stoppage in the second embodiment; A figure showing an example of the composition of random numbers used in the special pattern lottery in the second embodiment. A figure showing an example of the composition of random numbers used in the normal pattern lottery in the second embodiment. A figure showing a modified configuration of the winning pattern random number used in the normal pattern lottery. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the general fluctuation pattern selection process. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. 13 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a RAM of a game control unit according to a second embodiment. FIG. A block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a RAM of a performance control unit in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the general map advance judgment process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of pre-determination patterns and table settings used in the general map pre-determination process. A diagram showing an example of a pre-determination effect pattern and a table setting. A diagram showing an example of a variable performance pattern and table settings. A diagram showing an example of a variable performance pattern and table settings. A diagram showing an example of a variable performance pattern and table settings. A diagram showing an example of a variable performance pattern and table settings. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A figure showing a modified example of variable performance example 8. 13 is a diagram explaining the relationship between an event that occurs when a command is missed and the timing of execution of a light-emitting effect using a decorative pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A front view of a pachinko gaming machine 100 according to a third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display presentation using pending images. A diagram showing a gradual display presentation using pending images. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display presentation using pending images. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display presentation using pending images. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display presentation using pending images. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display presentation using pending images. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display presentation using pending images. An explanatory diagram of each effect in variable effect example 9. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. An explanatory diagram of each effect in variable effect example 10. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display presentation using pending images. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. An explanatory diagram of each effect in variable effect example 14. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
[Basic configuration of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment.
FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 100 as viewed from the rear.
1, a pachinko game machine 100 as an example of a game machine is configured to pay out prize balls when a game ball shot out in response to a player's instruction enters a prize ball. The pachinko game machine 100 includes a game board 110 from which the game balls are shot out, and a frame member 150 that surrounds the game board 110. The game board 110 is attached to the frame member 150 in a removable manner.

The game board 110 is equipped with a game area 111 on the front side for playing with game balls, a rail member 112 that forms a path along which game balls launched from below rise and head toward an upper position of the game area 111, and a guide member 113 on the right side of the game area 111 for guiding the game balls.
In this embodiment, an image display unit 114 that displays various images for effects is disposed in a position in the game area 111 that is easily visible to the player. This image display unit 114 has a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, and displays, for example, decorative symbols to inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (symbol change result) as the player progresses through the game, and displays effect images due to the appearance of characters and items.
In addition, the front of the game board 110 is provided with three movable parts 115 and a board lamp 116 used for various effects. The three movable parts 115 are arranged in a left-right direction on the upper side of the image display unit 114. When each of the three movable parts 115 is described individually, the movable part 115 arranged on the left side is referred to as the "left movable part 115A". The movable part 115 arranged in the center is referred to as the "middle movable part 115B". The movable part 115 arranged on the right side is referred to as the "right movable part 115C". When the three movable parts 115 are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as the movable part 115. The movable parts 115 perform various effects by operating on the game board 110. The board lamp 116 performs various effects by emitting light.

In the game area 111, there are arranged game nails and windmills (not shown) for changing the direction in which the game balls fall. In addition, in the game area 111, various devices related to winning prizes and lotteries are arranged at predetermined positions. In addition, in the game area 111, there is arranged an outlet 117 for discharging game balls that are shot into the game area 111 but do not enter a winning hole, out of the game area 111. In addition, the pachinko game machine 100 is equipped with an out ball detection switch (SW) 227 (see FIG. 4 described later) for detecting out balls consisting of game balls that flow into the outlet 117.

In this embodiment, as various prize-winning and lottery-related features, a first start hole 121 and a second start hole 122 that start a special pattern lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball wins, and a start gate (hereinafter simply called a gate) 124 that starts a normal pattern lottery (opening and closing lottery) when a game ball wins (passes) are arranged on the game board 110. In FIG. 1, the gate 124 is provided on the right side of the game area 111. The first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122 here refer to the winning hole that triggers the operation of a predetermined special pattern display device. Specifically, the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122 are provided with switches (first start hole switch 211 and second start hole switch 212 described below) that detect the passage of a game ball when a prize is won. When the game ball enters the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122, this switch detects the passage of the game ball, which triggers the special symbol display device to operate.

The second starting hole 122 is equipped with an electric tulip (opening/closing member) 123 as a normal electric device in which a pair of tulip-shaped wings are opened and closed by an electric solenoid and light up. The electric tulip 123 is configured so that when the wings are closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 122, but when the wings are open, the entrance to the second starting hole 122 expands, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 122. When the normal pattern lottery is won, the electric tulip 123 opens its wings for a specified time (e.g., 0.15 to 1.8 seconds) and a specified number of times (e.g., 1 to 3 times) while lighting up or flashing.

The pachinko game machine 100 has, as game states, a no-electric support state in which there are fewer chances of winning at the second starting hole 122, and an electric support state in which there are more chances of winning at the second starting hole 122 than in the no-electric support state. And, under a predetermined condition, for example, triggered by a jackpot or the number of times a special symbol lottery is drawn, the game machine is controlled to either the no-electric support state or the electric support state. The electric support state is a game state controlled by, for example, shortening the normal symbol variation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, or increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery, either by one or a combination of the above.
The pachinko game machine 100 has, as game states, a no-time-shortening state in which the special symbol variation time is long, and a time-shortening state in which the special symbol variation time is shorter than that in the no-time-shortening state. Here, the time-shortening state is a state more advantageous to the player than the no-time-shortening state.
In this embodiment, the electric support state and the time-saving state are controlled simultaneously. In the following description, the electric support state and the time-saving state are simply referred to as the time-saving state, and the no electric support state and no time-saving state are simply referred to as the no time-saving state.

In this embodiment, as other roles related to winning and lottery, the first large prize opening 125 and the second large prize opening 126 as special electric roles that open according to the result of the special pattern lottery, and the normal prize opening 127 that does not perform a lottery even if the game ball wins are arranged on the game board 110. The first large prize opening 125 is provided with a first large prize opening door 125D that opens and closes the first large prize opening 125. The second large prize opening 126 is provided with a second large prize opening door 126D that opens and closes the second large prize opening 126. In the following description, the opening and closing state and opening and closing operation of the first large prize opening door 125D may be described as the opening and closing state and opening and closing operation of the first large prize opening 125 for convenience. In addition, in the following description, the open/closed state and opening/closing operation of the second large prize opening door 126D may be described for convenience as the open/closed state and opening/closing operation of the second large prize opening door 126D.
In this embodiment, a display 130 is disposed at the bottom left of the game board 110 to display information regarding the lottery results and the number of reserved balls.

In the pachinko game machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the second start hole 122 equipped with the electric tulip 123, the gate 124, the first large winning hole 125, and the second large winning hole 126 are arranged in the right area of the game area 111. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment, when trying to win the second start hole 122, the gate 124, the first large winning hole 125, the second large winning hole 126, etc., the game ball is made to flow down to the right area of the game area 111. Here, the left area of the game area 111 is regarded as the first game area. Also, the right area of the game area 111 is regarded as the second game area.
In the illustrated example, the second start gate 122 with the electric tulip 123, the gate 124, the first large winning gate 125, and the second large winning gate 126 are arranged in the right area of the play area 111, but this is not limited to the above. The second start gate 122 with the electric tulip 123, the gate 124, the first large winning gate 125, and the second large winning gate 126 may be arranged in the left area of the play area 111, and the first start gate 121 and the normal winning gate 127 may be arranged in the left area of the play area 111. In this case, the right area of the play area 111 is regarded as the first play area. Also, the left area of the play area 111 is regarded as the second play area.

Attached to the back of the game board 110 are a game control board 200B that determines whether a special symbol has won, and a performance control board 300B that controls the overall performance. Attached to the back of the game board 110 are various boards (not shown), such as an image control board that controls the performance using images and sounds, and a lamp control board that controls the performance using various lamps and movable role objects 115. Attached to the back of the game board 110 are a connector 200C that connects the game control board 200B and the performance control board 300B, and a switching power supply (not shown) that converts the supplied 24V AC power into DC power and outputs it to various boards. The connector 200C is provided with multiple wires (not shown) for connecting the game control board 200B and the performance control board 300B.

The frame member 150 is equipped with a launching device (not shown) that electrically launches game balls at a predetermined time interval (e.g., 100 balls per minute) with a ball-hitting force corresponding to the angle of operation when the player touches the handle 151 and rotates the lever 152 clockwise. The frame member 150 also includes a supplying device (not shown) that supplies game balls to the launching device one by one in sequence at a timing linked to the player's operation of the lever 152, and a tray 153 that temporarily stores the game balls supplied by the supplying device to the launching device. Balls are paid out to the tray 153 by a payout unit, for example.
In this embodiment, the plate 153 is configured as an integrated upper and lower plate, but a configuration example in which the upper plate and the lower plate are separated is also conceivable. Also, a configuration example in which the handle 151 of the launching device is made to emit light under a predetermined condition is also conceivable.

The frame member 150 also has a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the launch of the game balls even when the player is touching the handle 151 of the launching device, and an ejection button 155 for dropping the game balls accumulated in the tray 153 into a box (not shown) and removing them.
The frame member 150 also includes a speaker 156 and a frame lamp 157 that notify the game status and situation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and perform various effects. The speaker 156 performs various effects using music, voice, and sound effects. The frame lamp 157 is composed of an illuminant such as an LED, and performs various effects using light with lighting/flashing patterns, differences in light emission color, etc. It should be noted that the frame lamp 157 may be configured to perform effects by changing the direction of light irradiation.
The frame member 150 also includes a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board 110 from the player.

Figure 3 is a diagram explaining a pachinko gaming machine 100 according to this embodiment, where Figure 3(a) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display 130 arranged at the bottom left of the gaming board 110, Figure 3(b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and Figure 3(c) is an enlarged view showing an example of a sub-information display 80 arranged at the bottom left of the gaming board.
As shown in Fig. 3(a), the display 130 of the pachinko game machine 100 includes a first special symbol display 221 that operates in response to winning at the first start port 121, a second special symbol display 222 that operates in response to winning at the second start port 122, and a normal symbol display 223 that operates in response to passing through the gate 124. The first special symbol display 221 displays the first special symbol in a variable manner and then stops to display the lottery result based on the winning at the first start port 121. The second special symbol display 222 displays the second special symbol in a variable manner and then stops to display the lottery result based on the winning at the second start port 122. The first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 perform cycle fluctuations (cycle display) in which the change in the display mode is one cycle (=256 ms) multiple times, and stop display when the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed. For example, the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 turn on the leftmost LED of the eight LEDs and turn off the other LEDs to notify that the lottery result is a miss. The first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 turn on the first to third three LEDs from the right of the eight LEDs and turn off the other LEDs to notify that the lottery result is a big win. The second special symbol display 222 turns on the first and second two LEDs from the right of the eight LEDs and turns off the other LEDs to notify that the lottery result is a small win.
The normal symbol display 223 displays the lottery result by displaying the normal symbol variably and then stopping it based on the game ball passing through the gate 124. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed according to the lighting state of the LEDs. Similarly, the normal symbol display 223 is also composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed according to the lighting state of the LEDs. As an example, the normal symbol display 223 notifies the player that the lottery result is a miss by lighting the leftmost LED of the three LEDs and turning off the other LEDs. Also, the normal symbol display 223 notifies the player that the lottery result is a win by lighting the rightmost LED of the three LEDs and turning off the other LEDs.

The display 130 also includes a first special symbol reserved indicator 218 that operates in response to a reserved symbol on the first special symbol display 221, a second special symbol reserved indicator 219 that operates in response to a reserved symbol on the second special symbol display 222, and a normal symbol reserved indicator 220 that operates in response to a reserved symbol on the normal symbol display 223. In this embodiment, the first special symbol reserved indicator 218, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, and the normal symbol reserved indicator 220 are each comprised of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the number of reserved symbols is displayed by the lighting state of the LEDs.

Here, the reservation will be explained. If a game ball enters the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 during the variable display operation of the special symbol (while the variable display for one winning is being performed), the variable display operation of the special symbol based on the later winning cannot be started because the special symbol is changing. Therefore, the later winning is stored up to a specified number (for example, four), and the right to start the special symbol for the winning game ball is reserved until the variable display operation for the previously winning game ball is completed.
The normal symbols are also processed in the same manner as the special symbols. The fact that such a reservation has been made and the number of reservations (unchanged number) are displayed on the first special symbol reservation indicator 218, the second special symbol reservation indicator 219, and the normal symbol reservation indicator 220.

The display 130 further includes a status indicator 224 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In this embodiment, the status indicator 224 is configured as a display device with two LEDs arranged in an array. One of the two LEDs lights up to indicate whether the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a time-saving state in which the special pattern variation time is short. The other LED lights up to indicate whether the status is favorable to the player by hitting to the right (by changing the hitting force of the gaming ball).

The display 130 also includes a round number display 225 that displays the number of rounds when the first large winning port 125 is activated in a jackpot game that is played according to the results of the special pattern lottery. The jackpot game will be described later. The round number display 225 is composed of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the number of rounds when the first large winning port 125 is activated in a jackpot game is displayed by the lighting state of the LEDs.

The display 130 also includes a status confirmation indicator 226. The status confirmation indicator 226 is composed of a single LED and is used to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described later is set. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the LED goes out. In this way, since the status confirmation indicator 226 is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, it is possible to easily check whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. The status confirmation indicator 226 may be installed in any location as long as it is on the front (surface) of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same display mode (illuminated display) is used regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but the display may be made so that it is possible to recognize which mode is set. For example, the status confirmation indicator 226 may be illuminated in the setting change mode and flashing in the setting confirmation mode, or vice versa.

In addition, in this embodiment, the status confirmation indicator 226 is provided as a dedicated indicator to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may be used in combination with other indicators. For example, in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol indicator 221, the second special symbol indicator 222, the first special symbol reserved indicator 218, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, the round number indicator 225, the status indicator 224, etc. are turned off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

The frame member 150 of the pachinko game machine 100 is equipped with an input device for the player to input for the effects. As shown in FIG. 3(b), in this embodiment, as an example of an input device, an effect button 161 and an effect key 162 consisting of a plurality of keys arranged in a substantially cross shape adjacent to the effect button 161 are arranged on the frame member 150. In the illustrated example, consider a case where an effect is performed in which an operation to select one image from a plurality of images is accepted. In this case, for example, a player can operate the effect key 162 consisting of four keys arranged in a cross shape to specify one of the multiple images displayed on the image display unit 114, and operate the effect button 161 to select the specified image. In addition, as the form of the input device, in addition to the illustrated effect button 161 and effect key 162, various input forms such as a lever or a handle can be adopted depending on the content of the effect.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment is equipped with a sub-information display 80 inside the game area 111, which consists of a sub-first change display device 81, a sub-second change display device 82, a sub-first hold display device 83, a sub-second hold display device 84, a sub-regular map change display device 85, a sub-regular map hold display device 86, and a sub-right-hit display device 87.
The sub-information display 80 is basically composed of LEDs and is designed to be dynamically lit. The sub-information display 80 does not have an indicator such as the status check indicator 226 that indicates that the sub-information display 80 is in a setting change mode or setting check mode.

The sub-first variable indicator 81 is for displaying (informing) whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed, and the sub-second variable indicator 82 is for displaying (informing) whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed, and each is composed of one LED. When the display of the corresponding special symbol begins, the LED flashes at a predetermined cycle (1 second) (0.5 seconds on → 0.5 seconds off), and lights up when the corresponding special symbol is displayed stationary. In other words, the sub-first variable indicator 81 and the sub-second variable indicator 82 repeatedly perform a cyclic display in which one flash is one cycle (= 1 second), and light up when the corresponding special symbol is displayed stationary.

The result of the special symbol jackpot determination may be notified by the sub-first variable display 81 or the sub-second variable display 82. In this case, the LED may be lit in the event of a jackpot and turned off in the event of a miss.

The sub-first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold information items (first hold number) described below, and the sub-second hold indicator 84 is for displaying the number of second hold information items (second hold number) described below, and each is composed of two LEDs. When the hold number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the hold number is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, when the hold number is "2", the left LED is turned on, when the hold number is "3", the left LED is blinking and the right LED is turned on, and when the hold number is "4", the left and right LEDs are blinking.

The sub-regular symbol variation display 85 is for displaying (informing) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the regular symbol starts, the LED flashes (varies) at a specified interval. Then, when the regular symbol is displayed in a static state, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a win, and goes out in the case of a loss) is displayed in a static state.

In addition, the sub-regular pattern change indicator 85 may be configured to flash while displaying the normal pattern change, and to light up or go out when the normal pattern stops, so that it is possible to know whether or not the normal pattern change is being displayed.

The sub-regular map reserve indicator 86 is used to display the number of reserved regular map memories (regular map reserve number) and is composed of two LEDs. When the regular map reserve number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the regular map reserve number is "1", the left LED is lit and the right LED is turned off, when the regular map reserve number is "2", the left and right LEDs are lit, when the regular map reserve number is "3", the left LED flashes and the right LED is lit, and when the regular map reserve number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The sub right-hit indicator 87 is intended to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-hand area of the game area 111 (so-called right hit), and is composed of one LED. The LED lights up during a jackpot state (special game) and during a time-saving game state, and is turned off in other game states.

[Configuration of the control unit]
Next, a control unit that controls the operation and processes signals in the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment.
FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of the image/audio control unit and the lamp control unit of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 4, the control unit includes a game control unit 200 as a game control means for determining whether a special symbol has been won. Also, as a presentation control means, the control unit includes a presentation control unit 300 for overall control of the presentation, and a payout control unit 330 for controlling the payout of balls.

[Game control unit configuration and functions]
The game control unit 200 includes a CPU 201 which performs calculations when determining whether a special symbol has been won, a ROM 202 which stores programs to be executed by the CPU 201 and various data, and a RAM 203 which is used as a working memory for the CPU 201, etc.

The game control unit 200 controls the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 to either a no-time-reduction state or a time-reduction state. The game state of the pachinko game machine 100 in the no-time-reduction state may be referred to as a normal game state below. The game state of the pachinko game machine 100 in the time-reduction state may be referred to as a time-reduction game state below. In addition, in this embodiment, the time-reduction game state includes a special time-reduction game state and a specific time-reduction game state. The special time-reduction game state is a game state controlled via a jackpot game. In addition, although details will be described later, the special time-reduction game state includes a first special time-reduction game state and a second special time-reduction game state. In addition, the specific time-reduction game state is a game state controlled by the number of times that the special pattern variable display executed from the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, resetting the number of variations) reaches a specific number (300 times in this embodiment). As a result, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 becomes one of a normal gaming state, a special time-saving gaming state, and a specific time-saving gaming state. The gaming control unit 200 switches between the normal gaming state and the special time-saving gaming state based on a predetermined condition. The gaming control unit 200 also switches between the normal gaming state and the specific time-saving gaming state based on a predetermined condition. The gaming control unit 200 also switches between the specific time-saving gaming state and the special time-saving gaming state based on a predetermined condition. In the time-saving gaming state, the gaming control unit 200 also performs control such as increasing the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery compared to the normal gaming state, shortening the normal pattern fluctuation time, and extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123.

The game control unit 200 performs a special pattern lottery when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122. Then, a special game such as a big win game or a small win game is performed according to the result of the special pattern lottery. In the big win game, the game control unit 200 controls the round in which the first large winning hole 125, which is a special electric role, maintains an open state until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have entered) is met, to be repeated a predetermined number of times. Then, the game control unit 200 controls the interval between opening and closing operations when the first large winning hole 125 opens. Also, in the small win game, the game control unit 200 controls the round in which the second large winning hole 126, which is a special electric role, maintains an open state until a predetermined condition (for example, 0.9 seconds have passed) is met, to be repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). Then, the game control unit 200 controls the interval between opening and closing operations when the second large winning hole 126 opens.

In addition, the game control unit 200 performs a normal symbol lottery when the gaming ball passes through the gate 124. Then, the game control unit 200 controls the operation of the electric tulip according to the result of the normal symbol lottery.
In addition, the game control unit 200 sets holds that occur when the game ball enters the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 during special pattern change, and holds that occur when the game ball passes through the gate 124 during normal pattern change.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sends information related to game control, such as the results of the special pattern lottery and the normal pattern lottery, information on changing the time-saving state to no time-saving state, and hold setting information, to the performance control unit 300 using commands described later.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first start hole 121, the second start hole 122, the first large winning hole 125, the second large winning hole 126, and the normal winning hole 127, the game control unit 200 instructs the payout control unit 330 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls per game ball according to the place where the game ball entered. For example, the game control unit 200 sends an instruction command (command) to the payout control unit 330 so as to pay out three prize balls when the game ball enters the first start hole 121, four prize balls when the game ball enters the second start hole 122, nine prize balls when the game ball enters the second large winning hole 126, thirteen prize balls when the game ball enters the first large winning hole 125, and ten prize balls when the game ball enters the normal winning hole 127. Incidentally, even if it is detected that a gaming ball has passed through the gate 124, the payout control unit 330 is not instructed to pay out any prize balls associated with that passage.
When the payout control unit 330 pays out prize balls in accordance with an instruction from the game control unit 200, the game control unit 200 obtains information on the number of paid out prize balls from the payout control unit 330. In this way, the game control unit 200 manages the number of paid out prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game control unit 200 is connected to a detection means including a first start port detection unit (first start port switch (SW)) 211 that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 121, a second start port detection unit (second start port switch (SW)) 212 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 122, an electric tulip opening/closing unit 213 that opens and closes the electric tulip 123, and a gate detection unit (gate switch (SW)) 214 that detects the passage of a game ball through the gate 124.
In addition, connected to the game control unit 200 are a first large prize opening detection unit (first large prize opening switch (SW)) 215 which detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 125, a first large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216 which sets the first large prize opening door 125D of the first large prize opening 125 to a closed state and a protruding, tilted open state, a second large prize opening detection unit (second large prize opening switch (SW)) 209 which detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 126, a second large prize opening door opening/closing unit 210 which sets the second large prize opening door 126D of the second large prize opening 126 to a closed state and a protruding, tilted open state, and a normal prize opening detection unit (normal prize opening switch (SW)) 217 which detects the entry of a game ball into the normal prize opening 127.

In addition, a magnetic detection sensor 207 that detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time and a radio wave detection sensor 208 that detects abnormal radio waves for a predetermined period of time are connected to the game control unit 200. The magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are connected to the game control board 200B via wiring (not shown).
In addition, the game control unit 200 is connected to a first special pattern reserved display 218 which displays the number of reserved, unchanging symbols that have entered the first start port 121 while the special pattern is changing, a second special pattern reserved display 219 which displays the number of reserved, unchanging symbols that have entered the second start port 122 while the special pattern is changing, and a normal pattern reserved display 220 which displays the number of reserved, unchanging symbols that have passed through the gate 124 while the normal pattern is changing.
In addition, the game control unit 200 is connected to a first special pattern display 221 which displays the change in special pattern that occurs when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 and the result of the special pattern lottery, a second special pattern display 222 which displays the change in special pattern that occurs when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122 and the result of the special pattern lottery, a normal pattern display 223 which displays the change in normal pattern and the result of the normal pattern lottery, and a status display 224 which displays the status of the pachinko game machine 100.

Then, the detection signals detected by the first start gate switch 211, the second start gate switch 212, the gate switch 214, the first large prize gate switch 215, the second large prize gate switch 209, the normal prize gate switch 217, the magnetic detection sensor 207, and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are sent to the game control unit 200. In addition, control signals from the game control unit 200 are sent to the electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, the first large prize gate door opening/closing unit 216, the second large prize gate door opening/closing unit 210, the first special symbol reserved indicator 218, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, the normal symbol reserved indicator 220, the first special symbol indicator 221, the second special symbol indicator 222, the normal symbol indicator 223, and the status indicator 224. As a result, the game control unit 200 performs various controls related to the number of prize balls paid out as described above.

Also mounted on the front side of the gaming control board are a RAM clear switch 228 for inputting a signal to clear the memory contents of the RAM 203 of the gaming control unit 200 or to update a setting value (probability of determining a jackpot), which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game, a setting key switch 229 for inputting a signal to switch to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, by operating the setting key, an information display 230 for displaying performance information and setting values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped, and other electronic components.

The information display 230 is composed of four seven-segment displays (see 230a to 230d) arranged in the left-right direction. The two seven-segment displays from the left, 230a and 230b, form an identification segment for displaying identification information showing the type of performance information (data type), and the two seven-segment displays from the right, 230c and 230d, form a numeric segment for displaying numerical information showing setting values and numerical values of the performance information. Note that static lighting is used when displaying setting values, and dynamic lighting is used when displaying performance information.

The game control unit 200 is further connected to an external information terminal board 350 for the board, which transmits various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall. The game control unit 200 transmits information obtained from the payout control unit 330 regarding the number of prize balls paid out and information indicating the status of the game control unit 200, etc., to the host computer via the external information terminal board 350 for the board.

[Configuration and functions of the dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 330 comprises a CPU 331 which performs calculations when controlling the payout of balls, a ROM 332 which stores programs executed by the CPU 331 and various data, etc., and a RAM 333 which is used as a working memory for the CPU 331, etc.
The payout control unit 330 then controls the payout of balls based on commands sent from the game control unit 200.
Specifically, the payout control unit 330 receives a command from the game control unit 200 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the location where the game ball has entered (such as the first starting hole 121). Then, the payout control unit 330 controls the payout drive unit 334 to pay out the number of prize balls specified in the command. The payout drive unit 334 here is composed of a drive motor that sends out game balls from a storage unit for game balls.

Also connected to the payout control unit 330 are a payout ball detection unit 335 that detects the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit 334, a ball presence detection unit 336 that detects whether game balls are stored in the storage unit (not shown), and a full tank detection unit 337 that detects whether the tray 153 that holds the game balls used by the player when playing and the paid-out prize balls is full or not. The payout control unit 330 receives detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, the ball presence detection unit 336, and the full tank detection unit 337, and performs a predetermined process according to these detection signals.
Furthermore, the payout control unit 330 is connected to a frame external information terminal board 340 that transmits various information to a host computer installed in the hall. The payout control unit 330 transmits, for example, information on the number of prize balls instructed to be paid out by the payout drive unit 334 and information on the number of prize balls actually paid out detected by the payout ball detection unit 335 to the host computer via the frame external information terminal board 340. The payout control unit 330 also transmits similar information to the game control unit 200.

The game control unit 200 (game control board 200B described later) is regarded as the first control means that controls the progress of the game. Note that the first control means provided in the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not limited to the game control unit 200 (game control board 200B). The pachinko gaming machine 100 may be provided with a means for controlling the progress of the game other than the game control unit 200 (game control board 200B). In this case, the multiple means for controlling the progress of the game provided in the pachinko gaming machine 100 can be collectively regarded as the first control means.

[Configuration and functions of the production control unit]
The performance control unit 300 is equipped with a CPU 301 which performs calculations when controlling the performance, a ROM 302 which stores programs to be executed by the CPU 301 and various data, a RAM 303 which is used as working memory for the CPU 301, and a real-time clock (RTC) 304 which measures the date and time.
The performance control unit 300 sets the performance contents based on, for example, the result of the determination of whether or not a special symbol lottery has been won and the variation pattern sent from the game control unit 200. At that time, the performance contents corresponding to the operation input may be set in response to an operation input from a user using the performance button 161 or the performance key 162. In this case, for example, a signal corresponding to the operation (operation signal) is received from a controller (not shown) such as the performance button 161, and the operation content identified by this operation signal is reflected in the performance settings.
Furthermore, when a game is suspended for a predetermined period of time, the performance control unit 300 instructs the setting of a screen display for waiting customers as one of the performance effects.
Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 sets the presentation content based on the change information of the time-saving no state and the time-saving state received from the game control unit 200.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 sends commands to the image/audio control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 to instruct the execution of the set performance contents.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 is connected to an image/audio control unit 310 that controls the performance using images and sounds, and a lamp control unit 320 that controls the performance using various lamps and movable props 115.

[Image/audio control unit configuration and functions]
As shown in FIG. 5, the image/audio control unit 310 includes a CPU 311 which performs calculations when controlling the images and sounds that express the performance content, a ROM 312 in which programs executed by the CPU 311 and various data are stored, a RAM 313 which is used as a working memory for the CPU 311, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 314, a CGROM 315, and an SNDROM 316.

Then, based on the commands sent from the performance control unit 300, the image/audio control unit 310 controls the image displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sound output from the speaker 156.
Specifically, the CGROM 315 stores image data such as pattern images and background images to be displayed on the image display unit 114 during play, decorative patterns for notifying the player of lottery results, characters and items for displaying advance notices to the player, etc. Also, the SNDROM 316 stores various types of sound data such as music and voice to be output from the speaker 156 in synchronization with the image data or independently of the image data, as well as sound effects such as jingles.
Based on the pending number command or variable performance start command sent from the performance control unit 300, the CPU 311 analyzes the animation pattern, creates a display list that summarizes drawing commands, and sends the display list to the VDP 314.

Based on the display list received from the CPU 311, the VDP 314 reads out image data and sound data stored in the CGROM 315 and the SNDROM 316, respectively. Furthermore, the VDP 314 performs drawing processing for background image display, pattern image display, pattern image variation, character/item display, and the like using the read image data, and performs sound processing using the read sound data. The VDP 314 then controls the screen display on the image display unit 114 using the image data that has been subjected to the drawing processing. The VDP 314 also controls the sound output from the speaker 156 using the sound data that has been subjected to the sound processing.
In this embodiment, the VDP 314 is configured to perform audio processing in addition to drawing processing, but this is not limiting, and a separate processor dedicated to audio processing may be provided.

[Lamp control unit configuration and functions]
The lamp control unit 320 includes a CPU 321 which performs calculations when controlling the illumination of the board lamp 116, the frame lamp 157, the movable part 115, and the performance button 161, and the operation and vibration of the movable part 115 and the performance button 161, a ROM 322 in which programs executed by the CPU 321 and various data are stored, and a RAM 323 which is used as a working memory for the CPU 321, etc.
The lamp control unit 320 controls the lighting/flashing and light color of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the command sent from the performance control unit 300. It also controls the operation of the movable prop 115.

Specifically, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores lighting/flashing pattern data and light color pattern data (light emission pattern data) for the board lamp 116, frame lamp 157, movable role piece 115, and performance button 161 according to the performance content set by the performance control unit 300. The CPU 321 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 322 that corresponds to the command sent from the performance control unit 300. The lamp control unit 320 then controls the light emission of the board lamp 116, frame lamp 157, movable role piece 115, and performance button 161 according to the read light emission pattern data.
In addition, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores operation (vibration) pattern data of the movable role object 115 and the performance button 161 according to the performance content set by the performance control unit 300. The CPU 321 controls the operation of the movable role object 115 and the performance button 161 according to the read operation (vibration) pattern data.

The performance control unit 300 (performance control board 300B, described later) can be regarded as a second control means for controlling the performance. Note that the second control means provided in the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not limited to the performance control unit 300 (performance control board 300B). The pachinko gaming machine 100 may be provided with a means for controlling the performance other than the performance control unit 300 (performance control board 300B). In this case, the multiple means for controlling the performance provided in the pachinko gaming machine 100 can be collectively regarded as the second control means.

In this embodiment, the game control unit 200, the presentation control unit 300, the image/sound control unit 310, the lamp control unit 320, and the payout control unit 330 are each individually configured in a game control board 200B as a main board arranged on the rear surface of the game board 110, a presentation control board 300B as a sub-board, an image control board, a lamp control board, and a payout control board.
5, the performance button 161 and the performance key 162 are connected to the performance control unit 300 and controlled by the performance control unit 300, but are not limited to this. The performance button 161 and the performance key 162 may be connected to the lamp control unit 320 and controlled by the lamp control unit 320.

[Functional configuration of the game control unit]
Next, the functional configuration of the game control unit 200 will be described.
Fig. 6 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the game control unit 200. As shown in Fig. 6, the game control unit 200 includes a random number acquisition unit 231, a normal symbol determination unit 232, a special symbol variation control unit 233, a special symbol determination unit 234, and a normal symbol variation control unit 236 as functional units for executing various lottery processes.
The game control unit 200 also includes a variation pattern selection unit 235 as a functional unit that executes processing associated with the variation of special symbols.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 is equipped with a large prize opening operation control unit 237, an electric tulip operation control unit 238, a prize ball processing unit 239, an output control unit 240, and a random number control unit 241, which are functional units that control the operation of various gimmicks and execute data processing related to prize balls, etc.

The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value used in the special symbol lottery and a random number value used in the normal symbol lottery. In the case of the random number value used in the special symbol lottery, specifically, one number (random number value) is selected (acquired) from a predetermined range of numbers for each type of random number, on the condition that a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122. The acquired random number value is used for the judgment by the special symbol judgment unit 234. Although the details will be described later, the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery include a jackpot random number indicating whether or not there is a jackpot, a pattern random number indicating the type of jackpot, a variable pattern random number, a reach random number, and the like.
In the case of the random number used in the normal symbol lottery, specifically, one number (random number) is selected (obtained) from a predetermined range of numbers on the condition that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 124. The obtained random number is used for the determination by the normal symbol determination unit 232. Note that as the random number used in the normal symbol lottery, in addition to a winning random number indicating whether or not there is a win, a pattern random number indicating the type of win or a variable pattern random number may be set.
When a special pattern lottery is held, the special pattern change control unit 233 controls the change of the special pattern on the first special pattern display device 221 or the second special pattern display device 222 according to the lottery result.

When the special symbols start to change, the special symbol determination unit 234 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. 25 described later to determine whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if a jackpot is won, and whether it is a small jackpot or a miss if a jackpot is not won. That is, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value related to the special symbol when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 211 or the second start port switch 212, which are detection means, and the special symbol determination unit 234 determines whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired random number value. The lottery for the special symbol (jackpot lottery) described above refers to the processing in the random number acquisition unit 231 and the special symbol determination unit 234.

The variation pattern selection unit 235 selects the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 221 or the second special symbol display unit 222. Specifically, the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines the variation pattern based on the judgment result of whether or not to play a big win game and the judgment result of whether or not to set a variation pattern (for example, 15.0 seconds or more) that can perform a reach performance in the decorative symbol variation performance accompanying the special symbol variation. Then, based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit 235, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol. The details of the operation of the variation pattern selection unit 235 and the special symbol variation control unit 233 will be described later.
Here, "reach" refers to a presentation that makes the player expect a big win with decorative symbols, which will be described later.

When the normal symbol starts to change, the normal symbol determination unit 232 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. 25(e) to determine whether the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win or not. That is, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not to play the auxiliary game of opening and closing the electric tulip 123 based on the random number value for the normal symbol lottery acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231. In addition, when multiple types of wins are set in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the "type of win" when the judgment result is a win. The normal symbol lottery is a process performed by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the normal symbol determination unit 232.
When a normal pattern lottery is held, the normal pattern change control unit 236 controls the change of the normal pattern by the normal pattern display device 223 according to the lottery result.
When the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines that the normal symbol lottery results in a "win," the electric tulip operation control unit 238 opens the electric tulip 123 for a specified time and a specified number of times, creating a state in which the game ball can easily win in the second starting hole 122. When a "loss" is determined, the electric tulip 123 does not open in this manner. The operation patterns of the electric tulip 123 will be described later, but there are, for example, an operation pattern in which the electric tulip 123 opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds, and an operation pattern in which the electric tulip opens three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds.

When the special symbol determination unit 234 determines a "big win" in the special symbol lottery, the big prize opening operation control unit 237 controls the opening operation of the first big prize opening 125 in an operation pattern specified based on the type of big prize won as a big prize game. Also, when the special symbol determination unit 234 determines a "small win" in the special symbol lottery, the big prize opening operation control unit 237 opens the second big prize opening 126 for a specified time and a specified number of times as a small prize game.
The prize ball processing unit 239 sets commands for managing the number of winning balls for various prize-winning and lottery-related devices and for controlling the payout of prize balls according to winnings.
The output control unit 240 controls the output of control commands from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300 and the payout control unit 330 .
The random number control unit 241 updates various random number values acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 at a predetermined timing.

[Basic operation of the gaming machine]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
When the power is turned on, the game control unit 200 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 initializes various devices and sets them as basic processing at startup. After performing the basic processing, the game control unit 200 repeatedly executes main control processing, which is a series of processing related to the progress of the game. When the power is turned off, the game control unit 200 also executes a series of power-off processing.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the operation of the basic process by the game control unit 200.
When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the gaming control unit 200 first permits access to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 4) (step (hereinafter, step is abbreviated as "S") 701). Then, the gaming control unit 200 judges whether or not a RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM 203 is ON (S702).
If the RAM clear switch is OFF (No in S702), the game control unit 200 next judges whether or not a backup flag relating to the operation when the power is cut off is ON (S703).
If the backup flag is ON (Yes in S703), the game control unit 200 next judges whether or not the checksum created when the power was cut off is normal (S704).
If the checksum is normal (Yes in S704), the game control unit 200 then executes a recovery process (S705). In this recovery process, the game control unit 200 sets the sub-control means such as the performance control unit 300 in response to recovery from a power-off state. Specifically, the game control unit 200 outputs a command to the performance control unit 300 to set the sub-control means so as to reflect the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 when the power is cut off (whether or not a jackpot game is being played, and whether the game is in a normal game state, a special time-saving game state, or a specific time-saving game state). In addition, in this recovery process, the game control unit 200 turns off the backup flag.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is ON (Yes in S702), the backup flag is OFF (No in S703), or the checksum is abnormal (No in S704), the game control unit 200 then clears the memory contents of RAM 203 (S706) and sets the working area of RAM 203 (S707) as an initialization process. The game control unit 200 then outputs a command to the performance control unit 300 to set (initialize) the sub-control means, and sets the sub-board (sub-control means) (S708). Setting the sub-board includes clearing the RAM 303, RAM 313, and RAM 323 mounted on each sub-board.

After the return process (see S705) is completed, or after the sub-board setting (see S708) is completed, the game control unit 200 sets various counters and timers used for game control (S709).Then, the game control unit 200 repeatedly executes interrupt permission (S710), interrupt prohibition (S711), symbol random number control process (S712), initial value random number update process (S713), and judgment of whether the power cutoff flag is ON or not (S714) as a loop process.
Here, the interrupt permission (S710) and interrupt prohibition (S711) are provided to enable execution of an interrupt process during execution of this loop process (S710 to S714). In this embodiment, the main control process in the game control is executed by this interrupt process. The details of the main control process will be described later.
In the symbol random number control process (S712), the game control unit 200 updates the variable pattern random number used in the special symbol lottery.
In the initial value random number update process (S713), the game control unit 200 updates the initial values of various random number values used in game control.
In the determination of the power cutoff flag, if the power cutoff flag is OFF (No in S714), the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not cut off, and the gaming control unit 200 repeatedly executes the loop process (S710 to S714) and the main control process by interruption. On the other hand, if the power cutoff flag is ON (Yes in S714), the gaming control unit 200 starts a process for cutting off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (processing at the time of power cutoff).

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the operation of the game control unit 200 during power interruption processing.
In the power interruption process, the game control unit 200 first clears the settings of the output ports for various outputs (S801). Next, the game control unit 200 creates a checksum and stores it in the RAM 203 (S802). Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the backup flag (S803), prohibits access to the RAM 203 (S804), and transitions to an infinite loop.

[Main control process of gaming machine]
Next, the main control process of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
In the main control process, the game control unit 200 controls the game in the pachinko game machine 100, and instructs the presentation control unit 300, which is a sub-control means, to control the presentation, and instructs the payout control unit 330 to control the payout of winning balls.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main control process of the game control unit 200.
The main control process is a series of processes in game control, and is repeatedly executed at preset fixed time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). In this embodiment, the game control unit 200 generates an interrupt at preset fixed time intervals, and executes the main control process as an interrupt process when the interrupt is permitted (see S710) in the loop process shown in Fig. 7. As shown in Fig. 9, in the main control process, a random number update process, a switch process, a pattern process, an electric role process, a prize ball process, and an output process are executed in sequence (S901 to S906).

In the random number update process (S901), the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the random number control unit 241 and updates the values of various random numbers used in game control by the game control unit 200. Details of setting random numbers and updating random number values will be described later.

The switch processing (S902) includes start port switch processing, gate switch processing, and second large prize port switch processing.
In the start port switch processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the state of the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212 in Fig. 4, and executes processing for the special symbol lottery when the switch is turned ON. In addition, as will be described later in detail, when performing pre-determination processing in the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212, each function (subroutine) of the special symbol determination unit 234 and the variation pattern selection unit 235 is called, and processing for pre-determination is executed.
In the gate switch processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the state of the gate switch 214 in Figure 4, and when the switch is turned ON, executes processing for the normal pattern lottery.
In the second big prize opening process, the game control unit 200 monitors the state of the second big prize opening switch 209 in FIG. 4, and when the switch is turned ON, executes a process for playing a big prize game.
The details of these switching processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (S903), special symbol processing and normal symbol processing are carried out.
In the special symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls each function (subroutine) of the special symbol change control unit 233, the special symbol determination unit 234, and the change pattern selection unit 235, and executes the special symbol change and processing associated with this pattern change.
In the normal symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the normal symbol determination unit 232 and the normal symbol change control unit 236, and executes the normal symbol change and processing associated with this pattern change.
The details of these symbol processes will be described later.

As the electric role processing (S904), a first large prize winning slot processing, a second large prize winning slot processing, and an electric tulip processing are performed.
In the first large prize opening processing, the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the large prize opening operation control unit 237 and controls the opening operation of the first large prize opening 125, which is a special electric device, based on specified conditions.
In the second large prize opening processing, the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the large prize opening operation control unit 237 and controls the opening operation of the second large prize opening 126, which is a special electric device, based on specified conditions.
In the electric tulip processing, the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the electric tulip operation control unit 238, and controls the opening operation of the electric tulip 123, which is a normal electric role, based on predetermined conditions.
The details of these electric accessory processes will be described later.

In prize ball processing (S905), the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the prize ball processing unit 239 and sets a control command for managing the number of winning balls and for paying out prize balls according to the winnings.

In the output process (S906), the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240, outputs a command for controlling the presentation to the presentation control unit 300, and outputs a command for controlling the payout to the payout control unit 330. The presentation control commands are generated in each process from S902 to S904, and are stored (set) in a storage area for control commands provided in the RAM 203. The payout control command is generated in the process of S905, and is stored (set) in a storage area for control commands provided in the RAM 203. The RAM 203 has a storage area set for each type of control command.

The output control unit 240 sequentially checks the storage areas of the RAM 203 for each control command, and if a control command is stored in each storage area (i.e., if a control command has been generated in the processing of S902 to S905), it reads out the control command and outputs it to the output destination (the performance control unit 300 or the payout control unit 330).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, output processing is performed at the end of a series of main control processing. That is, the commands generated in each process of S902 to S905 by each of the above functions as the first processing means are stored in the corresponding storage area of RAM 203 for each process. Then, after these processes, output control unit 240 as the second processing means outputs all of the commands generated in each process that have been accumulated in the storage area of RAM 203. In other words, in this embodiment, when one cycle of main control processing is executed, the commands generated in the execution of that one cycle are output after the final command generation for that one cycle is performed.

[Modifications of the basic operation of the gaming machine]
In the operation example described with reference to Figures 7 to 9, an interrupt is permitted in the loop processing portion of the basic processing, and a main control processing consisting of a series of processing is executed as an interrupt processing. However, the main control processing may be configured to be repeatedly executed at regular intervals, and the specific implementation means (execution procedure) is not limited to the examples shown in Figures 7 to 9. For example, the main control processing may be incorporated into a series of operations of the basic processing, the elapsed time may be measured at a predetermined timing, and the main control processing may be returned to at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). Also, while the main control processing is incorporated into a series of operations of the basic processing, an interrupt may be generated at regular intervals, and if an interrupt is generated, the main control processing may be returned to the main control processing incorporated into the basic processing, as in the operation described with reference to Figures 7 to 9.

When a command generated in the basic process is to be output, in principle, each time a command is generated, it is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203, and the function of the output control unit 240, which is the second processing means, is called and output. The basic process is a special process such as an initial operation that is performed only when the power is turned on, unlike the main control process related to the progress of the game. The basic process is also a process that quickly outputs the generated command so that there are no gaps in the output process, since the processing procedure may vary due to branching based on conditions such as the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is turned on. Note that, in cases where commands are generated consecutively by multiple related processes, or in other cases, a processing procedure may be adopted in which multiple commands are stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203 and output together depending on the specific processing requirements.

[Random number update process by game control unit]
The random number value as the judgment information used for various lotteries in game control such as the special symbol lottery is counted by a counter, and starting from a predetermined initial value, one is added each time the random number update process (S901) of the main control process shown in FIG. 9 is performed. Then, the value at the time when each lottery is performed is obtained by the start port switch process (FIG. 10) and the gate switch process (FIG. 11), and is used in the special symbol process (FIG. 13) and the normal symbol process (FIG. 18). This random number counter is an infinite loop counter, and after the counted random number value reaches the maximum value of the set random number (for example, 299 for the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 25(a) described later), it returns to the initial value again. In addition, since the random number update process is performed at regular intervals, if the initial value of each random number is specified, there is a risk that the winning value will be estimated based on the update interval and the initial value information. Therefore, after returning from the main control process to the basic process shown in FIG. 7, the initial value of each random number is randomly changed in the initial value random number update process of S713.

[Start port switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the contents of the start port switch process of the switch process shown in S902 of FIG.
In this start port switch processing, processing for winning at the first start port 121 and processing for winning at the second start port 122 are performed in sequence. Referring to FIG. 10, the game control unit 200 first judges whether or not a game ball has won at the first start port 121 and the first start port switch 211 has been turned ON (S1001). If the first start port switch 211 is turned ON, the game control unit 200 then judges whether or not the number of reserved balls U1 of the unchanging portion of winning at the first start port 121 is less than the upper limit (S1002). In the example shown in FIG. 10, the upper limit is set to 4 balls. If the number of reserved balls U1 has reached the upper limit (No in S1002), no more unchanging winning balls can be reserved, so the processing for winning at the first start port 121 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the reserved number U1 is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1002), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for determining whether or not a win has been won this time, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1003). In this case, since the first starting port 121 has won, a random number value for the special symbol lottery is acquired. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated in the random number update process of S901. This random number value then determines the result of the special symbol lottery in the subsequent special symbol process. The random number values referred to here include a jackpot random number value that determines whether or not a jackpot, a small jackpot, or a miss; a symbol random number value (jackpot symbol random number value) that determines the type of jackpot; a variation pattern random number value that specifies the variation pattern in the symbol variation; and a reach random number value that determines whether or not a variation pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach performance described below is set in the event of a miss.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a pre-determination process (S1004). The pre-determination process is a process (pre-determination) in which a winning ball (reserved ball) that has already obtained a random number by winning at the starting hole but has not yet had its random number determined by the special pattern process described below is determined before the random number is determined by the special pattern process.

The performance control unit 300 of this embodiment can perform a preview performance that suggests the result of the random number judgment by the special pattern processing based on the result of the random number judgment (pre-judgment result) determined by the pre-judgment processing before the random number is judged by the special pattern processing and the judgment result is announced. This preview performance is performed, for example, using a reserved display performance (described later) displayed on the image display unit 114 in response to the occurrence of a winning ball (reserved ball) that has already acquired a random number by winning at the starting port but has not yet been judged by the special pattern processing. This preview performance based on the pre-judgment suggests to the player the judgment result when the random number is judged by the special pattern processing afterwards for the reserved ball corresponding to the pre-judgment related to the preview performance. This allows the player to play while having expectations about the reserved ball. Details of the preview performance based on the pre-judgment will be described later.

Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U1 (S1005).
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information from the pre-determination process of S1004 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the performance control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S1006).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a reserved number increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the performance control unit 300 of the increase in the reserved number U1 due to S1005 (S1007), and ends the processing for the winning at the first starting port 121.

Next, processing for the winning at the second start port 122 is performed. Referring to FIG. 10, the game control unit 200 next judges whether or not a game ball has won at the second start port 122 and the second start port switch 212 has been turned ON (S1008). If the second start port switch 212 has been turned ON, the game control unit 200 next judges whether or not the number of reserved balls U2 that have not changed due to the winning at the second start port 122 is less than the upper limit (S1009). In the example shown in FIG. 10, the upper limit is set to four balls. If the number of reserved balls U2 has reached the upper limit (No in S1009), no more winning balls that have not changed can be reserved, and processing for the winning at the second start port 122 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the reserved number U2 is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1009), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for the lottery due to this winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1010). In this case, since the winning occurred at the second starting port 122, a random number value for the special symbol lottery (jackpot random number value, jackpot pattern random number value, small win pattern random number value, reach random number value, variable pattern random number value, etc.) is acquired, as in S1003 above. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated in the random number update process in S901. The result of the special symbol lottery is then determined in the subsequent special symbol process based on this random number value.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a pre-determination process (S1011). The contents of this pre-determination process are the same as those of S1004.
Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U2 (S1012).
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information from the pre-determination process of S1011 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the performance control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S1013).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a reserved number increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the performance control unit 300 of the increase in the reserved number U2 by S1012 (S1014), and ends the processing for the winning at the second starting port 122.

In this embodiment, regardless of the game state, the pre-determination process is performed for the first special symbol, and a pre-determination result command is sent to the performance control unit 300. In this case, the performance control unit 300 may execute a pre-determination performance (described later) for the first special symbol in the normal game state or the first special time-saving game state, and may limit the execution of the pre-determination performance for the first special symbol in the second special time-saving game state (not executing, executing with a lower probability than the normal game state or the first special time-saving game state, executing with a lower probability than the pre-determination performance for the second special symbol in the second special time-saving game state, etc.). Also, in the second special time-saving game state, the pre-determination performance for the first special symbol may be limited by not transmitting a pre-determination result command for the first special symbol to the performance control unit 300.
In this embodiment, the pre-determination process is performed for the second special symbol regardless of the game state, and a pre-determination result command is sent to the performance control unit 300. In this case, the performance control unit 300 may execute a pre-determination performance for the second special symbol when in the second special time-saving game state, and may limit the execution of the pre-determination performance for the second special symbol when in the normal game state or the first special time-saving game state (not executing, executing with a lower probability than in the normal game state or the first special time-saving game state, executing with a lower probability than the pre-determination performance for the first special symbol in the normal game state or the first special time-saving game state, etc.). Also, in the normal game state or the first special time-saving game state, the pre-determination performance for the second special symbol may be limited by not sending a pre-determination result command for the second special symbol to the performance control unit 300.

In addition, in this embodiment, a hold number increase command is sent to the performance control unit 300, but this is not limited to this. A hold number designation command that designates hold number U1 or hold number U2 may be sent to the performance control unit 300. When the first start port switch 211 is ON, not only a hold number designation command that designates hold number U1, but also a hold number designation command that designates hold number U2 may be sent to the performance control unit 300. Also, when the second start port switch 212 is ON, not only a hold number designation command that designates hold number U2, but also a hold number designation command that designates hold number U1 may be sent to the performance control unit 300.

[Gate switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the contents of the gate switch processing when the gaming ball passes through the gate 124.
In this gate switch process, the game control unit 200 first judges whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 has been turned ON (S1101). If the gate switch 214 has been turned ON, the game control unit 200 then judges whether the number of reserved balls G that have not yet been changed is less than the upper limit (S1102). In the example shown in FIG. 11, the upper limit is set to 4 balls. If the number of reserved balls G has reached the upper limit (No in S1102), no more winning balls that have not yet been changed can be reserved, and the gate switch process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the reserved number G is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1102), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for the lottery due to this winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1103). In this case, since the winning is at gate 124, a random number value for the regular pattern lottery (such as a winning random number value) is acquired.

Next, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number G (S1104).
After the value of the reserved number G is added in S1104, the game control unit 200 sets a reserved number G increase command in RAM 203 to notify the presentation control unit 300 of the increase in the reserved number G by S1104 (S1105), and terminates processing for the winning at gate 124.

[Second big prize opening switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second large prize opening switch processing among the switch processing shown in S902 of FIG.
In this second large prize opening switch processing, the game control unit 200 first judges whether or not the game ball has passed through the second large prize opening 126 and the second large prize opening switch 209 has been turned ON (S1201). If the second large prize opening switch 209 has not been turned ON (NO in S1201), the current second large prize opening switch processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the second large prize opening switch 209 is ON (YES in S1201), the game control unit 200 judges whether or not a small prize is being played (S1202). When a small prize is being played (YES in S1202), the game control unit 200 sets a second large prize opening passage command in the RAM 203 (S1203). The second large prize opening passage command is a command indicating that the game ball has passed through the second large prize opening 126. The second large prize opening passage command set in S1203 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9. On the other hand, when a small prize is not being played (NO in S1202), the game control unit 200 notifies the performance control board 300 of a second large prize opening passage error. The second large prize opening passage error is an error that occurs when the game ball passes through the second large prize opening 126 at an abnormal timing.

In addition, an area on the right side of the game area 111 that is different from the second large winning hole 126 may be set as a specific area, and the pachinko game machine 100 may be provided with a specific area switch that detects whether the game ball has passed through this specific area. Then, instead of determining whether the second large winning hole switch 209 has been turned ON, the game control unit 200 may determine whether the specific area switch has been turned ON, and if it is turned ON during a small win game, a large win game described below may be executed after the small win game ends. In other words, the area that detects whether the game ball has passed through during a small win game is not limited to the second large winning hole 126.

[Special symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol processing of the symbol processing shown in S903 of FIG.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol variation control unit 233 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the big win game flag is ON in the flag setting (hereinafter, flag setting) set in the RAM 203 (S1301). Here, the big win game flag is a flag that is set to identify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.

If the jackpot game flag is ON, the pachinko game machine 100 is already in the jackpot, so the special symbol processing ends without starting the special symbol change (Yes in S1301). On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is OFF (No in S1301), the special symbol change control unit 233 then judges whether the current state of the pachinko game machine 100 is in the special symbol change (S1302). If the special symbol is not changing (No in S1302), the special symbol change control unit 233 then performs processing on the reserved numbers U1 and U2 (see FIG. 10) of the special symbols that have not changed (S1303 to S1306). In this embodiment, the reserved number U1 related to the winning of the first start port 121 and the reserved number U2 related to the winning of the second start port 122 are distinguished, so this processing is also performed individually for each corresponding start port.

Specifically, the special symbol change control unit 233 first judges whether the reserved number U2 related to the winning of the second starting gate 122 is 1 or more (S1303). If the reserved number U2 is 1 or more (Yes in S1303), the special symbol change control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved number U2 (S1304). On the other hand, if the reserved number U2=0 (No in S1303), the special symbol change control unit 233 next judges whether the reserved number U1 related to the winning of the first starting gate 121 is 1 or more (S1305). If the reserved number U1 is 1 or more (Yes in S1305), the special symbol change control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved number U1 (S1306). On the other hand, if the reserved number U1 = 0 (No in S1305), this means that there is no winning combination to trigger the lottery for the special symbol, so the special symbol variation is not started, and a separate routine for setting up customer waiting is executed, and the process ends (S1319).
In this embodiment, priority is given to processing the reserved number U2 related to the winning of the second start port 122. That is, if the reserved number U2 is 1 or more, processing is performed for the reserved number U2, and if the reserved number U2=0, processing is performed for the reserved number U1 (see S1303 to S1306). On the other hand, it is also possible to control the reserved numbers U1 and U2 to be decremented in the order of winning, regardless of whether the winning is at the first start port 121 or the second start port 122.

After subtracting the reserved number U1 or reserved number U2 in S1304 or S1306, the special symbol change control unit 233 generates a game state command indicating the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1307). The game state command set in S1307 is included in the change start command set in S1312 of FIG. 13, and is sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9. Furthermore, the special symbol change control unit 233 turns off the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1308). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (S1319, see FIG. 17 described later).

Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 executes a jackpot determination process and a variation pattern selection process by a separate routine (S1309, S1310). As will be described in detail later, this jackpot determination process and variation pattern selection process determines setting information (jackpot symbol, game state, variation pattern, etc.) for the variation of the special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222. This information is included in the variation start command sent to the performance control unit 300.

After this, the special symbol variation control unit 233 starts variation of the special symbols displayed by the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222 shown in Fig. 3 based on the setting contents determined in the big win determination process and the variation pattern selection process (S1311). Then, a variation start command including setting information (big win symbol, game state, variation pattern, etc.) showing the setting contents is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1312). The variation start command set in S1312 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of Fig. 9.
Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 adds one to the number of times the special symbol has been displayed since the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of the number of times of variation) (S1313). Then, a variation number command indicating the number of times of the added variation display is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1314). The variation number command set in S1314 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9.

If it is determined in S1302 that the special pattern is changing (Yes in S1302), or after the change count command is set in S1314, the special pattern change control unit 233 determines whether the change time has elapsed (S1315). That is, it determines whether the time elapsed since the special pattern started changing in S1311 has reached the change time set in the change pattern selection process in S1310. If the change time has not elapsed (No in S1315), the special pattern change continues, and the special pattern processing ends.

On the other hand, if the change time has elapsed (Yes in S1315), the special symbol change control unit 233 first stops the change of the special symbols in the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222 at the symbol determined in the big win determination process in S1309 (S1316). Then, another routine of stop processing is executed (S1317). The contents of the stop processing will be described later. In addition, the special symbol change control unit 233 sets a change stop command for stopping the decorative symbol described later in the RAM 203 (S1318). The change stop command set in S1318 is transmitted to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9.
In addition, if a win at the second starting port 122 occurs during the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the first starting port 121, the special pattern may be changed due to a win at the second starting port 122 during the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the first starting port 121. Also, for example, if a win at the first starting port 121 occurs during the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the second starting port 122, the special pattern may be changed due to a win at the first starting port 121 during the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the second starting port 122.

Also, in the example shown in Figure 13, after subtracting the value of the reserved number U2 or the reserved number U1 (see S1304, S1306), a jackpot determination process and a variation pattern selection process are executed (see S1309, S1310), but this is not limited to this.
In the special symbol process, after the big win determination process and the variation pattern selection process are performed, a process of subtracting the value of the reserved number U2 or the reserved number U1 may be performed. In this case, in the variation pattern selection process, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the reserved number U2 or the reserved number U1 before subtraction.

In addition, in the normal game state and the first special time-saving game state, a command to stop the variation of the first special symbol may be sent to the performance control unit 300, and in the second special time-saving game state, a command to stop the variation of the first special symbol may not be sent to the performance control unit 300. Also, in the normal game state and the first special time-saving game state, a command to stop the variation of the second special symbol may not be sent to the performance control unit 300, and in the second special time-saving game state, a command to stop the variation of the second special symbol may be sent to the performance control unit 300.

[Jackpot Determination Processing by the Game Control Unit]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big win determination process (S1309 in FIG. 13).
In this jackpot determination process, the special symbol determination unit 234 of the game control unit 200 first determines the jackpot random number value in the current special symbol lottery (S1401), and determines whether or not a jackpot or a small jackpot has been obtained (S1402, S1405). Whether or not a jackpot or a small jackpot has been obtained is determined by determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number obtained in S1003 or S1010 of FIG. 10 matches the value set as the winning value for the jackpot or the value set as the winning value for the small jackpot (see FIG. 25(a)).

If the result of the random number determination in S1401 is a jackpot (Yes in S1402), the special symbol determination unit 234 then determines the jackpot symbol random number value (S1403). The type of jackpot is determined according to the result of this determination. The type of jackpot is determined by whether the value of the jackpot symbol random number obtained in S1003 or S1010 in FIG. 10 matches any of the values preset for each type of jackpot (see FIG. 25(b)).
After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets a special symbol designation command, which is a signal indicating a symbol (jackpot symbol) representing the type of jackpot determined by the jackpot symbol random number determination, as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1404).

If the result of the random number judgment in S1401 is a small win (No in S1402, Yes in S1405), the special symbol judgment unit 234 then judges the small win symbol random number value (S1406). Depending on the result of this judgment, the type of small win is determined. The type of small win is determined by whether the value of the big win symbol random number acquired in S1003 or S1010 in FIG. 10 matches any of the values preset for each type of small win (see FIG. 25(c)).
After the above determination, the special pattern determination unit 234 sets a special pattern designation command, which is a signal indicating a pattern (small win pattern) representing the type of small win determined by the small win pattern random number determination, in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1407).

If the result of the random number determination in S1401 is neither a big win nor a small win (No in S1402 and S1405), then the special symbol determination unit 234 sets a special symbol designation command, which is a signal indicating a symbol that indicates a loss in the lottery (hereinafter, a loss symbol), as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1408). Note that the special symbol designation command set in the RAM 203 in steps 1404, 1407, and 1408 is a command included in the variation start command set in the RAM 203 in step 1312 of the special symbol processing described with reference to FIG. 13.

[Variation pattern selection process by game control unit]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1310 in FIG. 13).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first refers to the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 (whether it is a normal game state, a special time-saving game state, or a specific time-saving game state) (S1501). Then, using the judgment result of S1402 of the big win judgment process (FIG. 14), it judges whether or not a big win has been won in this special symbol lottery (S1502). Then, if it is a big win (Yes in S1502), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out the big win variation pattern table from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1503).

On the other hand, if a big win has not been achieved (No in S1502), the variation pattern selection unit 235 then uses the result of the determination in S1405 of the big win determination process (FIG. 14) to determine whether or not a small win has been achieved in this special pattern lottery (S1504). If a small win has been achieved (YES in S1504), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out the variation pattern table for small wins from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1505).

On the other hand, if a small win has not been obtained (NO in S1504), a random number value is judged to determine whether or not to perform a so-called reach effect to make the player expect a big win (S1506). Whether or not to perform the reach effect is determined by judging whether or not the reach random number value obtained in S1003 or S1010 in Fig. 10 matches a preset value (see Fig. 25(d)).
If the result of the determination using the random number value indicates that a reach effect is to be performed (Yes in S1507), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out a reach-use variation pattern table from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1508). If the reach effect is not to be performed (No in S1507), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out a loss-use variation pattern table from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1509).
Here, the fluctuation pattern table is a table that associates multiple pre-prepared fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times of 3 seconds, 7 seconds, 13 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) with the value of the fluctuation pattern random number.

Next, the variation pattern selection unit 235 judges the variation pattern random number value using the variation pattern random number value acquired in S1003 or S1010 of FIG. 10 and the variation pattern table set in S1503, S1505, S1508, and S1509 (S1510). That is, the variation pattern selection unit 235 refers to the variation pattern table set in the RAM 203 and selects a variation pattern according to the random number value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is acquired, the variation pattern table referenced differs depending on the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is in a time-saving state or not), the result of the special symbol lottery (whether it has been a jackpot or not, whether it has been a small jackpot or not, and whether a reach performance is performed if it has been neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot), and the like, and therefore the variation pattern determined differs.

Then, the variation pattern selection unit 235 sets the variation pattern designation command, which is a signal indicating the variation pattern selected in S1510, in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1511). The variation pattern designation command set in S1511 is included in the variation start command set in S1312 of FIG. 13, and is sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9. Details of the variation pattern selected in this embodiment and its setting will be described later.

[Processing during stoppage by game control unit]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the contents of the during-stop process (S1317 in FIG. 13).
In this stop processing, the game control unit 200 first checks whether a flag indicating a time-saving state (hereinafter, time-saving flag) is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1601). If the time-saving flag is ON (Yes in S1601), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of lotteries (variation number) J in the time-saving state (S1602) and checks whether the number of lotteries J has become 0 (S1603). If the number of lotteries J=0 (Yes in S1603), the time-saving flag is turned OFF (S1604). The operation of turning ON the time-saving flag and setting the initial value of the number of lotteries J are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 21) in the first big prize winning port process (FIG. 19) described later.
Also, if the number of lottery draws J is not 0 (NO in S1603), the game control unit 200 generates a time-saving number command indicating the value of the number of lottery draws J in the time-saving state and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1605). The time-saving number command set in S1605 is transmitted to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

If the time-saving flag is OFF (No in S1601), or after the time-saving flag is turned OFF in S1604, or after the time-saving count command is set in S1605, the game control unit 200 then generates a game status command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1606). The game status command set in S1606 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 in FIG.
Next, the game control unit 200 judges whether or not the special symbol lottery has resulted in a jackpot (S1607). Here, the judgment of whether or not the jackpot has been won can be made based on the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process (FIG. 14). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the chart of FIG. 25(b) described later is set, the answer is Yes in S1607. If a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is set in the RAM 203 by the jackpot judgment process, the answer is No in S1607.

If it is a jackpot (Yes in S1607), the game control unit 200 then turns on the jackpot game flag (S1608), which causes the game state setting in the RAM 203 to become the jackpot game state.
Next, the game control unit 200 initializes the value of the number of lottery draws J (S1609). Furthermore, if the time-saving flag is ON in S1601 and the number of lottery draws J is not 0 in S1603, the game control unit 200 turns the time-saving flag OFF (S1610).

After initializing the value of the number of lottery draws J in S1610, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation of the big win game (S1611).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets an opening command for performing an effect in an opening operation according to the big win game flag in the performance control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S1612), and ends the processing during the stop. This opening command is transmitted to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing shown in S906 of FIG.

On the other hand, if the result of the current special symbol lottery is not a big win (No in S1607), the game control unit 200 next determines whether the result of the current special symbol lottery is a small win or not (S1613).
If it is a small win (YES in S1613), the game control unit 200 then turns on the small win game flag (S1614). This causes the game state setting in the RAM 203 to become a small win game state. Furthermore, the game control unit 200 starts an opening operation for the small win game (S1615).
Next, the game control unit 200 sets an opening command for performing an effect in an opening operation corresponding to the small win game flag in the performance control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S1616). This opening command is transmitted to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

On the other hand, if it is not a small win (No in S1613), the game control unit 200 judges whether the number of times of the variable display of the special symbol executed from the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of the number of times of variation) reaches a specific number (300 times in this embodiment) (S1617). If the specific number of times is reached (YES in S1617), the game control unit 200 executes a game status setting process of a different routine (S1618). The contents of the game status setting process will be described later.
Also, if the number of times the variable display has not reached the specific number (NO in S1617), the processing during the stoppage is terminated.

[Customer waiting setting process by the game control unit]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (S1319 in FIG. 13).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether the customer waiting flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1701). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag that is set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state.

If the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and the process ends as is (Yes in S1701). On the other hand, if the customer waiting flag is OFF (No in S1701), the game control unit 200 generates a customer waiting command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1702), and turns the customer waiting flag ON (S1703). The customer waiting command set in S1702 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9. The customer waiting flag is set when the variation of the special symbols has stopped and there are no reserved symbols.

[Normal symbol processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal symbol processing of the symbol processing shown in S903 of FIG.
In this normal symbol processing, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1801). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when the normal symbol lottery is won. When the auxiliary game flag is set, the electric tulip 123 is opened according to the electric tulip processing (FIG. 22) described later, and it is easy to win the second start hole 122 (auxiliary game state).

If the auxiliary game flag is ON, the auxiliary game state is already set and the normal symbol is stopped, so the normal symbol processing ends without starting the normal symbol change (Yes in S1801). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S1801), the normal symbol change control unit 236 then judges whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is during normal symbol change (S1802). If the normal symbol is not changing (No in S1802), the normal symbol change control unit 236 then judges whether the reserved number G (see FIG. 11) of unchanged normal symbols is 1 or more (S1803). If the reserved number G=0 (No in S1803), this means that there is no winning to start the lottery for the normal symbol, so the processing ends without starting the normal symbol change.

In contrast, if the reserved number G is 1 or more (Yes in S1803), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 subtracts 1 from the reserved number G (S1804). Then, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the winning random number in this normal symbol lottery and judges whether or not the normal symbol lottery has been won (S1805). Whether or not a winning number has been won is determined by judging whether or not the value of the winning random number obtained in S1103 of FIG. 11 matches the value set as the winning value in the table shown in FIG. 25(e) described below.

Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 sets the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery (S1806). That is, if the normal symbol lottery is won, a symbol representing the win (hereinafter, winning symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is not won, a symbol representing the loss (hereinafter, losing symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information.

Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 sets the variation time of the normal symbol (S1807). This variation time is set based on the time-saving flag set in the processing of S1604, S1610 in FIG. 16, S2101 in FIG. 21 described later, etc. That is, when the time-saving flag is ON at the time of setting by S1807, it is set to a short time (e.g., 1.5 seconds), and when the time-saving flag is OFF, it is set to a long time (e.g., 4.0 seconds). After this setting, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 starts the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 223 shown in FIG. 2 (a) and FIG. 4 based on the setting contents of S1807 (S1808). The variation pattern of the normal symbol can also be determined by lottery. In this case, for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value for the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, and in S1807, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 determines the random number value for the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, thereby setting the fluctuation time.

After the normal pattern change has started in S1808, or if it is determined in S1802 that the normal pattern is changing (Yes in S1802), the normal pattern change control unit 236 determines whether the change time has elapsed (S1809). In other words, it determines whether the time elapsed since the normal pattern change started in S1808 has reached the change time set in S1807. If the change time has not elapsed (No in S1809), the normal pattern change continues, and the normal pattern processing ends.

On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (Yes in S1809), the normal pattern variation control unit 236 stops the variation of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display 223 (S1810). Then, the normal pattern variation control unit 236 judges whether or not the result of the judgment in S1805 was a win (S1811). If it was a win (Yes in S1811), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (S1812). On the other hand, if the lottery was lost (No in S1811), the normal pattern processing ends without turning ON the auxiliary game flag.

[First big prize slot processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first big winning port processing of the electric role processing shown in S904 of FIG.
In this first big prize winning port process, the big prize winning port operation control unit 237 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the big prize game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1901). If the big prize game flag is OFF, there is no winning in the first big prize winning port 125, so the first big prize winning port process is terminated (No in S1901). On the other hand, if the big prize game flag is ON (Yes in S1901), the big prize winning port operation control unit 237 next judges whether the pachinko game machine 100 is in the middle of the opening operation in the big prize operation control started in the stop processing (FIG. 16) (S1902).

If the pachinko game machine 100 is in the opening state (Yes in S1902), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether or not the time (opening time) during which the preset opening operation should be performed has elapsed (S1903). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the first special prize opening 125 continues, and the first special prize opening process is terminated (No in S1903). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1903), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then sets the operation of the first special prize opening 125 (S1904), initializes the number of winning prizes C (C=0) (S1905), adds 1 to the current value of the number of rounds R of the operation of the first special prize opening 125 (S1906), and starts the operation (opens) of the first special prize opening 125 (S1907).

In the operation setting of S1904, the operation pattern of the first large prize opening 125 and the number of rounds (number of operation rounds) to be operated with that operation pattern are set. The operation pattern and number of rounds are set in various ways depending on the type of jackpot in the special pattern lottery. Note that in a jackpot game, it is specified that the first large prize opening 125 is operated multiple times (multiple rounds) in succession. As an example, it is operated for 15 rounds (15R), and in one round, it is opened once for 29.5 seconds. As another example, it is operated for two rounds (2R), and in one round, it is opened once for 0.9 seconds. To explain further, it is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 second, and then opened for 0.9 seconds.

Next, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 judges whether the opening time in the operation pattern set in S1904 has elapsed (S1908). If the opening state of the first large prize opening 125 has not elapsed the opening time (No in S1908), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 then judges whether the number of winning balls C in the first large prize opening 125 is equal to or greater than a specified number (e.g., 9 balls) (S1909). If the opening time has not elapsed and the number of winning balls C is less than the specified number, the operation state (open state) of the first large prize opening 125 continues, so the first large prize opening process is terminated (No in S1909). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1908) or the number of winning balls C has reached the specified number (Yes in S1909), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 terminates the operation (closes) of the first large prize opening 125 (S1910).

Next, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 determines whether the number of rounds R of the operation of the first large prize opening 125 has reached the maximum value set in S1904 (S1911). If the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operations are performed, and the first large prize opening processing is terminated (No in S1911).

When the number of rounds R of the operation of the first big prize opening 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S1911), the big prize opening operation control unit 237 then starts the ending operation (S1912). Here, the content of the ending operation corresponds to the state of the big prize game flag.
After this, the big prize opening operation control unit 237 sets an ending command for performing an ending operation corresponding to the big prize game flag in the performance control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S1913). This ending command is transmitted to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

Next, the special prize opening operation control unit 237 resets the number of rounds R of the operation of the first special prize opening 125 to 0 (S1914), and then determines whether the time elapsed since the start of the ending operation has passed the time (ending time) at which the ending operation should be performed (S1917). If the ending time has not passed, the ending operation continues, and the first special prize opening process is terminated (No in S1917). On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (Yes in S1917), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then goes through a game status setting process by the game control unit 200 (S1918), and then turns off the special prize game flag and terminates the first special prize opening process (S1919). The contents of the game status setting process will be described later.

If it is determined in S1902 that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening mode (No in S1902), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether or not the game is ending (S1915). If the game is ending (Yes in S1915), the operation from S1917 onwards is executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the ending mode (No in S1915), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether the first special prize opening 125 is in operation (open) or not (S1916). If it is not in operation (No in S1916), the operations from S1905 onwards are executed, and if it is in operation (Yes in S1916), the operations from S1908 onwards are executed.

[Second big prize slot processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second large winning port processing of the electric gimmick processing shown in S904 of FIG.
In this second large prize opening process, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the small prize game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S2001). If the small prize game flag is OFF (No in S2001), there is no prize in the second large prize opening 126, so the second large prize opening process is terminated. On the other hand, if the small prize game flag is ON (Yes in S2001), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 next judges whether the pachinko game machine 100 is in the middle of the opening operation in the operation control at the time of the small prize that was started in the stop processing (FIG. 16) (S2002).

If the pachinko game machine 100 is in the opening state (Yes in S2002), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 next judges whether or not the time (opening time) for the preset opening operation to be performed has elapsed (S2003). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the second special prize opening 126 continues, and the second special prize opening process is terminated (No in S2003). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S2003), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 next sets the operation of the second special prize opening 126 (S2004), initializes the number of winnings C (C=0) (S2005), adds 1 to the current value of the number of rounds R of the operation of the second special prize opening 126 (S2006), and starts the operation (opens) of the second special prize opening 126 (S2007).

In the operation setting of S2004, the operation pattern of the second large winning opening 126 and the number of rounds (number of operating rounds) to be operated with that operation pattern are set. The operation pattern and number of rounds are set in various ways depending on the type of small win in the special pattern lottery. Note that, in the case of a small win, it is stipulated that the cumulative opening time of the second large winning opening 126 must be set to within 1.8 seconds.

Next, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 judges whether the opening time in the operation pattern set in S2004 has elapsed (S2008). If the open state of the second large prize opening 126 has not elapsed the opening time (No in S2008), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 then judges whether the number of winning balls C in the second large prize opening 126 is equal to or greater than a specified number (S2009). If the opening time has not elapsed and the number of winning balls C is less than the specified number, the second large prize opening 126 will continue to be in an operating state (open state), and the second large prize opening process will be terminated (No in S2009). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S2008) or the number of winning balls C has reached the specified number (Yes in S2009), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 will terminate the operation (close) of the second large prize opening 126 (S2010).

Next, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 judges whether the number of rounds R of the operation of the second large prize opening 126 has reached the maximum value set in S2004 (S2011). If the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operations are performed, and the second large prize opening processing is terminated (No in S2011).

If the number of rounds R of the operation of the second large prize opening 126 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S2011), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 next judges whether or not the game ball has passed through the second large prize opening 126 during the small prize game (S2012). This judgment is made based on the judgment of the second large prize opening switch processing (S1202 in FIG. 12).
When the gaming ball passes through the second big winning opening 126 (YES in S2012), the gaming control unit 200 turns on the big win gaming flag (S2013). As a result, the gaming state setting in the RAM 203 becomes the big win gaming state.
Next, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation of the big win game (S2014). Then, the performance control unit 300 sets an opening command in the RAM 203 for performing a performance in the opening operation according to the big win game flag (S2015). Furthermore, the first big win port processing (see FIG. 19) of another routine is executed, and the second big win port processing is terminated (S2016).

On the other hand, if the gaming ball has not passed through the second large prize opening 126 (NO in S2012), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 starts the ending operation (S2017).
After this, the big prize opening operation control unit 237 sets an ending command for performing an ending operation corresponding to the small prize game flag in the performance control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S2018). This ending command is transmitted to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

Next, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 resets the number of rounds R of the operation of the second large prize opening 126 to 0 (S2019), and then determines whether the time elapsed since the start of the ending operation has passed the time (ending time) at which the ending operation should be performed (S2020). If the ending time has not passed (No in S2020), the ending operation continues, and the second large prize opening processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (Yes in S2020), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 then generates a game status command and sets it in RAM 203 (S2021). Furthermore, the small prize game flag is turned OFF, and the second large prize opening processing is terminated (S2022).

If it is determined in S2002 that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening mode (No in S2002), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether or not the game is ending (S2023). If the game is ending (Yes in S2023), the operation from S2020 onwards is executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the ending mode (No in S2023), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether the second special prize opening 126 is in operation (open) or not (S2024). If it is not in operation (No in S2024), the operations from S2005 onwards are executed, and if it is in operation (Yes in S2024), the operations from S2008 onwards are executed.

[Game Status Setting Process]
The contents of the game status setting process (S1618, S1918) by the game control unit 200 are shown in FIG.
First, the game control unit 200 judges whether the result of the special symbol lottery was a big win or a small win (S2101, S2103). These judgments can be made based on the type of symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 in the big win judgment process (FIG. 14), for example. These judgments are generally similar to S1402, S1403, S1405, and S1406 in the big win judgment process (FIG. 14), so the judgment results of S1402, S1403, S1405, and S1406 may be used.

If it is a jackpot (YES in S2101), the game control unit 200 sets an initial value of the number of lottery draws J based on the type of jackpot symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 (S2102). This initial value is, for example, 30. When the lottery draw for the set number of lottery draws J is performed, the time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is entered.
If it is a small win (NO in S2101, YES in S2103), the game control unit 200 sets an initial value of the number of lottery draws J based on the type of small win symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 (S2104). This initial value is, for example, 30 times.

Next, the game control unit 200 resets the number of times the special symbol has been changed since the establishment of a predetermined condition (executing RAM clear and resetting the number of times of change) (S2105). In addition, the game control unit 200 generates a change number command indicating the number of times of change display and sets it in the RAM 203 (S2106). This change number command is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9.
Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the special time-saving flag (S2107), which causes the game state setting in the RAM 203 to become the special time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if the winning combination is neither a big win nor a small win (NO in S2101, NO in S2103), the game control unit 200 sets the initial value of the number of lottery draws J (S2108). In this embodiment, the initial value of the number of lottery draws J is 295. Therefore, when 295 lottery draws are performed in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state ends and the game enters the normal game state.
Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the specific time-shortening flag (S2109), which causes the game state setting in the RAM 203 to become the specific time-shortening game state.

Next, the game control unit 200 generates a game status command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S2110). This game status command is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9.

[Electric tulip processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the contents of the electric tulip processing of the electric role processing shown in S904 of FIG.
In the electric tulip processing, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S2201). If the auxiliary game flag is OFF, the electric tulip 123 will not be opened, and so the electric tulip processing is terminated (No in S2201). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is ON (Yes in S2201), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 next judges whether the electric tulip 123 is operating (S2202).

If the electric tulip 123 is not in operation (No in S2202), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets the operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 (S2203) and operates the electric tulip 123 with the set operation pattern (S2204). Here, the operation pattern is set based on the time-saving flag set in the processes of S1604, S1610 in FIG. 16, S2107, S2109 in FIG. 21, etc. For example, if the time-saving flag is OFF when setting in S2203, an operation pattern is set in which the electric tulip 123 is opened once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds, and if the time-saving flag is ON, an operation pattern is set in which the electric tulip 123 is opened three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds. In this way, normally, when the time-saving flag is ON (in the time-saving state), the electric tulip 123 is opened multiple times for a long time, and a winning support (electric tulip support) that makes it easier to win the second starting hole 122 is performed. In addition, multiple operation patterns (types of auxiliary games) of the electric tulip 123 when the time-saving flag is ON or OFF may be prepared, and the operation pattern may be set according to the type of win determined in the normal pattern processing (see Figure 18).
Among the winnings determined by the normal symbol processing, a winning in which the electric tulip 123 is opened for a long time may be referred to as a long winning, and also, among the winnings determined by the normal symbol processing, a winning in which the electric tulip 123 is opened for a shorter time than a long winning may be referred to as a short winning.

If it is determined in S2202 that the electric tulip 123 is in operation (Yes in S2202), or after the electric tulip 123 has been operated in S2204, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines whether the opening time for the set operation pattern has elapsed (S2205). If the opening time has not elapsed, the electric tulip 123 will continue to be in operation (open state), and the electric tulip processing will end (No in S2205). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S2205), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 will turn off the auxiliary game flag and end the electric tulip processing (S2206).

[Modifications of the gaming machine configuration]
Next, a description will be given of modified examples of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG.
FIG. 23 is a schematic front view of a modified pachinko gaming machine 100. As shown in FIG.
The pachinko game machine 100 shown in Fig. 23 is provided with a first start hole 121A and a first start hole 121B as the first start hole 121. The first start hole 121A is provided in the same position as the first start hole 121 shown in Fig. 1. On the other hand, the first start hole 121B is provided in the right area of the play area 111. The second start hole 122 is provided in the right area of the play area 111, below the first start hole 121B.
In a modified example, the first starting hole 121B is provided with an electric tulip 123, while the second starting hole 122 is not provided with an electric tulip 123. Therefore, when the blades of the electric tulip 123 are closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting hole 121B, but when the blades of the electric tulip 123 are open, the entrance of the first starting hole 121B expands, making it easier for the game ball to enter the first starting hole 121B. On the other hand, when the game ball flows down to the right area of the game area 111, it is possible for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 122 even when the blades of the electric tulip 123 are closed.
In addition, when describing the first starting port 121A and the first starting port 121B without distinguishing between them, they will be simply referred to as the first starting port 121 below.

[Variations of special symbol processing]
Fig. 24 is a flow chart showing a modified example of the special symbol processing shown in Fig. 13. Note that the modified special symbol processing may be performed in the pachinko gaming machine 100 shown in Fig. 1, or the modified special symbol processing may be performed in the pachinko gaming machine 100 shown in Fig. 23.
In the special symbol processing as a modified example, the special symbol variation control unit 233 checks whether the big win game flag is ON or not (S2401). If the big win game flag is ON (Yes in S2401), the special symbol processing is terminated without starting the special symbol variation.
On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is OFF (No in S2401), the special symbol change control unit 233 then determines whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is during the second special symbol change (S2402).

If the second special symbol is not changing (No in S2402), the special symbol change control unit 233 next judges whether the reserved number U2 related to the winning of the second start port 122 is 1 or more (S2403). If the reserved number U2 is 1 or more (Yes in S2403), the special symbol change control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the reserved number U2 (S2404). Next, the special symbol change control unit 233 generates a game state command indicating the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S2405). Next, the special symbol change control unit 233 turns off the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S2406).
In addition, when subtracting the reserved number U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 in the normal game state (S2404), the special pattern change control unit 233 does not need to turn off the customer waiting flag.

Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 executes a jackpot determination process and a variation pattern selection process (S2407, S2408). Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 starts the variation of the special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display unit 222 based on the setting contents determined in the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process (S2409). Then, a variation start command including setting information (jackpot symbol, game state, variation pattern, etc.) indicating the setting contents is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S2410).
Next, the special symbol change control unit 233 increments the number of times the special symbol has been changed since the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, resetting of the change count) by one (S2411).Then, it generates a change count command indicating the incremented number of times the special symbol has been changed, and sets it in the RAM 203 (S2412).

On the other hand, if the second special pattern is changing (YES in S2402), or if the reserved number U2 = 0 (No in S2403), the special pattern change control unit 233 determines whether the current state of the pachinko game machine 100 is changing to the first special pattern (S2413).
If the first special symbol is not being changed (No in S2413), the special symbol change control unit 233 next judges whether the reserved number U1 related to the winning of the first starting port 121 is 1 or more (S2414). If the reserved number U1 is 1 or more (Yes in S2414), the special symbol change control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the reserved number U1 (S2415). After that, the processing of steps 2405 to 2412 is performed for the first special symbol.
In addition, when the special symbol change control unit 233 subtracts the reserved number U1 related to the winning of the first starting port 121 in the time-saving game state (S2415), it does not need to turn off the customer waiting flag.

If the first special symbol is changing (YES in S2413) or the reserved number U1=0 (NO in S2414), the special symbol change control unit 233 judges whether the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changing and U1=0 and U2=0 in this special symbol processing (S2416). If a positive result is obtained (YES in S2416), the customer waiting setting processing is executed and the processing ends (S2417).

Also, if a negative result is obtained in step 2416 (NO in S2416), the special symbol change control unit 233 judges whether the change time has elapsed (S2418). If the change time has not elapsed (NO in S2418), the special symbol change continues, and the special symbol processing ends.

On the other hand, if the change time has elapsed (Yes in S2418), the special symbol change control unit 233 stops the change of the special symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol for which the change time has elapsed at the symbol determined in the big win determination process of S2407 (S2419). Then, a process during the stop of another routine is executed (S2420). In addition, the special symbol change control unit 233 sets a change stop command in the RAM 203 to stop the decorative symbol described below (S2421).

[Random number determination method]
Here, we will explain in detail the random number determination method used in the jackpot determination process (Figure 14), the variable pattern selection process (Figure 15), the normal pattern process (Figure 18), etc.
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of random numbers (judgment table) used in the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery in this embodiment.
Figure 25(a) shows an example of the composition of a jackpot random number used in a special pattern lottery, Figure 25(b) shows an example of the composition of a jackpot random number used in a special pattern lottery, Figure 25(c) shows an example of the composition of a small win random number used in a special pattern lottery, Figure 25(d) shows an example of the composition of a reach random number used in a special pattern lottery that is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state, and Figure 25(e) shows an example of the composition of a winning random number used in a normal pattern lottery.

Referring to FIG. 25(a), a jackpot and a small jackpot are set as the jackpot random number judgment value. The range of the random number (jackpot random number) is 300, ranging from 0 to 299. In addition, the winning value of the jackpot is set for each of the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122, which are the triggers for the special pattern lottery, while the winning value of the small jackpot is set only for the second start hole 122. For the jackpot, three winning values are set for both the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122, and the winning probability is 3/300 (=1/100). In addition, the winning value of the small jackpot is set to 10, and the winning probability is 10/300 (=1/30).
Here, an example of the special symbol lottery will be described. It is determined whether the jackpot random number (see S1003, S1010) obtained as a result of winning the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 matches any of the winning values of the jackpot lottery in Fig. 25(a), namely "8", "58", and "208". Although a detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery for the small jackpot.

Referring to FIG. 25(b), five types of jackpot symbols are available: jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol C, jackpot symbol D, and jackpot symbol E. Here, jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, and jackpot symbol C are symbols that indicate that the result of the special symbol lottery, which is triggered by winning the first starting hole 121, is a jackpot, and among these, jackpot symbol A indicates an 8-round jackpot. Jackpot symbol B indicates a 4-round jackpot. Jackpot symbol C indicates a 15-round jackpot. Also, jackpot symbol D and jackpot symbol E are symbols that indicate that the result of the special symbol lottery, which is based on winning the second starting hole 122, is a jackpot, and among these, jackpot symbol D indicates a 15-round jackpot. Jackpot symbol E indicates an 8-round jackpot. The range of random number values is 100, from 0 to 99.

In the jackpot pattern A, 20 values are assigned as winning values for the first starting hole 121. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery started by winning the first starting hole 121, the probability of winning with the jackpot pattern A is 20/100 (=2/10).
For the jackpot pattern B, 70 values are assigned as winning values for the first starting hole 121. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery started by winning the first starting hole 121, the probability of winning with the jackpot pattern B is 70/100 (=7/10).
In the jackpot pattern C, 10 values are assigned as winning values for the first starting hole 121. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery started by winning the first starting hole 121, the probability of winning with the jackpot pattern C is 10/100 (=1/10).

For the jackpot symbol D, 50 values are assigned as the winning value when the symbol enters the second starting hole 122. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol D is 50/100 (=5/10).
For the jackpot symbol E, 50 values are assigned as the winning value when the second starting hole 122 is won. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol E is 50/100 (=5/10).

Here, taking the jackpot pattern A as an example, it is determined whether the jackpot pattern random number value (see S1003) obtained upon winning at the first starting hole 121 matches the winning value of jackpot pattern A in FIG. 25(b), which is "0 to 19." Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to the special pattern lottery for other jackpot patterns such as jackpot pattern B.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is capable of setting a set value which is a stage of the advantageous degree of the game. In the pachinko gaming machine 100, the set value can be set to one of, for example, six stages of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5" and "6".
In the pachinko gaming machine 100, when the set value is set to "1," the probability of winning is the lowest. For example, when the set value is "1," the probability of winning is 1/100.
In the pachinko gaming machine 100, the winning probability is highest when the set value is set to "6." For example, when the set value is "6," the winning probability is 1/95.
In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, the winning probability is set in the order of increasing set values "1"<"2"<"3"<"4"<"5"<"6".

Referring to FIG. 25(c), there are three types of small win symbols: small win symbol A, small win symbol B, and small win symbol C. Here, small win symbol A, small win symbol B, and small win symbol C all indicate two rounds of small win. The range of random number values is 100, from 0 to 99.

For the small prize pattern A, 20 values are assigned as winning values for the second starting hole 122. Therefore, when a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the small prize pattern A is 20/100 (=2/10).
For the small prize pattern B, 50 values are assigned as winning values for the second starting hole 122. Therefore, when a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the small prize pattern B is 50/100 (=5/10).
For the small prize pattern C, 30 values are assigned as winning values for the second starting hole 122. Therefore, when a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the small prize pattern C is 30/100 (=3/10).

Next, the determination of the reach random number will be explained. The reach random number is set according to the number of reserved balls, as described later. Here, as an example, the reach random number when the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 121 is one will be explained.
Referring to FIG. 25(d), the range of the random number value is 250 from 0 to 249, and 22 random numbers are assigned to the lottery result (with reach) that is a variation pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach performance (for example, 15.0 seconds or more), and 228 random numbers are assigned to the lottery result (without reach) that is not a variation pattern that can execute the reach performance (for example, less than 15.0 seconds). That is, in the illustrated example, when the special pattern lottery does not result in a jackpot, the reach performance is performed with a probability of 22/250 (=11/125). Here, the reach performance is a performance performed in the image display unit 114 when the special pattern changes. Hereinafter, the performance when the special pattern changes that does not have a variation pattern that can execute the reach performance is called a no-reach performance, and the performance when the special pattern changes that has a variation pattern that can execute the reach performance is called a reach performance.

Here, taking the reach-enabled state as an example, it is determined whether the reach random number value (see S1003) obtained upon winning the first start port 121 matches the reach-enabled winning value "0 to 21" in FIG. 25(d). Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery without the reach. Furthermore, the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery based on winning the first start port 121 and the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery based on winning the second start port 122 may have the same number of winning values or different numbers. Furthermore, the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery in the normal game state, the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving game state, and the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery in the specific time-saving game state may have the same number of winning values or different numbers.

In many cases, when the special symbol changes, a performance using a performance pattern such as a decorative pattern is performed in the image display unit 114 in conjunction with the display control of the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222 (hereinafter, when there is no need to distinguish between them, they are described as the special symbol displays 221 and 222). The decorative symbol is, for example, configured by displaying three rows of symbols consisting of a sequence of numbers in which the numbers 1 to 9 are written vertically in succession. Then, when the display of the special symbol changes in the special symbol displays 221 and 222 starts, the decorative symbol displayed in the image display unit 114 starts scrolling. Also, when the special symbol is displayed stationary after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display of the special symbol changes (the start of scrolling of the decorative symbol), the decorative symbol is also fixed and stopped. Generally, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win, the decorative symbol is displayed stationary with three identical numbers lined up in a straight line horizontally or diagonally. The effects that use the special symbols that appear as the special symbols change are called variable effects.

In the reach performance, the following operation is performed on the decorative symbols as a variable performance. First, before the decorative symbols scrolling vertically (horizontally) are fixed and stopped, any two symbols (number series) are temporarily stopped first. At this time, the same numbers are temporarily stopped in a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line. To explain further, if the decorative symbols are scrolling vertically, the same numbers are temporarily stopped in a horizontal line.
Next, the scrolling speed of the last row gradually slows down, giving the player a sense of expectation that three identical numbers will line up in a straight line. After the last row temporarily stops, the three symbols are fixed and stopped.
Here, in the reach effect, before the three symbols are fixed and stopped, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect may be performed. The SP reach effect is generally called the super reach or the special reach, and is an effect that gives more hope for a big win than the reach effect, and is a moving image effect in which various characters appear and a story unfolds. The SPSP reach effect is generally called the super super reach or the special special reach, and is an effect that gives more hope for a big win than the SP reach effect, and is a moving image effect in which various characters appear and a story unfolds.
As shown in FIG. 26 described later, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation time is longer (for example, 90 seconds or 60 seconds), the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is set to be executed.
On the other hand, in the no-reach performance, the decorative symbols scrolling vertically (horizontally) are not determined and stopped before the symbols are determined and stopped without the same numbers lining up in a straight line horizontally (vertically) or diagonally, without any performance that gives the player a sense of expectation like the reach performance.

In this way, when the result of the judgment of the jackpot random number is a miss, the reach random number determines whether to perform a reach effect in which the reach effect is an executable variation pattern on the image display unit 114, or a reach-free effect in which the reach effect is not an executable variation pattern. Also, the reach random number changes the execution rate of the reach effect according to the reserved number, enabling efficient game progress while giving the player an appropriate sense of expectation.
In addition, when a big win is won, a reach effect is performed, and the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped in a state where the same numbers are lined up in a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line. On the other hand, when a small win is won or a miss is won, the reach effect is performed, and the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped in a state where the same numbers are not lined up in the straight line.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used in the normal symbol lottery will be described.
25(e), the range of random number values is 10, from 0 to 9, with one value being assigned as the winning value when the time-saving flag is OFF, and nine values being assigned as the winning value when the time-saving flag is ON. Therefore, when a game ball passes through gate 124 in a non-time-saving state and a normal symbol lottery is held, there is a 1/10 probability of winning. In contrast, when a game ball passes through gate 124 in a time-saving state and a normal symbol lottery is held, there is a 9/10 probability of winning.

Here, taking the time-saving flag OFF as an example, it is determined whether the winning random number value (see S1103) obtained in response to the passage of the game ball through the gate 124, the first start port 121, or the second start port 122 matches the winning value "0" for the time-saving flag OFF in FIG. 25(e). Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to the normal symbol lottery for the time-saving flag ON.

Although not shown, multiple winning patterns can be set with different contents of auxiliary games (opening patterns of electric tulips 123) to be played when a winning is determined in the normal pattern lottery. In this case, for example, a winning pattern random number for specifying the type of winning in the normal pattern lottery is set in the same way as the jackpot pattern random number for specifying the type of winning in the special pattern lottery (see FIG. 25(b)). Then, the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value of the winning pattern random number together with the random number value of the winning random number in the gate switch process (see FIG. 11) by the random number acquisition unit 231, and identifies the type of winning based on the acquired random number value by the normal pattern determination unit 232.
Note that the range of random numbers, the ratio of winning values, and each value of the winning values shown in the configuration example of each random number in Figure 25 are merely examples and are not limited to the values shown.

[Example of setting fluctuation patterns]
Next, an example of the setting of the fluctuation patterns and tables used in the fluctuation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 15 will be described.
Fig. 26 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process shown in Fig. 15. Fig. 26 shows a setting example in which the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 26, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot (Yes in S1502 in FIG. 15), the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines the variation pattern based on the jackpot symbol and the variation pattern random number. Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines the variation pattern based on whether the variation pattern random number value (see S1003) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the variation pattern random number values assigned to each jackpot symbol. For example, when the jackpot symbol is "jackpot symbol C" and the variation pattern random number is "51", it matches the variation pattern random number range "50-69" assigned to "jackpot symbol C" in FIG. 26, so "PB3" is selected as the variation pattern. The special symbol variation time in this "PB3" is "90.18 seconds".

In addition, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss (when both S1502 and S1504 in FIG. 15 are No), the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines the variation pattern based on the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol lottery, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number. Specifically, when the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol lottery is "1", the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines whether the reach random number value (see S1003) acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 together with the jackpot random number value is assigned to the reach random number range "0-21" assigned to the reserved number "1" of "miss" in FIG. 26, or to the reach random number range "22-249". If the acquired reach random number is within the reach random number range "0-21", the fluctuation pattern is determined based on whether the fluctuation pattern random number value (see S1003) acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 together with the jackpot random number value matches any of the fluctuation pattern random number values assigned to the reach random number range "0-21". For example, if the fluctuation pattern random number is "51", it matches the fluctuation pattern random number range "50-89", so "PR7" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

27 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, FIG. 27 shows a setting example in which the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the second start hole 122 in the normal game state.
In the table shown in Fig. 27, a variation pattern is provided according to the judgment result of the special symbol lottery and the variation pattern random number. More specifically, a variation pattern is provided in which the "judgment result" corresponds to "big win", "small win", and "miss".
In the table shown in FIG. 27, a variation pattern in which the "time" is "150.00" is provided as a "big win pattern D". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "150.01" is provided as a "big win pattern E". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "140.00" is provided as a "small win pattern A". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "140.01" is provided as a "small win pattern B". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "140.02" is provided as a "small win pattern C". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "600.00" is provided as a "miss".

In this table, the "miss" is not assigned a winning value in the reach random number. Therefore, in the case of a special pattern change in which the lottery result based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the normal game state is a miss, a reach is not performed.

Fig. 28 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, Fig. 28 shows a setting example in which the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the first special time-saving game state.
In the table shown in FIG. 28, a fluctuation pattern is provided according to the determination result of the special pattern lottery, the reserved number U1 of the first special pattern lottery, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number.
In the table shown in FIG. 28, a variation pattern is provided in which the "time" is "2.50" and "4.00" as "no reach" when the "reserved number" is "1". The "time" of "2.50" and "4.00" is shorter than the "time" of "8.00" of the "variation pattern" provided in the table shown in FIG. 26 as "no reach" when the "reserved number" is "1". In addition, in the table shown in FIG. 28, a variation pattern is provided in which the "time" is "2.00" and "4.00" as "no reach" when the "reserved number" is "2 to 3". The "time" of "2.00" and "4.00" is shorter than the "time" of "6.80" of the "variation pattern" provided in the table shown in FIG. 26 as "no reach" when the "reserved number" is "2 to 3". In addition, in the table shown in Fig. 28, a fluctuation pattern in which the "time" is "1.50" and "4.00" is provided as "no reach" with the "reserved number" being "4". The "time" of "1.50" and "4.00" is shorter than the "time" of "4.60" of the "fluctuation pattern" provided as "no reach" with the "reserved number" being "4" in the table shown in Fig. 26.

Fig. 29 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, Fig. 29 shows a setting example in which the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the second start hole 122 in the first special time-saving game state.
In the table shown in Fig. 29, a variation pattern is provided according to the judgment result of the special symbol lottery and the variation pattern random number. More specifically, a variation pattern is provided in which the "judgment result" corresponds to "big win", "small win", and "miss".
In the table shown in FIG. 29, a variation pattern in which the "time" is "150.02" is provided as a "big win pattern D". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "150.03" is provided as a "big win pattern E". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "140.04" is provided as a "small win pattern A". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "140.05" is provided as a "small win pattern B". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "140.06" is provided as a "small win pattern C". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "600.01" is provided as a "miss".
In this table, the winning value in the reach random number is not assigned to "miss". Therefore, in the special symbol variation in which the lottery result based on the winning of the second start hole 122 in the first special time-saving game state is a miss, the reach is not performed.

Fig. 30(a) is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, Fig. 30(a) shows a setting example in which the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the second special time-saving game state.
In the table shown in Fig. 30(a), a variation pattern is provided according to the judgment result of the special symbol lottery and the variation pattern random number. More specifically, a variation pattern is provided in which the "judgment result" corresponds to "jackpot" and "miss," respectively.
In the table shown in FIG. 30(a), a variation pattern in which the "time" is "145.00" is provided as a "jackpot pattern A". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "145.01" is provided as a "jackpot pattern B". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "145.02" is provided as a "jackpot pattern C". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "601.01" is provided as a "miss".
In this table, the winning value in the reach random number is not assigned to "miss". Therefore, in the special symbol variation in which the lottery result based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the second special time-saving game state is a miss, the reach is not performed.

Figure 30 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, Figure 30 (b) shows a setting example in which the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the second start hole 122 in the second special time-saving game state.
In the table shown in FIG. 30(b), a fluctuation pattern is provided according to the determination result of the special pattern lottery, the reserved number U2 of the second special pattern lottery, and the fluctuation pattern random number.
In the table shown in FIG. 30(b), the fluctuation patterns that are "misses" include "PO1", which is a fluctuation pattern of "not in reach", and "PO2", which is a fluctuation pattern of "in reach".
In the table shown in FIG. 30(b), a variation pattern in which the "time" is "150.02" is provided as the "big win pattern D". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "150.03" is provided as the "big win pattern E". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "140.04" is provided as the "small win pattern A". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "140.05" is provided as the "small win pattern B". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "140.06" is provided as the "small win pattern C". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "2.01", a variation pattern in which the "time" is "30.00", a variation pattern in which the "time" is "1.01", and a variation pattern in which the "time" is "1.00" are provided as "misses".

The game control unit 200 determines the table to be used for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol based on whether the game ball has entered the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 and the game status of the pachinko game machine 100. Then, as described above, the game control unit 200 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the variation pattern random number value (see S1003 and S1010 in FIG. 10) obtained when the game ball has entered the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122, the presence or absence of a reach effect, the number of reserved balls, and other conditions. Then, information on the determined variation pattern of the special symbol is included in a variation start command and sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300. In the performance control unit 300, as described later, a performance corresponding to (executable during) the variation time specified based on the variation pattern information included in the variation start command is selected and executed as the performance when the special symbol changes.

[Configuration of RAM of game control unit and RAM of performance control unit for performing advance notice performance based on advance judgment]
Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the presentation control unit 300 in this embodiment for executing the advance notice presentation based on the advance judgment will be described.
Fig. 31 is a block diagram for explaining an example of the configuration of the RAM 203 (see Fig. 4) of the game control unit 200 according to this embodiment. Fig. 31(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the memory area 204, and Fig. 31(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memories shown in Fig. 31(a).

As shown in FIG. 31(a), the RAM 203 has a memory area 204 as a special symbol reservation memory area that stores the jackpot random number obtained by the jackpot random number lottery. This memory area 204 has eight memory sections corresponding to the maximum number of reserved numbers in the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122 (when the upper limit of each reserved number is 4). More specifically, the memory area 204 has a first memory section 204a, a second memory section 204b, a third memory section 204c, a fourth memory section 204d, a fifth memory section 204e, a sixth memory section 204f, a seventh memory section 204g, and an eighth memory section 204h.

As shown in FIG. 31(b), each of these memory units 204a-204h has an area for storing information indicating which starting hole (first starting hole 121 or second starting hole 122) was won, an area for storing the obtained jackpot random number, an area for storing a pattern random number, an area for storing a reach random number, and an area for storing a variation pattern random number. That is, each of the memory units 204a-204h stores a jackpot random number, a pattern random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number.

Here, each random number is stored in order starting from the first storage unit 204a. To explain more specifically, for example, when no random number is stored in any of the first storage unit 204a to the eighth storage unit 204h, the acquired random number is stored in the first storage unit 204a. Also, for example, when random numbers are already stored in the first storage unit 204a to the fourth storage unit 204d, the acquired random number is stored in the fifth storage unit 204e.

Fig. 32 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration example of the RAM 303 (see Fig. 4) of the performance control unit 300 according to this embodiment. Fig. 32(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the reserved memory areas 305 and 306, and Fig. 32(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in Fig. 32(a).
As shown in FIG. 32(a), the RAM 303 includes a first reserved memory area 305 and a second reserved memory area 306 as reserved status memory areas that store the status of reserved balls. The first reserved memory area 305 and the second reserved memory area 306 correspond to the reserved status for the winning of the first starting hole 121 and the reserved status for the winning of the second starting hole 122, respectively, and each has four memory sections. Specifically, the first reserved memory area 305 includes a first memory section 305a, a second memory section 305b, a third memory section 305c, and a fourth memory section 305d. The second reserved memory area 306 includes a first memory section 306a, a second memory section 306b, a third memory section 306c, and a fourth memory section 306d.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), each of these storage units 305a-305d, 306a-306d has a reserved flag storage area for turning the reserved flag ON/OFF and a notification flag storage area for turning the notification flag ON/OFF. The reserved flag is a flag for identifying the presence or absence of reserved balls for each storage unit 305a-305d, 306a-306d. That is, for example, if the number of reserved balls due to winning in the first starting hole 121 is 3, the reserved flag is ON in the three reserved flag storage areas of the first to third storage units 305a, 305b, and 305c. The notification flag is a flag for setting whether or not to perform a notice performance based on the results of a preliminary judgment for each reserved ball. In the pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can set whether or not to perform a notice performance based on the results of a preliminary judgment depending on the game state and the situation of the performance. Therefore, if a preview performance is to be performed, the notification flag is set to ON, and if a preview performance is not to be performed, the notification flag is set to OFF. For example, if a preview performance is to be performed for the third of the three reserved balls, the notification flag is set to ON in the notification flag storage area of the third storage unit 305c.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the RAM 203 has an area (hereinafter, the pre-judgment information storage area) in which pre-judgment information is stored, in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 31(a). The pre-judgment information is information obtained by the pre-judgment process based on the random numbers described above (see S1004 and S1011 in FIG. 10). The contents of the pre-judgment information are the same as the information obtained as various judgment results in the special symbol process (see FIG. 13), and specifically, it is information for indicating whether or not a jackpot has been hit (and whether or not a small jackpot has been hit), the type of jackpot if a jackpot has been hit, whether the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is long enough to execute a reach performance, and the contents of the fluctuation pattern. The pre-judgment information stored in the pre-judgment information storage area is sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300 together with information on the reservation (hereinafter, the reservation information) corresponding to the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-judgment process has been performed, or at a unique timing separate from this reservation information, and is included in the pre-judgment result command.

[Preliminary judgment process]
Next, the pre-determination process (see S1004 and S1011 in FIG. 10) will be described in detail.
In the pre-determination process in this embodiment, the game control unit 200 performs pre-determination as follows, using a random number table similar to the example of the random number configuration described with reference to Figures 26 to 30 (b).

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination process (S1004 and S1011 in FIG. 10) according to this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 33, the game control unit 200 first refers to the game status (S3301), selects a table corresponding to the current game status of the pachinko game machine 100, and performs a preliminary determination of the jackpot random number and jackpot pattern random number (S3302).
Next, the game control unit 200 selects a table according to the current game state of the pachinko game machine 100 and performs a preliminary determination of the reach random number (S3303). Furthermore, it selects a table according to the current game state and performs a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern random number (S3304).
Although not shown in the figures, in S3302, S3303 and S3304, a dedicated table is selected depending on whether the pre-determination process is based on a winning entry at the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122.

Next, the game control unit 200 selects a pre-determination pattern according to the results of the pre-determinations in S3302, S3303, and S3304 (S3305).
After that, the game control unit 200 stores the result of the pre-determination of the jackpot random number, the result of the pre-determination of the jackpot pattern random number, the result of the pre-determination of the reach random number, the result of the pre-determination of the variation pattern, and the pre-determination pattern obtained as described above in the pre-determination information storage area as pre-determination information (S3306).Furthermore, in order to transmit the pre-determination information to the performance control unit 300, a pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information is set in the RAM 203 (S3307).

The above-mentioned preliminary judgment was performed using a random number value (see S1003 and S1010 in FIG. 10) obtained in response to the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122, and a judgment table having a configuration similar to that of the judgment table used in the jackpot judgment process (see FIG. 25). In other words, the judgment itself after selecting the judgment table to be used is the same as the judgment in the jackpot judgment process (see S1401 in FIG. 14). Therefore, in this embodiment, the subroutine (see S1309 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) of the jackpot judgment process used in the special pattern process (see FIG. 13) is called, and the random number judgment in the above-mentioned preliminary judgment is performed.

By configuring in this manner, in this embodiment, there is no need to prepare a processing function (subroutine) for judging random numbers separately from the jackpot judgment process in order to judge the random numbers in the pre-judgment process. This reduces the number of control instructions, and suppresses an increase in the size of the programs related to the jackpot judgment process and the pre-judgment process. Also, as described above, if the judgment table used for the pre-judgment is configured in the same way as the judgment table used for the jackpot judgment, the judgment table used for the jackpot judgment may also be used for the pre-judgment.

In addition, here, only the advance judgment (whether or not it is a big win) regarding the special symbol lottery has been described, but in this embodiment, the change pattern when performing the change display and the stop display of the special symbol is also read ahead (advance judgment). The selection of the change pattern in the special symbol lottery is performed using the change pattern selection random number (see S1003, S1010 in FIG. 10) obtained in response to the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122 and the change pattern table (see FIG. 26 to FIG. 30 (b)) (see S1310 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 15). Therefore, in the advance reading of the change pattern, the change pattern to be selected can be read ahead using the change pattern selection random number obtained at the time of winning and a look-ahead table having the same configuration as the change pattern table used in the change pattern selection process of the special symbol process. In other words, a different look-ahead table can be used for each game state of the pachinko game machine 100. Also, different look-ahead tables can be used depending on whether the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is won.

In this case, the subroutine (see S1310 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 15) of the variation pattern selection process used in the special symbol processing (see FIG. 13) can be called and used to look ahead at the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol processing may be used for the look-ahead table used to look ahead at the variation pattern selection. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of control commands related to the look-ahead of the variation pattern selection and suppress an increase in the size of the program.

In addition, if the pre-judgment process and the jackpot judgment process during the special pattern change are performed in the same subroutine using the same judgment table group, the execution time of each process is different, so the pre-judgment result and the judgment result by the jackpot judgment process during the special pattern change may differ. That is, after the pre-judgment process is performed, the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 (either the normal game state, the special time-saving game state, or the specific time-saving game state) changes by the time the special pattern change starts. In this case, since different types of judgment tables are used depending on the game state, the specific judgment tables used for judgment will be different when the pre-judgment process is performed and when the jackpot judgment process is performed. Therefore, even if the same random number value obtained when winning the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122 is used, the pre-judgment result and the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process may differ. In such a case, if the game state changes after the execution of the pre-determination process by the time the special pattern variation starts, the performance control unit 300 may perform control such as prohibiting the execution of the performance based on the pre-determination result.

In accordance with the command output from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300 as described above, the performance control unit 300 controls, for example, the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157. For example, when the performance control unit 300 receives a command indicating the start of a door opening error, the performance control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display a message such as "Please call an attendant" or an image indicating an abnormal state. The performance control unit 300 also causes the speaker 156 to output an alarm indicating an abnormal state, and restricts the output of music, voice, sound effects, and the like. The performance control unit 300 also turns on the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 in red, for example, to indicate an abnormal state.

In addition, although it has been described here that the performance control unit 300 notifies the occurrence of an error using all of the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157, it may be possible to use only some of these. The notification mode may be switched depending on the type of error. For example, when a door opening error occurs, the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157 may all be used as described above. When a payout error occurs, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 notify the occurrence of an error. This allows staff at the gaming establishment (pachinko parlor) to easily determine the urgency of an error that has occurred in the gaming machine.

[Example of pre-determined pattern settings]
Next, a description will be given of an example of setting the pre-determination patterns and tables used in the pre-determination process shown in FIG.
Fig. 34 is a diagram showing an example of setting the pre-determination pattern and the table used in the pre-determination process shown in Fig. 33. Fig. 34 shows a setting example in which the special symbol is changed based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the normal game state.

In the table shown in Figure 34, "judgment result,""pattern,""reach random number,""variation pattern random number,""planned variation pattern," and "pre-judgment pattern" are associated with each other.
The game control unit 200 determines a planned fluctuation pattern and a pre-determination pattern based on the pre-determination results of the jackpot random number and the jackpot pattern random number, the pre-determination results of the reach random number, and the pre-determination results of the fluctuation pattern random number.
Fig. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the pre-determination pattern and the table used in the pre-determination process. Fig. 35 shows an example of the setting when the special symbol is changed based on the winning of the second start hole 122 in the normal game state.
In the table shown in Figure 35, "judgment result,""pattern,""reach random number,""variation pattern random number,""planned variation pattern," and "pre-judgment pattern" are associated with each other.

Fig. 36(a) is a diagram showing an example of a pre-determination pattern and a table used in the pre-determination process. Fig. 36(a) shows a setting example in which a special symbol is changed based on a winning into the first start hole 121 in the first special time-saving game state.
In the table shown in Figure 36 (a), "judgment result,""pattern,""reach random number,""variation pattern random number,""planned variation pattern," and "pre-judgment pattern" are associated with each other.
Fig. 36(b) is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the pre-determination pattern and the table used in the pre-determination process. Fig. 36(b) shows an example of the setting when the special symbol is changed based on the winning of the second start hole 122 in the first special time-saving game state.
In the table shown in Figure 36 (b), "judgment result,""pattern,""reach random number,""variation pattern random number,""planned variation pattern," and "pre-judgment pattern" are associated with each other.

Fig. 37(a) is a diagram showing an example of a pre-determination pattern and a table used in the pre-determination process. Fig. 37(a) shows a setting example in which the special symbol is changed based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the second special time-saving game state.
In the table shown in Figure 37 (a), "judgment result,""pattern,""reach random number,""variation pattern random number,""planned variation pattern," and "pre-judgment pattern" are associated with each other.
Fig. 37(b) is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the pre-determination pattern and the table used in the pre-determination process. Fig. 37(b) shows a setting example in which the special symbol is changed based on the winning of the second start hole 122 in the second special time-saving game state.
In the table shown in Figure 37 (b), "judgment result,""pattern,""reach random number,""variation pattern random number,""planned variation pattern," and "pre-judgment pattern" are associated with each other.

In this embodiment, examples of the pre-determination patterns and tables are provided, including a setting example in which a special symbol is changed based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state, a setting example in which a special symbol is changed based on winning the second start port 122 in the normal game state, a setting example in which a special symbol is changed based on winning the first start port 121 in the first special time-saving game state, a setting example in which a special symbol is changed based on winning the second start port 122 in the first special time-saving game state, a setting example in which a special symbol is changed based on winning the first start port 121 in the second special time-saving game state, and a setting example in which a special symbol is changed based on winning the second start port 122 in the second special time-saving game state. That is, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state and regardless of whether the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is won, a pre-determination result command is generated in the pre-determination process and set in RAM 203. However, depending on the game state, a pre-determination pattern table may not be provided. For example, when the special symbol changes based on winning the second start hole 122 in the normal game state, when the special symbol changes based on winning the second start hole 122 in the first special time-saving game state, and when the special symbol changes based on winning the first start hole 121 in the second special time-saving game state, the pre-determination result command may not be generated in the pre-determination process (the pre-determination result command may not be sent to the performance control unit 300), and the pre-determination performance may not be executed.

In the illustrated example, one "pre-determination pattern" is associated with one "planned fluctuation pattern," but this is not limited to the above. Multiple "pre-determination patterns" may be associated with one "planned fluctuation pattern." When this "planned fluctuation pattern" is selected, one of the multiple "pre-determination patterns" may be selected by lottery.

[Operation of the production control unit]
Next, the operation of the performance control unit 300 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the operation of the performance control unit 300.
The operation of the performance control unit 300 consists of the main processing shown in Fig. 38(a) and the interrupt processing shown in Fig. 38(b). Referring to Fig. 38(a), the performance control unit 300 first performs initial settings at startup (S3801), sets the cycle of the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) (S3802), and then accepts interrupt processing while updating the random numbers used in performance control according to the set cycle (S3803).

The interrupt process is performed periodically according to the cycle set in S3802. Referring to FIG. 38(b), in this interrupt process, the performance control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs command reception process (S3811). In this command reception process, the performance content (performance pattern) is selected. The performance control unit 300 also performs specific time-saving related performance process to execute a performance related to a specific time-saving game state (S3812). The performance control unit 300 also performs performance button process to accept the operation of the performance button 161 by the player (S3813). After this, the performance control unit 300 performs command transmission process to transmit a command including information on the selected performance pattern to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 (S3814). As a result, performance is performed by image display and sound output on the image display unit 114, operation of the movable role object 115, and illumination of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, etc.

[Command reception processing by the production control unit]
FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command receiving process (S3811 in FIG. 38(b)).
In this command reception process, the performance control unit 300 first judges whether or not the pre-determination result command and the reserved number increase command have been received (S3901). The pre-determination result command and the reserved number increase command are commands that are set in the start port switch process shown in Fig. 10 in the game control unit 200 (S1006, S1007, S1013, S1014) and sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output process (S906) shown in Fig. 9.
Then, if the performance control unit 300 determines that it has received a pre-determination result command and a command to increase the number of reserved items (Yes in S3901), it adds 1 to the value of the number of reserved items stored in RAM 303 (S3902).
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 performs a pre-determination performance selection process based on the pre-determination result command and the reserved number increase command (S3903). The contents of the pre-determination performance selection process will be described later.

If the received command is neither a pre-determination result command nor a reserved number increase command (No in S3901), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the received command is a fluctuation start command (S3904). This fluctuation start command is a command that is set in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 13 by the game control unit 200 (S1312) and sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing (S906) shown in FIG. 9.
If the received command is a fluctuation start command (Yes in S3904), the performance control unit 300 executes a performance selection process (S3905). When a fluctuation start command is received, a random number value for performance control used in the performance selection process is obtained. This random number value is a random number value that is periodically updated in S3803 of the main process shown in FIG. 38(a). The details of the performance selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a reserved number increase command, or a fluctuation start command (No in S3901 and S3904), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the received command is a fluctuation stop command (S3906). This fluctuation stop command is a command that is set in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 13 by the game control unit 200 (S1318) and sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing (S906) shown in FIG. 9.
If the received command is a fluctuation stop command (Yes in S3907), the performance control unit 300 executes a fluctuation performance end process (S3907). In the fluctuation performance end process, the performance control unit 300 analyzes the received fluctuation stop command and sets a fluctuation performance end command in the RAM 303 to instruct the end of the symbol fluctuation performance.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a reserved number increase command, a fluctuation start command, or a fluctuation stop command (No in S3901, S3904, and S3906), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the received command is an opening command for starting the opening operation of the big win game (S3908). This opening command is set (S1618) during the stop processing shown in FIG. 16 or the second big winning port processing (S2015) shown in FIG. 20, and is a command sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing (S906) shown in FIG. 9.
If the received command is an opening command (Yes in S3908), the effect control unit 300 executes a big win effect selection process (S3909). The big win effect selection process will be described in detail later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a reserved number increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, or an opening command (No in S3901, S3904, S3906, and S3908), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the received command is an ending command for starting the ending operation of the big win game (S3910). This ending command is a command that was set in the first big win port process shown in Figure 19 (S1913) and sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output process (S906) shown in Figure 9.
If the received command is an ending command (Yes in S3910), the performance control unit 300 executes an ending performance selection process (S3911). The details of the ending performance selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a hold number increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, or an ending command (No in S3901, S3904, S3906, S3908, and S3910), the performance control unit 300 then executes a customer waiting command reception process to transition the received command to a customer waiting state (S3912). The customer waiting command reception process will be described in detail later.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process (S3903) and the effect selection process (S3905) of FIG.
In the pre-determination effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the pre-determination result command received from the game control unit 200 (S4001). Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 analyzes the reserved number increase command received from the game control unit 200 (S4002). Then, the effect control unit 300 selects an effect pattern (pre-determination effect pattern) to be used in the pre-determination effect based on the pre-determination result command and the reserved number increase command (S4003).

Here, as the pre-determination performance pattern, various performance patterns can be provided that foretell the result of the random number determination by the special pattern processing before the start of the fluctuation based on the result of the random number determination by the special pattern processing. For example, a reserved display performance, a continuous notice performance, etc. can be provided as a pre-determination performance pattern. In this embodiment, when a reserved ball occurs, a display showing the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first special pattern reserved display 218 and the second special pattern reserved display 219 of the display 130 (see FIG. 3), and a reserved display suggesting the occurrence of a reserved ball and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the image display unit 114 (reserved display performance). Therefore, in this reserved display performance, by reflecting the pre-determination result in the display mode of the reserved display, etc., a pre-determination performance can be provided that suggests to the player the judgment result when the random number determination by the special pattern processing is performed later for the reserved ball.

Note that, although the case where the pending display effect is used as the pre-determination effect has been described here, it is possible to perform a variety of preview effects by reflecting the various effects performed before the start of fluctuations based on the random number determination results by special pattern processing. For example, effects using the effect image displayed on the image display unit 114, effects using the illumination of the board lamp 116, frame lamp 157, movable role 115, and effect button 161, effects using the movement (vibration) of the movable role 115 and effect button 161, effects using the audio output of music, sound effects, etc. can be set as pre-determination effect patterns.

In addition, the pre-determination performance may be performed in conjunction with a pattern change for other winning balls that is performed before the pattern change for the winning ball (reserved ball) for which a pre-determination has been performed. In this embodiment, the reserved balls are limited to four per start port (first start port 121 or second start port 122) (see FIG. 10). Also, priority is given to the consumption of reserved balls in the second start port 122. In this case, for example, if a pre-determination is performed for a reserved ball in the second start port 122, a pattern change will be performed for up to four winning balls, including the currently changing change (referred to as the change in question), before the pattern change for that reserved ball is performed. In the advance notice performance for the reserved ball for which a pre-determination has been performed, if multiple pattern changes are performed before the pattern change for that reserved ball, an advance notice performance (continuous advance notice performance) that spans the multiple pattern changes may be performed.

Then, the performance control unit 300 sets a reserved number command containing the value of the reserved number after the addition and information on the pre-determined performance pattern selected in the pre-determined performance selection process in RAM 303 (S4004). The reserved number command contains information indicating the selected pre-determined performance pattern to notify the CPU 311 of the image/audio control unit 310 of the pattern. By receiving the reserved number command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected pre-determined performance pattern. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data for representing the selected pre-determined performance pattern from the CGROM 315 and the SNDROM 316, and displays the pre-determined performance using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156.

In the effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received fluctuation start command (S4011). It also subtracts 1 from the reserved number value stored in RAM 303 (S4012). Then, the effect control unit 300 selects a fluctuation effect pattern for the pattern fluctuation by the image displayed on the image display unit 114 based on various setting information (information on the type of jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game, the fluctuation pattern, etc.) obtained from the analysis result of the fluctuation start command (S4013). Note that after the fluctuation effect pattern is selected, the reserved number value stored in RAM 303 may be subtracted by 1. In other words, the fluctuation effect pattern may be selected in the state before the reserved number value stored in RAM 303 is subtracted by 1.

Finally, the performance control unit 300 sets a variable performance start command in the RAM 303 to instruct the start of execution of the selected performance (S4014). The variable performance start command includes information indicating the selected variable performance pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the selected pattern. By receiving the variable performance start command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected variable performance pattern. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data to represent the selected variable performance pattern from the CGROM 315 and the SNDROM 316, and displays the variable performance using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156.

Although not described in detail, in the selection process of the variation presentation pattern of the pattern variation in S4013, the variation presentation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. The variation presentation pattern of the decorative pattern, the background presentation, the notice presentation, etc. are determined based on the variation presentation pattern determined here. The variation presentation of the decorative pattern is a presentation display performed on the image display unit 114 in conjunction with the variation presentation of the special pattern performed on the first special pattern display device 221 or the second special pattern display device 222. In this variation presentation of the decorative pattern, a reach presentation, etc. is executed. Unlike this embodiment, when multiple variation presentation patterns are set for the variation pattern, the variation presentation pattern may be selected by lottery using a presentation random number (one of the random numbers updated in S3803 of FIG. 38(a), and the presentation random number value is obtained when the variation start command is received).

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big win effect selection process (S3909) of FIG.
In this big win effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received opening command (including information on the type of big win symbol) (S4101), and selects an effect pattern (big win effect pattern) (S4102). Then, the effect control unit 300 reads image data and sound data used for the effect by the selected big win effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the big win effect start command that instructs the selected effect together with these data in the RAM 303, and ends the big win effect selection process (S4103). This determines the effect during the big win. In addition, in the selection of the big win effect pattern (S4102), a judgment may be made based on a random number value obtained when the command is received.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process (S3911) of FIG.
In this ending performance selection process, the performance control unit 300 first analyzes the received ending command (including information on the type of big win symbol) (S4201), and selects a performance pattern (ending performance pattern) (S4202). Then, the performance control unit 300 reads image data and sound data used for the performance by the selected ending performance pattern from the ROM 302, sets the ending performance start command that instructs the selected performance together with these data in the RAM 303, and ends the ending performance selection process (S4203). Note that in the selection of the ending performance pattern (S4202), a judgment may be made based on a random number value obtained when the command is received.

FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the contents of the customer waiting command receiving process (S3912) of FIG.
The performance control unit 300 judges whether or not a customer waiting command for switching to a customer waiting state has been received (S4301). If a customer waiting command has been received (Yes in S4301), the performance control unit 300 starts measuring the elapsed time (S4302) and sets the measurement flag in the RAM 303 to ON (S4303). On the other hand, if the received command is not a customer waiting command (No in S4301), the performance control unit 300 judges whether or not the measurement flag stored in the RAM 303 is ON (S4304). If the measurement flag is OFF (No in S4304), the customer waiting command reception process ends.

If the measurement flag is ON (Yes in S4304 or after being set to ON in S4303), the performance control unit 300 then determines whether the measurement time has reached a predetermined time-up time (e.g., 10 seconds) (S4305). If the time has not yet expired (No in S4305), the customer waiting command reception process ends. On the other hand, if the time has expired (Yes in S4305), the performance control unit 300 turns OFF the measurement flag stored in RAM 303 (S4306).

Next, the performance control unit 300 judges whether or not the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a specific time-saving game state (S4307). If it is in the specific time-saving game state (YES in S4307), the performance control unit 300 judges whether or not the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state has not yet started (S4308).
If it is not before the start of the first variable performance (NO in S4308), the performance control unit 300 sets a customer waiting performance command for performing the first customer waiting performance in the RAM 303 and ends the customer waiting command receiving process (S4309).
If the game is not in the specific time-saving game state (NO in S4307) or before the start of the first variable performance in the specific time-saving game state (YES in S4308), the performance control unit 300 sets a customer waiting performance command for performing a second customer waiting performance (demo performance) in the RAM 303 and ends the customer waiting command reception process (S4310). The second customer waiting performance is a performance of a different type from the first customer waiting performance.

When the command reception process is completed in this manner, one of the following commands is set in RAM 303: variable performance start command, variable performance end command, big win performance start command, ending performance start command, or customer waiting performance command.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific time-saving related performance processing (S3812) of FIG. 38(b).
The performance control unit 300 judges whether the current game state of the pachinko game machine 100 is a normal game state (S4401). If it is a normal game state (YES in S4401), the performance control unit 300 judges whether it has been controlled from a specific time-saving game state to a normal game state (S4402). If it has been controlled from a specific time-saving game state to a normal game state (YES in S4402), the performance control unit 300 ends the specific time-saving related performance processing. Also, if it has not been controlled from a specific time-saving game state to a normal game state (NO in S4402), the performance control unit 300 judges whether a variable performance is being executed (S4403). If it is not during a variable performance (NO in S4403), the performance control unit 300 ends the specific time-saving related performance processing.

On the other hand, if the variation performance is in progress (YES in S4403), the performance control unit 300 judges whether or not a RAM clear was performed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 was last restored from a power-off state (S4404). If a RAM clear was not performed (NO in S4404), the performance control unit 300 judges whether or not the number of times the decorative pattern changed after the last restoration is equal to or greater than the first number (S4405). In this embodiment, the first number is 50 times. However, the first number may be any value. If the number of times of change is less than the first number (NO in S4405), the specific time-saving related performance process is terminated. Note that the condition for the performance control unit 300 to judge that the number of times of change is equal to or greater than the first number may be that the first number of times of change has ended, or that the first number of times of change has started.
If the number of changes is equal to or greater than the first number (YES in S4405), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the number of changes of the decorative pattern after the return is equal to or greater than the second number (S4406). The second number is a number of changes greater than the first number. In this embodiment, the second number is, for example, 101 times. However, the second number may be any value as long as it is a number of changes greater than the first number. Note that the performance control unit 300 may determine that the number of changes is equal to or greater than the second number as a condition that the second number of changes has ended or that the second number of changes has started.
If the number of times of change is less than the second number (NO in S4406), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the number of times of change of the decorative pattern after the return is the third number (S4407). In this embodiment, the third number is 100 times. The performance control unit 300 may determine that the number of times of change is the third number as a condition that the third number of changes has ended or that the third number of changes has started.

If the number of times of change is not the third number (NO in S4407), the performance control unit 300 determines by lottery (for example, a ratio of 1/2) whether or not to execute the clear negation performance (S4408). The clear negation performance is a performance indicating that the RAM clear has not been executed. If it is determined that the clear negation performance is not executed (NO in S4408), the specific time-saving related performance processing is terminated.
When it is determined that the clear negation effect is to be executed (YES in S4408), the effect control unit 300 executes the clear negation effect and the remaining number notification effect (S4409). The remaining number notification effect is an effect that notifies the number of variable effects required until the specific time-saving game state is reached.

If the number of changes is the third number (YES in S4407), the performance control unit 300 determines whether or not the clear negation performance has been performed (S4410). If the clear negation performance has not been performed (NO in S4410), the performance control unit 300 executes the clear negation performance and the remaining number of times notification performance (S4411).

On the other hand, if the RAM was cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 100 most recently returned from a power-off state (YES in S4404), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the most recent reset of the number of fluctuations was a reset based on a jackpot (S2105 in FIG. 21) (S4412). If the reset was not based on a jackpot (NO in S4412), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the number of fluctuations after the most recent return from a power-off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is the fourth number or more (S4413). The fourth number is a number of fluctuations greater than the first number. In this embodiment, the fourth number is 100 times. However, the fourth number may be any value as long as it is a number of fluctuations greater than the first number. If the number of fluctuations is less than the fourth number (NO in S4413), the specific time-saving related performance process is terminated. The performance control unit 300 may determine that the number of fluctuations is equal to or greater than the fourth number when the fourth number of fluctuations has ended or when the fourth number of fluctuations has started.

If the number of times of change is the fourth or more (YES in S4413) or if the most recent reset was a reset based on a big win (YES in S4412), the performance control unit 300 judges whether or not the remaining number of times notification performance has been executed (S4414). If the remaining number of times notification performance has not been executed (NO in S4414), the performance control unit 300 executes the remaining number of times notification performance (S4415).
In addition, if S4406 is YES, if S4410 is YES, after S4409 is executed, after S4411 is executed, if S4414 is YES, or after S4415 is executed, the presentation control unit 300 executes a remaining number update presentation (S4416). The remaining number update presentation is a presentation that notifies the user of the updated number of variable presentations required until the specific time-saving game state is reached.

On the other hand, if the normal game state is not reached (NO in S4401), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the specific time-saving game state (S4417). If the current game state is not in the specific time-saving game state (NO in S4417), the specific time-saving related performance process is terminated.
If the specific time-saving game state is in progress (YES in S4417), the performance control unit 300 judges whether or not the first variable performance in the specific time-saving game state has yet to start (S4418). If the first variable performance has yet to start (YES in S4418), the performance control unit 300 judges whether or not there is a hold (S4419). If there is a hold (NO in S4419), the specific time-saving related performance process ends.
If there is no reserved ball (YES in S4419), the performance control unit 300 starts a right hit notification (S4420). More specifically, the performance control unit 300 starts a notification to prompt the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111.

On the other hand, if the first variable effect in the specific time-saving game state has started (NO in S4418), the effect control unit 300 judges whether or not the right hit notification has started (S4421). If the right hit notification has started (NO in S4421), the specific time-saving related effect processing is terminated.
If the right hit notification has not yet started (YES in S4421), the performance control unit 300 starts the right hit notification (S4422). Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 executes a specific time-saving notification performance (S4423). The specific time-saving notification performance is a performance that notifies the pachinko gaming machine 100 that it is in a specific time-saving game state.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect button processing (S3813 in FIG. 38(b)).
In this effect button process, the effect control unit 300 first judges whether or not the player has operated the operation means such as the effect button 161 during a predetermined acceptance period (valid period) (S4501). Here, the operation of the operation means includes the effect button 161 being pressed to turn ON, and the center key or surrounding keys of the effect keys 162 being pressed to turn ON. In addition, if the pachinko game machine 100 is provided with an operation device other than the effect button 161 and the effect keys 162, such as a touch panel, it includes the detection of the operation of that device. The effect control unit 300 receives operation signals from the controllers of these devices and detects that an operation has been performed.
If an operating means such as the effect button 161 is not operated (No in S4501), the effect button processing is terminated.

Also, if an operating means such as the performance button 161 is operated (Yes in S4501), the performance control unit 300 sets a performance button command including information indicating the operation content of the operating means in RAM 303 and ends the performance button processing (S4502).

Then, the performance control unit 300 performs the command sending process (S3814) of FIG. 38(b) and sends the command set in the RAM 303 in the command receiving process and performance button process to the image/audio control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320. Based on the received command, the image/audio control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 then control the image display on the image display unit 114, the sound output, the operation of the movable prop 115, the illumination of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, etc., to execute the set performance.

[Pre-determined performance pattern table]
46 and 47 are diagrams showing examples of pre-determined performance patterns and table settings used in the pre-determined performance pattern selection (S4003) in the pre-determined performance selection process of FIG. 40(a). FIG. 46 shows a pre-determined performance pattern table used when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 in the normal game state. FIG. 47(a) shows a pre-determined performance pattern table used when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 in the first special time-saving game state. FIG. 47(b) shows a pre-determined performance pattern table used when a game ball enters the second start hole 122 in the second special time-saving game state.

The pre-determined presentation pattern table shown in FIG. 46, which is used when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121 in normal gaming mode, has multiple pre-determined presentation patterns set. The pre-determined presentation patterns "JA1" to "JA6", "JB1" to "JB6", and "JR1" to "JR13" set using FIG. 34 above are associated one-to-one with the pre-determined presentation patterns "AA1" to "AA6", "AB1" to "AB6", and "AR1" to "AR13".

In addition, a plurality of pre-determined effect patterns are set in a pre-determined effect pattern table used when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121 in the first special time-saving gaming state shown in Fig. 47(a). The pre-determined effect patterns "AF1" to "AF3" and "AG1" to "AG8" correspond one-to-one to the pre-determined patterns "JF1" to "JF3" and "JG1" to "JG8" set using the above Fig. 36(a).
In addition, a plurality of pre-determined effect patterns are set in a pre-determined effect pattern table used when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 122 in the second special time-saving gaming state as shown in Fig. 47(b). The pre-determined effect patterns "JM1", "JM2", "JN1" to "JN3", and "JO1" to "JO4" set using Fig. 37(b) above are associated one-to-one with the pre-determined effect patterns "AM1", "AM2", "AN1" to "AN3", and "AO1" to "AO4".

Here, the pre-determination effect is an effect that is performed based on the pre-determination process.
In addition, in the illustrated pre-determined effect pattern, a "reserved image" and a "display color" are set. Note that "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding effect will not be executed.

Here, the "reserved image" is an image indicating that the right to judge a big win is reserved. The reserved image will be described in detail later.
The "display color" indicates the display color of the reserved image. In this embodiment, the display color of the reserved image is changed to notify or suggest the player of the expectation of winning the jackpot. In this embodiment, one of "blue", "green", "red", "gold" and "rainbow" is selected as the display color. For example, the display colors of the reserved images may be set in the order of white, blue, green, red, gold and rainbow, with the expectation level increasing with the order. In addition, the variable presentation in which a rainbow-colored reserved image is displayed may be a variable presentation in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. In other words, the expectation level of a rainbow-colored reserved image may be 100%.

The performance control unit 300 determines a pre-determined performance pattern based on the tables shown in Figures 46 and 47. Specifically, the performance control unit 300 selects a pre-determined performance pattern corresponding to the pre-determined pattern set in the pre-determining process (see Figure 33) based on the tables shown in Figures 46 and 47.
For example, in Fig. 46, if the "judgment result" is "miss" and the pre-judgment pattern is "JR6", "AR6" is selected as the pre-judgment performance pattern. In this pre-judgment performance pattern "AR6", a "reserved image" and a "display color" are set. That is, in the pre-judgment performance pattern "AR6", a "reserved image" is displayed and the "display color" becomes "blue".
In addition, in the pre-determination performance pattern, when the ``pending image'' is ``◯'' and the ``display color'' is ``-'', it means that a white pending image is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, there is no pre-determined effect pattern table used when the game ball enters the second start hole 122 in the normal game state, no pre-determined effect pattern table used when the game ball enters the second start hole 122 in the first special time-saving game state, and no pre-determined effect pattern table used when the game ball enters the first start hole 121 in the second special time-saving game state. That is, in this embodiment, no pre-determined effect is performed when the game ball enters the second start hole 122 in the normal game state, when the game ball enters the second start hole 122 in the first special time-saving game state, and when the game ball enters the first start hole 121 in the second special time-saving game state. However, a pre-determined presentation pattern table used when the game ball enters the second start hole 122 in the normal game state, a pre-determined presentation pattern table used when the game ball enters the second start hole 122 in the first special time-saving game state, and a pre-determined presentation pattern table used when the game ball enters the first start hole 121 in the second special time-saving game state may be provided. The presentation control unit 300 may use these pre-determined presentation pattern tables to perform a pre-determined presentation when the game ball enters the second start hole 122 in the normal game state, when the game ball enters the second start hole 122 in the first special time-saving game state, and when the game ball enters the first start hole 121 in the second special time-saving game state.

[Variable performance pattern table]
48 to 51 are diagrams showing examples of the variable presentation patterns and table settings used in the variable presentation pattern selection (S4013) in the presentation selection process of FIG. 40(b). FIG. 48 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state is performed. FIG. 49 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning the second start port 122 in the normal game state is performed. FIG. 50(a) shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning the first start port 121 in the first special time-saving game state is performed. FIG. 50(b) shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning the second start port 122 in the first special time-saving game state is performed. FIG. 51(a) shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning the first start port 121 in the second special time-saving game state is performed. Also, Figure 51 (b) shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is carried out based on a winning entry into the second starting hole 122 in the second special time-saving game state.

A plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state is performed as shown in Fig. 48. Variable presentation patterns "EA1" to "EA6", "EB1" to "EB6", and "ER1" to "ER13" correspond one-to-one to the variable presentation patterns "PA1" to "PA6", "PB1" to "PB6", and "PR1" to "PR13" set using Fig. 26 above.
In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the second start hole 122 in the normal game state is performed as shown in Fig. 49. The variable presentation patterns "EC1", "EC2", "ED1" to "ED3" and "EE1" correspond one-to-one to the variable presentation patterns "PC1", "PC2", "PD1" to "PD3" and "PE1" set using Fig. 27 above.

In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the first special time-saving gaming state shown in Fig. 50(a) is performed. Variable presentation patterns "EF1" to "EF3" and "EG1" to "EG8" are associated one-to-one with the variable presentation patterns "PF1" to "PF3" and "PG1" to "PG8" set using Fig. 28 above.
In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the second starting hole 122 in the first special time-saving gaming state shown in Fig. 50(b) is performed. Variable presentation patterns "EH1", "EH2", "EI1" to "EI3" and "EJ1" are in one-to-one correspondence with the variable presentation patterns "PH1", "PH2", "PI1" to "PI3" and "PJ1" set using Fig. 29 above.

In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the second special time-saving game state shown in Fig. 51(a) is performed. "EK1" to "EK3" and "EL1" are associated one-to-one with the variable patterns "PK1" to "PK3" and "PL1" set using the above Fig. 30(a).
In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the second starting hole 122 in the second special time-saving gaming state shown in Fig. 51(b) is performed. The variable patterns "PM1", "PM2", "PN1" to "PN3", and "PO1" to "PO4" set using Fig. 30(b) above are associated one-to-one with "EM1", "EM2", "EN1" to "EN3", and "EO1" to "EO4".

In addition, the number of variable performance patterns is not limited to the numbers shown in Figures 48 to 51.
For example, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is a jackpot. Also, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first special time-saving game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first special time-saving game state is a jackpot. In this case, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the first special time-saving play state is a jackpot may be smaller than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the first special time-saving play state is a jackpot.
In this case, when the game ball enters the first start hole 121 in the normal game state or the first special time-saving game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, the interest in the game can be increased by various presentations. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the entry into the second start hole 122 in the first special time-saving game state is a miss, the number of variable presentation patterns is small, so it is difficult to increase the interest in the game. Therefore, in the normal game state and the first, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game ball should enter the first start hole 121.

In addition, for example, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a jackpot. Also, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the first special time-saving game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the first special time-saving game state is a miss. In this case, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern drawing based on winning at the second start port 122 in the second special time-saving play state is a miss may be less than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern drawing based on winning at the second start port 122 in the first special time-saving play state is a jackpot.

Also, for example, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a jackpot. Also, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the second start port 122 in the second special time-saving game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the second start port 122 in the second special time-saving game state is a jackpot. In this case, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the second special time-saving play state is a jackpot may be smaller than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the second special time-saving play state is a jackpot.
Also, for example, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a jackpot. Also, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning at the second start port 122 in the second special time-saving game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning at the second start port 122 in the second special time-saving game state is a miss. In this case, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the second special time-saving play state is a jackpot may be smaller than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the second special time-saving play state is a jackpot.

Here, the variable presentation is a presentation for visually announcing the result of the special pattern lottery (i.e., whether or not a jackpot has been won) by displaying decorative symbols in a variable manner and then stopping the display.
In addition, in the illustrated variable performance pattern, "pseudo consecutive number of times", "normal", "SP reach", "SPSP reach", "final display color", "lamp", "effect", "gimmick", "sound", "button", "promotion hint", and "promotion" are set. Note that "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding performance will not be executed.

Here, the "pseudo consecutive number of times" is the number of pseudo consecutive performances (pseudo consecutive). This pseudo consecutive performance is a performance that makes it look as if the decorative pattern is changing multiple times in the display of the special pattern. In the pseudo consecutive performance, the performance control unit 300 changes the decorative pattern before the reach state, temporarily stops the decorative pattern, and then starts the display of the decorative pattern again. In other words, in the pseudo consecutive performance, after the decorative pattern starts to change, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and changed again for a set number of pseudo consecutive times, and then the display of the special pattern is stopped to end the display of the special pattern. Here, the temporary stop is a pseudo stop state in which the pattern appears to be stopped at first glance, but in reality the pattern is slightly swaying. In other words, the temporary stop of the pattern is a state in which the change is treated as continuing in terms of game control. In addition, the fixed stop of the pattern is a state in which the special pattern is fixed as a pattern in the display of the special pattern. In addition, in the pseudo continuous performance, the performance control unit 300 may start the variable display of the decorative symbols again after the reach state is reached. Furthermore, in the pseudo continuous performance, the performance control unit 300 may start the variable display of the decorative symbols again after varying the decorative symbols without temporarily stopping the decorative symbols.
In the illustrated example, the "pseudo consecutive number of times" is set to "-", "1", "2", or "3", i.e., between 0 and 3 times. The pseudo consecutive number of times is set in association with the expectation (reliability) of a jackpot, which is the degree to which a jackpot can be expected. In other words, the higher the pseudo consecutive number of times, the higher the expectation is set.

"Normal" indicates the type of reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "N1", "N2", and "N3" is executed as the reach effect type.
"SP Reach" indicates the type of SP Reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is executed as the type of SP Reach effect. Also, the order of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is set so that the larger the number, the higher the expectation.
"SPSP Reach" indicates the type of SPSP Reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3" is executed as the type of SPSP Reach effect. In addition, the order of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3" is set such that the larger the number, the higher the expectation.

"Final display color" refers to the final display color of the variable image (described later). In this embodiment, the display color of the variable image is changed to notify or suggest to the player the expectation of winning the jackpot. In the illustrated example, one of "blue," "green," "red," "gold," and "rainbow" is selected as the final display color. For example, the display colors of the variable image may be set in the order of white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow, with the expectation increasing the later the order. Furthermore, a variable presentation in which a rainbow-colored variable image is displayed may be a variable presentation in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. In other words, a rainbow-colored variable image may have a 100% expectation.

"Lamp" indicates the type of effect in which various lamps such as the board lamp 116, frame lamp 157, movable role 115, and effect button 161 are illuminated. The illumination colors of the various lamps may be set in the order of blue, yellow, green, purple, red, and rainbow, with the later colors being set in the order, the higher the expectation. Also, a variable effect in which various lamps are illuminated in rainbow colors may be a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In other words, the expectation rate for the rainbow illumination colors may be 100%. In the illustrated example, one of "LU1" to "LU4" is executed as the type of "lamp". Also, the order is set in the order of "LU1", "LU2", "LU3", and "LU4", with the higher numbers being set in the order, the higher the expectation rate.

"Effect" indicates the type of effect presentation. The effect presentation is a presentation in which an effect image is displayed on the image display unit 114, thereby making the player expect a jackpot in the variation of the special symbol. The effect image is an image used to enhance the effect of the presentation image on the player's vision, such as an image of any of a plurality of colors. For example, the colors of the effect images may be set in the order of blue, yellow, green, purple, red, and rainbow, so that the later the order, the higher the expectation. In addition, in the variation presentation in which the rainbow effect image is displayed, the variation presentation may be one in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. That is, the rainbow effect image may have a 100% expectation. In addition, the effect image may be, for example, an image that imitates light. In the illustrated example, one of "EF1" to "EF4" is executed as the type of effect presentation. In addition, the order of "EF1", "EF2", "EF3", and "EF4" is set so that the higher the number, the higher the expectation.
"Gem" indicates the type of gem performance. A gem performance is a performance in which the movable gem 115 moves. In the illustrated example, one of "CH1" to "CH4" is executed as the type of gem performance. Also, the higher the number, the higher the expectation, in the order of "CH1", "CH2", "CH3", and "CH4".
"Sound" indicates the type of sound effect. A sound effect is an effect in which sound is output from the speaker 156. In the illustrated example, one of "SO1" to "SO4" is executed as the type of sound effect. Also, the higher the number, the higher the expectation, in the order of "SO1", "SO2", "SO3", and "SO4".

"Button" indicates the type of button operation effect. A button operation effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 161. The button operation effect may be executed based on the result of a pre-determination process. The button operation effect executed based on the result of a pre-determination may be an effect that makes the player hope for a jackpot in the special pattern variation that started the button operation effect, or may be an effect that makes the player hope for a jackpot in the special pattern variation following the special pattern variation that started the button operation effect. In the illustrated example, one of "BU1", "BU2", and "BU3" is executed as the type of button operation effect. Also, the higher the number, the higher the expectation, in the order of "BU1", "BU2", and "BU3".

The "promotion teasing" refers to a promotion teasing performance. The promotion teasing performance is a performance in which, after a decorative pattern that notifies the player that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern is changed to a decorative pattern that notifies the player that the game state will be more advantageous to the player.
"Promotion" means a promotion effect. The promotion effect is an effect in which a decorative pattern that indicates that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win is temporarily stopped, and then changed to a decorative pattern that indicates that the game state will be more advantageous for the player. In this promotion effect, for example, after "444" is temporarily stopped as a decorative pattern, the decorative pattern "777" is displayed as a stopped pattern.

Now, the performance control unit 300 determines the variable performance pattern based on the tables shown in Figures 48 to 51. Specifically, the performance control unit 300 selects a variable performance pattern corresponding to the variable pattern set in the variable pattern selection process (see Figure 15) based on the tables shown in Figures 48 to 51.
For example, in FIG. 48, when the "jackpot pattern" is the "jackpot pattern C" and the change pattern is "PB1", "EB1" is selected as the change presentation pattern. In this change presentation pattern "EB1", "pseudo consecutive number of times", "promotion teasing" and "promotion" are set to "-". In other words, when "EB1" is selected as the change presentation pattern, the pseudo consecutive presentation, the promotion teasing presentation and the promotion presentation are not executed. In addition, in the change presentation pattern "EB1", "N1" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach", the "final display color" becomes "red", "LU3" is executed as "lamp", "EF3" is executed as "effect", "CH3" is executed as "gimmick", "SO4" is executed as "sound", and "BU1" is executed as "button".
50(b), in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning the second start port 122 in the first special time-saving game state is performed, "-" is set for "pseudo consecutive number of times,""normal,""SPreach,""SPSPreach,""final display color,""lamp,""effect,""gimmick,""sound,""button,""promotionhint," and "promotion," which are associated with the "miss" of the "judgment result." In other words, when a variable presentation is performed in which the judgment result of the special symbol lottery based on winning the second start port 122 in the first special time-saving game state is a miss, none of the pseudo consecutive presentation, reach presentation, SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation, change in the display color of the variable image, effect presentation, gamble presentation, sound presentation, button operation presentation, promotion hint presentation, and promotion presentation is executed.

[Production image]
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing one aspect of the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, the performance image that the performance control unit 300 causes to be displayed on the image display unit 114 will be described.
52, the performance control unit 300 controls the image display unit 114 to display the performance image. In this embodiment, the performance image displayed on the image display unit 114 includes the decorative pattern 41, the reserved number display 53, the small pattern 54, the special pattern 55, and the stage image 701. In addition, the image display unit 114 may display a variable image 51, a pending image 52, a left hit image 702, a light emission image 703, a transition image 704, a SP reach image 705, a SPSP reach image 706, a button operation image 707, a first notification image 708, a jackpot game notification image 709, a second notification image 710, a round image 711, a first right hit image 712, a status notification image 713, a time-saving remaining number of times image 714, a first shutter image 715, a third notification image 716, a second right hit image 717, a setting image 718, a customer waiting demo image 719, a normal remaining number of times image 720, a recovery in progress image 721, a fourth notification image 723, a second shutter image 724, a result notification image 725, and a third right hit image 726.

(Decorative design 41)
As shown in FIG. 52(1), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed on the image display unit 114. When the three patterns constituting the decorative pattern 41 are described individually, the pattern arranged on the left side may be referred to as the "left decorative pattern 41", the pattern arranged in the center as the "middle decorative pattern 41", and the pattern arranged on the right side as the "right decorative pattern 41". When the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 are described together, they may be referred to as the "left and right decorative patterns 41". When the left decorative pattern 41, the middle decorative pattern 41, and the right decorative pattern 41 are described together, they may be referred to as the "three decorative patterns 41". When the three decorative patterns 41 have matching numbers, they may be referred to as the "double number decorative pattern 41". When the three decorative patterns 41 have mismatched numbers, they may be referred to as the "missing number decorative pattern 41".

In this embodiment, the display modes of the decorative pattern 41 include a highly decorative display mode (see FIG. 52(1)) in which character images are displayed in addition to letters such as numbers, and a less decorative display mode (see FIG. 55(6), FIG. 60(20)) in which letters such as numbers are displayed as the main feature. The images of characters and the like provided in the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 are different for each letter of the decorative pattern 41, and it is possible to identify which pattern it is by the images of the characters and the like. Furthermore, the less decorative decorative pattern 41 has a higher proportion of the area occupied by the letters in the decorative pattern 41 compared to the more decorative decorative pattern 41.
Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 is switched according to the change in the game state or the progress of the performance. Details will be described later, but for example, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in the SP reach performance or the time-saving game state, and the decorative pattern 41 with high decorativeness is displayed in other cases. In addition, the display mode and display size of the decorative pattern 41 may be different between the first special time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state.
In addition to characters such as numbers, simple pictures, images such as characters, etc. may be displayed in the low-decorative decorative pattern 41. In other words, the "low-decorative decorative pattern 41" shown in Figure 55 (6) or Figure 60 (20) may be less decorative than the "highly decorative decorative pattern 41" shown in Figure 52 (1) or the like.

In the variable presentation, the presentation control unit 300 displays the three decorative patterns 41 in a variable manner, for example by vertical scrolling (scrolling downwards), and then temporarily stops the left decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "0"), then the right decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "9"), and then the center decorative pattern (for example, the number "2"). After all decorative patterns 41 have been temporarily stopped in this manner, all decorative patterns 41 are finally stopped in accordance with the stopped display of the special patterns. The combination "029" of stopped decorative patterns 41 shown in FIG. 52 (1) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss. The decorative patterns 41 are an example of a presentation pattern.

(Number of reserved calls displayed: 53)
As shown in FIG. 52(1), the image display unit 114 displays the reserved number display 53 based on the information of the memory area corresponding to the reserved ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 4, etc.). This reserved number display 53 is an image showing the reserved number. In addition, the reserved number display 53 includes a first reserved number display 53A showing the reserved number for winning the first start port 121, and a second reserved number display 53B showing the reserved number for winning the second start port 122. In addition, when the first reserved number display 53A and the second reserved number display 53B are described without any particular distinction, they are simply referred to as the reserved number display 53. In the example shown in FIG. 52(1), the first reserved number display 53A and the second reserved number display 53B are displayed in this order from the left to the right in the image display unit 114.

(Small design 54)
As shown in FIG. 52(1), the image display unit 114 displays a small pattern 54 indicating that the special pattern is being displayed (the decorative pattern 41 is being displayed) by the special pattern change control unit 233 (see FIG. 6, etc.) based on winning the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122. The small pattern 54 is controlled by the performance control unit 300 to display a change in accordance with the display of the special pattern and to display a stop in accordance with the display of the special pattern. In addition, the small pattern 54 includes a first small pattern 54A indicating that the special pattern (first special pattern) is being displayed (changing performance) based on winning the first starting port 121, and a second small pattern 54B (see FIG. 61(4)) indicating that the special pattern (second special pattern) is being displayed (changing performance) based on winning the second starting port 122. In addition, when the first small pattern 54A and the second small pattern 54B are described without making any particular distinction between them, they will simply be referred to as small patterns 54.

In the illustrated example, the small patterns 54 are three images corresponding to the decorative patterns 41, and are displayed on the right side of the image display area of the image display unit 114. The small patterns 54 are displayed as images smaller in size than the decorative patterns 41. As described above, the decorative patterns 41 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode or a less decorative display mode, but the small patterns 54 are displayed only in a less decorative display mode that mainly consists of characters. However, the small patterns 54 may be displayed in a display mode in which images such as pictures and characters are displayed in addition to characters. In other words, the small patterns 54 may be less decorative than the highly decorative decorative patterns 41.
When describing the three patterns constituting the small pattern 54 individually, the pattern arranged on the upper side may be referred to as the "upper small pattern 54", the pattern arranged in the center as the "medium small pattern 54", and the pattern arranged on the lower side as the "lower small pattern 54". When describing the upper small pattern 54 and the lower small pattern 54 together, they may be referred to as the "upper and lower small patterns 54". When describing the upper small pattern 54, the medium small pattern 54, and the lower small pattern 54 together, they may be referred to as the "three small patterns 54". When describing the three small patterns 54 with matching numbers, they may be referred to as the "double-digit small pattern 54". When describing the three small patterns 54 with mismatched numbers, they may be referred to as the "missing small pattern 54".

The small pattern 54 is displayed (e.g., scrolled vertically) in a manner that indicates that the special pattern is being displayed in a changing manner in response to winning at the first starting gate 121 or the second starting gate 122. During scrolling, the small pattern 54 displays number images incrementing by one from "1" to "9," and then repeats the display incrementing by one from "1" again. Then, when the special pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the small pattern 54 is displayed in a stopped state. In the illustrated example, the number indicated by the stopped small pattern 54 matches the number indicated by the decorative pattern 41. To explain further, in the example of FIG. 52(1), the number corresponding to "029" of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed as the first small pattern 54A. The small pattern 54 is also an example of a performance pattern.

(Special design 55)
As shown in FIG. 52(1), the image display unit 114 displays a special pattern 55 indicating that the special pattern is changing (changing performance) based on winning the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 by the special pattern change control unit 233. The special pattern 55 includes a first special pattern 55A indicating that the special pattern (first special pattern) is changing (changing performance) based on winning the first start port 121, and a second special pattern 55B indicating that the special pattern (second special pattern) is changing (changing performance) based on winning the second start port 122. Note that when the first special pattern 55A and the second special pattern 55B are described without any particular distinction, they are simply referred to as the special pattern 55. When the special pattern starts to change, the special pattern 55 is displayed in a manner indicating that the special pattern is changing (for example, switching between an image of a circle and an image of an x at high speed). Then, as the special symbol stops, the special symbol 55 is stopped and displayed. At this time, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, an image of a circle is displayed, and if the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, an image of a cross is displayed. The special symbol 55 is displayed on the right side of the image display unit 114, below the reserved number display 53 and the small symbol 54. In addition, the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B are displayed in this order from the left side to the right side of the image display unit 114. The special symbol 55 is also an example of a performance symbol.

(Stage image 701)
As shown in FIG. 52 (1), the image display unit 114 displays a stage image 701 as a background of the decorative pattern 41 and the like. The stage image 701 is, for example, an image (stage, etc.) related to the content (idol, anime character, etc.) that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The stage image 701 may also be a moving image. In the illustrated example, a space-themed moving image is displayed as the stage image 701. The stage image 701 is switched, for example, when a variable performance in one stage is performed a predetermined number of times. The stage image 701 may also be switched, for example, when a specific variable performance (for example, SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance) is performed. Furthermore, the stage image 701 may be switched for each game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. More specifically, the stage image 701 may be displayed in different display modes in the normal game state, the first special time-saving game state, and the second special time-saving game state.

(Variable image 51)
As shown in FIG. 52 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a variable image 51 indicating that the special symbol is being displayed by the special symbol variable control unit 233 (the decorative symbol 41 is being displayed). That is, the variable image 51 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbol during the variable display of the special symbol. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, the variable image 51 is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower side of the display area of the image display unit 114), and the display disappears when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. However, the variable image 51 may be hidden before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (during the variable display of the special symbol). In the illustrated example, the variable image 51 has a spherical shape. Also, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.

The variable image 51 also changes its display mode, such as its display color, to notify or suggest the likelihood of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, it is set so that a color with a higher likelihood of winning is displayed when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, rather than a miss. For example, when the colors of the variable image 51 are set to white, blue, green, red, and rainbow, it may be set so that the later the order, the higher the likelihood of winning. Furthermore, the likelihood of winning a rainbow-colored variable image 51 may be 100%.

(Reserved image 52)
As shown in Fig. 52 (4), the image display unit 114 displays the reserved image 52 based on the information of the memory area corresponding to the currently reserved ball in the RAM 303 (see Fig. 4, etc.). In other words, the reserved image 52 is an image indicating that the right to judge the big win is reserved. In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 52 on the screen is determined based on the result of the pre-judgment process.
The reserved image 52 has a smaller display size than the variable image 51. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 52 has a spherical shape. A reserved pedestal is displayed in the area where the reserved image 52 is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the reserved pedestal of the reserved image are displayed in different modes. In the following, the display mode of the variable image 51, which is white, and the display mode of the reserved image 52, which is white, may be referred to as a normal display mode.

As described above, a maximum of four pending images 52 are generated by winning the first starting port 121. Therefore, a maximum of four pending images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 by winning the first starting port 121. In this embodiment, the multiple pending images 52 generated by winning the first starting port 121 are displayed in the area to the left of the variable image 51, in order from a position closer to the variable image 51 to a position farther away, that is, from the right side to the left side.

Although detailed description is omitted, a maximum of four reserved images are also generated by the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 122. Therefore, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 by the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 122.
In addition, in this embodiment, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are basically configured in the same or similar form. However, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be configured in different forms. In addition, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be displayed in different forms when displayed by winning the first start port 121 and when displayed by winning the second start port 122.

In addition, in the following description, the four pending images 52 displayed at maximum may be referred to as the "first pending image 52," the "second pending image 52," the "third pending image 52," and the "fourth pending image 52," in order of proximity to the variable image 51.

(Left-handed image 702)
52(3), a left-hand hit image 702 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The left-hand hit image 702 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area 111. In the illustrated example, the left-hand hit image 702 is displayed with an arrow mark pointing to the left and the text "left-hand hit."

(Luminescent image 703)
As shown in FIG. 52(4), the image display unit 114 displays a light-emitting image 703. The light-emitting image 703 is an image that imitates light. The light-emitting image 703 may be displayed in any color. The light-emitting image 703 is displayed, for example, in the vicinity of the area in the image display area of the image display unit 114 in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the light-emitting image 703 is displayed around the area in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed. The light-emitting image 703 may also be displayed in the whole or part of the area in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed. The light-emitting image 703 may also be displayed in a layer in front of the layer in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed or in a layer behind the layer in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, among a plurality of layers in the image display unit 114.

(Transition Image 704)
As shown in FIG. 55 (5), the image display unit 114 displays a transition image 704. The transition image 704 is an image displayed when the background of the decorative pattern 41 transitions. In this embodiment, the transition image 704 is displayed when the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance starts, or when the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance ends. The transition image 704 displayed when the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance starts and the transition image 704 displayed when the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance ends may have different display modes. In the illustrated example, the transition image 704 is displayed in the entire display area of the image display unit 114. However, the transition image 704 may be displayed in a part of the display area of the image display unit 114.

(SP reach image 705)
55(6), an SP reach image 705 is displayed on the image display unit 114. This SP reach image 705 is an image indicating that an SP reach effect is being executed. The SP reach image 705 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini-game.

(SPSP reach image 706)
56(7), an SPSP reach image 706 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The SPSP reach image 706 is an image indicating that the SPSP reach performance is being executed. The SPSP reach image 706 is, for example, a moving image in which characters appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 fight.
It has been described that the stage image 701 may be changed when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is performed. That is, the SP reach image 705 or the SPSP reach image 706 may be displayed as the stage image 701.

(Button operation image 707)
As shown in FIG. 56 (8), a button operation image 707 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The button operation image 707 is an image that is displayed when a button operation effect is being executed. By displaying this button operation image 707, the player can recognize that it is time to operate the effect button 161. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates the effect button 161 is displayed as the button operation image 707. In this embodiment, the button operation image 707 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and if the effect button 161 is operated before the predetermined period has elapsed since the button operation image 707 was displayed, a predetermined effect is executed. That is, in the button operation effect, the effective period of the operation of the effect button 161 is determined as the display period of the button operation image 707.

(First notification image 708)
As shown in FIG. 58 (9), the image display unit 114 displays a first notification image 708. The first notification image 708 is an image that suggests or notifies that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. In the illustrated example, a rainbow-colored effect image is displayed as the first notification image 708 in the area overlapping with the movable role object 115 and around the movable role object 115.

(Big win game notification image 709)
As shown in FIG. 59 (16), a jackpot game notification image 709 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The jackpot game notification image 709 is an image that notifies the type of jackpot game or small win game to be executed. In the illustrated example, the text "Bonus!" is displayed as the jackpot game notification image 709. This text suggests or notifies the type of jackpot game or small win game (for example, the total number of rounds). The jackpot game notification image 709 may also suggest or notify the game state after the jackpot game or small win game ends.

(Second notification image 710)
As shown in FIG. 59 (16), the image display unit 114 displays a second notification image 710. The second notification image 710 is an image that suggests or notifies that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win. In the illustrated example, a rainbow-colored effect image is displayed as the second notification image 710 so as to surround the big win game notification image 709.

(Round image 711)
As shown in Fig. 59 (18), a round image 711 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The round image 711 is a moving image of a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The round image 711 is displayed during a round in a big win game. The round image 711 may also be a moving image whose display mode changes as the round progresses.

(First right-hit image 712)
As shown in FIG. 59 (18), a first right hit image 712 is displayed on the image display unit 114. This first right hit image 712 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. In the illustrated example, a mark of an arrow pointing to the right and the text "right hit" are displayed as the first right hit image 712. The first right hit image 712 is displayed, for example, during the execution of a jackpot game or in a time-saving game state.

(Status notification image 713)
60 (19), a status notification image 713 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The status notification image 713 is an image that notifies the gaming status of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In the illustrated example, the status notification image 713 displays the text "First special time-saving start!", which means that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the first special time-saving gaming state.

(Time-saving remaining number image 714)
As shown in Fig. 60 (20), the image display unit 114 displays a time-saving remaining number image 714. The time-saving remaining number image 714 is an image showing the remaining number of times of special symbol selection in the time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the time-saving remaining number image 714 displays the text "100 more", which indicates that the remaining number of times of special symbol selection in the first special time-saving game state is 100.

(First shutter image 715)
As shown in FIG. 61 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a first shutter image 715. The first shutter image 715 is an image displayed when the stage image 701 is switched. In other words, the first shutter image 715 is an image displayed when the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 is switched. In this embodiment, the stage image 701 corresponding to the normal game state is switched to the stage image 701 corresponding to the first special time-saving game state or the stage image 701 corresponding to the second special time-saving game state via the first shutter image 715. That is, the first shutter image 715 can also be regarded as an image that suggests or notifies that the special pattern lottery result is a big win or a small win. In the illustrated example, an image imitating a shutter is displayed as the first shutter image 715. The first shutter image 715 is displayed in the entire display area of the image display unit 114. However, the first shutter image 715 may be displayed in a part of the display area of the image display unit 114 and not in the other part. In addition, the display manner of the first shutter image 715 displayed when the stage image 701 corresponding to the normal game state is switched to the stage image 701 corresponding to the first special time-saving game state and the first shutter image 715 displayed when the stage image 701 corresponding to the normal game state is switched to the stage image 701 corresponding to the second special time-saving game state may be different.

(Third notification image 716)
As shown in FIG. 61 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a third notification image 716. In this embodiment, the third notification image 716 is displayed in the variable performance executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win, while the third notification image 716 is not displayed in the variable performance executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss. Therefore, the third notification image 716 is displayed to notify the player that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win. In addition, in this embodiment, the third notification image 716 is displayed when the first special time-saving game state is reached after the end of the big win game or the small win game. Therefore, the third notification image 716 is displayed to notify the player that the pachinko game machine 100 is in the first special time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the third notification image 716 includes the text "Big chance approaching!" and the text "139 seconds remaining" indicating the remaining time of the variable performance. The remaining time of the variable performance shown in the third notification image 716 is counted down as time passes.

(Second right-hand shot image 717)
As shown in FIG. 61 (6), a second right hit image 717 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second right hit image 717 is an image for encouraging the player to launch the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. In the illustrated example, an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "right hit" are displayed as the second right hit image 717. The second right hit image 717 has a larger display size on the image display unit 114 than the first right hit image 712.

(Settings image 718)
As shown in FIG. 64(2), the image display unit 114 displays a setting image 718. The setting image 718 is an image that accepts settings by the player regarding the effects of the pachinko game machine 100. When the player operates the effect key 162 while the setting image 718 is displayed, the volume of the speaker 156 and the light intensity of various lamps are adjusted. Furthermore, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the setting image 718 is displayed, a menu screen (not shown) for setting the game machine 1 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the setting image 718 shows an image imitating a speaker, an image imitating a lamp, and an image imitating a cross key 19. Furthermore, the setting image 718 shows an image imitating the effect button 161 and the text "display menu with button".

(Waiting for customers demo image 719)
As shown in FIG. 64 (3), the image display unit 114 displays a customer waiting demo image 719. The customer waiting demo image 719 is an image for advertising the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state. The customer waiting demo image 719 is displayed in the entire display area of the image display unit 114. However, the customer waiting demo image 719 may be displayed in a part of the display area of the image display unit 114 and not in the other part. The customer waiting demo image 719 is displayed when the second customer waiting performance (see S4310 in FIG. 43) is being executed. On the other hand, the customer waiting demo image 719 is not displayed when the first customer waiting performance (see S4309 in FIG. 43) is being executed. In addition, the customer waiting demo image 719 may be a moving image. In the illustrated example, a moving image related to the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed as the customer waiting demo image 719.

(Normal remaining number of times image 720)
As shown in FIG. 65(1), the image display unit 114 displays a normal remaining number of times image 720. The normal remaining number of times image 720 is an image showing the remaining number of times of special pattern lottery in the normal game state. In other words, the normal remaining number of times image 720 is an image showing the number of variable effects required to reach the specific time-saving game state. In this embodiment, when the number of variable effects required to reach the specific time-saving game state becomes a predetermined number (for example, 10 times) or less, the normal remaining number of times image 720 is displayed. In addition, the display content of the normal remaining number of times image 720 is updated every time a variable effect is performed. In the illustrated example, the normal remaining number of times image 720 shows the text "0 more", which means that the number of variable effects required to reach the specific time-saving game state is 0 times. Note that the number of variable effects shown in the normal remaining number of times image 720 may include the variable effects being executed, or may be the number excluding the variable effects being executed. In addition, the timing at which the display content of the normal remaining number of times image 720 is updated may be during the execution of the variable effect, or may be after the end of the variable effect.

(Recovery image 721)
As shown in Fig. 68 (3), a recovery image 721 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The recovery image 721 is an image indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is recovering from a power-off state. In this embodiment, after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the recovery image 721 is displayed before the stage image 701 and the decorative pattern 41 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the recovery image 721 displays the text "Recovering".

(Fourth notification image 723)
As shown in FIG. 75 (3), the image display unit 114 displays a fourth notification image 723. In this embodiment, the fourth notification image 723 is displayed in the variable performance executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win, while the fourth notification image 723 is not displayed in the variable performance executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss. Therefore, the fourth notification image 723 is displayed to suggest or notify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win. In addition, in this embodiment, when the second special time-saving game state is entered after the end of the big win game or the small win game, the fourth notification image 723 is displayed. Therefore, the fourth notification image 723 is displayed to suggest or notify that the pachinko game machine 100 will be in the second special time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the fourth notification image 723 shows the text "Extra big chance approaching!" and the text "115 seconds left" indicating the remaining time of the variable performance. The remaining time of the variable performance shown in the fourth notification image 723 is counted down as time passes.

(Second shutter image 724)
As shown in FIG. 78 (4), the image display unit 114 displays a second shutter image 724. The second shutter image 724 is an image displayed when the stage image 701 corresponding to the first special time-saving game state or the stage image 701 corresponding to the second special time-saving game state is switched to the stage image 701 corresponding to the normal game state. In the illustrated example, an image imitating a shutter is displayed as the second shutter image 724. The second shutter image 724 is displayed in the entire display area of the image display unit 114. However, the second shutter image 724 may be displayed in a part of the display area of the image display unit 114 and may not be displayed in the other part. In addition, the display mode may be different between the second shutter image 715 displayed when the stage image 701 corresponding to the first special time-saving game state is switched to the stage image 701 corresponding to the normal game state and the second shutter image 724 displayed when the stage image 701 corresponding to the second special time-saving game state is switched to the stage image 701 corresponding to the normal game state.

(Result notification image 725)
As shown in FIG. 78(4), the image display unit 114 displays a result notification image 725. The result notification image 725 is an image showing the result of a jackpot game. The result notification image 725 is displayed when the second shutter image 724 is displayed in the case where a jackpot game is played. In addition, when multiple jackpot games are played before the second shutter image 724 is displayed, the result notification image 725 shows the cumulative result of the multiple jackpot games. In the illustrated example, the result notification image 725 displays the text "first special time-saving mode" indicating that the first special time-saving game state was active, the text "TOTAL 3 times" indicating that the jackpot game was played three times, and the text "3024 Pt acquired" according to the prize balls in the jackpot game.

(Third right-hit image 726)
As shown in FIG. 88(1), a third right hit image 726 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third right hit image 726 is an image for encouraging the player to launch the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. In the illustrated example, an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "right hit" are displayed as the third right hit image 726. In addition, the third right hit image 726 has a display size larger than the first right hit image 712 and a display size smaller than the second right hit image 717.

(Example of variation 1)
Next, referring to Fig. 52 and Fig. 53, a variable performance (variable performance example 1) performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like will be specifically described. The variable performance example 1 is an example of a variable performance based on winning at the first start port 121 in a normal game state. In the variable performance example 1, a variable performance based on winning at the second start port 122 is started during the execution of a variable performance based on winning at the first start port 121.
In addition, the variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the variable performance example 1 is a variable performance executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 48. Also, the variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the variable performance example 1 is a variable performance executed when "EE1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 49.
In addition, each of the variation presentation examples described below is assumed to be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 100 having the configuration shown in Fig. 23. However, each of the variation presentation examples may be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 100 having the configuration shown in Fig. 1.

As shown in FIG. 52 (1), the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 as the previous first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300. At this time, the decorative symbol 41, the reserved number display 53, the small symbol 54, the special symbol 55, and the stage image 701 are displayed in the image display unit 114. The stage image 701 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the normal game state (first stage). At this time, the first reserved number display 53A and the second reserved number display 53B both display "0". At this time, the first small symbol 54A is displayed, while the second small symbol 54B is not displayed. At this time, the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B both display "X".

When the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 52 (2), the decorative pattern 41, the first small pattern 54A, and the first special pattern 55A start to change with the start of the change display of the first special pattern. In this embodiment, the left decorative pattern 41, the middle decorative pattern 41, the right decorative pattern 41, and the small pattern 54 display the numbers "1" to "9" in order, respectively, to change the display. That is, in this embodiment, the left decorative pattern 41, the middle decorative pattern 41, the right decorative pattern 41, and the small pattern 54 can change the numbers individually. Note that the left decorative pattern 41, the middle decorative pattern 41, the right decorative pattern 41, and the small pattern 54 may display characters other than numbers, such as English letters. In addition, in this embodiment, during the execution of the change performance, a performance sound corresponding to the change performance being executed is output from the speaker 156. Also, although not shown, in this embodiment, while a variable performance is being performed, the frame lamp 157, board lamp 116, movable role piece 115, and performance button 161 emit light in a lighting pattern that corresponds to the variable performance being performed.

In addition, when the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 54 are displayed (scrolled) at a particularly high speed in the drawing and are difficult to see, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 54 are displayed with arrows (↓) to make it easier to understand. In addition, when the special pattern 55 is displayed at a high speed in the drawing, the special pattern 55 is displayed with a triangular symbol (△) to make it easier to understand. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (2), the decorative pattern 41 is arranged in a left-right direction with the left decorative pattern 41, the middle decorative pattern 41, and the right decorative pattern 41, and moves (scrolls) in the up-down direction when it is displayed, but is not limited to this aspect. For example, the decorative pattern 41 may be arranged in a left-right direction with the left decorative pattern 41, the middle decorative pattern 41, and the right decorative pattern 41, and each of them may move (scroll) in the left-right direction.
Furthermore, the state in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by an arrow (↓) in the drawing is not limited to a state in which the decorative pattern 41 is difficult to see. For example, the state in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by an arrow (↓) in the drawing may be a state in which the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. In other words, the state in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by an arrow (↓) in the drawing may be a state in which the decorative pattern 41 is invisible or difficult to see.

Also, as shown in FIG. 52 (1), when a game ball enters the first start port 121 in a state where there is no reservation for the winning of the first start port 121 and the first special pattern is not changing, a reservation for the winning of the first start port 121 is first generated. Then, in this state, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table (see FIG. 26). Therefore, the "reservation number" when the variation pattern is selected is "1". Then, when a variation pattern is selected, the reservation number for the winning of the first start port 121 is subtracted. Also, although not shown, when there is no reservation for the winning of the second start port 122 and the second special pattern is not changing, when a game ball enters the second start port 122, a reservation for the winning of the second start port 122 is first generated. Then, in this state, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table. Therefore, the "reservation number" when the variation pattern is selected is "1". Then, when a variation pattern is selected, the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122 is subtracted.

Also, as shown in Fig. 52 (1), when there is no reservation for the winning of the first start hole 121 and the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, if a game ball enters the first start hole 121, "1" is displayed in the first reservation number display 53A and the reservation image 52 is displayed. Then, as shown in Fig. 52 (2), "0" is displayed in the first reservation number display 53A. Also, the reservation image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.
In addition, when a game ball enters the second start hole 122 in a state where there is no reservation for the winning of the second start hole 122 and the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, "1" is displayed in the second reservation number display 53B and the reservation image 52 is displayed. Then, "0" is displayed in the second reservation number display 53B. In addition, the reservation image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.

Next, when the player shoots the game ball to the right side of the play area 111, and the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, a left hit image 702 is displayed as shown in FIG. 52 (3). At this time, a sound is output from the speaker 156 to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the play area 111. Examples of this sound include a voice saying "Please hit to the left" and a warning sound. At this time, the display of the second special pattern begins to change. Then, as the display of the second special pattern begins to change, the display of the second special pattern 55B begins to change. Meanwhile, the second small pattern 54B is not displayed. Also, the display of the decorative pattern 41 does not change in association with the display of the second special pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(4), the left decorative pattern 41 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it was fixedly stopped until the start of the change. More specifically, the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops. At this time, the light-emitting image 703 corresponding to the left decorative pattern 41 is displayed. At this time, the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, and the reserved image 52 is displayed. At this time, the first reserved number display 53A is updated to "1".
In addition, when showing that the decorative pattern 41 or small pattern 54 is temporarily stopped in the drawing, in order to make it easier to understand, a display similar to a double quotation mark is used around the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41 or small pattern 54.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (5), the right decorative pattern 41 scrolls at a slow speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it had been fixed until the change started. More specifically, the number "1" which is the right decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops. At this time, an illuminated image 703 corresponding to the right decorative pattern 41 is displayed. At this time, three game balls enter the first starting hole 121, and three new reserved images 52 are displayed. At this time, the first reserved number display 53A is updated to "4".

Next, as shown in Fig. 52 (6), the middle decorative pattern 41 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it was fixed until the start of the change. More specifically, the number "2" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops. At this time, the light-emitting image 703 corresponding to the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed.
Then, after the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 53 (7) with the stop display of the special symbol. The combination "421" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a miss. The three first small symbols 54A are also fixed and stopped. In other words, in this variable performance, all the first small symbols 54A are fixed and stopped without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the combination "421" of the first small symbols 54A matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. Also, "x" is displayed on the first special symbol 55A. Meanwhile, the second special symbol 55B continues to display the variable. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the second special symbol 55B when displaying the decorative symbol 41, the first small symbol 54A, and the first special symbol 55A in the normal game state. Here, the normal game state is regarded as the first mode. Also, the decorative symbol 41, the first small symbol 54A, and the first special symbol 55A are all regarded as the first performance symbol. Also, the second special symbol 55B is regarded as the second performance symbol.
In this case, in the first mode, the player can recognize each of the first performance pattern corresponding to the first special pattern and the second performance pattern corresponding to the second special pattern, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the second special symbol 55B when displaying the decorative symbol 41, the first small symbol 54A, and the first special symbol 55A in the normal game state. Here, the normal game state is regarded as the first mode. Also, one of the decorative symbol 41, the first small symbol 54A, and the first special symbol 55A is regarded as the first performance symbol. Also, the other one of the decorative symbol 41, the first small symbol 54A, and the first special symbol 55A is regarded as the second performance symbol. Furthermore, the second special symbol 55B is regarded as the third performance symbol.
In this case, while allowing the player to recognize each of the performance patterns corresponding to the first special pattern and the second special pattern in the first mode, the player can be made to pay more attention to the variable performance related to the first special pattern that is being mainly performed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can variably display the second special symbol 55B when the decorative symbol 41, the first small symbol 54A, and the first special symbol 55A are variably displayed in the normal game state. Here, the normal game state is regarded as the first mode. Also, the decorative symbol 41, the first small symbol 54A, and the first special symbol 55A are all regarded as the first performance symbol. Also, the second special symbol 55B is regarded as the second performance symbol.
In this case, the player can be made aware that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating simultaneously in the first mode, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, even if the electric tulip 123 is not operating, when a game ball is launched to the right side of the game area 111, the game ball may enter the second starting hole 122 (see FIG. 23). The execution time of the change (changing performance) executed in this case is "600.00 seconds" (see FIG. 27), which is longer than the execution time of the change (changing performance) based on the winning of the first starting hole 121, so that an inefficient changing performance is executed. Therefore, the player is restrained from launching the game ball to the right side of the game area 111 in the normal game state.
In addition, in this embodiment, in a variable presentation based on a winning entry into the second starting hole 122 in the normal game state, and in a variable presentation based on the result of the special pattern lottery being a miss, no presentation other than the second special pattern 55B is displayed on the image display unit 114.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second start hole 122 during the normal game state, the second reserved number display 53B is updated to "1" as described above. That is, when a game ball enters the second start hole 122 during the normal game state, the performance display according to the pre-determination result command (for example, display of the reserved image 52 or change of the reserved image 52, etc.) is limited, but the performance display according to the reserved number increase command (update of the second reserved number display 53B) is executed, while when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 during the normal game state, the performance display according to the pre-determination result command (for example, display of the reserved image 52 or change of the reserved image 52, etc.) and the performance display according to the reserved number increase command (update of the first reserved number display 53A) are executed. In this case, the performance can be made different depending on whether the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 is entered during the normal game state, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122 in the normal game state, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed.

Although not described below, as described above, in this embodiment, when a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, an illuminated image 703 corresponding to the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41 is displayed.

(Example of variation 2)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 2) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 54. Variable performance example 2 is an example of a variable performance based on winning at the first start port 121 in a normal game state. The variable performance based on winning at the first start port 121 in variable performance example 2 is a variable performance executed when "ER5" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 48. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above variable performance example 1 will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as variable performance example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 54 (1), as the previous first special symbol is stopped, the performance control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A in the image display unit 114. Also, while an "X" is displayed in the first special symbol 55A, the second special symbol 55B continues to change. Also, at this time, the reserved image 52 is displayed. Also, at this time, a "1" is displayed in the first reserved number display 53A, and a "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display 53B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(2), as the next first special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41, the first small symbol 54A, and the first special symbol 55A start to change. Also, the first reserved number display 53A is updated to "0". Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.
Next, as shown in FIG. 54(3), the left decorative symbol 41, "4", is temporarily stopped. At this time, as the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, "x" is displayed on the second special symbol 55B. On the other hand, the second small symbol 54B is not displayed.
54(4), the right decorative symbol 41 "4" is temporarily stopped, and the reach effect starts. At this time, light-emitting images 703 corresponding to the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed, respectively.

54(5), the central decorative symbol 41, "5", is temporarily stopped. At this time, a light-emitting image 703 corresponding to the central decorative symbol 41 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 54(6), the three decorative patterns 41, "454", are fixed and stopped with the stop display of the first special pattern. Also, the first small pattern 54A, "454", is fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, "x" is displayed on the first special pattern 55A. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Although not explained below, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, when the highly decorative left and right decorative patterns 41 temporarily stop to start a reach performance, light-emitting images 703 corresponding to the temporarily stopped left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed (see FIG. 54 (4)).

(Example of variation 3)
55 and 56 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 3) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 55 and 56. Variable performance example 3 is an example of a variable performance based on winning at the first start hole 121 in a normal game state. The variable performance based on winning at the first start hole 121 in variable performance example 3 is a variable performance executed when "ER10" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 48. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variable performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 55 (1), as the previous first special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A are fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 by the performance control unit 300. At this time, an "X" is displayed in the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. At this time, a "2" is displayed in the first reserved number display 53A, and a "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display 53B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(2), as the next first special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41, the first small symbol 54A, and the first special symbol 55A start to change. The first reserved number display 53A is updated to "1". The second reserved image 52 moves closer to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the change performance of the variable image 51 is executed.
The change effect is an effect that changes the display mode of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52. More specifically, the change effect is an effect that changes the display color, pattern, shape, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "display color, etc.") of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52. In the illustrated example, the change effect causes the green variable image 51 to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(3), the left decorative pattern 41 "4" temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 55(4), the right decorative pattern 41 "4" temporarily stops, and the reach performance starts.
Next, as shown in FIG. 55(5), the transition image 704 is displayed. With the display of the transition image 704, the stage image 701 and the decorative pattern 41 are hidden. However, the decorative pattern 41 may be difficult or impossible to see by the player by displaying the decorative pattern 41 in a layer behind the layer in which the transition image 704 is displayed in the image display unit 114. That is, the decorative pattern 41 may be difficult or impossible to see by the player when the transition image 704 is displayed. Also, the decorative pattern 41 may be visible to the player even when the transition image 704 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (6), with the start of the SP reach performance, an SP reach image 705 is displayed. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a less decorative display mode, with a smaller display size than before the transition image 704 was displayed (see FIG. 55 (4)). In the example shown, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed on the upper side of the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(7), with the start of the SPSP reach effect, an SPSP reach image 706 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 56(8), a button operation presentation is executed and a button operation image 707 is displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 707 is displayed, the center decorative symbol 41 "5" is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 56 (9). This center decorative symbol 41 has a larger display size than the left and right decorative symbols 41. At this time, the light-emitting image 703 corresponding to the center decorative symbol 41 is not displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 56 (10), a transition image 704 is displayed. At this time, the three decorative patterns 41 are invisible or difficult to see.

Next, as shown in Fig. 56 (11), the three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode. At this time, the luminous image 703 corresponding to the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. At this time, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, and the stage image 701 are displayed again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (12), the three decorative symbols 41 and the first small symbol 54A, "454", are fixed and stopped with the stop display of the first special symbol. At this time, "x" is displayed on the first special symbol 55A. At this time, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

In this embodiment, it has been described that neither the variable image 51 nor the reserved image 52 is displayed during the execution of the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance, but this is not limited to this.
During the execution of the SP reach performance, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be displayed. Also, during the execution of the SP reach performance, the reserved image 52 may not be displayed, but the variable image 51 may be displayed. Also, during the execution of the SPSP reach performance, the reserved image 52 may not be displayed, but the variable image 51 may be displayed.

(Example of variation 4)
57 to 60 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable presentation example 4) of the variable presentation will be described with reference to Figures 57 to 60. Variable presentation example 4 is an example of a variable presentation based on winning at the first start hole 121 in a normal game state. The variable presentation based on winning at the first start hole 121 in variable presentation example 4 is a variable presentation executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variable presentation pattern" in Figure 48. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variable presentation examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable presentation examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 57(1), when the previous first special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A are fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 by the performance control unit 300. At this time, the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B are displayed with "x". At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. The first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue. At this time, the first reserved number display 53A displays "2" and the second reserved number display 53B displays "0".
The first reserved image 52 may be displayed in blue from the start of display, or may be displayed in blue as a result of a change in the reserved image 52 that was displayed in the normal display mode. In other words, the reserved image 52 may have undergone either of the effects as long as it is displayed in blue as a result of a pre-determination effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (2), as the next first special pattern starts to change, the decorative pattern 41, the first small pattern 54A, and the first special pattern 55A start to change. The first reserved number display 53A is updated to "1". The second reserved image 52 moves closer to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the change performance of the variable image 51 is executed, and the variable image 51 is displayed in red.

Next, as shown in Fig. 57 (3), the left decorative symbol 41 "4" is temporarily stopped. At this time, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, the variable display of the second special symbol starts, and the variable display of the second special symbol 55B starts. At this time, the left hit image 702 is displayed, and a sound is output from the speaker 156 to prompt the player to launch the game ball to the left side of the game area 111.
Next, as shown in FIG. 57(4), the right decorative pattern 41 "4" temporarily stops, and the reach performance starts.

57(5), a transition image 704 is displayed. With the display of the transition image 704, the stage image 701 and the decorative pattern 41 are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 57(6), the SP reach image 705 is displayed with the start of the SP reach performance. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a reduced size in a display mode with low decorativeness. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (7), the SPSP reach image 706 is displayed with the start of the SPSP reach performance. Also, at this time, the first reserved number display 53A is updated to "2" with the winning of the game ball in the first starting hole 121. Meanwhile, the reserved image 52 is not displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 58(8), a button operation presentation is executed and a button operation image 707 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the performance button 161 while the button operation image 707 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 58 (9), the role performance is executed, and the movable role 115 moves so as to overlap with the image display unit 114. At this time, the performance button 161 vibrates. At this time, a sound performance is executed, and a first performance sound that suggests or notifies that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a big win or a small win is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the first notification image 708 is displayed. At this time, the frame lamp 157 (not shown), the board lamp 116 (not shown), the movable role 115, and the performance button 161 all emit light in rainbow colors. In the following, when the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable role 115, and the performance button 161 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "each lamp."
In addition, the role effect in which the movable role object 115 moves so as to overlap with the image display unit 114 as shown in Fig. 58 (9) can also be regarded as an effect that suggests or notifies that the special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win. Also, the effect in which the effect button 161 vibrates as shown in Fig. 58 (9) can also be regarded as an effect that suggests or notifies that the special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (10), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is temporarily stopped. At this time, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a larger display size than when the variable performance starts or during the execution of the SP reach performance. Also, at this time, light-emitting images 703 corresponding to each of the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed. Also, the first small pattern 54A and the first special pattern 55A continue to display the variable display.
Next, as shown in Fig. 58 (11), a transition image 704 is displayed. With the display of the transition image 704, the decorative pattern 41 is no longer displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (12), the decorative pattern 41 of the double number is displayed in a highly decorative display mode. At this time, the luminous image 703 corresponding to each of the three decorative patterns 41 is displayed. At this time, the stage image 701 is displayed again. Meanwhile, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed.
In addition, after the transition image 704 is displayed, when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a highly decorative display mode, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be displayed. After the transition image 704 is displayed, when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a highly decorative display mode, the reserved image 52 may not be displayed, but the variable image 51 may be displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 59 (13), a promotion prompting effect is executed. In the promotion prompting effect, a button operation effect is executed. In the illustrated example, a button operation image 707 is displayed by the button operation effect.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 707 is displayed, the provisional stop of the decorative symbol 41 of "444" is maintained as shown in Fig. 59 (14). In other words, as a result of the execution of the promotion teasing effect, the promotion effect is not executed.

Then, as the first special symbol stops, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 59 (15). The number combination "444" of the decorative symbol 41 is an example of a combination when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win. In addition, the first small symbol 54, "444", is fixed and stopped. At this time, the first special symbol 55A is displayed as a "circle". Meanwhile, the second special symbol 55B continues to display in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (16), a big win game notification image 709 and a second notification image 710 are displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 41, the first small pattern 54A, the first reserved number display 53A, and the second reserved number display 53B are not displayed. Meanwhile, the first special pattern 55A and the second special pattern 55B remain displayed. At this time, each lamp emits a rainbow color light, and a second sound effect is output from the speaker 156, suggesting or notifying that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win or a small win. This second sound effect is a different sound from the first sound effect that was output when the special device performance was being executed (see FIG. 58 (9)). However, the second sound effect may be the same sound as the first sound effect.

At this time, the second special symbol is displayed as a stop. That is, when the variable performance (variable performance related to the first special symbol) that was executed due to the special symbol lottery result being a big win is finished, the variable display of the second special symbol ends regardless of whether the variable time of the second special symbol set in the variable pattern has elapsed (even if the variable time has not elapsed). Also, when the second special symbol is displayed as a stop, the second special symbol 55B is displayed as an "x".
In addition, when the executed variation performance ends because the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, if the variation time of the second special symbol set in the variation pattern has not elapsed, the variation display of the second special symbol may continue, while the second special symbol 55B may be displayed as "x". Then, when the variation time set in the variation pattern has elapsed, the second special symbol may be displayed stationary.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (17), the first special pattern 55A and the second special pattern 55B are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (18), with the start of a big win game, a round image 711 and a first right hit image 712 are displayed.

Next, when the jackpot game ends, a status notification image 713 is displayed as shown in FIG. 60 (19). In the illustrated example, the text "First special time-saving game begins!" is displayed, which suggests or notifies the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the first special time-saving game state, which is the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In other words, when the jackpot game ends, the pachinko gaming machine 100 goes from the normal game state to the first special time-saving game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (20), in the first special time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, "444", is fixed and stopped. Also, the first small pattern 54A is fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the first special pattern 55A displays "◯", and the second special pattern 55B displays "X". Also, the first reserved number display 53A displays "2", and the second reserved number display 53B displays "0". Also, at this time, a stage image 701 corresponding to the first special time-saving game state is displayed. Also, at this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, the time-saving remaining number image 714 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the time-saving remaining number image 714 displays the text "100 more", which indicates that the number of remaining times of the special pattern lottery in the first special time-saving game state is 100.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the reserved image 52 is not displayed even if the game ball enters the first start port 121 when the SPSP reach performance is being executed in the normal game state. Here, the reserved image 52 may not be displayed even if the first start port 121 is entered when the SP reach performance is being executed in the normal game state. Also, in the normal game state, the reserved image 52 is displayed when the first start port 121 is entered when the SP reach performance is being executed, while the reserved image 52 may not be displayed when the game ball enters the first start port 121 when the SPSP reach performance is being executed. Also, even if the second start port 122 is entered when the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is being executed in the normal game state, the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 may not be displayed.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may output a winning sound to notify the winning to the speaker 156 when the game ball wins the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 in the normal game state. In addition, when the game ball wins the first start hole 121 when the SP reach performance is being executed in the normal game state, the winning sound may be output (at this time, the reserved image 52 may be displayed, or the reserved image 52 may not be displayed). On the other hand, when the game ball wins the first start hole 121 when the SPSP reach performance is being executed in the normal game state, the winning sound may not be output. In addition, even if the game ball wins the first start hole 121 when the SP reach performance is being executed in the normal game state, the winning sound may not be output. In addition, when the game ball wins the second start hole 122 when the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is being executed in the normal game state, the winning sound may not be output. Also, in the normal game state, when a winning is made in the second starting port 122, the winning sound may not be output in any case (before the reach performance, during the reach performance, when the fluctuation is stopped, etc.).

In addition, in the variation performance example 4, it was explained that the promotion performance is not executed as a result of the promotion teasing performance being executed, but if the promotion performance is executed, a role device performance or vibration of the performance button 161, etc. may be performed after the promotion teasing performance is executed.

Also, as in the variation performance example 4, when a pre-determination performance such as the display of the blue reserved image 52 is being executed, a game ball may enter the second start hole 122 and a variation performance related to the second special symbol may be started. In this case, the pre-determination performance that was being executed may be ended (for example, the blue reserved image 52 may be switched to a normal display mode). In this case, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not knowing which variation the pre-determination performance is targeting, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, when the variable performance related to the second special pattern has ended, the pre-determination performance that has ended may be performed again, or the pre-determination performance that has ended may be restricted from being performed again.
In addition, when the variable display of the second special pattern is started during the execution of the pre-determination performance that was started based on a winning entry into the first starting port 121, rather than terminating the pre-determination performance abruptly, the pre-determination performance may be terminated abruptly at the point where a winning entry into the second starting port 122 occurs, or the pre-determination performance may be terminated abruptly at the point where the variable display of the first special pattern that was being executed at the time of the winning entry into the second starting port 122 has elapsed and the first special pattern has stopped being displayed, or the pre-determination performance may be terminated when the stop time of the first special pattern has elapsed.

In addition, in the variable presentation example 4, when a time-saving game state is generated, a right-hit notification may be given before the time-saving game state is generated, for example, by displaying the second right-hit image 717 described below during a jackpot game or while the state notification image 713 is being displayed. In this case, it is possible to notify the player that a time-saving game state is occurring, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage by hitting left when the time-saving game state is generated, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the game machine is in a customer waiting state at the start of the first special time-saving game state transitioned from the jackpot game, the background music corresponding to the presentation mode of the first special time-saving game state may be muted without being audibly output. In this case, when the game ball enters the first start hole 121 from the customer waiting state to start the variable presentation, the background music corresponding to the presentation mode of the first special time-saving game state may be audibly output.

(Example of variation 5)
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 5) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 61. Variable performance example 5 is an example of a variable performance based on winning at the second starting hole 122 in the normal game state. The variable performance in variable performance example 5 is executed when "EC1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 49. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variable performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 61 (1), as the previous first special symbol is stopped, the performance control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A in the image display unit 114. At this time, an "X" is displayed in the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B. At this time, a "0" is displayed in the first reserved number display 53A and the second reserved number display 53B.

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, the display of the second special symbol starts to change, and accordingly, as shown in FIG. 61 (2), the display of the second special symbol 55B starts to change. At this time, the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the third notification image 716 displays the text "139 seconds remaining," which indicates the remaining time of the change performance. Thereafter, as time passes, the time displayed in the third notification image 716 is updated. Note that the decorative symbol 41 is hidden as the first shutter image 715 is displayed. However, the decorative symbol 41 may be invisible or difficult to see by displaying the decorative symbol 41 in a layer behind the first shutter image 715 in the image display unit 114.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the display of the first special symbol begins to change, and accordingly, as shown in FIG. 61 (3), the display of the first small symbol 54A and the first special symbol 55A begins to change. Meanwhile, the decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. Also, the display content of the third notification image 716 is updated to "1 second left."

Next, when the second special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 61 (4), the second small symbol 54B "555" is displayed in a fixed stopped state, and the second special symbol 55B is displayed with "◯". At this time, the display content of the third notification image 716 is updated to "0 seconds remaining". Meanwhile, the variable display of the first small symbol 54A and the first special symbol 55A continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 61(5), the second small symbol 54B is not displayed. Meanwhile, the second special symbol 55B is displayed as "◯". In addition, the first small symbol 54A and the first special symbol 55A are displayed in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (6), the second right-hit image 717 is displayed. At this time, the first special symbol is stopped. That is, when the variable performance (variable performance related to the second special symbol) executed due to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery being a big win is ended, the variable display of the first special symbol ends regardless of whether the variable time of the first special symbol set in the variable pattern has elapsed (even if the variable time has not elapsed). In addition, with the stop display of the first special symbol, the first small symbol 54A, "421", is fixed and stopped, and the first special symbol 55A is displayed as "x".
In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win and the executed variable performance ends, if the variable time of the first special symbol set in the variable pattern has not elapsed, the variable display of the first special symbol continues, while the first small symbol 54A is stopped as a miss and the first special symbol 55A may be displayed as an "x". Then, when the variable time set in the variable pattern has elapsed, the first special symbol may be stopped and displayed.

Then, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the same effect as that shown in FIG. 59 (17) is executed. That is, the big win game notification image 709 and the second notification image 710 are displayed. At this time, the first small symbol 54A, the first reserved number display 53A, the second reserved number display 53B, the first special symbol 55A, and the second special symbol 55B are not displayed. At this time, each lamp emits a rainbow light, and the second effect sound that notifies the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win is output from the speaker 156. On the other hand, the role-playing effect and the vibration of the effect button 161 are not performed.
After that, the same effects as those explained using Figures 59 (18), 60 (19) and (20) are executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61 (1) and (2), the first small pattern 54A and the first special pattern 55A stopped and displayed with the first special pattern are not hidden. The first small pattern 54A and the first special pattern 55A are not hidden even when the next variable display of the second special pattern is started, and are not hidden even when the next variable display of the first special pattern is started. The first small pattern 54A and the first special pattern 55A stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss are not hidden even if multiple special pattern variations are executed thereafter, and are not hidden regardless of the variation performance associated with multiple special pattern variations (even if the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is executed). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 61 (4) and (5), the second small pattern 54B stopped and displayed with the second special pattern is not hidden. That is, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can not hide the first small symbol 54A and the first special symbol 55A that are stopped in the normal game state, and can hide the second small symbol 54B that is stopped in the normal game state. Here, the normal game state is regarded as the first mode. Also, both the first small symbol 54A and the first special symbol 55A are regarded as the first performance symbol. Also, the second small symbol 54B is regarded as the second performance symbol.
In this case, while allowing the player to recognize each of the first presentation pattern corresponding to the first special pattern and the second presentation pattern corresponding to the second special pattern in the first mode, the player can be made to focus more on the first presentation pattern related to the main variable presentation, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58(9) and FIG. 84(8) described later, it is possible to execute a specific effect such as illumination of each lamp in rainbow colors, which is a specific effect that suggests or notifies that the first special symbol lottery result or the second special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win. In the normal game state, the effect control unit 300 can execute a specific effect in the variable effect related to the first special symbol (see FIG. 58(9)), and can restrict the execution of the specific effect in the variable effect related to the second special symbol (see FIG. 61(4)). Here, the fact that the first special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win is considered to mean that the first game condition has been established. In addition, the fact that the second special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win is considered to mean that the second game condition has been established. In addition, the normal game state is considered to be a specific mode. In addition, the variable effect related to the first special symbol is considered to be a first variable effect. In addition, the variable effect related to the second special symbol is considered to be a second variable effect.
In this case, in the specific mode, the first variable presentation can be made more prominent than the second variable presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58 (9) and FIG. 84 (8) described later, it is possible to execute a specific performance in which the performance body is in a specific state suggesting that the first game condition or the second game condition has been established. Here, examples of the performance body include the movable role object 115 and the performance button 161. Examples of the specific state include the movement of the movable role object 115 downward, the vibration of the performance button 161, and the illumination of the movable role object 115 or the performance button 161 in rainbow colors. In addition, in the specific mode, the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance in the first variable performance (see FIG. 58 (9)), and can restrict the execution of the specific performance in the second variable performance (see FIG. 61 (4)).
In this case, in the specific mode, the first variable presentation can be made more prominent than the second variable presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58(9) and FIG. 84(8) described later, a specific effect can be executed in which a specific sound is output from the speaker 156 to suggest or notify that the first game condition or the second game condition has been established. Here, an example of the specific sound is the first sound effect. In the specific mode, the effect control unit 300 can execute the specific effect in the first variable effect (see FIG. 58(9)), and can restrict the execution of the specific effect in the second variable effect (see FIG. 61(4)).
In this case, in the specific mode, the first variable presentation can be made more prominent than the second variable presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58(9) and FIG. 84(8) described later, a specific effect can be executed to display a specific image that suggests or notifies that the first game condition or the second game condition has been established. Here, the specific image can be the first notification image 708. Then, in the specific mode, the effect control unit 300 can execute a specific effect in the first variable effect and display the decorative pattern 41, the first small pattern 54A, and the first special pattern 55A in a manner that suggests the establishment of the first game condition (see FIG. 58(9) and FIG. 59(15)), and in the second variable effect, the execution of the specific effect can be restricted and the second small pattern 54B and the second special pattern 55B in a manner that suggests the establishment of the second game condition (see FIG. 61(4)). Here, the decorative pattern 41, the first small pattern 54A, and the first special pattern 55A are all regarded as the first effect pattern. In addition, the second small pattern 54B and the second special pattern 55B are both regarded as second performance patterns.
In this case, in the specific mode, the first variable presentation can be made more prominent than the second variable presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, even in the second variation presentation, a presentation (such as the display of the first shutter image 715) is performed to suggest or inform that the special pattern lottery result is a big win or a small win. In other words, in the second variation presentation, it is sufficient that the execution of the specific presentation executed in the first variation presentation is restricted.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that in the second variable presentation, the execution of a specific presentation is restricted.
Here, after the second variable performance ends (for example, when gate 124 is won after the second variable performance ends), a specific performance (a role-play performance, vibration of performance button 161, output of the first performance sound, etc.) may be executed.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the second small symbol 54B and the second special symbol 55B in a manner that suggests or notifies that the second special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win during the execution of the variable performance related to the first special symbol in the normal game state. Here, the normal game state is regarded as a specific mode. In addition, examples of the manner that suggests that the second special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win include a double number and a mark of "0". In addition, the fact that the second special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win is regarded as the establishment of the second game condition. In addition, the second small symbol 54B is regarded as the first performance symbol. In addition, the second special symbol 55B is regarded as the second performance symbol.
In this case, even while the first special symbol is fluctuating, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 makes it possible to hide the second small symbol 54B during the execution of the variable performance related to the first special symbol in the normal game state. Here, the normal game state is regarded as a specific mode. Also, the variable performance related to the first special symbol is regarded as the first variable performance.
In this case, in the specific mode, after the player's attention is focused on the second small pattern 54B, the player can be directed to other presentation images that are displayed when the second small pattern 54B is no longer displayed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, when a variable presentation is executed based on the result of the second special pattern lottery being a big win or a small win while the first variable presentation is being executed, the presentation control unit 300 can continue to display the second special pattern 55B when the second small pattern 54B is made invisible.
In this case, even if the second small symbol 54B is not displayed, the second special symbol 55B is displayed, so that the player can be prevented from forgetting that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win and a variable performance is executed, a special image such as the first shutter image 715 or the third notification image 716 can be displayed. Here, the fact that the second special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win is regarded as the establishment of the second game condition. Then, the performance control unit 300 can display the second small symbol 54B, the second special symbol 55B, and a special image during the execution of the variable performance related to the first special symbol. The variable performance related to the first special symbol is regarded as the first variable performance.
In this case, even while the first special pattern is being displayed in a changing manner, the player can be directed to the presentation of the special pattern that represents a big win or small win as a result of the lottery, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, the decorative pattern 41, the first small pattern 54A, and the first special pattern 55A are displayed as the performance patterns corresponding to the first special pattern, and the second small pattern 54B and the second special pattern 55B are displayed as the performance patterns corresponding to the second special pattern. That is, in the normal game state, there are more types of performance patterns corresponding to the first special pattern than types of performance patterns corresponding to the second special pattern.
In this case, it is possible to allow the player to pay more attention to the variable presentation of the first special symbol which is mainly performed in the normal gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the variable performance related to the second special symbol that is executed when the lottery result is a big win or a small win, a performance related to the remaining time of the variable performance is executed (see FIG. 61 (2)). In particular, in this embodiment, a performance is executed in which the remaining time of the variable performance is updated (subtracted) and notified.
In this case, the player can be made aware of the remaining time of the variable presentation, so that the player can be prevented from feeling anxious about not knowing when the variable presentation related to the second special pattern will end.

In addition, in variable presentation example 5, even if the second starting hole 122 is won in the normal game state, if a variable presentation is executed based on the result of the special pattern lottery being a big win or a small win, the left hit image 702 is not displayed and a sound is not output to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 111, but this is not limited to this. If the second starting hole 122 is won in the normal game state, regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery, the left hit image 702 may be displayed and a sound may be output to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 111.

In addition, special symbols may be provided as decorative symbols 41 displayed in the normal game state, suggesting or announcing that an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect will occur. In other words, in the normal game state, the number of types of decorative symbols 41 corresponding to the first special symbol may be greater than the number of types of second small symbols 54B corresponding to the second special symbol. In this case, the presentation effect in the normal game state can be improved, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

(Example of variation 6)
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing one aspect of the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 6) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 62. Variable performance example 6 is an example of a variable performance based on winning at the second starting hole 122 in the normal game state. The variable performance in variable performance example 6 is a variable performance executed when "EC1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 49. In other words, the variable performance in variable performance example 6 is a variable performance executed when the same variable performance pattern as the variable performance in variable performance example 5 is selected. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 62 (1), as the previous first special symbol is stopped, the performance control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A in the image display unit 114. At this time, an "X" is displayed on the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B. Also, a "1" is displayed on the first reserved number display 53A, and a "0" is displayed on the second reserved number display 53B. Also, one reserved image 52 is displayed at this time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(2), the display of the decorative pattern 41, the first small pattern 54A, and the first special pattern 55A starts with the start of the display of the next first special pattern. At this time, the first reserved number display 53A is updated to "0". At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.
In addition, after the display of the decorative symbol 41, the first small symbol 54A, and the first special symbol 55A has started, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, the display of the second special symbol starts, and accordingly, the display of the second special symbol 55B starts. Meanwhile, at this time, neither the first shutter image 715 nor the third notification image 716 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 62 (3), the three decorative symbols 41 and the first small symbol 54A, "421", are fixed and stopped with the stop display of the first special symbol. Also, "x" is displayed on the first special symbol 55A.
Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the first special symbol starts to change, and accordingly, as shown in FIG. 62(4), the first small symbol 54A and the first special symbol 55A start to change. At this time, the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 are displayed. The third notification image 716 displays the text "110 seconds remaining," which indicates the remaining time of the change performance based on the winning of the second starting hole 122.
After that, the same effects as those explained using Figures 61 (3) to (6), Figures 59 (17) and (18), and Figures 60 (19) and (20) are executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a variable performance based on a winning entry into the first starting port 121 is being executed when a variable performance based on a winning entry into the first starting port 121 is started based on the result of the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern being a jackpot, the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 are not displayed during the execution of this variable performance. Then, when a variable performance based on a winning entry into the next first starting port 121 is started, the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 are displayed. That is, the timing at which the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 start to be displayed is delayed. Then, to the extent that the timing at which the third notification image 716 starts to be displayed is delayed, a shorter time is displayed in the "remaining time of the variable time" displayed in the third notification image 716 when the third notification image 716 starts to be displayed.

When both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are being displayed in a varying manner (see FIG. 62 (2)), a game ball may enter the first starting hole 121. In this case, the first special symbol that was being displayed in a varying manner may be displayed as still, and as the next first special symbol starts to be displayed in a varying manner, the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 may start to be displayed.

In addition, even during normal game play, when the first special symbol is being displayed in a changing state (changing presentation), if the second special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win and the second special symbol is displayed in a changing state (changing presentation), the display of the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 may start.

(Example of change performance 7)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing one aspect of the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 7) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 63. Variable performance example 7 is an example of a variable performance based on winning into the second starting hole 122 in the normal game state. The variable performance in variable performance example 7 is a variable performance executed when "EC1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 49. In other words, the variable performance in variable performance example 7 is a variable performance executed when the same variable performance pattern as the variable performance in variable performance example 5 and the variable performance in variable performance example 6 is selected. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 63 (1), as the previous first special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A are fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 by the performance control unit 300. At this time, an "X" is displayed in the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B. Also, a "1" is displayed in the first reserved number display 53A, and a "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display 53B. Also, at this time, one reserved image 52 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(2), the display of the decorative pattern 41, the first small pattern 54A, and the first special pattern 55A starts with the start of the display of the next first special pattern. At this time, the first reserved number display 53A is updated to "0". At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.
In addition, after the display of the decorative symbol 41, the first small symbol 54A, and the first special symbol 55A has started, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, the display of the second special symbol starts, and accordingly, the display of the second special symbol 55B starts. Meanwhile, at this time, neither the first shutter image 715 nor the third notification image 716 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 63 (3), the three decorative symbols 41 and the first small symbol 54A, "421", are fixed and stopped with the stop display of the first special symbol. Also, "x" is displayed on the first special symbol 55A.
After that, if the state in which the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 121 continues, neither the first shutter image 715 nor the third notification image 716 is displayed, and the varying display of the second special pattern continues.

Next, when the second special symbol is stopped, the second small symbol 54B "555" is fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 63 (4). Also, "◯" is displayed in the second special symbol 55B. Meanwhile, neither the first shutter image 715 nor the third notification image 716 is displayed.
Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the first shutter image 715 and the second right hit image 717 are displayed as shown in Fig. 63 (5). On the other hand, the third notification image 716 is not displayed. At this time, the second small symbol 54B is not displayed.

Then, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the same effect as that shown in FIG. 59 (17) is executed. That is, the big win game notification image 709 and the second notification image 710 are displayed. Also, at this time, the first small symbol 54A, the first reserved number display 53A, the second reserved number display 53B, the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B are not displayed. Also, at this time, each lamp emits rainbow light, and the second effect sound that notifies that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win is output from the speaker 156. On the other hand, the role performance and the vibration of the effect button 161 are not performed.
After that, the same effects as those explained using Figures 59 (18), 60 (19) and (20) are executed.

In the state shown in FIG. 63(4), the game ball may pass through the gate 124 before entering the first starting hole 121. In this case, the effect shown in FIG. 59(17) may be performed without the effect shown in FIG. 63(5).

(Example of variation 8)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing one aspect of the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 8) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 64. The variable performance example 8 is an example of a variable performance that is executed twice based on two winnings in the second starting hole 122 in the normal game state. The first variable performance in the variable performance example 8 is a variable performance that is executed when "EE1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 49, and the second variable performance is a variable performance that is executed when "EC1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 49. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, when the reserved number U1 and the reserved number U2 are both 0 and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both stopped and displayed, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, the display of the second special symbol begins to change, and the display of the second special symbol 55B begins to change, as shown in FIG. 64 (1). At this time, a left hit image 702 is displayed, and a sound is output from the speaker 156 to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 111.

Then, when the time has elapsed since the first special symbol has stopped and no gaming ball has entered the first start port 121, and the time measured by the performance control unit 300 since it received the customer waiting command reaches the time-up time (see S4305 in FIG. 43), the setting image 718 is displayed as shown in FIG. 64 (2). In other words, the customer waiting performance starts based on the time from the first special symbol has stopped and no gaming ball has entered the first start port 121, regardless of the variable display of the second special symbol or the variable performance based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting image 718 was displayed without a game ball entering the first starting hole 121, a customer waiting demo image 719 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 64 (3). At this time, as the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, an "X" is displayed on the second special symbol 55B. On the other hand, even if the second special symbol 55B is stopped and displayed, the customer waiting demo image 719 is not hidden.

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, the display of the second special symbol begins to change, and as shown in FIG. 64 (4), the display of the second special symbol 55B begins to change. At this time, the left hit image 702 is displayed, and a sound is output from the speaker 156 to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 111. On the other hand, the customer waiting demo image 719 is not hidden.

Next, as the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the second small symbol 54B "555" is fixed and stopped, and the second special symbol 55B is displayed with "◯" as shown in FIG. 64 (5). On the other hand, the customer waiting demo image 719 is not hidden.
Then, when the gaming ball enters the first start opening 121 before passing through the gate 124, the effect shown in Fig. 63 (5) is performed. Also, when the gaming ball passes through the gate 124 before entering the first start opening 121, the effect shown in Fig. 59 (17) is performed. That is, when the gaming ball enters the first start opening 121 or the gate 124, the customer waiting demo image 719 is hidden as the customer waiting effect ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, even if a game ball enters the second start hole 122 or a variable effect based on the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the customer waiting effect is not limited. Therefore, the customer waiting effect can be performed at an appropriate timing according to the game situation, and it is possible to exert the intended appealing effect on the player.
In addition, even if a game ball enters the second starting hole 122 during the execution of the customer waiting performance, the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 are not displayed. However, even during the execution of the customer waiting performance, if a variable performance is performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 122 and the second special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win, the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 may be displayed. In this case, the display of the left hit image 702 and the output of a sound for encouraging the player to launch the game ball to the left side of the game area 111 may not be performed.
In addition, a customer waiting effect may be started during the varying display (variable effect) of the second special pattern in the normal gaming state.
In the variation performance example 8, the second start port 122 is won twice. Due to these two wins, the number of variation performances required to reach the specific time-saving gaming state is reduced by two.

(Example of variation 9)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 9) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 65. The variable performance shown in variable performance example 9 is a variable performance based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state. The variable performance in variable performance example 9 is a variable performance executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 48. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variable performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 65 (1), the decorative pattern 41 and the first small pattern 54A are fixed and stopped with the display of the previous special pattern. In addition, an "X" is displayed on the first special pattern 55A and the second special pattern 55B. In addition, a "0" is displayed on the first reserved number display 53A and the second reserved number display 53B. At this time, the normal remaining number image 720 is also displayed.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as the first special symbol starts to change, the first small symbol 54A and the first special symbol 55A start to change as shown in FIG. 65 (2). In addition, the necessary change effects to reach the specific time-saving game state are executed, and the pachinko game machine 100 changes from the normal game state to the specific time-saving game state. At this time, the first right-hit image 712 and the status notification image 713 are also displayed. In the illustrated example, the status notification image 713 displays the text "Specific time-saving game has started!", which suggests or notifies that the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 is in the specific time-saving game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (3), a stage image 701 corresponding to the specific time-saving game state (first special time-saving game state) is displayed. At this time, the less decorative decorative pattern 41 and the first small pattern 54A "421" are fixed and stopped in association with the stopped display of the first special pattern. At this time, an "X" is displayed on the first special pattern 55A. At this time, a time-saving remaining number image 714 is displayed.

(Example of variation 10)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 10) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 66. The variable performance shown in the variable performance example 10 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state, and a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the normal game state. The variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the variable performance example 10 is a variable performance executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 48. The variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the variable performance example 10 is a variable performance executed when "EC1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 49. In addition, in the following description, differences from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly described, and explanations of points that match each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 66 (1), the decorative pattern 41 and the first small pattern 54A are fixed and stopped with the display of the previous special pattern. In addition, an "X" is displayed on the first special pattern 55A and the second special pattern 55B. In addition, a "0" is displayed on the first reserved number display 53A and the second reserved number display 53B. At this time, the normal remaining number of times image 720 is also displayed. In the illustrated example, the normal remaining number of times image 720 shows the text "1 more."

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Figure 66 (2), the display of the decorative pattern 41, the first small pattern 54A and the first special pattern 55A begins to change in accordance with the start of the display of the next first special pattern.
Next, when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 66(3), the variable display of the second special pattern starts, and the variable display of the second special pattern 55B starts.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (4), the decorative pattern 41 and the first small pattern 54A, "421", are fixed and stopped in conjunction with the display of the first special pattern. In addition, an "X" is displayed in the first special pattern 55A. At this time, the normal remaining number of times image 720 is updated to "0 remaining."

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as the first special symbol starts to change, the first special symbol 55A starts to change as shown in FIG. 66(5). In addition, the necessary change performance to reach the specific time-saving game state is executed, and the pachinko game machine 100 goes from the normal game state to the specific time-saving game state. On the other hand, the state notification image 713 (see FIG. 65(2)) that suggests or notifies that the pachinko game machine 100 has entered the specific time-saving game state is not displayed, and at this time, the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the first shutter image 715 displays the text "110 seconds left," which is the remaining time of the change performance.
After that, the same effects are performed as those explained using Figures 61 (3) to (6), Figures 59 (17) and (18), and Figures 60 (19) and (20).

As described above, in this embodiment, in the variable presentation that is supposed to notify the player that a specific time-shortened game state has been entered, if the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 are displayed, the notification that a specific time-shortened game state has been entered (display of the state notification image 713) is restricted.

In this embodiment, the first special time-saving game state is described as a state that is controlled when a special symbol lottery is won in the normal game state, but this is not limited to the above. The first special time-saving game state may be a state that is controlled when the special symbol changes the number of times required to reach the specific time-saving game state in the normal game state. In other words, the specific time-saving game state may be the first special time-saving game state. Also, the specific time-saving game state may be the second special time-saving game state described later.

Also, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 66(1), when the second special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win based on the winning of the second starting hole 122, and the variable display (variation performance) of the second special symbol is started, the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 may be displayed. Then, during the variable display (variation performance) of the second special symbol, when the variable display (variation performance) of the first special symbol is started and ended based on the winning of the first starting hole 121, the variable performance required until the specific time-saving game state is reached is executed, and the pachinko game machine 100 goes from the normal game state to the specific time-saving game state. That is, during the variable display (variation performance) of the second special symbol, the specific time-saving game state is reached. Even in this case (specific time-saving game state), the display of the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 may be continued until the variable display (variation performance) of the second special symbol is ended. On the other hand, after the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to a specific time-saving game state, if the result of the second special pattern lottery is a big win or a small win and the variable display (variable performance) of the second special pattern is started, the display of the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 may be restricted.
That is, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 executes a specific performance (display of the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716) when the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the first mode (normal game state), and can restrict the execution of the specific performance when the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the second mode (specific time-saving game state). And, the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance in the second mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the first mode and the variable display of the second special symbol is finished in the second mode. In other words, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started before the first mode is finished (before the variable display of the final time in the normal game state is finished), the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance even if the variable display of the second special symbol is finished after the first mode is finished (after the variable display of the final time in the normal game state is finished).

(Example of variation 11)
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 11) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 67. The variable performance example 11 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the normal game state, and a variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state. The variable performance in the variable performance example 11 is a variable performance executed when "EC1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 49, and a variable performance executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 48. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 67(1), as the previous special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A are fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 by the performance control unit 300. At this time, an "X" is displayed in the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B. At this time, a "0" is displayed in the first reserved number display 53A and the second reserved number display 53B.

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, the display of the second special symbol starts to change, and accordingly, the display of the second special symbol 55B starts to change, as shown in Fig. 67 (2). At this time, the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the third notification image 716 displays the text "139 seconds remaining," which indicates the remaining time of the change performance.
Next, as shown in Fig. 67 (3), when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the first small symbol 54A and the first special symbol 55A start to change in accordance with the start of the change in the first special symbol. At this time, the remaining time of the change in the third notification image 716 is updated to "90 seconds remaining."

Next, when the second special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 67(4), the second small symbol 54B "555" is displayed in a fixed and stopped state, and a "◯" is displayed in the second special symbol 55B. At this time, the display content of the third notification image 716 is updated to "0 seconds remaining." At this time, when the first special symbol is stopped, the first small symbol 54A "444" is displayed in a fixed and stopped state, and a "◯" is displayed in the first special symbol 55A.

Next, as shown in Fig. 67(5), the second right-hit image 717 is displayed. At this time, the first small symbol 54A and the second small symbol 54B are both hidden. After that, the same effects as those described using Fig. 59(17), (18), Fig. 60(19), and (20) are executed.
In addition, as in the variation performance example 11, when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery result of the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern are both a big win or a small win, the big win game to be executed and the game state to be controlled may be determined based on the lottery result for the special pattern that ends the variable display first among the first special pattern and the second special pattern. Also, the big win game to be executed and the game state to be controlled may be determined based on the lottery result that was more advantageous to the player among the first special pattern and the second special pattern.

In addition, in the variable performance example 11, when the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed because the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win in the normal game state, the variable display of the first special symbol is started because the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win. In this case, the variable display of the first special symbol, which started after the variable display of the second special symbol, may end before the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, even before the variable display of the second special symbol ends, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, a specific performance such as a role performance, vibration of the performance button 161, output of the first performance sound, display of the first notification image 708, and illumination of each lamp in rainbow colors may be performed. In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, although the first small symbol 54A and the first special symbol 55A of the double number are displayed (see FIG. 67 (4)), the execution of the specific performance may be restricted, and the performance shown in FIG. 67 (5) may be executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the first small symbol 54A and the first special symbol 55A are displayed in a manner that suggests or notifies that the first special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win, the performance control unit 300 can display the second small symbol 54B and the second special symbol 55B in a manner that suggests or notifies that the second special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win. Here, the first small symbol 54A and the first special symbol 55A are both regarded as the first performance symbol. Also, the second small symbol 54B and the second special symbol 55B are both regarded as the second performance symbol. Also, the fact that the first special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win is regarded as the fact that the first game condition has been established. Also, the fact that the second special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win is regarded as the fact that the second game condition has been established.
In this case, the player can be made to recognize that the results of the lottery for each of the first special pattern and the second special pattern are either a big win or a small win, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

(Example of variation 12)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 12) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 68. Variable performance example 12 is an example of a variable performance based on winning at the second starting hole 122 in the normal game state. The variable performance in variable performance example 5 is a variable performance executed when "EC1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 49. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variable performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as the second special symbol changes, as shown in FIG. 68(1), the second special symbol 55B changes and the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 are displayed. Note that the state shown in FIG. 68(1) may be any state when the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 are displayed in the above-mentioned change performance examples.

Next, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the image display section 114 goes out and no image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 68(2).
Next, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored, a restoration image 721 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 68(3).

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(4), the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A, "123", are fixed and stopped. Also, the stage image 701 corresponding to the normal game state is displayed again. Meanwhile, neither the first shutter image 715 nor the third notification image 716 is displayed. Also, at this time, the variable display of the second special symbol continues, but "x" is displayed on the second special symbol 55B.
Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the first special symbol starts to be displayed, and the decorative symbol 41, the first small symbol 54A, and the first special symbol 55A start to be displayed as shown in Fig. 68 (5). On the other hand, neither the first shutter image 715 nor the third notification image 716 is displayed.

Then, with the stop display of the first special symbol, as shown in Fig. 68 (6), the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A, "421", are fixed and stopped. Also, "x" is displayed on the first special symbol 55A.
After this, the second special symbol stops and is displayed, but in the second special symbol 55B, the "X" display is maintained without displaying the "O". Furthermore, if the game ball enters the first start hole 121 before passing through the gate 124, the effect shown in FIG. 63 (5) is performed. Also, if the game ball passes through the gate 124 before entering the first start hole 121, the effect shown in FIG. 59 (17) is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored while the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 are displayed, the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 are not displayed again. Also, if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot, an "X" is displayed in the second special symbol 55B.
In addition, if the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored while the second special pattern is being displayed in a varying manner based on the result of the special pattern lottery being a jackpot, the second special pattern 55B may be displayed with an "X", and then the second special pattern 55B may switch to a "O" as the second special pattern is displayed stopped.

In addition, in the variation performance example 12, when the power to the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off and then restored during the variation display of the second special pattern, the stage image 701 and the decorative pattern 41 are displayed before the variation display of the second special pattern that was being executed ends (see Figure 68 (4)), although this is not limited to this.
When the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off and then restored during the variable display of the second special symbol, the display of the recovery image 721 is maintained until the variable display of the second special symbol that was being executed is completed, and the stage image 701 and the decorative symbol 41 may not be displayed. Then, the image shown in FIG. 68 (4) may be displayed with the stop display of the second special symbol that was being executed. After this, if the game ball enters the first start hole 121 before the game ball passes through the gate 124, the performance shown in FIG. 63 (5) may be performed, and if the game ball passes through the gate 124 before the game ball enters the first start hole 121, the performance shown in FIG. 59 (17) may be performed.

(Example of variation 13)
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 13) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 69. The variable performance shown in the variable performance example 13 is a variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the first special time-saving game state. In the variable performance example 13, during the execution of the variable performance based on winning the first start port 121, a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 is started.
In addition, the variable performance based on winning at the first start port 121 in the variable performance example 13 is a variable performance executed when "EG1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 50(a). Also, the variable performance based on winning at the second start port 122 in the variable performance example 13 is a variable performance executed when "EJ1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 50(b). Also, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variable performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69 (1), the decorative pattern 41 and the first small pattern 54A are stopped in a confirmed state following the display of the previous special pattern. In addition, an "X" is displayed on the first special pattern 55A and the second special pattern 55B. In addition, a "0" is displayed on the first reserved number display 53A and the second reserved number display 53B. At this time, a stage image 701, a first right hit image 712, and a remaining number of times for time-saving play image 714 according to the first special time-saving play state are also displayed.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as the first special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41, the first small symbol 54A, and the first special symbol 55A start to change as shown in FIG. 69(2). Also, the changing image 51 is displayed. Also, the time reduction remaining number image 714 is updated to "99 more".
Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, the variable display of the second special symbol starts, and the variable display of the second special symbol 55B starts as shown in Fig. 69 (3). At this time, the left hit image 702 is not displayed, and a sound is not output to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 111.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(4), the decorative pattern 41 and the first small pattern 54A, "421", are fixed and stopped, and "x" is displayed on the first special pattern 55A. Meanwhile, the second special pattern 55B continues to change.
In the time-saving game state, unlike the normal game state, when the decorative pattern 41 stops, the luminous image 703 corresponding to the stopped decorative pattern 41 may not be displayed. However, even in the time-saving game state, as in the normal game state, when the decorative pattern 41 stops, the luminous image 703 corresponding to the stopped decorative pattern 41 may be displayed. In this case, in the normal game state, when three decorative patterns 41 are stopped and displayed, the luminous images 703 corresponding to the three stopped decorative patterns 41 are simultaneously displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122 in the time-saving game state, the left-hit image 702 is not displayed, and no sound is output to encourage the player to launch the game ball to the left side of the game area 111. In this case, even if the game ball is launched toward the first starting hole 121B (see FIG. 23) in the time-saving game state, it is possible to prevent the player from being encouraged to launch the game ball to the left side of the game area 111.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the first special time-saving game state, a notification (display of the remaining time-saving number image 714) is given regarding the number of times the first special symbol will change display (changing performance) that is executed based on winning at the first start port 121, which is also possible in the normal game state.

(Example of variation 14)
70 and 71 are diagrams showing one aspect of the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 14) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 70 and FIG. 71. The variable performance example 14 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the first special time-saving game state, and a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the first special time-saving game state. The variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the variable performance example 14 is a variable performance executed when "EG5" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 50(a). The variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the variable performance example 14 is a variable performance executed when "EH1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 50(b). In addition, in the following description, differences from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly described, and explanations of points that match each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 70 (1), the decorative pattern 41 and the first small pattern 54A are fixed and stopped with the display of the previous special pattern. Also, an "X" is displayed in the first special pattern 55A. Also, at this time, one reserved image 52 is displayed. Also, at this time, a "1" is displayed in the first reserved number display 53A, and a "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display 53B. Also, at this time, with the display of the second special pattern changing, the display of the second special pattern changing is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (2), as the next first special pattern starts to change, the decorative pattern 41, the first small pattern 54A, and the first special pattern 55A start to change. The first reserved number display 53A is updated to "0". At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the variable image 51 is transformed, and the variable image 51 is displayed in green. The remaining number of times for time reduction image 714 is updated to "89 left". At this time, as the second special pattern stops, an "X" is displayed on the second special pattern 55B.

Next, as shown in Fig. 70 (3), a reach prompting effect is executed. The reach prompting effect is an effect that prompts whether or not a reach effect will be executed. In the illustrated example, the left decorative pattern 41 "4" is temporarily stopped, and then the reach prompting effect is executed by the right decorative pattern 41 "4".
Next, as shown in FIG. 70(4), the right decorative pattern 41 "4" temporarily stops, and the reach performance starts.

Next, as shown in Fig. 70 (5), the SP reach image 705 is displayed with the start of the SP reach performance. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a reduced size. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the stage image 701 are not displayed.
In the time-saving gaming state, the SP reach effect is started without displaying the transition image 704 (see FIG. 55(5)), but this is not limited to this. Even in the time-saving gaming state, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect may be started after the reach effect is started, via the transition image 704.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(6), with the start of the SPSP reach effect, an SPSP reach image 706 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71(7), a button operation presentation is executed and a button operation image 707 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 707 is displayed, the middle decorative pattern 41 "5" is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 71 (8).
71(9), the decorative symbol 41 of the mismatched combination, "454", is temporarily stopped. At this time, the variable image 51 and the stage image 701 are displayed again.
In the time-saving game state, the stage image 701 and the like are redisplayed without displaying the transition image 704 (see FIG. 56 (10)) after the execution of the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect, but this is not limited to this. Even in the time-saving game state, the stage image 701 and the like may be redisplayed via the transition image 704 after the execution of the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect.

Then, with the stop display of the first special symbol, as shown in Fig. 71 (10), the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A, "454", are fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, "x" is displayed on the first special symbol 55A.
Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 71 (11), the variable display of the special 2 special symbol starts, and the variable display of the second special symbol 55B starts. Meanwhile, the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 are not displayed. In addition, the remaining number of times of time reduction image 714 is updated to "88 more".

Then, when the second special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 71 (12), the second small symbol 54B "555" is fixed and stopped, and a "circle" is displayed in the second special symbol 55B.
Although not shown, the second small symbol 54B is then hidden, while the second special symbol 55B continues to be displayed. If the game ball enters the first starting hole 121 before passing through the gate 124, the effect shown in FIG. 63 (5) is performed. If the game ball passes through the gate 124 before entering the first starting hole 121, the effect shown in FIG. 59 (17) is performed.
After that, the same effects as those shown in Figures 59 (18), 60 (19) and (20) are performed.

(Example of variation 15)
72 to 76 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 15) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 72 to 74. Variable performance example 15 is an example of a variable performance based on winning into the first starting hole 121 in the first special time-saving game state. The variable performance in variable performance example 15 is executed when "EF2" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 50 (a). In the following explanation, differences from each of the variable performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 72(1), when the previous first special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A are fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 by the performance control unit 300. At this time, the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B are displayed with "x". At this time, one reserved image 52 is displayed in blue. At this time, the first reserved number display 53A displays "1" and the second reserved number display 53B displays "0".
The first reserved image 52 may be displayed in blue from the start of display, or may be displayed in blue as a result of a change in the reserved image 52 that was displayed in the normal display mode. In other words, the reserved image 52 may have undergone either of the effects as long as it is displayed in blue as a result of a pre-determination effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (2), as the next first special pattern starts to change, the decorative pattern 41, first small pattern 54A, and first special pattern 55A start to change. The first reserved number display 53A is updated to "0". At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the change performance of the variable image 51 is executed, and the variable image 51 is displayed in red. The remaining time-saving number image 714 is updated to "79 left".

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(3), the left and right decorative symbols 41 "7" temporarily stop, and the reach performance starts.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72(4), the SP reach image 705 is displayed with the start of the SP reach performance. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a reduced size. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the stage image 701 are not displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72(5), the SPSP reach image 706 is displayed with the start of the SPSP reach performance. Also, at this time, when the game ball enters the first start hole 121, the first reserved number display 53A is updated to "1". On the other hand, the reserved image 52 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(6), a button operation presentation is executed and a button operation image 707 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 707 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 73 (7), a role effect is executed, and the movable role object 115 moves so as to overlap with the image display unit 114. At this time, the effect button 161 vibrates. At this time, a sound effect is executed, and a first effect sound that suggests or notifies that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win is output from the speaker 156. At this time, a first notification image 708 is displayed. At this time, each lamp emits light in rainbow colors.

73(8), the doublet decorative symbol 41 "777" is temporarily stopped. At this time, the doublet decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a larger display size than when the SP reach performance is being executed.
In addition, when the double-digit decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in the time-saving gaming state, the luminous images 703 corresponding to each of the double-digit decorative patterns 41 may be displayed (simultaneously).

Then, with the stop display of the first special symbol, as shown in Fig. 73 (9), the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A, "777", are fixed and stopped. At this time, the first special symbol 55A is displayed as "◯".
Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (10), a big win game notification image 709 and a second notification image 710 are displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 41, the first small pattern 54A, the first reserved number display 53A, and the second reserved number display 53B are not displayed. Meanwhile, the first special pattern 55A and the second special pattern 55B are maintained displayed. At this time, each lamp emits rainbow light, and a second performance sound is output from the speaker 156, which suggests or notifies that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win or a small win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (11), the first special pattern 55A and the second special pattern 55B are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (12), with the start of the big win game, a round image 711 and a first right hit image 712 are displayed.

Next, when the jackpot game ends, a status notification image 713 is displayed as shown in FIG. 74 (13). In the illustrated example, the text "Second special time-saving start!" is displayed, which suggests or notifies the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second special time-saving game state, which is the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In other words, when the jackpot game ends, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to the second special time-saving game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (14), in the second special time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, "777", is fixed and stopped. Also, the second small pattern 54B, "777", is fixed and stopped. This second small pattern 54B is displayed at the position where the first small pattern 54A was displayed in the normal game state or the first special time-saving game state (see FIG. 52 (1) and FIG. 72 (1)). Meanwhile, the first small pattern 54A is not displayed. Also, at this time, "◯" is displayed in the first special pattern 55A, and "×" is displayed in the second special pattern 55B. Also, "1" is displayed in the first reserved number display 53A, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display 53B. Meanwhile, the reserved image 52 is not displayed. Also, at this time, a stage image 701 corresponding to the second special time-saving game state is displayed. Also, at this time, a time-saving remaining number image 714 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the remaining time-saving number image 714 displays the text "200 more," indicating that there are 200 remaining times for special symbol selection in the second special time-saving play state.

As described above, in this embodiment, not only in the normal game state but also in the first special time-saving game state, the first special symbol-related variable performance is performed as the main variable performance rather than the second special symbol-related variable performance. In particular, in the first special time-saving game state, it is possible to execute an expectation performance that makes the player expect that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big win or a small win. In addition, the expectation performance includes a plurality of expectation performances with different expectation levels of a big win or a small win. Furthermore, the expectation performance is performed even during the variable display of the second special symbol. Examples of the expectation performance include a reach performance, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance, and the display of the reserved image 52 and the variable image 51.
In addition, as the variation presentation patterns of the variation presentation related to the first special symbol in the first special time-saving game state, a plurality of variation presentation patterns in which the lottery result is a jackpot and a plurality of variation presentation patterns in which the lottery result is a miss are provided (see FIG. 50(a)). In addition, as the variation pattern in which the lottery result related to the first special symbol in the first special time-saving game state is a jackpot and the variation pattern in which the lottery result related to the first special symbol in the first special time-saving game state is a miss, a plurality of variation patterns with different execution times are provided (see FIG. 28).
In addition, in the first special time-saving game state, a time-saving remaining number image 714 regarding the number of times the first special symbol changes is displayed. Furthermore, in the first special time-saving game state, a pre-determination performance based on the pre-determination result of the first special symbol lottery is executed (see FIG. 47(a)).
In addition, in the first special time-saving gaming state, the pre-determination effect for the first special symbol is more likely to be executed than the pre-determination effect for the second special symbol. In addition, in the first special time-saving gaming state, the reach effect is more likely to be executed when the variable effect for the first special symbol is executed than when the variable effect for the second special symbol is executed.
In this case, a variety of variable effects related to the first special symbol can be realized not only in the normal game state but also in the first special time-saving game state, thereby making the game more interesting.

In this embodiment, the pre-determination effect for the second special symbol is not executed in the first special time-saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the first special time-saving game state, the pre-determination effect for the second special symbol may be executed more easily than the pre-determination effect for the first special symbol, while the pre-determination effect for the second special symbol is executed. In addition, the pre-determination effect for the first special symbol is executed more easily than the pre-determination effect for the second special symbol in the first special time-saving game state, which includes the pre-determination effect for the second special symbol not being executed (0%) in the first special time-saving game state.
In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the reach effect is not performed in the variable performance related to the second special symbol in the first special time-saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the first special time-saving game state, while the variable performance related to the second special symbol in which the reach effect is performed is a variable performance related to the first special symbol, the reach effect may be more easily executed when the variable performance related to the first special symbol is performed than when the variable performance related to the second special symbol is performed. In addition, the fact that the reach effect is more easily executed when the variable performance related to the first special symbol is performed than when the variable performance related to the second special symbol is performed in the first special time-saving game state also includes the fact that the reach effect is not performed (0%) in the variable performance related to the second special symbol in the first special time-saving game state.

In addition, if the game machine is in a customer waiting state at the start of the second special time-saving game state transitioned from the jackpot game, the background music corresponding to the presentation mode of the second special time-saving game state may be muted without being audibly output. In this case, when the game ball enters the second start hole 122 from the customer waiting state to start the variable presentation, the background music corresponding to the presentation mode of the second special time-saving game state may be audibly output.

In the present embodiment, the reserved image 52 is not displayed even if the game ball enters the first start port 121 when the SPSP reach performance is being executed in the first special time-saving game state. Here, the reserved image 52 may not be displayed even if the game ball enters the first start port 121 when the SP reach performance is being executed in the first special time-saving game state. Also, in the first special time-saving game state, the reserved image 52 is displayed when the first start port 121 is entered when the SP reach performance is being executed, while the reserved image 52 may not be displayed when the game ball enters the first start port 121 when the SPSP reach performance is being executed. Also, even if the game ball enters the second start port 122 when the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is being executed in the first special time-saving game state, the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 may not be displayed.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may output a winning sound to notify the winning to the speaker 156 when a game ball wins in the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 in the first special time-saving game state. And, when a game ball wins in the first start hole 121 when the SP reach performance is being executed in the first special time-saving game state, a winning sound may be output (at this time, the reserved image 52 may be displayed, or the reserved image 52 may not be displayed). On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the first start hole 121 when the SPSP reach performance is being executed in the first special time-saving game state, the winning sound may not be output. Also, even if a game ball wins in the first start hole 121 when the SP reach performance is being executed in the first special time-saving game state, the winning sound may not be output. Also, in the first special time-saving game state, when the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is being executed, if the second start port 122 is won, the winning sound may not be output. Also, in the first special time-saving game state, if the second start port 122 is won, in any case (before the reach performance, during the reach performance, during the fluctuation stop, etc.), the winning sound may not be output.

In addition, in the first special time-saving game state, even if the first special symbol is being displayed (changing presentation) in a changing manner, when the second special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win and the second special symbol is displayed (changing presentation) in a changing manner, the display of the first shutter image 715 and the fourth notification image 723 may start.

(Example of variation 16)
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 16) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 75. Variable performance example 16 is an example of a variable performance based on winning into the second starting hole 122 in the first special time-saving game state. The variable performance in variable performance example 16 is a variable performance executed when "EH1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 50(b). In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly described, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 75(1), when the previous first special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A are fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 by the performance control unit 300. At this time, the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B are displayed with "x". At this time, the first reserved number display 53A and the second reserved number display 53B are displayed with "0".
Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 122, as shown in Fig. 75 (2), the second special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol 55B starts to be displayed in a variable manner. Also, the time-saving remaining number image 714 is updated to "69 remaining".

Next, when the game ball enters the first start hole 121, as shown in FIG. 75(3), the first small symbol 54A and the first special symbol 55A start to change. At this time, the first shutter image 715 and the fourth notification image 723 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the fourth notification image 723 displays the text "Big chance approaching!" and the text "115 seconds remaining" which indicates the remaining time of the change performance. That is, the time displayed as the "remaining time of the change time" displayed in the fourth notification image 723 is shorter by the amount that the display start timing of the second notification image 723 is delayed with respect to the start of the change display of the second special symbol. After that, the time displayed in the fourth notification image 723 is updated as time passes. At this time, the reserved image 52 is not displayed. In addition, even during the period from when the game ball enters the first start hole 121 to when the first shutter image 715 is displayed, the reserved image 52 is not displayed (the display is limited).

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(4), the first small symbol 54A, "421", stops and "x" is displayed on the first special symbol 55A in response to the stop display of the first special symbol. Also, at this time, the fourth notification image 723 shows the text "111 seconds remaining."
Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Fig. 75 (5), the first small symbol 54A and the first special symbol 55A start to change as the first special symbol starts to change. At this time, the fourth notification image 723 shows the text "3 seconds left".

Next, when the second special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 75(6), the second small symbol 54B "777" is fixed and stopped, and the second special symbol 55B is displayed with "◯". At this time, the fourth notification image 723 shows the text "0 seconds remaining". Meanwhile, the first small symbol 54A continues to display the variable display.
After this, the second small symbol 54B is hidden, although not shown. Then, the second right-hit image 717 is displayed, the first small symbol 54A is fixed and stopped, and the first special symbol 55A is displayed with an "x". Furthermore, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the big win game notification image 709 and the second notification image 710 are displayed, the decorative symbol 41, the first reserved number display 53A, and the second reserved number display 53B are hidden, each lamp emits rainbow light, and a second performance sound that suggests or notifies that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or is output from the speaker 156. After that, the same performance as that shown in FIG. 73 (11), (12), FIG. 74 (13), and (14) is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, a specific effect such as display of the first shutter image 715 can be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, in the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 61 (2), when a game ball enters the second start hole 122 during the stopped display of the first special symbol, the first shutter image 715 is displayed. On the other hand, in the first special time-saving game state, even if a game ball enters the second start hole 122 during the stopped display of the first special symbol, the first shutter image 715 is not displayed (see FIG. 75 (2)), and when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 after that, the first shutter image 715 is displayed (see FIG. 75 (3)). That is, the normal game state and the first special time-saving game state have different start conditions for the specific effect. Here, the normal game state is regarded as the first mode. In addition, the first special time-saving game state is regarded as the second mode.
In this case, the player can feel a sense of surprise at the start of a special effect, compared to when the conditions for starting the special effect are the same for each mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, in the first mode, the performance control unit 300 can start a specific performance while the first special pattern is displayed stationary, and in the second mode, the performance control unit 300 can start a specific performance while the first special pattern is displayed in a varying manner.
In this case, the way in which the first special symbol changes and the expectation for the specific performance can be made different for each mode, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the first mode, the performance control unit 300 starts a specific performance at a predetermined timing (at the start of the variable performance) in the variable performance related to the second special pattern, and in the second mode, starts a specific performance at a timing different from the predetermined timing (after the start of the variable performance related to the second special pattern).
In this case, the player can feel a sense of surprise at the start of a special effect, compared to when the start timing of the special effect is the same for each mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the variable presentation that is performed when the result of the second special pattern lottery in the first special time-saving game state is a big win or a small win, the execution of the gimmick presentation, the vibration of the presentation button 161, the output of the first presentation sound, etc. is restricted.
Here, after the variable presentation that is performed when the result of the second special pattern lottery in the first special time-saving game state is a big win or a small win ends (for example, when gate 124 is won after the variable presentation ends), a role-play presentation, vibration of presentation button 161, output of the first presentation sound, etc. may be executed.

(Example of variation 17)
FIG. 76 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. As shown in FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 17) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 76. Variable performance example 17 is an example of a variable performance based on winning into the second starting hole 122 in the first special time-saving game state. The variable performance in variable performance example 17 is executed when "EH1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 50(b). In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly described, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 76(1), when the previous first special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A are fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 by the performance control unit 300. At this time, the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B are displayed with "x". At this time, one reserved image 52 is displayed, the first reserved number display 53A displays "1", and the second reserved number display 53B displays "0".
Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Fig. 76 (2), the display of the decorative pattern 41, the first small pattern 54A, and the first special pattern 55A starts to change with the start of the display of the first special pattern. Also, the time reduction remaining number image 714 is updated to "59 more".

Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 122, as shown in Fig. 76 (3), the second special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol 55B starts to be displayed in a variable manner. Also, the time-saving remaining number image 714 is updated to "58 more".
Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (4), with the first special pattern being stopped, decorative pattern 41 and first small pattern 54A, "421", are fixed and stopped, and an "X" is displayed on first special pattern 55A.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Fig. 76 (5), the first small symbol 54A and the first special symbol 55A start to change as the first special symbol starts to change. At this time, the first shutter image 715 and the fourth notification image 723 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the fourth notification image 723 displays the text "115 seconds remaining."
After this, the same presentation as that shown in Figure 75 (4) and onwards in Variable Presentation Example 16 is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the variable performance related to the second special symbol is started during the stopped display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 75(2)), the display of the first shutter image 715 and the fourth notification image 723 is started at the timing when the variable performance related to the first special symbol is started (see FIG. 75(3)). On the other hand, when the variable performance related to the second special symbol is started during the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 76(3)), the display of the first shutter image 715 and the fourth notification image 723 is started at the timing when the variable performance related to the first special symbol being executed ends and the variable performance related to the next first special symbol is started (see FIG. 76(5)). That is, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the start timing of the display of the first shutter image 715 and the fourth notification image 723 different depending on the start timing of the variable performance related to the second special symbol in the first special time-saving game state. Here, the display of the first shutter image 715 and the fourth notification image 723 are both regarded as specific effects in the variable effects. Also, the first special time-saving gaming state is regarded as a specific mode.
In this case, the player can be made to feel a sense of surprise at the start of the special presentation, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the variable performance related to the first special symbol is started after the variable performance related to the second special symbol is started in the specific mode, the performance control unit 300 can start the specific performance after the start of the variable performance related to the first special symbol without starting the specific performance until the variable performance related to the first special symbol is started. In other words, the start timing of the specific performance in the first special time-saving game state is determined by the start timing of the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol.
In this case, the variable presentation related to the first special pattern becomes less noticeable, so that the player is prevented from paying attention to the variable presentation related to the first special pattern even when a specific presentation is being performed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(Example of variation 18)
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 18) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 77. The variable performance example 18 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the first special time-saving game state, and a variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the first special time-saving game state. The variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the variable performance example 18 is a variable performance executed when "EH1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 50(b). The variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the variable performance example 18 is a variable performance executed when "EG1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 50(a). In addition, in the following description, differences from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly described, and explanations of points that match each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 77(1), when the previous first special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A are fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 by the performance control unit 300. At this time, the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B are displayed with "x". At this time, the first reserved number display 53A and the second reserved number display 53B are displayed with "0". In addition, the time reduction remaining number image 714 shows "2 more".
Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 122, as shown in Fig. 77 (2), the second special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol 55B starts to be displayed in a variable manner. Also, the time-saving remaining number image 714 is updated to "1 more".

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Fig. 77 (3), the first small symbol 54A and the first special symbol 55A start to change with the start of the change display of the first special symbol. At this time, the first shutter image 715 and the fourth notification image 723 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the fourth notification image 723 displays the text "135 seconds remaining."
Next, as shown in FIG. 77(4), the first small symbol 54A "421" is fixed and stopped, and the first special symbol 55A is displayed with "X". In addition, since the remaining number of times of the special symbol in the first special time-saving game state becomes 0, the pachinko game machine 100 goes from the first special time-saving game state to the normal game state. Then, as the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to the normal game state, the first right-hit image 712 is not displayed. In addition, at this time, the remaining time of the variable performance shown in the fourth notification image 723 is updated to "131 seconds remaining".

Next, when the second special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 77(5), the second small symbol 54B "777" is fixed and the second special symbol 55B is displayed with "◯". At this time, the fourth notification image 723 shows the text "0 seconds remaining".
After this, the first small symbol 54A and the second small symbol 54B are hidden, but not shown. Then, the second right-hit image 717 is displayed. Furthermore, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the big win game notification image 709 and the second notification image 710 are displayed, the decorative symbol 41, the first reserved number display 53A and the second reserved number display 53B are hidden, each lamp emits rainbow light, and the second performance sound that notifies the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win is output from the speaker 156. After that, the same performance as that shown in Figures 73 (11), (12), 74 (13), and (14) is performed.

(Example of variation 19)
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 19) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 78. The variable performance example 19 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the first special time-saving game state, a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the normal game state, and a variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state. The variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the first special time-saving game state in the variable performance example 19 is a variable performance executed when "EG1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 50(a). The variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the normal game state in the variable performance example 19 is a variable performance executed when "EC2" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 49. In addition, the variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state in the variable performance example 19 is a variable performance executed when "ER13" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 48. In addition, in the following explanation, the points that differ from each of the variable performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 78(1), when the previous first special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A are fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 by the performance control unit 300. At this time, the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B are displayed with "x". At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed, the first reserved number display 53A displays "2", and the second reserved number display 53B displays "0". In addition, the time-saving remaining number image 714 shows "1 more".
Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 78(2), the display of the decorative pattern 41, the first small pattern 54A, and the first special pattern 55A starts with the start of the display of the first special pattern. In addition, the second reserved image 52 moves closer to the display position of the variable image 51, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. In addition, the time reduction remaining number image 714 is updated to "0 remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (3), with the first special symbol being stopped, the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A, "421", are fixed and stopped, and an "X" is displayed on the first special symbol 55A. The variable image 51 is no longer displayed. Furthermore, as the remaining number of times the special symbol can be varied in the first special time-saving game state becomes 0, the pachinko gaming machine 100 changes from the first special time-saving game state to the normal game state. Furthermore, with the pachinko gaming machine 100 being controlled to the normal game state, the first right-hit image 712 is no longer displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 78 (4), the second shutter image 724 and the result notification image 725 are displayed. Also, at this time, when the game ball enters the second start hole 122, the variable display of the second special symbol 55B starts along with the variable display of the second special symbol. Meanwhile, the first shutter image 715 is not displayed.
Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 78(5), the first small symbol 54A and the first special symbol 55A start to be displayed in response to the start of the display of the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number display 53A is updated to "0". Meanwhile, the first shutter image 715 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(6), in conjunction with the stopped display of the first special symbol, the first small symbol 54A "624" is fixed and stopped, and an "X" is displayed in the first special symbol 55A.
Next, as shown in Fig. 79-1 (7), the second shutter image 724 and the result notification image 725 are hidden, and the stage image 701 corresponding to the normal game state is displayed again. Also, the decorative pattern 41 "624" is displayed in a fixed and stopped state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79-1 (8), in conjunction with the stopped display of the second special symbol, the second small symbol 54B "777" is fixed and stopped, and a "circle" is displayed in the second special symbol 55B.
After that, if the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121 before passing through the gate 124, the effect shown in Fig. 63 (5) is performed. Also, if the gaming ball passes through the gate 124 before entering the first starting hole 121, the effect shown in Fig. 59 (17) is performed.
After that, the same effects as those shown in Figures 59 (18), 60 (19) and (20) are performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute the display of the first shutter image 715 in the first special time-saving gaming state, and can restrict the display of the first shutter image 715 in the normal gaming state. Here, the first special time-saving gaming state is regarded as the first mode. Also, the normal gaming state is regarded as the second mode. Also, the display of the first shutter image 715 is regarded as the execution of a specific effect.
In this case, compared to a case where the execution of a specific effect is not restricted regardless of the mode, the player can feel the unexpectedness of the execution of a specific effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 executes a specific performance when the variable display of the second special symbol starts in the first mode, and can restrict the execution of the specific performance when the variable display of the second special symbol starts in the second mode. The performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance in the second mode when the variable display of the second special symbol starts in the first mode and ends in the second mode (see FIG. 77 (4)). In other words, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts before the first mode ends (before the final variable display of the first special symbol in the first special time-saving game state ends), the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance even if the variable display of the second special symbol ends after the first mode ends (after the final variable display of the first special symbol in the first special time-saving game state ends). Here, the first mode can also be regarded as a specific mode.
In this case, the player can be made to feel a sense of surprise in the execution of the specific presentation, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 122 in normal game mode, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed.

(Modification)
In this embodiment, it has been explained that when the varying display of the second special pattern starts after the first mode ends (after the final varying display of the first special pattern in the first special time-saving game state has ended and control has been exercised to the normal game state), the execution of a specific presentation (display of the first shutter image 715) is restricted (see Figure 78 (5)), but this is not limited to this.
Figure 79-2 is a diagram showing a modified example of variable performance example 19.

First, as in variation presentation example 19, the same presentation as shown in Figures 78 (1) to (4) is performed. That is, when the remaining number of variations of the special symbol in the first special time-saving game state becomes 0, the pachinko gaming machine 100 changes from the first special time-saving game state to the normal game state, and the second shutter image 724 and the result notification image 725 are displayed. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 79-2 (1), with the start of the variation display of the second special symbol whose lottery result is a big win or a small win, the variation display of the second special symbol 55B begins.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 79-2 (2), the first small symbol 54A and the first special symbol 55A start to change with the start of the change display of the first special symbol. At this time, the first shutter image 715 and the fourth notification image 723 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the fourth notification image 723 displays the text "135 seconds remaining."
Next, as shown in FIG. 79-2(3), the first small symbol 54A, "421", stops and an "X" is displayed on the first special symbol 55A, along with the display of the first special symbol. At this time, the remaining time of the variable performance shown in the fourth notification image 723 is updated to "131 seconds remaining."

Next, when the second special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 79-2(4), the second small symbol 54B "777" is fixed and the second special symbol 55B is displayed with "◯". At this time, the fourth notification image 723 shows the text "0 seconds remaining".
After that, a second right hit image 717 is displayed as shown in FIG. 79-2(5).

As described above, the performance control unit 300 may execute a specific performance (display of the first shutter image 715) even if the varying display of the second special pattern begins after the first mode has ended (after the final varying display of the first special pattern in the first special time-saving game state has ended).
In particular, in this embodiment, after the second shutter image 724 is displayed (see FIG. 79-2(1)), the first shutter image 715 is displayed (see FIG. 79-2(2)). In this case, it is possible to realize an unexpected effect in which shutter images with different display modes are displayed consecutively, which can increase the interest of the game.

(Example of variation 20)
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 20) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 80. The variable performance in the variable performance example 20 is a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the second special time-saving game state. In the variable performance example 20, during the execution of the variable performance based on winning the second start port 122, the variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 is started.
In addition, the variable performance based on winning the second starting hole 122 in the variable performance example 20 is a variable performance executed when "EO1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 51 (b). Also, the variable performance based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the variable performance example 20 is a variable performance executed when "EL1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 51 (a). Also, in the following explanation, the points that differ from each of the variable performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 80(1), in the second special time-saving game state, the decorative symbol 41 and the second small symbol 54B, "029", are fixed and stopped. This second small symbol 54B is displayed at the position where the first small symbol 54A was displayed in the normal game state or the first special time-saving game state. In addition, "x" is displayed in the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first reserved number display 53A and the second reserved number display 53B. The display positions of the first special symbol 55A, the second special symbol 55B, the first reserved number display 53A, and the second reserved number display 53B are all the same as the positions displayed in the normal game state or the first special time-saving game state. In addition, at this time, the stage image 701, the first right hit image 712, and the time-saving remaining number image 714 corresponding to the second special time-saving game state are displayed. The remaining time reduction number image 714 shows the text "200 more."

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as the second special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41, the second small symbol 54B, and the second special symbol 55B start to change as shown in Fig. 80 (2). Also, the changing image 51 is displayed. Also, the time reduction remaining number image 714 is updated to "199 more".
Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the first special symbol starts to change and the first special symbol 55A starts to change as shown in FIG. 80(3). Meanwhile, the first small symbol 54A is not displayed. Also, the time reduction remaining number image 714 is updated to "198 remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(4), when the second special symbol stops, the decorative symbol 41 and the second small symbol 54B, "421", are fixed and stopped, and an "X" is displayed in the second special symbol 55B. Meanwhile, the first special symbol 55A continues to change.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if a game ball is launched to the right side of the game area 111 in the second special time-saving game state, this game ball may enter the first start hole 121B (see FIG. 23). In this case, the execution time of the change (change performance) executed is "601.01 seconds" (see FIG. 30(a)), which is longer than the execution time of the change (change performance) based on the winning of the second start hole 122, so that an inefficient change performance is executed. Therefore, in the second special time-saving game state, even if the player launches the game ball to the right side of the game area 111, it is possible to prevent the change performance related to the first special symbol from being mainly executed rather than the change performance related to the second special symbol.
In particular, in the second special time-saving game state, the execution time of the variable display (variation performance) of the second special symbol is shortened. Therefore, in the second special time-saving game state, the variable display (variation performance) of the first special symbol can be executed multiple times during the variable display (variation performance) of the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to effectively appeal to the player that there are multiple chances to get a favorable result, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the first special symbol 55A when the decorative symbol 41, the second small symbol 54B, and the second special symbol 55B are displayed in the time-saving game state. Here, the time-saving game state is regarded as the second mode. Also, the first special symbol 55A is regarded as the first performance symbol. Also, the decorative symbol 41, the second small symbol 54B, and the second special symbol 55B are all regarded as the second performance symbol.
In this case, in the second mode, the player can recognize each of the first performance pattern corresponding to the first special pattern and the second performance pattern corresponding to the second special pattern, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the decorative pattern 41, the second small pattern 54B, and the second special pattern 55B when the first special pattern 55A is displayed in the second special time-saving game state. Here, the second special time-saving game state is regarded as the second mode. The first special pattern 55A is regarded as the first performance pattern. One of the decorative pattern 41, the second small pattern 54B, and the second special pattern 55B is regarded as the second performance pattern. The other one of the decorative pattern 41, the second small pattern 54B, and the second special pattern 55B is regarded as the third performance pattern.
In this case, while allowing the player to recognize each of the performance patterns corresponding to the first special pattern and the second special pattern in the second mode, the player can be made to pay more attention to the variable performance related to the second special pattern that is being mainly performed, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can variably display the first special symbol 55A when the decorative symbol 41, the second small symbol 54B, and the second special symbol 55B are variably displayed in the second special time-saving game state. Here, the second special time-saving game state is regarded as the second mode. Also, the first special symbol 55A is regarded as the first performance symbol. Also, the decorative symbol 41, the second small symbol 54B, and the second special symbol 55B are all regarded as the second performance symbol.
In this case, the player can be made aware that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating simultaneously in the second mode, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the second small symbol 54B in the display position of the first small symbol 54A in the normal game state in the second special time-saving game state, and can display the second special symbol 55B in the display position of the second special symbol 55B in the normal game state. Here, the normal game state is regarded as the first mode. Also, the second special time-saving game state is regarded as the second mode. Also, the first small symbol 54A is regarded as the first performance symbol. Also, the second special symbol 55B is regarded as the second performance symbol. Also, the second small symbol 54B is regarded as the third performance symbol.
In this case, the presentation pattern displayed at a position likely to be noticed by the player can be switched between being different depending on the mode or remaining the same regardless of the mode, depending on the presentation pattern, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, the time-saving game state includes a first special time-saving game state and a second special time-saving game state. Here, the time-saving game state is regarded as the second mode. The second special time-saving game state is regarded as the first performance. The first special time-saving game state is regarded as the second performance. When the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the performance control unit 300 can display a variable image 51, which is an information image suggesting the contents of information related to the judgment of the special symbol lottery related to the started variable display. The performance control unit 300 can display an information image in the second performance without displaying the information image in the first performance.
In this case, even in the second mode, by varying whether an information image is displayed or not depending on whether it is the first or second presentation, the player's expectations regarding winning at the first starting hole 121 can be varied, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display a reserved image 52 corresponding to a predetermined random number value stored in the RAM 203 based on a winning entry into the first starting gate 121. The performance control unit 300 can not display the reserved image 52 corresponding to the random number value stored based on a winning entry into the first starting gate 121 in the first performance, and can display the reserved image 52 corresponding to the random number value stored based on a winning entry into the first starting gate 121 in the second performance.
In this case, even in the second mode, by varying whether the pending image 52 is displayed or not depending on whether the first or second presentation is being performed, the player's expectations regarding winning at the first starting hole 121 can be varied, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed in the normal game state, a variable start command for the second special pattern is sent to the performance control unit 300, but the execution of a variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 associated with the second special pattern is restricted. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed in the second special time-saving game state, a variable start command for the second special pattern is sent to the performance control unit 300, and a variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 associated with the second special pattern is executed. In this case, the performance effect in the time-saving game state can be improved, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 during the second special time-saving game state, the first reserved number display 53A is updated to "1" as described above. That is, when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 during the second special time-saving game state, the performance display according to the pre-judgment result command (for example, display of the reserved image 52 or change of the reserved image 52, etc.) is limited, but the performance display according to the reserved number increase command (update of the first reserved number display 53A) is executed, while when a game ball enters the second start hole 122 during the second special time-saving game state, the performance display according to the pre-judgment result command (for example, display of the reserved image 52 or change of the reserved image 52, etc.) and the performance display according to the reserved number increase command (update of the second reserved number display 53B) are executed. In this case, the performance can be made different depending on whether the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 is entered during the time-saving game state, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 in the second special time-saving game state, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed.

The decorative pattern 41 displayed in the second special time-saving game state may be a special pattern that suggests or notifies that an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect will occur. In other words, in the second special time-saving game state, the number of types of decorative patterns 41 corresponding to the second special pattern may be greater than the number of types of first small patterns 54A corresponding to the first special pattern. In this case, the presentation effect in the second special time-saving game state can be improved, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

(Example of variation 21)
81 and 82 are diagrams showing one aspect of the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. In FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 21) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 81 and Fig. 82. Variable performance example 21 is an example of a variable performance based on winning into the second starting hole 122 in the second special time-saving game state. The variable performance in variable performance example 21 is a variable performance executed when "EO2" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 51 (b). In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variable performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 81 (1), as the previous second special symbol is stopped, the performance control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the second small symbol 54B in the image display unit 114. At this time, an "X" is displayed in the second special symbol 55B. Meanwhile, the first special symbol is changing, and the first special symbol 55A continues to change. At this time, one reserved image 52 is displayed. At this time, a "0" is displayed in the first reserved number display 53A, and a "1" is displayed in the second reserved number display 53B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (2), as the next second special pattern starts to change, the decorative pattern 41, the second small pattern 54B, and the second special pattern 55B start to change. The second reserved number display 53B is updated to "0". At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the variable image 51 is changed, and the variable image 51 is displayed in blue. The remaining number of time-saving times image 714 is updated to "189 left". At this time, as the first special pattern stops, an "X" is displayed on the first special pattern 55A. On the other hand, the first small pattern 54A is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(3), a reach prompting effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 81(4), the right decorative pattern 41 "4" temporarily stops, and the reach performance starts.
Next, as shown in FIG. 81(5), the SP reach image 705 is displayed with the start of the SP reach performance. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a reduced size. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the stage image 701 are not displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 81(6), with the start of the SPSP reach effect, an SPSP reach image 706 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 82(7), a button operation presentation is executed and a button operation image 707 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 707 is displayed, the middle decorative pattern 41 "5" is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 82 (8).
Next, as shown in Fig. 82(9), the decorative pattern 41 of the miss, "454", is temporarily stopped. At this time, the variable image 51, the stage image 701, and the remaining number of time-saving times image 714 are redisplayed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (10), the decorative pattern 41 and the second small pattern 54B, "454", are fixed and stopped with the stop of the second special pattern. At this time, "x" is displayed on the second special pattern 55B. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, during the normal game state and the first special time-saving game state, the display of the variable image 51 and reserved image 52 corresponding to the second special symbol is restricted, but the display of the variable image 51 and reserved image 52 corresponding to the first special symbol is possible, and in the second special time-saving game state, the display of the variable image 51 and reserved image 52 corresponding to the first special symbol is restricted, but the display of the variable image 51 and reserved image 52 corresponding to the second special symbol is possible. Therefore, it is possible to realize the display of the variable image 51 and reserved image 52 according to the importance to the game state, which makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

(Example of variation 22)
83 and 84 are diagrams showing one aspect of the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. In FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 22) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 83 and Fig. 84. Variable performance example 22 is an example of a variable performance based on winning into the second starting hole 122 in the second special time-saving game state. The variable performance in variable performance example 22 is a variable performance executed when "EN1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 51 (b). In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variable performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 83(1), when the previous second special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol 41 and the second small symbol 54B are fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 by the performance control unit 300. At this time, the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B are displayed with "x". At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. The first reserved image 51 is displayed in blue. At this time, the first reserved number display 53A displays "0" and the second reserved number display 53B displays "2".
The first reserved image 52 may be displayed in blue from the start of display, or may be displayed in blue as a result of a change in the reserved image 52 that was displayed in the normal display mode. In other words, the reserved image 52 may have undergone either of the effects as long as it is displayed in blue as a result of a pre-determination effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (2), as the display of the next second special symbol begins, the display of the decorative symbol 41, the second small symbol 54B, and the second special symbol 55B begins. The second reserved number display 53B is updated to "1". The second reserved image 52 moves closer to the display position of the variable image 51, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the change performance of the variable image 51 is executed, and the variable image 51 is displayed in green. The remaining time-saving number image 714 is updated to "189 left".

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(3), a reach prompting effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 83(4), the left and right decorative symbols 41 "4" temporarily stop, and the reach performance starts.
Next, as shown in FIG. 83(5), the SP reach image 705 is displayed with the start of the SP reach performance. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a reduced size. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the stage image 701 are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (6), the SPSP reach image 706 is displayed with the start of the SPSP reach performance. Also, at this time, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the first special symbol starts to be displayed with the first special symbol being ...

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(7), a button operation presentation is executed and a button operation image 707 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 707 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 84 (8), a role effect is executed, and the movable role object 115 moves so as to overlap with the image display unit 114. At this time, the effect button 161 vibrates. At this time, a sound effect is executed, and a first effect sound that suggests or notifies that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win is output from the speaker 156. At this time, a first notification image 708 is displayed. At this time, each lamp emits light in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in Fig. 84 (9), the doublet decorative symbol 41 "444" is temporarily stopped. At this time, the doublet decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a larger display size than when the SP reach performance is being executed.
Then, with the stop display of the second special symbol, as shown in Fig. 84 (10), the decorative symbol 41 and the second small symbol 54B, "444", are fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, "◯" is displayed in the second special symbol 55B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (11), a jackpot game notification image 709 and a second notification image 710 are displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 41, the second small pattern 54B, the first reserved number display 53A, and the second reserved number display 53B are hidden. Meanwhile, the first special pattern 55A and the second special pattern 55B remain displayed. At this time, each lamp lights up in rainbow colors, and a second sound effect is output from the speaker 156 to notify the player that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot.

At this time, the first special symbol is displayed as a stop. That is, when the variable performance (variable performance related to the second special symbol) that was executed due to the special symbol lottery result being a big win is finished, the variable display of the first special symbol ends regardless of whether the variable time of the first special symbol set in the variable pattern has elapsed (even if the variable time has not elapsed). Also, when the first special symbol is displayed as a stop, the first special symbol 55A is displayed as an "x".
In addition, when the executed variation performance ends because the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, if the variation time of the first special symbol set in the variation pattern has not elapsed, the first special symbol 55A may be displayed as "x" while the variation display of the first special symbol continues. Then, when the variation time set in the variation pattern has elapsed, the first special symbol may be displayed as a stopped symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (12), the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B are hidden.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 73 (12), 74 (13), and 74 (14) are performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58 (9), when the first special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win and a variable performance is performed, a suggestive performance that suggests or notifies the result of the first special symbol lottery can be executed. The fact that the first special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win is regarded as the establishment of the first game condition. In addition, examples of the suggestive performance include the illumination of each lamp in rainbow colors, the role performance, the vibration of the performance button 161, the output of the first performance sound, and the display of the first notification image 708. In addition, as shown in FIG. 61 (2) to (4), when the variable performance is performed in the normal game state because the second special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win, the suggestive performance is not performed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 84 (8), when the variable performance is performed in the second special time-saving game state because the second special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win, a suggestive performance is performed. That is, in this embodiment, in the first mode, the performance control unit 300 does not execute a suggestive performance that suggests the result of the judgment of the special symbol lottery based on the second game information, and in the second mode, the performance control unit 300 can execute a suggestive performance that suggests the result of the judgment of the special symbol lottery based on the second game information. Here, the first mode can be a normal game state. Also, the second mode can be a second special time-saving game state. Also, the second game information can be, for example, a random number value acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 based on winning the second start port 122.
In this case, the result of the judgment based on the second game information can be suggested in a different suggestion manner for each mode, thereby making the game more interesting.

In particular, in this embodiment, in the first mode, a specific suggestive effect such as the display of the first shutter image 715 that suggests or notifies that the second special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win is not performed as an effect that suggests or notifies that the first special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win. That is, in the first mode, a specific suggestive effect that suggests the result of the judgment of the special symbol lottery based on the first game information is not performed, and a specific suggestive effect that suggests the result of the judgment of the special symbol lottery based on the second game information is performed. Also, in the first mode, a suggestive effect that suggests the result of the judgment of the special symbol lottery based on the second game information is not performed, and a suggestive effect that suggests the result of the judgment of the special symbol lottery based on the first game information is performed. As the first game information, for example, a random number value acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 based on the winning of the first start hole 121 can be mentioned.
In this case, in the first mode, it is possible to easily allow the player to recognize whether a big win or a small win was achieved through the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the second special time-saving game state, a specific effect is executed in the variable effect related to the second special symbol executed when the lottery result is a big win or a small win. The specific effect is, for example, the illumination of each lamp in rainbow colors, the role effect, the vibration of the effect button 161, the display of the first notification image 708, the output of the first effect sound, etc. (see FIG. 84 (8)). On the other hand, in the first special time-saving game state, in the variable effect related to the second special symbol executed when the lottery result is a big win or a small win, a specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect is restricted) (see FIG. 75 (3) to (6)).
In this case, even in the time-shortened game state, the presentation mode of the variable presentation related to the second special pattern that is executed when the lottery result is a big win or a small win can be made different depending on whether the state is the first special time-shortened game state or the second special time-shortened game state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, the fluctuation start command sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300 may include a reserve number designation command that specifies the reserved number of special patterns (U1, U2). In addition, when the multiple decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped in the variable performance related to the second special symbol during the second special time-saving game state, it is possible to perform a performance operation on the stage image 701, and when the multiple decorative symbols 41 performing the performance operation are temporarily stopped and a specific number (e.g., three) of reserved images 52 related to the second special symbol that is two more than the predetermined number (e.g., one) are displayed, if a state (missing) occurs in which multiple commands (a command to start the variable of the second special symbol, a command to stop the variable of the second special symbol, etc.) transmitted from the game control unit 200 cannot be normally received and then a command to start the variable of the second special symbol that makes the reserved number U2 a predetermined number (e.g., one) is received, the variable performance related to the second special symbol (a variable performance involving the variable display of the decorative symbol 41, the second small symbol 54B, and the second special symbol 55B) may be started, and the reserved images 52 related to the second special symbol that is one less than the specific number (e.g., three) may be displayed before the predetermined number (e.g., one) of reserved images 52 is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that even if a game ball enters the first start port 121 when the SPSP reach performance is being executed in the second special time-saving game state, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed. Here, even if a game ball enters the first start port 121 when the SP reach performance is being executed in the second special time-saving game state, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may not be displayed. Also, even if a game ball enters the second start port 122 when the SP reach performance is being executed in the second special time-saving game state, the reserved image 52 may not be displayed. Also, in the second special time-saving game state, if a game ball enters the second start port 122 when the SP reach performance is being executed, the reserved image 52 is displayed, whereas if a game ball enters the second start port 122 when the SPSP reach performance is being executed, the reserved image 52 may not be displayed.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may output a winning sound to notify the winning to the speaker 156 when the game ball wins the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 in the second special time-saving game state. And, when the game ball wins the second start port 122 when the SP reach performance is being executed in the second special time-saving game state, the winning sound may be output (at this time, the reserved image 52 may be displayed, or the reserved image 52 may not be displayed). On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second start port 122 when the SPSP reach performance is being executed in the second special time-saving game state, the winning sound may not be output. Also, even if the game ball wins the second start port 122 when the SP reach performance is being executed in the second special time-saving game state, the winning sound may not be output. Also, in the second special time-saving game state, when the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is being executed, if the first start port 121 is won, the winning sound may not be output. Also, in the second special time-saving game state, if the first start port 121 is won, in any case (before the reach performance, during the reach performance, during the fluctuation stop, etc.), the winning sound may not be output.

(Example of variation 23)
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 23) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 85. The variable performance in the variable performance example 23 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the second special time-saving game state, and a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the second special time-saving game state. The variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the variable performance example 23 is a variable performance executed when "EK1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 51(a). The variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the variable performance example 23 is a variable performance executed when "EO1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 51(b). In addition, in the following description, differences from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly described, and explanations of points that match each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 85(1), as the previous second special symbol is stopped, the performance control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the second small symbol 54B in the image display unit 114. At this time, an "X" is displayed in the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B. At this time, a "0" is displayed in the first reserved number display 53A and the second reserved number display 53B.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Fig. 85 (2), the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the first special symbol 55A starts to be displayed in a variable manner. Also, the time reduction remaining number image 714 is updated to "189 remaining".
Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in Fig. 85 (3), the second small symbol 54B and the second special symbol 55B start to change as the second special symbol starts to change. At this time, the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 are displayed. The third notification image 716 displays the text "140 seconds remaining," which indicates the remaining time for the change performance related to the first special symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(4), the second small symbol 54B "421" stops with the second special symbol being stopped, and "X" is displayed on the second special symbol 55B. At this time, the remaining time of the variable performance displayed on the third notification image 716 is updated to "138 seconds remaining."
Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in Fig. 85 (5), the second small symbol 54B and the second special symbol 55B start to change as the second special symbol starts to change. At this time, the remaining time of the change performance displayed in the third notification image 716 is updated to "1 second left".

Then, as shown in FIG. 85(6), the first small symbol 54A, "444", is displayed in a fixed and stopped state with the first special symbol 54A. At this time, "◯" is displayed in the first special symbol 55A. The third notification image 716 also shows the text "0 seconds left". Meanwhile, the variable display of the second small symbol 54B and the second special symbol 55B continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 86 (7), the second right hit image 717 is displayed. At this time, the first small symbol 54A is not displayed. On the other hand, the first special symbol 55A is displayed.

At this time, the second special symbol is stopped. That is, when the variable performance (variable performance related to the first special symbol) that was executed due to the special symbol lottery result being a big win is finished, the variable display of the second special symbol ends regardless of whether the variable time of the second special symbol set in the variable pattern has elapsed (even if the variable time has not elapsed). Also, when the second special symbol is stopped, the second small symbol 54B, "421", is fixed and stopped, and the second special symbol 55B is displayed as "x".
In addition, when the executed variation performance ends because the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, if the variation time of the second special symbol set in the variation pattern has not elapsed, the variation display of the second special symbol may continue, while the second small symbol 54B of the miss may be stopped and the second special symbol 55B may be displayed as "x". Then, when the variation time set in the variation pattern has elapsed, the second special symbol may be stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(8), the big win game notification image 709 and the second notification image 710 are displayed. At this time, the second small symbol 54B, the first reserved number display 53A, and the second reserved number display 53B are not displayed. Meanwhile, the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B are maintained displayed. At this time, each lamp emits a rainbow color, and the second performance sound that suggests or notifies that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win is output from the speaker 156.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 59 (17) and (18), and Figures 60 (19) and (20) are performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the second special time-saving game state, the display condition for the first shutter image 715 is that the display of the second special pattern begins after the display of the first special pattern, which is executed when the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win or a small win, begins. However, in the second special time-saving game state, when the display of the first special pattern is not being displayed (when it is stopped), the display condition for the first shutter image 715 may also be that the display of the first special pattern begins when the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85(1) and (2), the second small pattern 54B and the second special pattern 55B stopped and displayed with the stop display of the second special pattern are not hidden. The second small pattern 54B and the second special pattern 55B are not hidden even when the next variable display of the second special pattern is started, and are not hidden even when the next variable display of the first special pattern is started. The second small pattern 54B and the second special pattern 55B stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss are not hidden even if multiple special pattern variations are executed after that, and are not hidden regardless of the variation performance related to the multiple special pattern variations (even if the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is executed). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 85(6) and FIG. 86(7), the first small pattern 54A stopped and displayed with the stop display of the first special pattern is not hidden. That is, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can hide the stopped first small symbol 54A in the second special time-saving game state without hiding the stopped second small symbol 54B and the second special symbol 55B. Here, the second special time-saving game state is regarded as the second mode. Also, the first small symbol 54A is regarded as the first performance symbol. Also, the second small symbol 54B and the second special symbol 55B are both regarded as the second performance symbol.
In this case, while allowing the player to recognize each of the first presentation pattern corresponding to the first special pattern and the second presentation pattern corresponding to the second special pattern in the second mode, the player can be made to pay more attention to the second presentation pattern related to the main variable presentation, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the present embodiment, in the second special time-saving game state, the first small symbol 54A and the first special symbol 55A are displayed as the effect symbols corresponding to the first special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41, the second small symbol 54B and the second special symbol 55B are displayed as the effect symbols corresponding to the second special symbol. That is, in the second special time-saving game state, the types of effect symbols corresponding to the second special symbol are greater than the types of effect symbols corresponding to the first special symbol.
In this case, it is possible to allow the player to pay more attention to the variable presentation relating to the second special symbol which is mainly performed in the second special time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the variable presentation that is performed when the result of the first special pattern lottery in the second special time-saving game state is a big win or a small win, the execution of the role presentation, the vibration of the presentation button 161, the output of the first presentation sound, etc. is restricted.
Here, after the variable presentation that is performed when the result of the first special pattern lottery in the second special time-saving game state is a big win or a small win ends (for example, when gate 124 is won after the variable presentation ends), a role-play presentation, vibration of presentation button 161, output of the first presentation sound, etc. may be executed.

In addition, in the second special time-saving game state, even if the second special symbol is being displayed (changing presentation), when the first special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win and the first special symbol is displayed (changing presentation) starting, the display of the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 may start.

(Example of variation 24)
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 24) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 87. The variable performance in the variable performance example 24 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the second special time-saving game state, and a variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the second special time-saving game state. The variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the variable performance example 24 is a variable performance executed when "EO1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 51(b). The variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the variable performance example 24 is a variable performance executed when "EK1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 51(a). In addition, in the following description, differences from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly described, and explanations of points that match each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 87(1), as the previous second special symbol is stopped, the performance control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the second small symbol 54B in the image display unit 114. At this time, an "X" is displayed in the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B. At this time, a "0" is displayed in the first reserved number display 53A and the second reserved number display 53B.

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 87(2), the display of the decorative pattern 41, the second small pattern 54B, and the second special pattern 55B starts with the display of the second special pattern. In addition, the time reduction remaining number image 714 is updated to "189 remaining". In addition, the display of the variable image 51 is displayed.
Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Fig. 87 (3), the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the first special symbol 55A starts to be displayed in a variable manner. Also, the time-saving remaining number image 714 is updated to "188 remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (4), in conjunction with the stopping display of the second special pattern, decorative pattern 41 and second small pattern 54B, "421", are fixed and stopped, and "X" is displayed in second special pattern 55B.
After that, when the first special symbol stops without the game ball entering the second starting hole 122, the first small symbol 54A "444" stops and the first special symbol 55A "◯" is displayed as shown in Fig. 87 (5). Also, although not shown, the first small symbol 54A is then hidden.

Next, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the big win game notification image 709 and the second notification image 710 are displayed as shown in FIG. 87 (6). At this time, the second small symbol 54B, the first reserved number display 53A, and the second reserved number display 53B are not displayed. Meanwhile, the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B remain displayed. At this time, each lamp emits a rainbow color, and the second performance sound that suggests or notifies that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win is output from the speaker 156.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 59 (17) and (18), and Figures 60 (19) and (20) are performed.

In the state shown in FIG. 87(5), if the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the effect shown in FIG. 86(7) may be performed. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the effect shown in FIG. 87(6) may be performed.

(Example of variation 25)
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 25) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 88. The variable performance example 25 is an example of a variable performance executed twice based on two winnings in the first starting hole 121 in the second special time-saving game state. The first variable performance in the variable performance example 25 is a variable performance executed when "EL1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 51(a), and the second variable performance is a variable performance executed when "EK1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 51(a). In addition, in the following description, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly described, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, when the reserved number U1 and the reserved number U2 are both 0 and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both stopped and displayed in the second special time-saving game state, if a game ball enters the first start hole 121A (see FIG. 23), the display of the first special symbol starts to change, and the display of the first special symbol 55A starts to change, as shown in FIG. 88(1). At this time, the third right-hit image 726 is displayed, and a sound is output from the speaker 156 to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 111.
In addition, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121B (see Figure 23) in the second special time-saving game state, the third right-hit image 726 is not displayed, and no sound is output to prompt the player to launch the game ball to the right side of the game area 111.

Then, when the time has elapsed since the second special symbol has stopped and no game ball has entered the second start port 122, and the time measured by the performance control unit 300 since it received the customer waiting command reaches the time-up time (see S4305 in FIG. 43), the setting image 718 is displayed as shown in FIG. 88 (2). In other words, the customer waiting performance starts based on the time from the second special symbol has stopped and no game ball has entered the second start port 122, regardless of the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable performance based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting image 718 was displayed without a game ball entering the second starting hole 122, a customer waiting demo image 719 is displayed as shown in FIG. 88 (3). At this time, as the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, an "X" is displayed on the first special symbol 55A. On the other hand, even if the first special symbol 55A is stopped and displayed, the customer waiting demo image 719 is not hidden.

Next, when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121A, the display of the first special symbol begins to change, and as shown in FIG. 88 (4), the display of the first special symbol 55A begins to change. At this time, the third right-hit image 726 is displayed, and a sound is output from the speaker 156 to prompt the player to shoot the gaming ball to the right side of the gaming area 111. On the other hand, the customer waiting demo image 719 is not hidden.

Next, as the first special symbol stops, the first small symbol 54A, "444", stops and the first special symbol 55A displays "◯", as shown in FIG. 88 (5). On the other hand, the customer waiting demo image 719 is not hidden. Although not shown, the first small symbol 54A is then hidden and the first special symbol 55A continues to be displayed.
If the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121 before passing through the gate 124, the effect shown in Fig. 63 (5) is produced. If the gaming ball passes through the gate 124 before entering the first starting hole 121, the effect shown in Fig. 59 (17) is produced.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 59 (18), 60 (19) and (20) are performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the second special time-saving game state, even if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 or a variable effect based on the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the customer waiting effect is not limited. Therefore, the customer waiting effect can be performed at an appropriate timing according to the game situation, and it is possible to exert the intended appealing effect on the player.
In addition, even if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 during the execution of the customer waiting performance, the first shutter image 715 and the like are not displayed. However, even during the execution of the customer waiting performance, if a variable performance is performed due to the special symbol lottery result being a jackpot based on the entry into the first start hole 121, the first shutter image 715 may be displayed. In this case, the display of the third right hit image 726 and the output of a sound for encouraging the player to launch the game ball to the right side of the game area 111 may not be performed.
In addition, a customer waiting effect may be started during the varying display (variable effect) of the first special pattern in the second special time-saving game state.
In the variation performance example 25, the first start port 121 is won twice. Due to these two wins, the remaining number of variations of the special symbols that can be executed in the second special time-saving game state is reduced by two.

In addition, the execution of the customer waiting effect may be limited in the time-saving game state compared to the normal game state (the time until the customer waiting effect is executed may be longer). Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting effect appropriately according to the situation where the player has a high possibility of securing the gaming machine, that is, the time-saving game state which is advantageous to the player.
Furthermore, even in the normal game state, when the second special pattern is being displayed in a changing state or when the reserved number U2 is not "0", the customer waiting effect may not be executed, and during the time-saving game state, the customer waiting effect may not be executed, and during the time-saving game state, either the setting image 718 or the customer waiting demo image 719 may not be displayed.
In addition, during the normal game state, when the varying display of special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is being executed, the execution of the customer waiting effect may be restricted, and in the second special time-saving game state, the customer waiting effect may be allowed to be executed even if the varying display of the first special pattern is being executed.

(Example of variation 26)
FIG. 89 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 26) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 89. The variable performance in the variable performance example 26 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the second special time-saving game state, and a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the second special time-saving game state. The variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the variable performance example 26 is a variable performance executed when "EK1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 51(a). The variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the variable performance example 26 is a variable performance executed when "EN1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 51(b). In addition, in the following description, differences from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly described, and explanations of points that match each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 89 (1), as the previous second special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol 41 and the second small symbol 54B are fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 by the performance control unit 300. At this time, an "X" is displayed in the second special symbol 55B. At this time, a "0" is displayed in the first reserved number display 53A and the second reserved number display 53B. At this time, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the display of the first special symbol starts to change as the display of the first special symbol starts to change.

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 89 (2), the second special symbol starts to change, and the second small symbol 54B and the second special symbol 55B start to change. At this time, the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 are also displayed. The third notification image 716 displays the text "140 seconds remaining," which indicates the remaining time for the change performance related to the first special symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(3), when the first special symbol is displayed, the first small symbol 54A "444" is displayed in a fixed and stopped state, and a "◯" is displayed in the first special symbol 55A. At this time, the third notification image 716 shows the text "0 seconds remaining." At this time, when the second special time-saving symbol is displayed, the second small symbol 54B "444" is displayed in a fixed and stopped state, and a "◯" is displayed in the second special symbol 55B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(4), the second right-hit image 717 is displayed. At this time, the first small symbol 54A and the second small symbol 54B are not displayed. Meanwhile, the first special symbol 55A and the second special symbol 55B continue to be displayed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 59 (16) to (18) and Figures 60 (19) and (20) are performed.

In addition, in the variable performance example 26, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed because the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win in the second special time-saving game state, the variable display of the second special symbol is started because the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win. In this case, the variable display of the second special symbol, which started after the variable display of the first special symbol, may end before the first special symbol. In this case, even before the variable display of the first special symbol ends, when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, a specific performance such as a role performance, vibration of the performance button 161, output of the first performance sound, display of the first notification image 708, and illumination of each lamp in rainbow colors may be performed. In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, although the second small symbol 54B and the second special symbol 55B of the double number are displayed (see FIG. 89 (3)), the execution of the specific performance may be restricted, and the performance shown in FIG. 89 (4) may be executed.

(Example of variation 27)
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 27) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 90. Variable performance example 27 is an example of a variable performance based on winning into the first starting hole 121 in the second special time-saving game state. The variable performance in variable performance example 27 is a variable performance executed when "EK1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 51 (a). In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variable performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and as shown in FIG. 90(1), the first special symbol 55A is displayed in a variable manner, and the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 are displayed. Note that the state shown in FIG. 90(1) may be any state when the first shutter image 715 is displayed in the second special time-saving game state among the variable presentation examples described above.

Next, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the image display section 114 goes out and no image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 90(2).
Next, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored, a restoration image 721 and a first right hit image 712 are displayed, as shown in FIG. 90 (3).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(4), the decorative symbol 41 and the second small symbol 54B, "123", are fixed and stopped. Also, the stage image 701 corresponding to the second special time-saving game state is displayed again. Meanwhile, neither the first shutter image 715 nor the third notification image 716 is displayed. Also, at this time, the variable display of the first special symbol continues, but "x" is displayed on the first special symbol 55A.
Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, the display of the second special symbol starts, and the display of the decorative symbol 41, the second small symbol 54B, and the second special symbol 55B starts, as shown in Fig. 90 (5). On the other hand, neither the first shutter image 715 nor the third notification image 716 is displayed.

Then, with the stop display of the second special symbol, as shown in Fig. 90 (6), the decorative symbol 41 and the second small symbol 54B, "421", are fixed and stopped. Also, "x" is displayed in the second special symbol 55B.
After this, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, but the first special symbol 55A maintains the display of "X" without displaying "O". Furthermore, if the game ball enters the first start hole 121 before passing through the gate 124, the effect shown in Fig. 63 (5) is performed. Also, if the game ball passes through the gate 124 before entering the first start hole 121, the effect shown in Fig. 59 (17) is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored when the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 are displayed in the second special time-saving gaming state, the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 are not displayed again. Also, in the second special time-saving gaming state, if the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored during the variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot, an "X" is displayed in the first special symbol 55A.
In addition, in the second special time-saving game state, if the power to the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off and then restored while the first special pattern is being displayed in a changing state based on the result of the special pattern lottery being a jackpot, an "X" will be displayed on the first special pattern 55A, and then, as the first special pattern is displayed as stopped, the first special pattern 55A may switch to a "O".

In addition, in the variation performance example 27, when the power to the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off and then restored while the first special pattern is being varied, the stage image 701 and the decorative pattern 41 are displayed before the variation display of the first special pattern that was being executed ends (see Figure 90 (4)), but this is not limited to the above.
When the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off and then restored during the variable display of the first special symbol, the display of the recovery image 721 is maintained until the variable display of the first special symbol that was being executed is completed, and the stage image 701 and the decorative symbol 41 may not be displayed. Then, the image shown in FIG. 90 (4) may be displayed with the stopped display of the first special symbol that was being executed. After this, if the game ball enters the first start hole 121 before the game ball passes through the gate 124, the performance shown in FIG. 63 (5) may be performed, and if the game ball passes through the gate 124 before the game ball enters the first start hole 121, the performance shown in FIG. 59 (17) may be performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the first presentation in which neither the variable image 51 nor the reserved image 52 is displayed is the second special time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this.
The first presentation that does not display the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 may be an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation in the normal game state, the first special time-saving game state, or the second special time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the first starting hole 121 is won in a time-saving game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state), there are times when the third right-hit image 726 is not displayed and a sound is not output to prompt the player to launch the game ball to the right side of the game area 111 (see Figures 69 (2), 72 (5), 83 (6), 85 (2), and 87 (3)), but this is not limited to this.
Even in a time-saving game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state), when the ball enters the first starting hole 121A (see Figure 69 (2), Figure 72 (5), Figure 83 (6), Figure 85 (2), Figure 87 (3)), a third right-hit image 726 may be displayed and a sound may be output to encourage the player to launch the game ball to the right side of the game area 111.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display size of the decorative pattern 41 is the same in the first special time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this.
The display size of the decorative pattern 41 may be smaller in the second special time-saving game state than in the first special time-saving game state. Also, the display size of the decorative pattern 41 may be smaller in the first special time-saving game state than in the second special time-saving game state.
Also, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed on one side (upper side, lower side, left side, right side, etc., farther from the center) of the image display unit 114 in the second special time-saving game state than in the first special time-saving game state. Also, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed on one side of the image display unit 114 in the first special time-saving game state than in the second special time-saving game state.

Also, in this embodiment, the display manner of the first shutter image 715 is the same in the normal gaming state, the first special time-saving gaming state, and the second special time-saving gaming state, but this is not limited to this.
The display manner of the first shutter image 715 may be different between the normal game state, the first special time-saving game state, and the second special time-saving game state, for example, the shape of the shutter in the first shutter image 715 may be different.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the small symbol 54 of a missing number is displayed in a stopped state in the normal game state, the first special time-saving game state, and the second special time-saving game state, the small symbol 54 of a missing number displayed in a stopped state does not become hidden until the next variable performance starts, and when the small symbol 54 of a double number is displayed in a stopped state, the small symbol 54 of a double number displayed in a stopped state becomes hidden until the next variable performance starts (during the jackpot game), but this is not limited to the above.
Even if the small symbols 54 of double numbers are displayed stationary in the normal game state, the first special time-saving game state, and the second special time-saving game state, the small symbols 54 of double numbers displayed stationary do not have to be hidden until the next variable performance starts (during the big win game).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that in certain modes (normal game state, first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state), it is possible to make the predetermined performance patterns (decorative pattern 41, first small pattern 54A, second small pattern 54B, etc.) invisible during the execution of the first variable performance (variable performance related to the first special pattern, variable performance related to the second special pattern). Here, making it possible to make the predetermined performance patterns invisible during the execution of the first variable performance also includes the case where the predetermined performance patterns are invisible before the start of the first variable performance and are displayed during the execution of the first variable performance.

In addition, even in the normal game state or the first special time-saving game state, regardless of the result of the second special pattern lottery (even if the lottery result is a miss), the second small pattern 54B may be displayed changing and stopped in conjunction with the second special pattern changing and stopped.
Furthermore, even in the second special time-saving game state, regardless of the result of the first special pattern lottery (even if the lottery result is a miss), the first small pattern 54A may be displayed changing and stopped in conjunction with the first special pattern changing and stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first special pattern and the second special pattern are displayed in a changing manner at the same time, if one of them is displayed stationary in a manner that suggests or notifies a big win or a small win first, the changing display of the other pattern also ends (is interrupted), but this is not limited to this.
When the first special pattern and the second special pattern are displayed in a changing manner at the same time, even if one of them is displayed stationary first in a manner that suggests or notifies of a big win or a small win, the changing display of the other (the other small pattern 54) may be made uninterrupted (continue until the end of the original changing time).

In addition, in this embodiment, the display positions of the first small pattern 54A and the second small pattern 54B are switched between the normal game state and the first special time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this.
The display position of the first small pattern 54A and the display position of the second small pattern 54B may be the same in the normal game state, the first special time-saving game state, and the second special time-saving game state.
In addition, not only may the display positions of the first small pattern 54A and the second small pattern 54B be swapped between the normal game state and the first special time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state, but the display positions of the first reserved number display 53A and the second reserved number display 53B, and the display positions of the first special pattern 55A and the second special pattern 55B may also be swapped.

In addition, in this embodiment, even in the second special time-saving game state, the remaining time-saving number image 714 is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
In the second special time-saving game state, the number of times J of the selection of the special symbol in the time-saving game state is set to be larger (200 times) than in the first special time-saving game state. In other words, the second special time-saving game state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special time-saving game state. Therefore, in the second special time-saving game state, the time-saving remaining number image 714 may not be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, depending on the type of big win or small win, when the first shutter image 715 is displayed, the third alarm image 716 or the fourth alarm image 723 is displayed (the images displayed are different), but this is not limited to this.
Regardless of the type of win, whether big win or small win, the notification image displayed when the first shutter image 715 is displayed may be the same image.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol 55 suggests or notifies the result of the special symbol lottery by a symbol, but is not limited to this.
The special symbol 55 may suggest or notify the result of the special symbol lottery by, for example, a color. For example, the special symbol 55 may perform a variable display in which red and blue change rapidly, and may be displayed in red if the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win, and may be displayed in blue if the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss.

In addition, in this embodiment, the timing of the non-display of the first small symbol 54A and the first special symbol 55A is not limited to the above-mentioned example. In the above-mentioned example, the timing of the non-display of the first small symbol 54A and the timing of the non-display of the first special symbol 55A may be interchanged. That is, the first special symbol 55A may be hidden before the first small symbol 54A.
In addition, the timing of the non-display of the second small symbol 54B and the second special symbol 55B is not limited to the above-mentioned example. In the above-mentioned example, the timing of the non-display of the second small symbol 54B and the timing of the non-display of the second special symbol 55B may be interchanged. That is, the second special symbol 55B may be hidden before the second small symbol 54B.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first small pattern 54A and the second small pattern 54B have the same display size, but this is not limited to this.
In the normal game state and the first special time-saving game state, the first small symbol 54A may be displayed in a larger size than the second small symbol 54B. Also, in the second special time-saving game state, the second small symbol 54B may be displayed in a larger size than the first small symbol 54A.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display size of the decorative pattern 41 is the same in the first special time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this.
The display size of the decorative pattern 41 may be larger in the second special time-saving game state than in the first special time-saving game state. Also, the display size of the decorative pattern 41 may be larger in the first special time-saving game state than in the second special time-saving game state.
In addition, the display size of the characters in the decorative pattern 41 may be larger in the first special time-saving game state than in the normal game state. On the other hand, the display size of the characters in the decorative pattern 41 may be larger in the normal game state than in the second special time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when an SP reach performance is executed in the normal game state, the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily made invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see) (see Figure 55 (5)), and in the time-saving game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state), the decorative pattern 41 is not made invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see) even when an SP reach performance is executed, but this is not limited to this.
Even in the time-saving game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state), when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is started, the decorative pattern 41 may be temporarily made invisible (difficult to see or invisible). Also, in the normal game state, even when the SP reach effect is executed, the decorative pattern 41 may not be made invisible (difficult to see or invisible).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, which are both displayed in a variable manner and which indicates a big win or a small win as a result of the lottery, is displayed in a stopped state first, the variable display of the other special pattern is stopped (ended midway) (see Figures 59 (16), 61 (6), 84 (11), and 86 (7)), but this is not limited to this.
When the game control unit 200 stops and displays one of the first and second special symbols, which is a big win or a small win as a lottery result, first, the game control unit 200 may suspend the display of the other special symbol. In this case, the display of the other special symbol according to the display of the other special symbol is also suspended. Then, when the big win game ends, the display of the suspended special symbol may be resumed. In this case, the display control unit 300 may resume the display of the other special symbol according to the resumed display of the other special symbol.

Furthermore, when the game control unit 200 stops and displays first one of the first and second special symbols, which is a big win or a small win as a lottery result, regardless of whether the special symbol stopped and displayed first is the first or second special symbol and regardless of whether the game is in a normal game state or a time-saving game state. Then, when the big win game ends, the game control unit 200 may resume the stopping of the changing display of the special symbol.
In addition, when the game control unit 200 first stops and displays one of the first and second special patterns, both of which are being displayed in a variable manner, and the one that results in a big win or small win as a result of the lottery, regardless of whether the special pattern that was displayed in a variable manner first is the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and regardless of whether the game is in a normal game state or a time-saving game state, the game control unit 200 may cancel (end midway) the variable display of the other special pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power to the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off and then restored, the stage image 701 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the first stage, and the decorative pattern 41 "123" is displayed in a stopped state (see Figure 68 (4)).
Here, the performance control unit 300 may determine the display mode of the stage image 701 to be displayed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after being cut off by lottery from among a plurality of stages based on the random number value acquired after the restoration. As an example, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after being cut off, the performance control unit 300 may determine the display mode of the stage image 701 to be the first stage with a probability of 70% and to be the second stage different from the first stage with a probability of 30%. In other words, the display mode of the stage image 701 to be displayed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after being cut off is not limited to one stage.
The performance control unit 300 may also determine the number of the decorative pattern 41 to be displayed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after being cut off by lottery from among a plurality of number combinations. As an example, the performance control unit 300 may determine the decorative pattern 41 to be displayed as "123" with a 70% probability and as "246" with a 30% probability when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after being cut off. In other words, the decorative pattern 41 to be displayed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after being cut off is not limited to one combination.

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment is common to the first embodiment in that it executes a variable performance according to the variable display of the special symbol. On the other hand, the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it executes a variable performance according to the variable display of the normal symbol as well as the variable performance according to the variable display of the special symbol.
The second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail below. Note that, below, configurations different from the first embodiment will be described, and descriptions of configurations that are the same as the first embodiment will be omitted. Also, each process and each performance in the second embodiment will be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 100 having the configuration shown in FIG.

The pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment has, as game states, a no-time-reduction state in which the normal symbol variation time is long, and a time-reduction state in which the normal symbol variation time is shorter than the no-time-reduction state. Here, the time-reduction state is a state that is more advantageous to the player than the no-time-reduction state.
In this embodiment, the electric support state and the time-saving state are controlled simultaneously. In the following description, the electric support state and the time-saving state are simply referred to as the time-saving game state, and the state without the electric support and the time-saving state is simply referred to as the no-time-saving state (normal game state).
In the present embodiment, a first time-shortened gaming state and a second time-shortened gaming state are provided as the time-shortened gaming state. The first time-shortened gaming state and the second time-shortened gaming state will be described in detail later.

[Gate switch processing]
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the contents of the gate switch process of this embodiment.
In this gate switch process, the game control unit 200 first judges whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 has been turned ON (S9101). If the gate switch 214 has been turned ON, the game control unit 200 then judges whether the number of reserved balls G that have not yet been changed is less than the upper limit (S9102). In the example shown in FIG. 91, the upper limit is set to 4 balls. If the number of reserved balls G has reached the upper limit (No in S9102), no more winning balls that have not yet been changed can be reserved, and the gate switch process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the reserved number G is less than the upper limit (Yes in S9102), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for the lottery due to this winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S9103). These random numbers include a winning random number value that determines whether or not there is a win, a design random number value that determines the type of win (winning design random number value), a variation pattern random number value that specifies the variation pattern in the design variation, a reach random number value that determines whether or not there is a variation pattern (variation time) that can execute a reach performance when there is a loss, and the like.
Next, the game control unit 200 performs a normal symbol pre-determination process (S9104). The normal symbol pre-determination process is a process for determining the random number of a winning ball (reserved ball) that has already been obtained by winning at the gate 124 but has not yet been determined by the normal symbol process (described later) before the random number is determined by the normal symbol process (pre-determination).

The performance control unit 300 of this embodiment can perform a preview performance that suggests the result of the random number judgment by the normal pattern processing based on the result of the random number judgment (normal pattern pre-judgment result) determined by the normal pattern pre-judgment processing before the random number is judged by the normal pattern processing and the judgment result is announced. This preview performance is, for example, the display of the reserved image 52 in response to the occurrence of a winning ball (reserved ball) for which a random number has already been obtained by winning at the gate 124 but the random number has not yet been judged by the normal pattern processing. This preview performance based on the pre-judgment suggests to the player the judgment result when the random number is judged by the normal pattern processing afterwards for the reserved ball corresponding to the pre-judgment related to the preview performance. This allows the player to play while having expectations about the reserved ball. Details of the preview performance based on the pre-judgment will be described later.

Next, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number G (S9105).
After this, the game control unit 200 sets a normal map pre-determination result command including pre-determination information from the normal map pre-determination process of S9104 in RAM 203 in order to notify the performance control unit 300 of the normal map pre-determination result (S9106).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets in the RAM 203 a reserved number G increase command to notify the performance control unit 300 of the increase in reserved number G due to S9104 (S9107), and ends the processing for the winning at gate 124.

In this embodiment, regardless of the game state, the normal symbol pre-determination process is performed and a normal symbol pre-determination result command is sent to the performance control unit 300. In this case, the performance control unit 300 executes a pre-determination performance for a normal symbol in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), and may limit the execution of a pre-determination performance for a normal symbol in the normal game state (not executing, executing with a lower probability than the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), executing with a lower probability than the pre-determination performance for the first special symbol in the normal game state or the pre-determination performance for the second special symbol in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), etc.). In addition, in the normal game state, the normal symbol pre-determination result command may not be sent to the performance control unit 300, thereby limiting the pre-determination performance for a normal symbol.
In this embodiment, the pre-determination process is performed on the first special symbol regardless of the game state, and a pre-determination result command is sent to the performance control unit 300. In this case, the performance control unit 300 may execute a pre-determination performance on the first special symbol in the normal game state, and limit the execution of the pre-determination performance on the first special symbol in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) (not execute, execute with a lower probability than the normal game state, execute with a lower probability than the pre-determination performance on the normal symbol in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) or the pre-determination performance on the second special symbol in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), etc.). Also, in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), the pre-determination performance on the first special symbol may be limited by not sending a pre-determination result command on the first special symbol to the performance control unit 300.
In this embodiment, the pre-determination process is performed on the second special symbol regardless of the game state, and a pre-determination result command is sent to the performance control unit 300. In this case, the performance control unit 300 may execute a pre-determination performance for the second special symbol in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), and may limit the execution of the pre-determination performance for the second special symbol in the normal game state (not executing, executing with a lower probability than the normal game state, executing with a lower probability than the pre-determination performance for the first special symbol in the normal game state or the pre-determination performance for the normal symbol in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state)). Also, in the normal game state, the pre-determination performance for the second special symbol may be limited by not sending a pre-determination result command for the second special symbol to the performance control unit 300.

[Normal pattern processing]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal pattern processing in this embodiment.
In this normal symbol processing, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S9201).

If the auxiliary game flag is ON, the auxiliary game state is already set and the normal symbol is stopped, so the normal symbol processing ends without starting the normal symbol change (Yes in S9201). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S9201), the normal symbol change control unit 236 then judges whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is during normal symbol change (S9202). If the normal symbol is not during change (No in S9202), the normal symbol change control unit 236 then judges whether the reserved number G (see FIG. 91) of unchanged normal symbols is 1 or more (S9203). If the reserved number G=0 (No in S9203), this means that there is no winning to start the lottery for the normal symbol, so the processing ends without starting the normal symbol change.

In contrast, if the reserved number G is 1 or more (Yes in S9203), the normal pattern change control unit 236 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved number G (S9204).
Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 generates a game status command indicating the current game status of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S9205). The game status command set in S9205 is included in the variation start command set in S9211 of Fig. 92, and is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of Fig. 9.

Next, the normal symbol change control unit 236 judges whether the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a time-saving gaming state (S9206). If the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a time-saving gaming state (YES in S9206), the normal symbol change control unit 236 turns OFF the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S9207). On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in a time-saving gaming state (NO in S9206), the customer waiting flag is not turned OFF.

Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 executes a win determination process and a normal symbol variation pattern selection process by a separate routine (S9208, S9209). As will be described in detail later, this win determination process and normal symbol variation pattern selection process determines setting information (winning symbol, game state, variation pattern, etc.) for the variation of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 223. This information is included in the variation start command sent to the performance control unit 300.

Next, the normal symbol change control unit 236 starts changing the normal symbol displayed by the normal symbol display 223 shown in FIG. 3 based on the setting contents determined in the winning judgment process and the normal symbol change pattern selection process (S9210). Then, a change start command including setting information indicating this setting content (winning symbol, game state, change pattern, etc.) is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S9211). The change start command set in S9211 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9.

Next, the normal symbol change control unit 236 judges whether the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a time-saving game state (S9212). If the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a time-saving game state (YES in S9212), the normal symbol change control unit 236 adds 1 to the number of normal symbol changes executed in the time-saving game state (S9213), generates a change count command indicating the added number of changes, and sets it in the RAM 203 (S9214). The change count command set in S9214 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9. On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in a time-saving game state (NO in S9212), the change count is not added and the change count command is not generated.

After the normal pattern change has started in S9210, or if it is determined in S9202 that the normal pattern is changing (Yes in S9202), the normal pattern change control unit 236 determines whether the change time has elapsed (S9215). In other words, it determines whether the time elapsed since the normal pattern change started in S9210 has reached the change time set in the normal pattern change pattern selection process in S9209. If the change time has not elapsed (No in S9215), the normal pattern change continues, and the normal pattern processing ends.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (Yes in S9215), the normal pattern fluctuation control unit 236 first stops the fluctuation of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display 223 at the pattern determined in the hit determination process of S9208 (S9216). Then, the normal pattern fluctuation control unit 236 executes processing during the stop of another routine (S9217). In addition, the normal pattern fluctuation control unit 236 sets a fluctuation stop command to stop the decorative pattern in the RAM 203 (S9218). The fluctuation stop command set in S9218 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9.

As described above, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game is in a normal game mode or a time-saving game mode, when the variable display of the normal pattern is executed, a variable start command for the normal pattern is sent to the performance control unit 300. Therefore, the performance control unit 300 can grasp that the variable display of the normal pattern is being executed, and it becomes possible to execute a performance according to the variable display of the normal pattern (for example, the variable display of the third small pattern 54C, etc., which will be described later).

In addition, in the normal game state, the command to stop the change of the normal pattern may not be sent to the performance control unit 300, and in the time-saving game state, the command to stop the change of the normal pattern may be sent to the performance control unit 300. Also, in the normal game state, the command to stop the change of the first special pattern may be sent to the performance control unit 300, and in the time-saving game state, the command to stop the change of the first special pattern may not be sent to the performance control unit 300.

In addition, when the variable display of the normal pattern is executed in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), a command that is not sent in the normal game state may be sent to the performance control unit 300, such as a command specifying the remaining number of times that the variable display of the normal pattern can be executed in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state). In other words, the number of commands sent to the performance control unit 300 when the variable display of the normal pattern is executed during the time-saving game state may be greater than the number of commands sent to the performance control unit 300 when the variable display of the normal pattern is executed during the normal game state. In this case, the performance control unit 300 can appropriately grasp the remaining number of time-saving times, and can perform processing such as notifying the remaining number of time-saving times.

[Hit detection process]
FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing the contents of the hit determination process shown in S9208 of FIG.
In this winning judgment process, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 of the game control unit 200 first judges the winning random number value in this normal symbol lottery (S9301), and judges whether or not a long or short win has occurred (S9302, S9305). Whether or not a long or short win has occurred is determined by judging whether or not the value of the winning random number obtained in S9103 of FIG. 91 is the value set as the winning value of the winning, and whether or not the value of the winning symbol random number obtained in S9103 of FIG. 91 matches the value set as the winning value of the long win or the value set as the winning value of the short win (see FIG. 97-1(a) and (b) described later).

If the result of the random number judgment in S9301 is a long win (Yes in S9302), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 then judges the winning symbol random number value (S9303). Depending on the result of this judgment, the type of win is determined. The type of win is determined by whether the value of the winning symbol random number acquired in S9103 of FIG. 91 matches any of the values preset for each type of win (see FIG. 97-1(b) described later).
After the above determination, the normal pattern change control unit 236 sets a normal pattern designation command, which is a signal indicating a pattern (long winning pattern) representing the type of winning determined by the winning pattern random number determination, as setting information in the RAM 203 (S9304).

If the result of the random number judgment in S9301 is a short win (No in S9302, Yes in S9305), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 then judges the winning symbol random number value (S9306). Depending on the result of this judgment, the type of short win is determined.
After the above determination, the normal pattern change control unit 236 sets a normal pattern designation command, which is a signal indicating a pattern (short win pattern) representing the type of short win determined by the winning pattern random number determination, as setting information in the RAM 203 (S9307).

If the result of the random number judgment in S9301 is neither a long win nor a short win (No in S9302 and S9305), then the normal symbol variation control unit 236 sets a normal symbol designation command, which is a signal indicating a symbol that indicates a loss in the lottery (hereinafter, a losing symbol), in the RAM 203 as setting information (S9308). Note that the normal symbol designation command set in the RAM 203 in steps 9304, 9307, and 9308 is a command included in the variation start command set in the RAM 203 in step 9211 of the normal symbol processing described using FIG. 92.

[Selection of general map fluctuation patterns]
FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the contents of the general map variation pattern selection process (S9209 in FIG. 92).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first refers to the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 (whether it is a normal game state, a first time-saving game state, or a second time-saving game state) (S9401). Then, using the judgment result of S9302 of the winning judgment process (FIG. 93), it is judged whether or not a long win has occurred in this normal pattern lottery (S9402). Then, if it is a long win (Yes in S9402), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out the variation pattern table for the long win from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S9403).

On the other hand, if a long win has not occurred (No in S9402), the variation pattern selection unit 235 then uses the result of the judgment in S9305 of the win judgment process (FIG. 93) to judge whether or not a short win has occurred in this normal pattern lottery (S9404). Then, if a short win has occurred (YES in S9404), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out the variation pattern table for short wins from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S9405).

On the other hand, if a short win has not occurred (NO in S9404), a random number value is judged to determine whether or not to perform a reach effect to make the player expect a win (S9406). Whether or not to perform a reach effect is determined by judging whether or not the reach random number value acquired in S9103 of Fig. 91 matches a preset value (see Fig. 97-1(c) described later).
If the result of the determination using the random number value indicates that a reach effect is to be performed (Yes in S9407), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out a reach-use variation pattern table from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S9408). If the reach effect is not to be performed (No in S9407), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out a loss-use variation pattern table from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S9409).

Next, the variation pattern selection unit 235 judges the variation pattern random number value using the variation pattern random number value acquired in S9103 of FIG. 91 and the variation pattern table set in S9403, S9405, S9408, and S9409 (S9410). That is, the variation pattern selection unit 235 refers to the variation pattern table set in the RAM 203 and selects a variation pattern according to the random number value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is acquired, the variation pattern table referenced differs depending on the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 (whether it is in a time-saving state or not), the result of the normal pattern lottery (whether it is a long win or not, whether it is a short win or not, and whether a reach performance is performed if neither a long win nor a short win has occurred), and the like, and therefore the determined variation pattern differs. However, for example, the same variation pattern table may be used in the case of a long win and the case of a short win.

Then, the variation pattern selection unit 235 sets the variation pattern designation command, which is a signal indicating the variation pattern selected in S9410, in the RAM 203 as setting information (S9411). The variation pattern designation command set in S9411 is included in the variation start command set in S9211 of FIG. 92, and is sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9. Details of the variation pattern selected in this embodiment and its setting will be described later.

[Processing during stoppage]
FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of the processing during stoppage in this embodiment.
In this stop processing, the game control unit 200 first checks whether the time-saving flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S9501). If the time-saving flag is ON (Yes in S9501), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of selections in the time-saving state (the number of changes of the pattern that is the target of the stop processing among the first special pattern, the second special pattern, and the normal pattern) J (S9502), and checks whether the number of selections J has become 0 (S9503). Here, in this embodiment, the number of selections is determined for each of the first special pattern, the second special pattern, and the normal pattern. For example, in the first time-saving game state, the number of selections (number of changes) J of the first special pattern is determined to be 5 times, the number of selections (number of changes) J of the second special pattern is determined to be 1 time, and the number of selections (number of changes) J of the normal pattern is determined to be 100 times. In the second time-saving game state, the number of times J for the first special symbol is drawn (number of times it changes) is set to 5 times, the number of times J for the second special symbol is drawn (number of times it changes) is set to 1 time, and the number of times J for the normal symbol is drawn (number of times it changes) is set to 120 times.

Then, if the number of times J is selected for at least one of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is 0 (Yes in S9503), the time-saving flag is turned OFF (S9504). Note that the operation of turning ON the time-saving flag and setting the initial value of the number of times J is performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 21) in the first big prize winning port process (FIG. 19).
In addition, if the number of selections J is not 0 for any of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol (NO in S9503), the game control unit 200 generates a time-saving number command indicating the value of the number of selections J in the time-saving state and sets it in the RAM 203 (S9505). The time-saving number command set in S9505 is transmitted to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

If the time-saving flag is OFF (No in S9501), or after the time-saving flag is turned OFF in S9504, or after the time-saving count command is set in S9505, the game control unit 200 then generates a game status command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S9506). The game status command set in S9506 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 in FIG.
Next, the game control unit 200 judges whether or not the current symbol lottery has resulted in a jackpot (S9507). Here, the judgment of whether or not the current symbol lottery has resulted in a jackpot can be judged based on the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process (FIG. 14). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the chart of FIG. 96(b) described later is set, the answer is Yes in S9507. If a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is set in the RAM 203 by the jackpot judgment process, or if the current symbol lottery is a normal symbol lottery, the answer is No in S9507.

If it is a jackpot (Yes in S9507), the game control unit 200 then turns on the jackpot game flag (S9508), which causes the game state setting in the RAM 203 to become the jackpot game state.
Next, the game control unit 200 initializes the value of the number of lottery draws J (S9509). Furthermore, if the time-saving flag is ON in S9501 and the number of lottery draws J is not 0 in S9503, the game control unit 200 turns the time-saving flag OFF (S9510).

After initializing the value of the number of lottery draws J in S9510, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation of the big win game (S9511).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets an opening command for performing an effect in an opening operation according to the big win game flag in the performance control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S9512), and ends the processing during the stop. This opening command is transmitted to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing shown in S906 of FIG.

On the other hand, if the result of the current special symbol lottery is not a big win (No in S9507), the game control unit 200 next determines whether or not the result of the current symbol lottery is a small win (S9513).
If it is a small win (YES in S9513), the game control unit 200 then turns on the small win game flag (S9514). This causes the game state setting in the RAM 203 to become a small win game state. Furthermore, the game control unit 200 starts an opening operation for the small win game (S9515).
Next, the game control unit 200 sets an opening command for performing an effect in an opening operation corresponding to the small win game flag in the performance control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S9516). This opening command is transmitted to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

Also, if the winning combination is not a small win (No in S9513), the game control unit 200 next judges whether or not the result of this symbol lottery is a win (the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win) (S9517).
If the reel is a win (YES in S9517), the game control unit 200 then turns on the auxiliary game flag (S9518). As a result, the game state setting in the RAM 203 becomes the auxiliary game state.
Next, the game control unit 200 sets an opening command for performing a performance corresponding to the auxiliary game in the performance control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S9519). This opening command is transmitted to the performance control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

If the winning combination is not found (NO in S9517), the game control unit 200 judges whether the number of times the special symbol variation display has been performed since the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, resetting of variation count) has reached a specific number (300 times in this embodiment) (S9520). If the specific number of times has been reached (YES in S9520), the game control unit 200 executes a game status setting process (S9521).
Also, if the number of times the variable display has not reached the specific number (NO in S9520), the processing during the stoppage is terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the number of times J of the selection of the special symbol in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) becomes 0, even if the number of times J of the selection of the normal symbol remains, the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) ends. Therefore, the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) can be ended according to the progress of the game (the execution status of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol), and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.
In addition, when the number of times J for the selection of normal symbols in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) becomes 0, the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) ends even if the number of times J for the selection of special symbols remains. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel gameplay in which the time-saving game state ends not with the number of times that the selection of the special symbol is performed, but with the number of times that the selection of the normal symbol is not performed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.
In the second time-shortened game state, the time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state) may not end even if the number of times J of the first special symbol is drawn or the number of times J of the normal symbol is drawn becomes 0. In other words, in the second time-shortened game state, the time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state) may end only when the number of times J of the second special symbol is drawn becomes 0.

In addition, the number of times J for the first special symbol in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) is set to a value larger than the upper limit memory number "4" of the reserved number U1 for the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) ending due to the execution of a variable display of a special symbol based on the reserved number stored at the time when the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, the number of times J for drawing special symbols in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) is set to be less than the number of times J for drawing normal symbols in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state). In this way, the player will execute the variable display of normal symbols rather than the variable display of special symbols so that the time-saving game state does not end early, and it is possible to provide an unprecedented and novel playability of the time-saving game state and to increase the interest in the game.
In this embodiment, the number of times J of the second special symbol drawn in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) is a value smaller than the upper limit memory number "4" of the reserved number U2 for the second special symbol, but is not limited to this. The number of times J of the second special symbol drawn in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) may be a value larger than the upper limit memory number "4" of the reserved number U2 for the second special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of times J to draw special symbols in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) is set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number of times J to draw special symbols in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) may be set to a common number of times J to draw for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. And, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), the number of times J to draw may be subtracted. In this case, a fair game can be provided by preventing the game result from being favored depending on the game method used by the player, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the number of times J to be drawn for normal symbols in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) may be set to be greater when the lottery result is determined to be a big win or a small win in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and a variable display of a special symbol (jackpot game) is executed because the lottery result is determined to be a big win or a small win in the normal game state, than when a variable display of a special symbol (jackpot game) is executed because the lottery result is determined to be a big win or a small win in the normal game state. By doing this, the number of times J to be drawn can be set differently depending on the game state and the type of jackpot game, making it possible to improve playability and increase interest in the game.

In addition, when the number of times J of selections of normal symbols in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) becomes "0" and the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) is terminated, the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) may be terminated when the variable display of the normal symbols starts (immediately after the start), not when the variable time of the normal symbols has elapsed and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, or when the stopped time has elapsed. In this case, the time-saving game state can be terminated at a timing that is easy for the player to grasp, regardless of the variable time of the normal symbols, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.
In addition, in the case where the number of times J of drawings for a special symbol becomes "0" during a time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state) to end the time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state), the time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state) is configured to end when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed and the special symbol has been stopped and displayed. Similarly, in the case where the number of times J of drawings for a normal symbol becomes "0" to end the time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state), the time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state) may be configured to end when the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and the normal symbol has been stopped and displayed, or the time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state) may be configured to end when the stop time of the normal symbol has elapsed.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of random numbers (judgment table) used in the special pattern lottery in this embodiment.
Fig. 96(a) shows an example of the configuration of the big win random number used in the special symbol lottery, Fig. 96(b) shows an example of the configuration of the big win random number used in the special symbol lottery, Fig. 96(c) shows an example of the configuration of the small win random number used in the special symbol lottery, and Fig. 96(d) shows an example of the configuration of the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 121 in the normal game state. The contents shown in Figs. 96(b) to (d) are the same as those shown in Figs. 25(b) to (d).

96(a), a jackpot and a small jackpot are set as the jackpot random number determination value. The range of the random number (jackpot random number) value is 300, ranging from 0 to 299. In addition, a jackpot winning value is set for each of the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122, which are the triggers for the special symbol lottery, while a small jackpot winning value is set only for the second start hole 122. For the first start hole 121, three jackpot winning values are set, and the winning probability is 3/300 (=1/100).
In addition, for the second starting hole 122, the winning value of the big win and the winning value of the small win are both set to 150, and the winning probability of the big win and the winning probability of the small win are both 150/300 (= 1/2). That is, in this embodiment, in the special pattern lottery based on the winning of the second starting hole 122, either the big win or the small win is always (100%) won. Therefore, if there is a reservation about the winning of the second starting hole 122, the right to win the special pattern lottery is always (100%) stocked.

FIG. 97-1 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of random numbers (judgment table) used in the normal symbol lottery in this embodiment.
Figure 97-1(a) shows an example of the composition of winning random numbers used in normal pattern lottery, Figure 97-1(b) shows an example of the composition of winning pattern random numbers used in normal pattern lottery, and Figure 97-1(c) shows an example of the composition of reach random numbers used in normal pattern lottery.

Referring to FIG. 97-1(a), the range of random numbers (winning random numbers) is 200, from 0 to 199. In addition, a winning value is set for each of the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state, second time-saving gaming state). For a winning in the normal gaming state, the winning value is set to 1, and the winning probability is 1/200. For a winning in the time-saving gaming state, the winning value is set to 4, and the winning probability is 4/200 (=1/50).
Here, an example of a normal symbol lottery will be explained. It is determined whether the winning random number value (see S9103) obtained as a result of winning at gate 124 matches the winning value of the winning lottery in Figure 97-1 (a).

97-1(b), there are two types of winning symbols, winning symbol A and winning symbol B. The range of the winning symbol random numbers in this embodiment is 10, from 0 to 9.
Here, in any of the normal game state, the first time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state, five values are assigned as winning values to each of the winning symbols A and B. Therefore, in any of the normal game state, the first time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state, the probability of winning with the winning symbol A and the probability of winning with the winning symbol B are each 5/10 (= 1/2).

In addition, the opening time of the electric tulip 123 is set for each of the winning symbols A and B. Note that a winning symbol with an opening time of the electric tulip 123 set to 5 seconds is a long winning symbol as described above. Note that a winning symbol with an opening time of the electric tulip 123 set to 0.1 seconds is a short winning symbol as described above.

In the normal game state, the opening time of the electric tulip 123 is set to 0.1 seconds for both the winning symbol A and the winning symbol B. In other words, in the normal game state, even if the normal symbol lottery is won, the long win is not won, but the short win is won.
In the first time-saving gaming state, the opening time of the electric tulip 123 is set to 0.1 seconds for the winning symbol A, and 5 seconds for the opening time of the electric tulip 123 for the winning symbol B. In other words, in the first time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the probability of winning a long win and the probability of winning a short win are both 1/2.
In the second time-saving gaming state, the opening time of the electric tulip 123 is set to 5 seconds for both the winning symbol A and the winning symbol B. In other words, in the normal gaming state, if the normal symbol lottery is won, the player will always (100%) win a long win without winning a short win.
In addition, in the first mode and the second mode of the second time-saving gaming state described below, the probability of winning with the winning pattern A and the winning pattern B, and the probability of winning a long win and a short win are the same.

Next, the determination of the reach random number will be described. Here, as an example, the reach random number when the reserved number for winning at the gate 124 is one will be described.
97-1(c), the range of random numbers is 0 to 249, with 250 random numbers, and 22 random numbers are assigned to the lottery result (with reach) that is a variation pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach performance, and 228 random numbers are assigned to the lottery result (without reach) that is not a variation pattern that can execute the reach performance. That is, in the illustrated example, when the normal pattern lottery is not won, the reach performance is executed with a probability of 22/250 (=11/125).

As described above, in this embodiment, the probability that the electric tulip 123 will be opened for a long time (5 seconds) when the normal symbol lottery is won differs between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. Here, as described above, in the first time-saving game state, the number of times (number of variations) J for the normal symbol is set to 100 times, and in the second time-saving game state, the number of times (number of variations) J for the normal symbol is set to 120 times. Therefore, the probability that the electric tulip 123 will be opened for a long time (5 seconds) when the normal symbol lottery is won differs depending on the number set as the number of times (number of variations) J for the normal symbol in the time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, the probability of being determined as a win in the normal pattern lottery differs between the normal game state and the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), but this is not limited to this.
Regardless of the game state, the probability (proportion) of being determined as a winning in the normal symbol lottery may be the same. In this case, it is possible to make players expect that the auxiliary game will be executed regardless of the game state, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of types of winning symbols that are stopped and displayed is the same in the normal game state and the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), but is not limited to this.
The number of types of winning symbols displayed in the normal game state and the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) may be different. Furthermore, the number of types of winning symbols displayed in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) may be greater than the normal game state. In this case, the playability of the normal symbols can be made different depending on the game state, which makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the opening time and ending time of the auxiliary game may be the same or different when the auxiliary game is executed due to a short win and when the auxiliary game is executed due to a long win. As an example, the opening time and/or ending time of the auxiliary game may be shorter when the auxiliary game is executed due to a short win than when the auxiliary game is executed due to a long win.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, a winning symbol that results in a long win is not set, but even in the normal game state, a winning symbol that results in a long win may be set. In other words, even in the normal game state, a game ball may be able to enter the second starting hole 122.

(Modification)
FIG. 97-2 is a diagram showing a modified example of the winning symbol random number used in the normal symbol lottery.
In this embodiment, the configuration of the winning symbol random number used in the normal symbol lottery is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 97-1(b).

Referring to FIG. 97-2, the pachinko game machine 100 has a first state (first time-saving game state), a second state (first mode of the second time-saving game state), and a third state (second mode of the second time-saving game state). Three types of winning symbols are prepared: winning symbol A, winning symbol B, and winning symbol C. The range of the winning symbol random number in this example is 12, from 0 to 11.
Here, in any of the first, second, and third states, two values are assigned as the winning values of the winning symbols A and B, respectively, and eight values are assigned as the winning value of the winning symbol C. Therefore, in any of the first, second, and third states, the probability of winning with the winning symbol A and the probability of winning with the winning symbol B are each 1/6, and the probability of winning with the winning symbol C is 2/3.

In addition, the opening times of the electric tulips 123 are set for the winning symbols A, B, and C, respectively.
In the first state, the electric tulip 123 is set to open for 5 seconds for the winning symbol A. That is, if the winning symbol A is selected in the first state, the electric tulip 123 is opened for a long time, and the state becomes one in which it is easy to win the second starting hole 122 (easy winning state).
In the first state, the opening time of the electric tulip 123 is set to 0.1 seconds for both the winning symbol B and the winning symbol C. That is, if the winning symbol B or the winning symbol C is won in the first state, the electric tulip 123 is opened for a short time, and the state becomes one in which it is not easy to win the second starting hole 122 (a state in which it is not easy to win).
Therefore, when the normal symbol lottery is won in the first state, the probability of the state becoming easy to win is 1/6 (≈17%), and the probability of the state becoming not easy to win is 5/6 (≈83%).

In the second state, the electric tulip 123 is set to open for 5 seconds for the winning symbol A. In other words, if the winning symbol A is selected in the second state, the electric tulip 123 is opened for a long time, making it easier to win.
In the second state, the opening time of the electric tulip 123 for the winning symbol B is set to 5 seconds and 0.1 seconds. That is, if the winning symbol B is selected with the random number value "2" in the second state, the electric tulip 123 is opened for a long time, making it easier to win. In the second state, if the winning symbol B is selected with the random number value "3", the electric tulip 123 is opened for a short time, making it harder to win.
In the second state, the opening time of the electric tulip 123 is set to 0.1 seconds for the winning symbol C. In other words, if the winning symbol C is selected in the second state, the electric tulip 123 is opened for a short period of time, making it difficult to win.
Therefore, when the normal symbol lottery is won in the second state, the probability of the state becoming easy to win is 1/4 (25%), and the probability of the state becoming not easy to win is 3/4 (75%).

In the third state, the opening time of the electric tulip 123 is set to 5 seconds for each of the winning symbols A, B, and C. In other words, if the winning symbol A, B, or C is won in the third state, the electric tulip 123 is opened for a long time, making it easier to win.
Therefore, when the normal symbol lottery is won in the third state, the probability of the easy-to-win state being reached is 1/1 (100%), and the probability of the not-easy-to-win state being reached is 0 (0%).

As described above, in this embodiment, the probability of entering an easy-to-win state when the normal pattern lottery is won varies depending on the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 and the winning symbol. In this case, even in the same game state, whether or not the state becomes easy to win can be made different depending on which winning symbol is won, and also, even in the same winning symbol, whether or not the state becomes easy to win can be made different depending on which game state is won, so that diverse gameplay can be realized.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if a specific symbol is won in a specific state, such as when winning symbol B is won in the second state, the state may be one in which it is easy to win or one in which it is not easy to win. In this case, the player can be given a sense of excitement about whether or not the state will be one in which it is easy to win if the specific symbol is won in a specific state, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Example of setting fluctuation patterns]
Next, an example of the fluctuation pattern and table settings in this embodiment will be described.
Figure 98 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the normal pattern variation pattern selection process shown in Figure 92. Note that Figure 98 shows a setting example in which the normal pattern variation is performed based on the winning of the gate 124 in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 98, when the result of the normal pattern lottery is a win (Yes in S9302 or S9305 in FIG. 93), the normal pattern change control unit 236 determines the change pattern based on the winning pattern and the change pattern random number. Specifically, the normal pattern change control unit 236 determines the change pattern based on whether the change pattern random number value (see S9103) acquired together with the winning random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the change pattern random number values assigned to each winning pattern. For example, when the winning pattern is "Winning Pattern B", "PP2" is selected as the change pattern. The normal pattern change time in this "PP2" is "5.61 seconds".

In addition, when the result of the normal pattern lottery is a miss (when both S9302 and S9305 in FIG. 93 are No), the normal pattern change control unit 236 determines the change pattern based on the reserved number G of the normal pattern lottery, the reach random number, and the change pattern random number. Specifically, when the result of the normal pattern lottery is a miss, the normal pattern change control unit 236 selects "PQ1" as the change pattern.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, the execution time of the variable display of the normal symbols differs depending on the result of the normal symbol lottery and the symbols that are stopped and displayed, but this is not limited to this.
In the normal game state, regardless of the result of the normal symbol lottery (whether it is a win or a miss), the execution time of the normal symbol variable display may be the same. In this case, the amount of data required for the normal symbol variable display in the normal game state can be reduced, and the normal symbol variable display can be efficiently controlled. In addition, the player will not have excessive expectations, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Figure 99 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process of this embodiment. In addition, Figure 99 (a) shows a setting example in which the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state and second time-saving game state).
In the table shown in Fig. 99(a), a variation pattern is provided according to the judgment result of the special symbol lottery and the variation pattern random number. More specifically, a variation pattern is provided in which the "judgment result" corresponds to "jackpot" and "miss," respectively.
In the table shown in FIG. 99(a), a variation pattern in which the "time" is "3.50" is provided as a "jackpot pattern A". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "3.51" is provided as a "jackpot pattern B". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "3.52" is provided as a "jackpot pattern C". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "1.20" is provided as a "miss".

In this table, the "miss" is not assigned a winning value in the reach random number. Therefore, a reach is not performed in the special pattern change in which the lottery result based on winning the first start hole 121 in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) is a miss.

Figure 99(b) is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process of this embodiment. In addition, Figure 99(b) shows a setting example in which the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the second start hole 122 in the first time-saving game state.
In the table shown in Figure 99 (b), a fluctuation pattern is provided according to the determination result of the special pattern lottery, the reserved number U2 of the second special pattern lottery, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number.
In the table shown in FIG. 99(b), a variation pattern in which the "time" is "0.60" is provided for the "big win pattern D". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "0.61" is provided for the "big win pattern E". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "0.62" is provided for the "small win pattern A". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "0.63" is provided for the "small win pattern B". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "0.64" is provided for the "small win pattern C".

In addition, in this table, there is no "miss" judgment result. Therefore, in the special pattern variation based on winning at the second start port 122 in the first time-saving play state, the lottery result of the special pattern lottery will not vary to a miss, but will always (100%) vary to a big win or small win.

Figure 99(c) is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process of this embodiment. In addition, Figure 99(c) shows a setting example in which the variation of the normal pattern is performed based on the winning of the gate 124 in the first time-saving game state.
In the table shown in Fig. 99(c), a variation pattern is provided according to the judgment result of the special symbol lottery and the variation pattern random number. More specifically, a variation pattern is provided in which the "judgment result" corresponds to "win" and "lose".
In the table shown in Fig. 99(c), a variation pattern in which "time" is "1.63" is provided as "winning symbol A". In addition, a variation pattern in which "time" is "60.04", a variation pattern in which "time" is "60.05", and a variation pattern in which "time" is "90.02" are provided as "winning symbol B". In addition, a variation pattern in which "reach" and a variation pattern in which "reach" are not provided as "misses".

As described above, in this embodiment, when a normal pattern variable display without a reach is performed in the first time-saving game state, the normal pattern variable display is executed for a longer execution time than when a normal pattern variable display without a reach is performed in the normal game state. Here, in the first time-saving game state, the average execution time of the normal pattern variable display may be shorter than the average execution time of the normal pattern variable display in the normal game state. In this case, it becomes easier to stimulate the player's sense of expectation in the time-saving game state, and the normal pattern variable display can be executed in a manner that is more advantageous to the player in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Fig. 100(a) is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process of this embodiment. Fig. 100(a) shows a setting example in which the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the second start hole 122 in the first mode of the second time-saving game state.
In the table shown in Fig. 100(a), a variation pattern is provided according to the judgment result of the special symbol lottery and the variation pattern random number. More specifically, a variation pattern is provided in which the "judgment result" corresponds to "big win" and "small win".
In the table shown in FIG. 100(a), a variation pattern in which the "time" is "150.00" is provided as a "big win pattern D". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "150.01" is provided as a "big win pattern E". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "140.00" is provided as a "small win pattern A". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "140.01" is provided as a "small win pattern B". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "140.02" is provided as a "small win pattern C".

In addition, in this table, there is no "miss" judgment result. Therefore, in the special pattern variation based on winning the second starting hole 122 in the first mode of the second time-saving play state, the lottery result of the special pattern lottery will not vary to a miss, but will always (100%) vary to a big win or small win.

Figure 100(b) is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process of this embodiment. In addition, Figure 100(b) shows a setting example in which the variation of the normal pattern is performed based on the winning of the gate 124 in the first mode of the second time-saving game state.
In the table shown in Fig. 100(b), a variation pattern is provided according to the judgment result of the normal symbol lottery and the variation pattern random number. More specifically, a variation pattern is provided in which the "judgment result" corresponds to "win" and "lose".
In the table shown in FIG. 100(b), a variation pattern in which the "time" is "3.01" is provided as the "winning symbol A". Also, a variation pattern in which the "time" is "3.02" is provided as the "winning symbol B". Also, a variation pattern in which the "time" is "2.70" is provided as the "losing symbol".

In this table, a winning value in the reach random number is not assigned to "miss". Therefore, in the case of a normal pattern change in which the lottery result based on winning at gate 124 in the first mode of the second time-saving play state is a miss, a reach is not performed.

Fig. 100(c) is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process of this embodiment. Fig. 100(c) shows a setting example in which the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the second start hole 122 in the second mode of the second time-saving game state.
In the table shown in Fig. 100(c), a variation pattern is provided according to the judgment result of the special symbol lottery and the variation pattern random number. More specifically, a variation pattern is provided in which the "judgment result" corresponds to "big win" and "small win".
In the table shown in FIG. 100(c), a variation pattern in which the "time" is "150.02" is provided as a "big win pattern D". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "150.03" is provided as a "big win pattern E". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "140.03" is provided as a "small win pattern A". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "140.04" is provided as a "small win pattern B". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "140.05" is provided as a "small win pattern C".

In addition, in this table, there is no "miss" judgment result. Therefore, in the special pattern variation based on winning the second start hole 122 in the second mode of the second time-saving play state, the lottery result of the special pattern lottery will not vary to a miss, but will always (100%) vary to a big win or small win.

Fig. 100(d) is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process of this embodiment. Fig. 100(d) shows a setting example in which the variation of the normal pattern is performed based on the winning of the gate 124 in the second mode of the second time-saving game state.
In the table shown in Fig. 100(d), a variation pattern is provided according to the judgment result of the normal symbol lottery and the variation pattern random number. More specifically, a variation pattern is provided in which the "judgment result" corresponds to "win" and "lose".
In the table shown in FIG. 100(d), a variation pattern in which the "time" is "36.01" is provided as a "winning symbol A". Also, a variation pattern in which the "time" is "36.02" is provided as a "winning symbol B". Also, a variation pattern in which the "time" is "2.71", a variation pattern in which the "time" is "2.72", a variation pattern in which the "time" is "36.03", and a variation pattern in which the "time" is "36.04" are provided as "losing symbols".

In this table, a winning value in the reach random number is not assigned to "miss". Therefore, in the case of a normal pattern change in which the lottery result based on winning at gate 124 in the second mode of the second time-saving play state is a miss, a reach is not performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the average execution time of the variable display of the normal symbols is different between the first time-saving game state, the first mode of the second time-saving game state, and the second mode of the second time-saving game state. In this case, it is possible to bring out the characteristics of each time-saving game state, and to increase the interest of the game.
However, the average execution time of the variable display of the normal symbols may be the same in the first mode of the second time-saving game state and the second mode of the second time-saving game state. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unequal between the modes in the second time-saving game state.

It may also be possible to make it easier to determine a variation pattern in which the execution time of the variable display of normal symbols is shorter in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state. By doing so, it is possible to give the machine characteristics such as different performance depending on the type of game state, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the setting example when the special symbol changes based on winning at the first starting hole 121 during normal game play is the same as the setting example shown in the first embodiment (see Figure 26).

The game control unit 200 determines the table to be used for selecting the variation pattern of the special or normal symbol based on whether the game ball has entered the first start gate 121, the second start gate 122, or the gate 124, and the game status of the pachinko game machine 100. Then, as described above, the game control unit 200 determines the variation pattern of the special or normal symbol based on the variation pattern random number value obtained when the game ball entered the first start gate 121, the second start gate 122, or the gate 124, the presence or absence of a reach effect, the number of reserved balls, and other conditions. Then, information on the variation pattern of the determined special or normal symbol is included in the variation start command and sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300. In the performance control unit 300, as described later, a performance corresponding to (executable at) the variation time specified based on the variation pattern information included in the variation start command is selected and executed as the performance when the special or normal symbol changes.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the performance control unit 300 in this embodiment for executing a preview performance based on a prior determination of normal symbols will be described.
Fig. 101 is a block diagram for explaining an example of the configuration of the RAM 203 (see Fig. 4) of the game control unit 200 according to this embodiment. Fig. 101(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the memory area 205, and Fig. 101(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memories shown in Fig. 101(a).

As shown in FIG. 101(a), the RAM 203 has a memory area 205 as a regular symbol reserved memory area for storing the winning random numbers obtained by the winning random number lottery. This memory area 205 has four memory sections corresponding to the maximum reserved number for winning at the gate 124. More specifically, the memory area 205 has a first regular symbol memory section 205a, a second regular symbol memory section 205b, a third regular symbol memory section 205c, and a fourth regular symbol memory section 205d.

As shown in FIG. 101(b), each of these random number memory units 205a to 205d has an area in which the acquired winning random number is stored, an area in which a pattern random number is stored, an area in which a reach random number is stored, and an area in which a variation pattern random number is stored. That is, each of the memory units 205a to 205d stores winning random numbers, pattern random numbers, reach random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers.

Here, each random number is stored in order starting from the first general map memory unit 205a. To explain more specifically, for example, when no random number is stored in any of the first general map memory unit 205a to the fourth general map memory unit 205d, the acquired random number is stored in the first general map memory unit 205a. Also, for example, when random numbers are already stored in the first general map memory unit 205a to the third memory unit 205c, the acquired random number is stored in the fourth memory unit 205d.

Fig. 102 is a block diagram for explaining an example of the configuration of the RAM 303 (see Fig. 4) of the performance control unit 300 according to this embodiment. Fig. 102(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the reserved memory area 307, and Fig. 102(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in Fig. 102(a).
As shown in FIG. 102(a), the RAM 303 includes a reserved memory area 307 as a reserved status memory area for storing the status of reserved balls. The reserved memory area 307 has four memory sections, each of which corresponds to a reserved ball for winning the gate 124. Specifically, the first regular map reserved memory area 307 includes a first regular map memory section 307a, a second regular map memory section 307b, a third regular map memory section 307c, and a fourth regular map memory section 307d.

Also, as shown in FIG. 102(b), each of these storage units 307a to 307d has a reserved flag storage area for turning the reserved flag ON/OFF and a notification flag storage area for turning the notification flag ON/OFF. The reserved flag is a flag for identifying the presence or absence of reserved balls for each storage unit 307a to 307d. That is, for example, when the number of reserved balls due to winning at gate 124 is 3, the reserved flag is ON in the three reserved flag storage areas of the first to third general map storage units 307a, 307b, and 307c. The notification flag is a flag for setting whether or not to perform a notice performance based on the general map advance judgment result for each reserved ball. In the pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can set whether or not to perform a notice performance based on the general map advance judgment result depending on the game state and the performance situation. Therefore, when a notice performance is performed, the notification flag is ON, and when a notice performance is not performed, the notification flag is OFF. For example, if a preview performance is to be performed on the third of the three reserved balls, the notification flag is turned ON in the notification flag storage area of the third general map storage unit 307c.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the RAM 203 has an area in which pre-judgment information is stored (hereinafter, pre-judgment information storage area) in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 101(a). The pre-judgment information is information obtained by the normal pattern pre-judgment process (see S9104 in FIG. 91) based on the above random numbers. The contents of the normal pattern pre-judgment information are the same as the information obtained as various judgment results in the normal pattern process (see FIG. 92), and specifically, it is information for indicating whether or not a win has occurred, the type of win if a win has occurred, whether the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is long enough to execute a reach performance, and the contents of the fluctuation pattern. The pre-judgment information stored in the pre-judgment information storage area is sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300 together with information on the reservation corresponding to the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the normal pattern pre-judgment process has been performed (hereinafter, reserved information) or at a unique timing separate from this reserved information, and is included in the normal pattern pre-judgment result command.

[General map advance judgment processing]
Next, the general map advance judgment process (see S9104 in FIG. 91) will be described in detail.
In the normal game pre-determination process in this embodiment, the game control unit 200 performs a pre-determination as follows using a random number table similar to the example of the random number configuration described with reference to Figures 98 to 100.

FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the general map advance judgment process (S9104 in FIG. 91) according to this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 103, the game control unit 200 first refers to the game status (S10301), selects a table corresponding to the current game status of the pachinko game machine 100, and performs a preliminary determination of the winning random number and winning pattern random number (S10302).
Next, the game control unit 200 selects a table according to the current game state of the pachinko game machine 100 and performs a preliminary determination of the reach random number (S10303). Furthermore, it selects a table according to the current game state and performs a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern random number (S10304).

Next, the game control unit 200 selects a pre-determination pattern according to the results of the pre-determinations in S10302, S10303, and S10304 (S10305).
After that, the game control unit 200 stores the result of the pre-determination of the winning random number, the result of the pre-determination of the winning symbol random number, the result of the pre-determination of the reach random number, the result of the pre-determination of the variation pattern, and the pre-determination pattern obtained as described above in the pre-determination information storage area as pre-determination information (S10306).Furthermore, in order to transmit the pre-determination information to the performance control unit 300, a pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information is set in the RAM 203 (S10307).

The above-mentioned normal symbol pre-determination was performed using a random number value (see S9103 in FIG. 91) obtained in response to the entrance of the game ball into gate 124, and a determination table having the same configuration as the determination table used in the hit determination process (see FIG. 97-1). In other words, the determination itself after selecting the determination table to be used is the same as the determination in the hit determination process (see S9301 in FIG. 93). Therefore, in this embodiment, the subroutine (see S9208 in FIG. 92 and FIG. 93) of the hit determination process used in the normal symbol process (see FIG. 92) is called, and the random number determination in the above-mentioned normal symbol pre-determination is performed.

By configuring in this way, in this embodiment, there is no need to prepare a processing function (subroutine) for judging random numbers separately from the hit judgment process in order to judge the random numbers in the normal map pre-judgment process. This makes it possible to reduce the number of control instructions and suppress an increase in the size of the programs related to the hit judgment process and the normal map pre-judgment process. Also, as described above, if the judgment table used in the normal map pre-judgment is configured in the same way as the judgment table used in the hit judgment, the judgment table used in the hit judgment may also be used in the pre-judgment.

...

In this case, the subroutine (see S9209 in FIG. 92 and FIG. 94) of the variation pattern selection process used in the normal symbol processing (see FIG. 92) can be called and used to look ahead at the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the normal symbol processing may also be used for the look-ahead table used to look ahead at the variation pattern selection. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of control commands related to the look-ahead of the variation pattern selection and suppress an increase in the size of the program.

In addition, if the normal pattern pre-determination process and the hit determination process during normal pattern change are performed in the same subroutine using the same judgment table group, the execution time of each process is different, so the normal pattern pre-determination result and the judgment result by the hit determination process during normal pattern change may differ. That is, after the normal pattern pre-determination process is executed, the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 (any of the normal game state, the first time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state) changes by the time the normal pattern change starts. In this case, since different types of judgment tables are used depending on the game state, the specific judgment tables used for judgment will be different when the normal pattern pre-determination process is executed and when the hit determination process is executed. Therefore, even if the same random number value obtained when winning the gate 124 is used, the normal pattern pre-determination result and the judgment result of the hit determination process may differ. In such a case, if the game state changes after the normal pattern advance determination process is executed and before the normal pattern change starts, the performance control unit 300 may perform control such as prohibiting the execution of the performance based on the normal pattern advance determination result.

In accordance with the command output from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300 as described above, the performance control unit 300 controls, for example, the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157. For example, when the performance control unit 300 receives a command indicating the start of a door opening error, the performance control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display a message such as "Please call an attendant" or an image indicating an abnormal state. The performance control unit 300 also causes the speaker 156 to output an alarm indicating an abnormal state, and restricts the output of music, voice, sound effects, and the like. The performance control unit 300 also turns on the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 in red, for example, to indicate an abnormal state.

In addition, although it has been described here that the performance control unit 300 notifies the occurrence of an error using all of the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157, it may be possible to use only some of these. The notification mode may be switched depending on the type of error. For example, when a door opening error occurs, the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157 may all be used as described above. When a payout error occurs, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 notify the occurrence of an error. This allows staff at the gaming establishment (pachinko parlor) to easily determine the urgency of an error that has occurred in the gaming machine.

[Example of pre-determined pattern settings]
Next, examples of setting the pre-determination patterns and tables used in the pre-determination process and the general pre-determination process will be described.
Fig. 104(a) is a diagram showing an example of a pre-determination pattern and a table used in the normal symbol pre-determination process. Fig. 104(a) shows a setting example in which the normal symbol is changed based on the winning of the gate 124 in the normal game state.
In the table shown in Figure 104 (a), "judgment result,""pattern,""reach random number,""variation pattern random number,""planned variation pattern," and "pre-judgment pattern" are associated with each other.
The game control unit 200 determines the expected fluctuation pattern and the pre-determination pattern based on the normal pattern pre-determination results of the winning random number and winning pattern random number, the normal pattern pre-determination results of the reach random number, and the normal pattern pre-determination results of the fluctuation pattern random number.

Fig. 104(b) is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the pre-determination pattern and the table used in the pre-determination process. Fig. 104(b) shows a setting example in which the special symbol is changed based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the time-saving game state (the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state).
In the table shown in Figure 104 (b), "judgment result,""pattern,""reach random number,""variation pattern random number,""planned variation pattern," and "pre-judgment pattern" are associated with each other.

Fig. 104(c) is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the pre-determination pattern and the table used in the pre-determination process. Fig. 104(c) shows an example of the setting when the special symbol is changed based on the winning of the second start hole 122 in the first time-saving game state.
In the table shown in Figure 104 (c), "judgment result,""pattern,""reach random number,""variation pattern random number,""planned variation pattern," and "pre-judgment pattern" are associated with each other.

Fig. 104(d) is a diagram showing an example of a pre-determination pattern and a table used in the normal symbol pre-determination process. Fig. 104(d) shows a setting example in which the normal symbol is changed based on the winning of the gate 124 in the first time-saving game state.
In the table shown in Figure 104 (d), "judgment result,""pattern,""reach random number,""variation pattern random number,""planned variation pattern," and "pre-judgment pattern" are associated with each other.

In this embodiment, the setting example when the special symbol changes based on winning the first start hole 121 during normal gameplay is the same as the setting example shown in the first embodiment (see Figure 34).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the second time-saving gaming state, even if a winning entry is made in any of the first start port 121, the second start port 122, and the gate 124, a pre-determination process is not performed. Therefore, no setting example is provided for a case where a change is made based on a winning entry in the first start port 121, the second start port 122, or the gate 124 in the second time-saving gaming state.
However, in the second time-saving gaming state, if any of the first start gate 121, the second start gate 122, and the gate 124 is won, a pre-determination process may be performed. Then, by performing this pre-determination process, a pre-determination result command is generated, and the generated pre-determination result command is sent to the performance control unit 300, while the pre-determination performance may not be executed. Also, in the second time-saving gaming state, if any of the first start gate 121, the second start gate 122, and the gate 124 is won, a pre-determination performance may be executed.

[Pre-determined performance pattern table]
Fig. 105 is a diagram showing an example of setting of a pre-determined effect pattern and a table used in the pre-determined effect pattern selection (S4003) in the pre-determined effect selection process of Fig. 40 (a). Fig. 105 shows a pre-determined effect pattern table used when the game ball enters the gate 124 in the first time-saving game state.

The pre-determined effect pattern table shown in FIG. 105, which is used when the gaming ball enters gate 124 in the first time-saving gaming state, has multiple pre-determined effect patterns set. The pre-determined effect patterns "AW1" to "AW4" and "AX1" to "AX8" correspond one-to-one to the pre-determined effect patterns "JW1" to "JW4" and "JX1" to "JX8" set using FIG. 104(d) above.

Here, in the illustrated pre-determined effect pattern, a "reserved image" and a "display color" are set. Note that "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding effect will not be executed.
The "reserved image" may be an image indicating that the right to determine a winning position for the normal symbol lottery is reserved.
The "display color" indicates the display color of the reserved image 52. Here, in this embodiment, by changing the display color of the reserved image 52, not only the expectation of winning the jackpot for the special pattern lottery but also the expectation of winning the regular pattern lottery may be notified or suggested. In this embodiment, one of "blue", "green", "red", "gold" and "rainbow" is selected as the display color. For example, the display colors of the reserved images may be set in the order of white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow so that the later the order, the higher the expectation. In addition, the variable presentation in which the rainbow reserved image is displayed may be a variable presentation in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot or a small win, or a variable presentation in which the lottery result of the regular pattern lottery is a win. In other words, the expectation of the rainbow reserved image may be 100%.

The performance control unit 300 determines a pre-determined performance pattern based on the table shown in Fig. 105. Specifically, the performance control unit 300 selects a pre-determined performance pattern corresponding to a pre-determined pattern set in the normal pre-determining process (see Fig. 103) based on the table shown in Fig. 105.
For example, in Fig. 105, if the "judgment result" is "miss" and the pre-judgment pattern is "JX8", "AX8" is selected as the pre-judgment performance pattern. In this pre-judgment performance pattern "AX8", a "reserved image" and a "display color" are set. That is, in the pre-judgment performance pattern "AX8", a "reserved image" is displayed and the "display color" becomes "blue".

In this embodiment, the pre-determination presentation pattern table used when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state is the same as the example shown in the first embodiment (see Figure 46).
In addition, in this embodiment, a pre-determination performance pattern table is not provided for use when the gate 124 is won in the normal game state, or when the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is won in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state and second time-saving game state). That is, when the gate 124 is won in the normal game state, or when the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is won in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state and second time-saving game state), a pre-determination process or a normal pre-determination process is performed, a pre-determination result command or a normal pre-determination process is generated, and the generated command is sent to the performance control unit 300, but even in this case, the pre-determination performance is not executed.
When a prize is won at gate 124 in the normal game state, a pre-determination performance may be executed even when a prize is won at the first start gate 121 or the second start gate 122 in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state and second time-saving game state).

Figures 106 to 109 are diagrams showing examples of setting variable presentation patterns and tables used in the variable presentation pattern selection (S4013) in the presentation selection process of Figure 40 (b).
FIG. 106(a) shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning the gate 124 in the normal game state is performed. FIG. 106(b) shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning the first start port 121 in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state and second time-saving game state) is performed. FIG. 107(a) shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning the second start port 122 in the first time-saving game state is performed. FIG. 107(b) shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning the gate 124 in the first time-saving game state is performed. FIG. 108(a) shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning the second start port 122 in the first mode of the second time-saving game state is performed. Also, Fig. 108(b) shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the gate 124 in the first mode of the second time-saving gaming state is performed. Also, Fig. 109(a) shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the second starting hole 122 in the second mode of the second time-saving gaming state is performed. Also, Fig. 109(b) shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the gate 124 in the second mode of the second time-saving gaming state is performed.

A plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the gate 124 in the normal game state shown in Fig. 106(a) . Variable presentation patterns "EP1", "EP2", and "EQ1" are associated one-to-one with the variable presentation patterns "PP1", "PP2", and "PQ1" set using Fig. 98 above.
In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the first start hole 121 in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state and second time-saving game state) shown in Fig. 106(b) is performed. Variable presentation patterns "ES1" to "ES3" and "ET1" are associated one-to-one with the variable presentation patterns "PS1" to "PS3" and "PT1" set using Fig. 99(a) above.

In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the second start hole 122 in the first time-saving gaming state shown in Fig. 107(a) is performed. Variable presentation patterns "EU1", "EU2", and "EV1" to "EV3" are associated one-to-one with the variable presentation patterns "PU1", "PU2", and "PV1" to "PV3" set using Fig. 99(b) above.
In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the gate 124 in the first time-saving gaming state shown in Fig. 107(b) is performed. Variable presentation patterns "EW1" to "EW4" and "EX1" to "EX8" are associated one-to-one with the variable presentation patterns "PW1" to "PW4" and "PX1" to "PX8" set using the above Fig. 99(c).

In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning into the second starting hole 122 in the first mode of the second time-saving gaming state shown in Fig. 108(a) is performed. "Ea1", "Ea2", "Eb1" to "Eb3" correspond one-to-one to the variable patterns "Pa1", "Pa2", and "Pb1" to "Pb3" set using the above Fig. 100(a).
In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the gate 124 in the first mode of the second time-saving gaming state shown in Fig. 108(b) is performed. "Ec1", "Ec2", and "Ed1" are associated one-to-one with the variable patterns "Pc1", "Pc2", and "Pd1" set using Fig. 100(b) above.

In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning into the second starting hole 122 in the second mode of the second time-saving gaming state shown in Fig. 109(a) is performed. "Ee1", "Ee2", "Ef1" to "Ef3" are in one-to-one correspondence with the variable patterns "Pe1", "Pe2", and "Pf1" to "Pf3" set using the above Fig. 100(c).
In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the gate 124 in the second mode of the second time-saving gaming state shown in Fig. 109(b) is performed. "Eg1", "Eg2", and "Eh1" to "Eh4" are associated one-to-one with the variable patterns "Pg1", "Pg2", and "Ph1" to "Ph4" set using the above Fig. 100(d).

In this embodiment, a variable presentation pattern table is not provided for when a variable presentation is performed based on a winning entry into the second start hole 122 in the normal game state. In other words, even if a game ball wins the second start hole 122 in the normal game state, the execution of each presentation, the execution or non-execution of which is determined in the variable presentation pattern table, is restricted. However, when a game ball wins the second start hole 122 in the normal game state, while the execution of a variable presentation involving a variable display of the decorative pattern 41 is restricted, a variable presentation involving a variable display of the small pattern 54 may be executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the second time-saving game state, a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be executed when the variable display of the second special pattern results in a big win or small win, compared to when the variable display of the first special pattern results in a big win. By doing this, it becomes easier to enhance the presentation effect when the variable display of the second special pattern results in a big win, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the normal game state, the execution of pre-determination effects related to normal symbols is restricted, and during the first time-saving game state, pre-determination effects related to normal symbols can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the time-saving game state, where the variable display of normal symbols is important, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of types of pre-determined effects for normal symbols executed during the time-saving play state is greater than the number of types of pre-determined effects for the second special symbols executed during the time-saving play state. By doing this, it becomes easier to attract the player's interest in the changing display of normal symbols than in the changing display of the second special symbols during the time-saving play state, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

The variation pattern table (variable presentation pattern table) in this embodiment is not limited to the above example. A plurality of variation pattern tables (variable presentation pattern tables) related to the first special symbol in the normal game state may be provided. The variation pattern table (variable presentation pattern table) used may be switchable depending on the number of times the special symbol changes from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM (RAM) clear, end of the big win game). In this case, the variation presentation pattern table used when the number of times the special symbol changes from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM (RAM) clear, end of the big win game) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number may be more likely to execute a variation presentation in which a reach presentation is performed when a variation presentation in which the lottery result is a miss is performed than the variation presentation pattern table used when the number of times the special symbol changes is less than the predetermined number. In this way, the variation display of the special symbol can be executed in a manner that does not tire the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, in the time-saving game state, the variation pattern table (variation presentation pattern table) used according to the number of times the special symbol varies may not be switched. In this way, it is possible to realize a gameplay different from that in the normal game state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when determining the variation pattern of the special symbols in the normal game state or the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), it is possible to switch the variation pattern table (variable presentation pattern table) when the number of times the special symbols have changed since the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear, end of the jackpot game) reaches a predetermined number, whereas when determining the variation pattern of the normal symbols in the normal game state or the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), the switching of the variation pattern table (variable presentation pattern table) may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to improve the efficiency of control when executing the variation display of the normal symbols. In addition, it is possible to enrich the variation display of the special symbols that are directly linked to the jackpot, while it is possible to make the variation display of the normal symbols that are not directly linked to the jackpot game simple and easy to understand, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the variable pattern table (variable presentation pattern table) in the normal game state may be switched multiple times (for example, three times at 250 times, 500 times, and 750 times) depending on the number of times the special pattern changes, or in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), the variable pattern table (variable presentation pattern table) may be switched once or multiple times depending on the number of times the special pattern changes, but it is preferable that the variable pattern table (variable presentation pattern table) is less likely to switch in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) than in the normal game state (e.g., it is easier to switch in the normal game state).
In addition, when a variable display of a special pattern is executed in a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), the reach effect may be executed with a lower probability than in a normal game state even if the same judgment result (jackpot, miss) is obtained, or the reach effect may be executed more easily in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a small win (the execution probability may be made higher in the case of a jackpot, or the reach effect may not be executed in the case of a small win, etc.).

In addition, in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), a variation pattern with a longer variation time may be more likely to be executed when the variable display of the second special pattern results in a jackpot than when the variable display of the second special pattern results in a small jackpot. By doing this, it becomes easier to enhance the presentation effect when the variable display of the second special pattern results in a jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the average execution time of the variable display according to the variable display pattern used when the lottery result for the normal symbol is a miss in the time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state) may be longer than the average execution time of the variable display according to the variable display pattern used when the lottery result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a miss in the time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state). By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the time-shortened game state in which the variable display of the normal symbol is important, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game states (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), the number of types of change patterns (change presentation patterns) used to display the winning change of the normal symbols may be greater than the number of types of change patterns (change presentation patterns) used to display the jackpot change of the second special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the time-saving game states (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) where the change presentation of the normal symbols is important, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In the present embodiment, in the normal game state or the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), the rate at which the reserved image 52 relating to the special symbol changes to the reserved image 52 or the variable image 51 with high expectation after the display start may be made different from the rate at which the reserved image 52 relating to the normal symbol changes to the reserved image 52 or the variable image 51 with high expectation after the display start. In this case, the tendency of change can be made different between the special symbol and the normal symbol, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.
Furthermore, even if the final display color is the same in the normal game state or the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), the number of change scenarios (e.g., change from blue to red, or change from blue to green to red, etc.) of the reserved images 52 and the variable images 51 related to the special symbols may be made different from the number of change scenarios of the reserved images 52 and the variable images 51 related to the normal symbols. In this case, the tendency of change can be made different between the special symbols and the normal symbols, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of types of pre-determination effects for normal symbols executed during the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) may be made smaller than the number of types of pre-determination effects for the first special symbol executed during the normal game state (changing effects, display of reserved image 52, etc.). In this case, while improving the effect of the effects in the normal game state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the pre-determination effects in the time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Here, the variable presentation in this embodiment may be not only a presentation that notifies the result of the special pattern selection, but also a presentation that notifies the judgment result of the normal pattern selection (i.e., whether or not a win has been won).
In addition, the decorative pattern 41 in this embodiment may not only be displayed in a varying manner in conjunction with the varying display of the special pattern and then displayed stationary in conjunction with the stationary display of the special pattern, but may also be displayed in a varying manner in conjunction with the varying display of the normal pattern and then displayed stationary in conjunction with the stationary display of the normal pattern.

In addition, the reserved number display 53 in this embodiment may not only indicate the reserved number for winning entries at the first starting gate 121 and the second starting gate 122, but may also indicate the reserved number for winning entries at gate 124.
In addition, the small pattern 54 in this embodiment may not only be displayed changing in conjunction with the display of the special pattern and then displayed stationary in conjunction with the display of the special pattern, but may also be displayed changing in conjunction with the display of the normal pattern and then displayed stationary in conjunction with the display of the normal pattern.

In addition, the changing image 51 in this embodiment may not only indicate that the special pattern is being changed and displayed by the special pattern change control unit 233, but may also indicate that the normal pattern is being changed and displayed by the normal pattern change control unit 236.
In addition, the reserved image 52 in this embodiment may not only indicate that the right to make a jackpot determination is reserved, but also that the right to make a win determination (determination of the normal pattern lottery) is reserved.
In addition, in this embodiment, the display colors of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may not only notify or suggest the likelihood of winning the jackpot, but may also notify or suggest the likelihood of the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery being a win.

In addition, the first notification image 708 in this embodiment may not only suggest or notify that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win or a small win, but may also suggest or notify that the result of the normal pattern lottery is a win.
In addition, the time-saving remaining number image 714 in this embodiment not only indicates the remaining number of times for special symbol lotteries in the time-saving play state, but may also indicate the remaining number of times for normal symbol lotteries in the time-saving play state.

In addition, the pseudo-continuous presentation of this embodiment may be not only a presentation in which the display makes it appear as if multiple changes in the decorative pattern 41 are being displayed in the display of one change in the special pattern, but also a presentation in which the display makes it appear as if multiple changes in the decorative pattern 41 are being displayed in the display of one change in the normal pattern.
In addition, the reach performance of this embodiment may be performed not only when the special symbol changes, but also when the normal symbol changes.
In addition, the SP reach presentation in this embodiment may not only be a presentation that gives a higher expectation of a jackpot than a reach, but may also be a presentation that gives a higher expectation of a hit (the result of the normal pattern lottery is a winning combination) than a reach.
In addition, the SPSP reach presentation of this embodiment may not only be a presentation that gives a greater expectation of a jackpot than the SP reach, but may also be a presentation that gives a greater expectation of a hit than the SP reach (the result of the normal pattern lottery is a winning one).

In addition, in this embodiment, the light colors of each lamp, such as the board lamp 116, the frame lamp 157, the movable part 115, and the performance button 161, may not only notify or suggest the likelihood of winning a big win or a small win, but may also notify or suggest the likelihood of the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery being a win.
In addition, in this embodiment, the color of the effect image may not only notify or suggest the likelihood of winning a big win or a small win, but may also notify or suggest the likelihood of the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery being a win.

In addition, the promotion prompting effect of this embodiment may be a performance that prompts the player to decide whether or not to change the decorative pattern that indicates that the result of the normal pattern lottery is a big win or a small win after temporarily stopping the decorative pattern to indicate that the player will be in a more advantageous gaming state.
In addition, the promotion effect in this embodiment may be an effect in which a decorative pattern indicating that the result of the normal pattern lottery is a big win or a small win is temporarily stopped, and then changed to a decorative pattern indicating that the player will be in a more advantageous gaming state.

[Production image]
Next, the performance image that the performance control unit 300 causes to be displayed on the image display unit 114 will be described.
In this embodiment, in addition to the presentation images shown in the first embodiment, the presentation images displayed on the image display unit 114 may include a third reserved number display 53C, a third small pattern 54C, a fourth small pattern 54D, a prize promotion image 727, a remaining time image 728, a change effect image 729, a stock promotion image 730, a failure image 731, a success image 732, an expectation image 733, a consumption promotion image 734, a high expectation image 735, a winning image 736, a countdown image 737, and an end image 738.

(Third reserved number display 53C)
110(1), a third reserved number display 53C is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third reserved number display 53C is an image showing the reserved number for winning at the gate 124. In the example shown in the figure, the third reserved number display 53C is displayed to the right of the first reserved number display 53A on the image display unit 114.

(Third small pattern 54C)
As shown in FIG. 110(1), the third small pattern 54C is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third small pattern 54C is a performance pattern that indicates that the normal pattern is being displayed in a variable manner (the decorative pattern 41 is being displayed in a variable manner) based on winning at the gate 124. The third small pattern 54C is controlled by the performance control unit 300, and is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display of the normal pattern, and is displayed in a stationary manner in accordance with the stationary display of the normal pattern. In the illustrated example, the third small pattern 54C is displayed to the right of the first small pattern 54A on the image display unit 114.

(Fourth small pattern 54D)
As shown in FIG. 117 (19), the fourth small pattern 54D is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourth small pattern 54D is a performance pattern indicating that the special pattern is being displayed (the decorative pattern 41 is being displayed) based on winning the first starting hole 121 or the second starting hole 122. The fourth small pattern 54D is controlled by the performance control unit 300, and is displayed in response to the display of the target special pattern among the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and is displayed in a stopped state in response to the display of the target special pattern. That is, the fourth small pattern 54D is used for the change performance related to the first special pattern and the change performance related to the second special pattern. In the illustrated example, the fourth small pattern 54D is displayed to the left of the third small pattern 54C on the image display unit 114.

(Winner promotion image 727)
124(11), a winning promotion image 727 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The winning promotion image 727 is an image that encourages the player to make the game ball win in the second starting hole 122. In the illustrated example, the winning promotion image 727 includes the text "Aim to the right!!", an image that resembles the game area 111, and an arrow mark pointing from the left side to the right side in the image that resembles the game area 111.

(Remaining time image 728)
As shown in FIG. 129(2), the image display unit 114 displays a remaining time image 728. The remaining time image 728 is an image showing the remaining time of the variable display of the second special symbol (the variable performance related to the second special symbol). In this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol (the variable performance related to the second special symbol) in the second time-saving game state starts, the remaining time image 728 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "150 seconds left" is displayed in the remaining time image 728. Also, during the variable display of the second special symbol (during the variable performance related to the second special symbol), the time shown in the remaining time image 728 is displayed decreasing as time passes.

(Change effect image 729)
As shown in FIG. 129 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a change effect image 729. The change effect image 729 is an effect image whose display color changes according to the change performance related to the normal pattern. In this embodiment, during the change display of the second special pattern in the second time-saving game state, the change effect image 729 is displayed over the change display of the normal pattern (the change performance related to the normal pattern) performed multiple times. The change effect image 729 changes its display color according to the result of the normal pattern lottery related to the normal pattern that is displayed in a changeable manner, and notifies or suggests the expectation of winning. Furthermore, it is set so that a type of color with a higher expectation is displayed when the judgment result of the normal pattern lottery is a win than when it is a miss. For example, when white, blue, yellow, green, purple, red, and gold are set as the colors of the change effect image 729, it may be set so that the later the order, the higher the expectation.

(Stock promotional image 730)
As shown in Fig. 130 (8), a stock teasing image 730 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The stock teasing image 730 is an image teasing whether or not the right to win the special symbol lottery has been stocked due to the occurrence of a hold on the winning of the second starting hole 122. In the illustrated example, the stock teasing image 730 displays the text "Stock success!?"

(Failed image 731)
As shown in FIG. 130(9), a failure image 731 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The failure image 731 is an image indicating that the player has failed to stock the right to win the special symbol lottery during the variable display of the second special symbol. In the illustrated example, the failure image 731 shows an "x" mark.

(Success image 732)
As shown in FIG. 133(10), a success image 732 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The success image 732 is an image indicating that the player has succeeded in stocking the right to win the special symbol lottery during the variable display of the second special symbol. In the illustrated example, the success image 732 displays the text "Stock successful!"

(Expected image 733)
As shown in Fig. 138 (4), an expectation image 733 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The expectation image 733 is an image that makes the player expect that he or she will win the normal symbol lottery. The expectation image 733 is, for example, a moving image of a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 playing a mini-game.

(Digestive teaser image 734)
As shown in FIG. 139(7), a consumption prompt image 734 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The consumption prompt image 734 is an image encouraging consumption of the right to win the special symbol lottery, which was stocked by winning the second start port 122. In the illustrated example, the consumption prompt image 734 displays the text "Stock release!?"

(Highly anticipated image 735)
As shown in FIG. 141(4), the image display unit 114 displays a high expectation image 735. The high expectation image 735 is an image that makes the player expect that he or she will win the normal symbol lottery. In this embodiment, the high expectation image 735 has a higher expectation of winning the normal symbol lottery than the expectation image 733. The high expectation image 735 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini-game.

(Winning image 736)
As shown in FIG. 142(7), a winning image 736 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The winning image 736 is an image that suggests or notifies the player that the normal symbol lottery has been won. In the illustrated example, the winning image 736 displays the text "Victory!"

(Countdown image 737)
As shown in FIG. 125-2(3), a countdown image 737 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The countdown image 737 is an image showing the remaining time until the second large prize opening door 126D transitions from an open state to a closed state. In this embodiment, the countdown image 737 is displayed when a gaming ball does not enter the second large prize opening 126 within a predetermined time after the second large prize opening door 126D opens. In the illustrated example, the text "3:00 seconds remaining" is displayed as the countdown image 737.

(End image 738)
As shown in FIG. 125-2(4), an end image 738 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The end image 738 is displayed when the time-saving game state ends without a big win game being played. In the illustrated example, the text "END" is displayed as the end image 738.

(Example of variation 1)
Next, referring to Fig. 110, a variable presentation (variable presentation example 1) performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like will be specifically described. The variable presentation example 1 is an example of a variable presentation based on a winning entry into the first start gate 121 in a normal game state. In the variable presentation example 1, a variable presentation based on a winning entry into the gate 124 is started during the execution of a variable presentation based on a winning entry into the first start gate 121.
In addition, the variable performance based on winning at the first starting gate 121 in the variable performance example 1 is a variable performance executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 48. Also, the variable performance based on winning at the gate 124 in the variable performance example 1 is a variable performance executed when "EQ1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 106(a).

As shown in FIG. 110 (1), when the previous first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved number display 53A, the third reserved number display 53C, the first small symbol 54A, the third small symbol 54C, and the stage image 701 are displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved number display 53A and the third reserved number display 53C both display "0". The stage image 701 is displayed in a display mode that corresponds to the normal game state.

When the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Fig. 110 (2), the decorative pattern 41 and the first small pattern 54A start to change in accordance with the start of the change display of the first special pattern. At this time, the change image 51 is also displayed.
Next, the "4" which is the left decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped. At this time, when the player shoots the game ball to the right side of the game area 111, and the game ball enters the gate 124, a left hit image 702 is displayed as shown in FIG. 110 (3). At this time, a sound is output from the speaker 156 to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 111. At this time, the variable display of the normal symbol is started. Then, as the variable display of the normal symbol is started, the variable display of the third small symbol 54C is started. On the other hand, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 based on the winning of the gate 124 are not displayed. Also, the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 accompanying the variable display of the normal symbol is not performed.

Although not shown in the figure, when a game ball enters gate 124 in a state where there is no reservation for winning at gate 124 and the normal symbol is not changing, first, "1" is displayed in third reservation number display 53C. Then, "0" is displayed in third reservation number display 53C, and the changing performance related to the normal symbol begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(4), the right decorative symbol 41, "1", is temporarily stopped. At this time, the third small symbol 54C, "135", is fixed and stopped in association with the stop display of the normal symbol.
Next, as shown in FIG. 110(5), the middle decorative pattern 41 "2" temporarily stops.
Then, with the stop display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 110(6), the three decorative symbols 41 and the first small symbol 54A, "421", are fixed and stopped. At this time, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the third small symbol 54C when displaying the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A in the normal game state. Here, the normal game state is regarded as the first mode. In addition, the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A are both regarded as the first performance symbol. In addition, the third small symbol 54C is regarded as the second performance symbol.
In this case, in the first mode, the player can recognize each of the first presentation pattern corresponding to the special pattern and the second presentation pattern corresponding to the normal pattern, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the third small symbol 54C when displaying the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A in the normal game state. Here, the normal game state is regarded as the first mode. Also, the decorative symbol 41 is regarded as the first performance symbol. Also, the first small symbol 54A is regarded as the second performance symbol. Furthermore, the third small symbol 54C is regarded as the third performance symbol.
In this case, while allowing the player to recognize each of the performance patterns corresponding to the special patterns and the normal patterns in the first mode, the player can be directed to the variable performance related to the special patterns that is being mainly performed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can variably display the third small symbol 54C when the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A are variably displayed in the normal game state. Here, the normal game state is regarded as the first mode. Also, the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A are both regarded as the first performance symbol. Also, the third small symbol 54C is regarded as the second performance symbol.
In this case, the player can be made aware that the special symbols and the normal symbols are fluctuating simultaneously in the first mode, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the variable presentation based on winning at gate 124 in the normal game state, the image display unit 114 does not display any presentation other than the third small symbol 54C, regardless of the result of the normal symbol selection.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, the decorative pattern 41 and the first small pattern 54A are displayed as the performance patterns corresponding to the special patterns, and the third small pattern 54C is displayed as the performance pattern corresponding to the normal pattern. That is, in the normal game state, there are more types of performance patterns corresponding to the special patterns than types of performance patterns corresponding to the normal patterns.
In this case, the player can be made to pay more attention to the variable presentation of the special symbols that is mainly performed during normal gaming mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 during normal game play, a first effect display (such as display of reserved image 52) according to the pre-determination result command and a second effect display (updating reserved number display 53) according to the reserved number increase command are executed, whereas when a game ball enters the gate 124 during normal game play, execution of the first effect display according to the pre-determination result command is restricted, but the second effect display according to the reserved number increase command is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the effects different when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 during normal game play and when a game ball enters the gate 124, thereby making the game more interesting.
In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the gate 124 in the normal game state, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed.

The decorative pattern 41 displayed in the normal game state may be a special pattern that suggests or notifies that an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect will occur. In other words, in the normal game state, the number of types of decorative pattern 41 corresponding to the first special pattern may be greater than the number of types of third small pattern 54C corresponding to the normal pattern. In this case, the presentation effect in the normal game state can be improved, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Although not described below, in this embodiment as well, when a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, an illuminated image 703 corresponding to the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41 may be displayed.

(Example of variation 2)
FIG. 111 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 2) of the variation performance of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. The variable performance example 2 is an example of a variation performance based on winning the first start gate 121 in the normal game state, and a variation performance based on winning the gate 124 in the normal game state. The variable performance based on winning the first start gate 121 in the variable performance example 2 is a variation performance executed when "ER5" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 48. The variable performance based on winning the gate 124 in the variable performance example 2 is a variation performance executed when "EP1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 106(a). In addition, in the following description, differences from the above variable performance example 1 will be mainly described, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable performance example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 111 (1), the decorative pattern 41, the first small pattern 54A, and the third small pattern 54C are fixed and suspended. At this time, one reserved image 52 is displayed. At this time, the first reserved number display 53A displays "1" and the third reserved number display 53C displays "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (2), as the display of the next first special symbol begins, the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A begins. The first reserved number display 53A is updated to "0". The first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, when the game ball enters the gate 124, a left hit image 702 is displayed and a sound is output from the speaker 156 to prompt the player to launch the game ball to the left side of the game area 111. At this time, as the display of the normal symbol begins, the display of the third small symbol 54C begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(3), the left and right decorative symbols 41, "4", temporarily stop, and the reach performance begins.
Also, at this time, the normal symbol display 223 is stopped and displayed in a lighting state that notifies that the lottery result is a win. Then, with the stop display of the normal symbol, the third small symbol 54C, "121", is fixed and stopped. That is, in the variable performance related to the normal symbol, the reach performance is not executed and the variable performance ends. Then, since the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is "win symbol A" (see FIG. 106(a)), the electric tulip 123 is opened (opened for a short time). Here, since the opening time of the electric tulip 123 when the "win symbol A" is displayed in the normal game state is 0.1 seconds (see FIG. 97-1(b)), even if the player launches a game ball to the right side of the game area 111 while the electric tulip 123 is open, the electric tulip 123 closes without the game ball winning in the second start hole 122. That is, in this embodiment, when a short win is won, the game ball does not win in the second start hole 122. However, the game ball may be set to enter the second starting hole 122 with a lower probability when a short win is won than when a long win is won.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(4), the middle decorative pattern 41 "5" temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 111(5), the three decorative symbols 41 and the first small symbol 54A, "454", are fixed and stopped with the stop display of the first special symbol. At this time, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the normal symbol lottery is won in the normal game state, the effect of notifying the player that the normal symbol lottery has been won is not executed. In other words, even if the normal symbol lottery is won in the normal game state, the third small symbol 54C of the losing combination is displayed.
As described above, all winnings in the normal pattern lottery in the normal game state are short wins, and in this case, even if the electric tulip 123 is opened, the game ball does not enter the second starting hole 122, and the game advantageous to the player is not played. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the normal pattern lottery is won, if the game advantageous to the player is not played, the performance of notifying the player that the normal pattern lottery has been won is not executed, so that although the performance of notifying the player that the normal pattern lottery has been won is executed to please the player, the interest in the game is prevented from being excessively reduced by not playing the game advantageous to the player.

Although not explained below, in this embodiment as well, when the highly decorative left and right decorative patterns 41 temporarily stop to start a reach performance, light-emitting images 703 corresponding to the temporarily stopped left and right decorative patterns 41 may be displayed.

(Example of variation 3)
112 and 113 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 3) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 112 and Fig. 113. Variable performance example 3 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in a normal game state. The variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in variable performance example 3 is a variable performance executed when "ER10" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 48. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variable performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 112(1), the decorative pattern 41, the first small pattern 54A, and the third small pattern 54C are fixed and suspended. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed, the first reserved number display 53A displays "2," and the third reserved number display 53C displays "0."

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (2), as the next first special pattern starts to change, the decorative pattern 41 and the first small pattern 54A start to change. The first reserved number display 53A is updated to "1". The second reserved image 52 moves closer to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the change performance of the variable image 51 is executed, and the variable image 51 is displayed in green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(3), the left and right decorative symbols 41, "4", temporarily stop, and the reach performance begins.
112(4), a transition image 704 is displayed. With the display of this transition image 704, the stage image 701 and the decorative pattern 41 are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (5), as the SP reach performance begins, an SP reach image 705 is displayed. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a reduced size with a less decorative display mode. At this time, the variable image 51 and reserved image 52 are not displayed. At this time, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the first reserved number display 53A is updated to "2". On the other hand, no new reserved image 52 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(6), with the start of the SPSP reach effect, an SPSP reach image 706 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 113(7), a button operation presentation is executed and a button operation image 707 is displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 707 is displayed, the center decorative symbol 41 "5" is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 113 (8). This center decorative symbol 41 has a larger display size than the left and right decorative symbols 41. At this time, the light-emitting image 703 corresponding to the center decorative symbol 41 is not displayed.
Next, a transition image 704 is displayed as shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (10), the three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode. At this time, the luminous image 703 corresponding to the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. At this time, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, and the stage image 701 are displayed again.
Next, with the stop display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 113 (11), the three decorative symbols 41 and the first small symbol 54A, "454", are fixed and stopped. At this time, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the reserved image 52 is not displayed even if the game ball enters the first start gate 121 when the SP reach performance is being executed in the normal game state. Here, the reserved image 52 may not be displayed even if the game ball enters the first start gate 121 when the SPSP reach performance is being executed in the normal game state. Also, in the normal game state, the reserved image 52 is displayed when the first start gate 121 is entered when the SP reach performance is being executed, while the reserved image 52 may not be displayed when the game ball enters the first start gate 122 when the SPSP reach performance is being executed. Also, even if the gate 124 is entered when the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is being executed in the normal game state, the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 may not be displayed.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may output a winning sound to notify the winning to the speaker 156 when the game ball wins the first start hole 121 or the gate 124 in the normal game state. In addition, when the game ball wins the first start hole 121 when the SP reach performance is being executed in the normal game state, the winning sound may be output (at this time, the reserved image 52 may be displayed, or the reserved image 52 may not be displayed). On the other hand, when the game ball wins the first start hole 121 when the SPSP reach performance is being executed in the normal game state, the winning sound may not be output. In addition, even if the game ball wins the first start hole 121 when the SP reach performance is being executed in the normal game state, the winning sound may not be output. In addition, when the game ball wins the gate 124 when the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is being executed in the normal game state, the winning sound may not be output. Also, in the normal game state, when a win is made at gate 124, the winning sound may be set not to be output in any case (before the reach performance, during the reach performance, when the fluctuation is stopped, etc.).

(Example of variation 4)
114 to 117 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 4) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to Figs. 114 to 117. Variable performance example 4 is an example of a variable performance based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state. The variable performance in variable performance example 4 is a variable performance executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 48. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variable performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 114(1), the decorative pattern 41, the first small pattern 54A, and the third small pattern 54C are fixed and stopped. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed, and the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue. At this time, the first reserved number display 53A displays "2" and the third reserved number display 53C displays "0". The first special pattern reserved indicator 218 is displayed (lit) in a manner that indicates that the reserved number is "2".
The first reserved image 52 may be displayed in blue from the start of display, or may be displayed in blue as a result of a change in the reserved image 52 that was displayed in the normal display mode. In other words, the reserved image 52 may have undergone either of the effects as long as it is displayed in blue as a result of a pre-determination effect.
In addition, when a change performance is performed, the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes, while the display mode (lighting mode) of the first special pattern reserved display 218 does not change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (2), as the display of the next first special pattern begins, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the first small pattern 54A begins. The first reserved number display 53A is updated to "1". The second reserved image 52 moves closer to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the change performance of the variable image 51 is executed, and the variable image 51 is displayed in red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(3), the left and right decorative symbols 41, "4", temporarily stop, and the reach performance begins.
114(4), a transition image 704 is displayed. With the display of the transition image 704, the stage image 701 and the decorative pattern 41 are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 114(5), the SP reach image 705 is displayed with the start of the SP reach performance. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a reduced size with a less decorative display mode. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (6), the SPSP reach image 706 is displayed as the SPSP reach performance begins. At this time, the first reserved number display 53A is updated to "2" as the game ball enters the first starting hole 121. Meanwhile, no new reserved image 52 is displayed.

In this embodiment, even if the game ball enters the first start gate 121 during the execution of the SP reach performance or the execution of the SPSP reach, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the game ball enters the first start gate 121 during the execution of the SP reach performance, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed, whereas when the game ball enters the first start gate 121 during the execution of the SPSP reach performance, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may not be displayed. Also, when the game ball enters the gate 124 during the execution of the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may not be displayed.
Also, when the first start gate 121 is won during the execution of the SP reach performance, a winning sound notifying the winning may be output from the speaker 156, whereas when the first start gate 121 is won during the execution of the SPSP reach performance, a winning sound notifying the winning may not be output. Also, when the first start gate 121 is won while the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is being executed, a winning sound notifying the winning may be output from the speaker 156, whereas when the gate 124 is won while the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is being executed, a winning sound notifying the winning may not be output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(7), a button operation presentation is executed and a button operation image 707 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 707 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 115 (8), a role effect is executed, and the movable role object 115 moves so as to overlap with the image display unit 114. At this time, the effect button 161 vibrates. At this time, a sound effect is executed, and a first effect sound that suggests or notifies that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win is output from the speaker 156. At this time, a first notification image 708 is displayed. At this time, each lamp emits light in rainbow colors.
In addition, the role effect in which the movable role object 115 moves so as to overlap with the image display unit 114 as shown in Fig. 115 (8) can be regarded as an effect that suggests or notifies that the special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win. Also, the effect in which the effect button 161 vibrates as shown in Fig. 58 (9) can be regarded as an effect that suggests or notifies that the special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(9), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is temporarily stopped. At this time, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a larger display size than when the variable performance starts or when the SP reach performance is being executed. Also, the first small pattern 54A continues to be displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 115 (10), a transition image 704 is displayed. With the display of the transition image 704, the decorative pattern 41 is no longer displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (11), the decorative pattern 41 of the double number is displayed in a highly decorative display mode. At this time, the stage image 701 is displayed again. Meanwhile, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed.
In addition, after the transition image 704 is displayed, when the repeated number decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a highly decorative display mode, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 may be displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 115 (12), a promotion prompting effect is executed. In the promotion prompting effect, a button operation effect is executed. In the illustrated example, a button operation image 707 is displayed by the button operation effect.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 707 is displayed, the provisional stop of the decorative symbol 41 of "444" is maintained as shown in Fig. 116 (13). In other words, as a result of the execution of the promotion teasing effect, the promotion effect is not executed.

Then, with the first special symbol being displayed, the decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A, "444", are displayed as shown in FIG. 116 (14).
Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (15), a big win game notification image 709 and a second notification image 710 are displayed. At this time, the first small symbol 54A is not displayed. Meanwhile, the third small symbol 54C, the first reserved number display 53A, and the third reserved number display 53C are maintained displayed. At this time, each lamp emits a rainbow color, and a second performance sound is output from the speaker 156, which suggests or notifies that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (16), the first reserved number display 53A is hidden. Meanwhile, the third small symbol 54C and the third reserved number display 53C continue to be displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (17), with the start of the big win game, a round image 711 and a first right hit image 712 are displayed.

In addition, in a jackpot game, the game ball is launched to the right side of the game area 111, and at this time, if the game ball enters the gate 124, a reservation may be made for the winning of the gate 124, or a variable display or a variable performance of the normal pattern may be performed based on the winning of the gate 124. If a reservation is made for the winning of the gate 124 during a jackpot game, the number of reservations that have been made is displayed on the third reservation number display 53C. On the other hand, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed. In addition, the variable performance of the normal pattern during a jackpot game is performed by the variable display and the stop display of the third small pattern 54C without using the decorative pattern 41.
In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol that started during the big win game may continue when the time-saving game state starts. In this case, the number of lotteries J in the time-saving game state may not be subtracted, and a variable performance in which the third small symbol 54C is displayed without the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 may be executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost money, and to improve the interest of the game.

Next, when the jackpot game ends, a status notification image 713 is displayed as shown in FIG. 116 (18). In the illustrated example, the text "First time-saving game has started!" is displayed, which suggests or notifies the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the first time-saving game state, which is the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In other words, when the jackpot game ends, the pachinko gaming machine 100 goes from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (19), in the first time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, "135", is fixed and stopped. Also, the third small pattern 54C, "135", and the fourth small pattern 54D, "444", are fixed and stopped. That is, in the time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 41 corresponding to the normal pattern is displayed. Also, the third small pattern 54C is displayed at the position where the third small pattern 54C was displayed in the normal game state. Also, the fourth small pattern 54D is displayed at the position where the first small pattern 54A was displayed in the normal game state. Also, while the third reserved number display 53C is displayed, the first reserved number display 53A and the second reserved number display 53B are not displayed. Also, a stage image 701 corresponding to the first time-saving game state is displayed. Also, at this time, the time-saving remaining number image 714 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the remaining time-saving number image 714 displays the text "100 more," indicating that there are 100 remaining times for the special pattern lottery in the first time-saving play state.

Although not shown in the figure, after this, the reserved winnings for the first starting hole 121 are consumed, and the first special symbol is displayed and a variable performance related to the first special symbol is performed twice. The variable performance related to the first special symbol is performed by the variable display and stop display of the fourth small symbol 54D, without using the decorative symbol 41.

As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116 (14) and (15), the first small symbol 54A displayed as stopped is not displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (2) to (5), the third small symbol 54C displayed as stopped is not displayed. Note that the third small symbol 54C displayed as stopped is not displayed even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed multiple times thereafter, regardless of the content of the variable display related to the multiple variable displays (even if the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is executed). That is, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can not display the third small symbol 54C displayed as stopped in the normal game state, and can not display the first small symbol 54A displayed as stopped. Here, the normal game state is regarded as the first mode. Also, the third small symbol 54C is regarded as the first performance symbol. Also, the first small symbol 54A is regarded as the second performance symbol.
In this case, the first performance pattern corresponding to the normal pattern and the second performance pattern corresponding to the special pattern in the first mode can be recognized by the player. Also, when the game ball is not shot to the left side of the game area 111, the first starting hole 121 does not win, and the first special pattern is not displayed, as in the case of a jackpot game, the second performance pattern can be hidden to make the player pay more attention to other performance images displayed when the second performance pattern is hidden. On the other hand, even during a jackpot game, the game ball is shot to the right side of the game area 111, the gate 124 wins, and the normal pattern can be displayed, so by not hiding the first performance pattern, it is possible to suggest to the player that the first performance pattern can be displayed. In this way, by switching between hidden and not hidden depending on the performance pattern, it is possible to both draw attention to other performance patterns and suggest that the performance pattern can be displayed. This improves the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not cut off from the time when the special pattern lottery result in a big win or small win in the normal game state starts the display of the special pattern changes (changing performance) until the first time-saving game state starts, the decorative pattern 41 of a losing symbol is displayed before the first change in the first time-saving game state starts (see FIG. 117 (19)).

In addition, while the normal symbol variable display is being performed, the pachinko gaming machine 100 may switch from the normal game state to the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state). In this case, the next normal symbol variable display is displayed according to a variable pattern for the time-saving game state. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complex processing such as changing the control of the normal symbol variable display or the auxiliary game control midway due to the occurrence of the time-saving game state, which makes it possible to reduce the processing burden.

For example, while the normal symbol variation display is being performed, the pachinko gaming machine 100 may switch from the time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state, second time-saving gaming state) to the normal gaming state. In this case, the variation display will be performed according to the variation pattern for the normal gaming state from the next normal symbol variation display. Therefore, even if the normal gaming state is controlled during the variation display of the long winning symbol, the electric tulip 123 will be opened for 5 seconds after the normal symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, if the game is in a customer waiting state at the start of a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) transitioned from a jackpot game, the background music corresponding to the presentation mode of the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) may be muted without being audibly output. In this case, when a game ball enters gate 124 from the customer waiting state to start a variable presentation, the background music corresponding to the presentation mode of the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) may be audibly output.

Although not explained below, both in this embodiment and in normal game mode, when the repeating decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 116 (13)), an illuminated image 703 corresponding to each of the three decorative patterns 41 may be displayed.

(Example of variation 5)
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 5) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 118. Variable performance example 5 is an example of a variable performance that is executed twice based on two winnings at the gate 124 in the normal game state. The first variable performance in variable performance example 5 is a variable performance that is executed when "EQ1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 106(a), and the second variable performance is a variable performance that is executed when "EP1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 106(a). In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 118 (1), when the reserved numbers for winning at the first starting gate 121 and the reserved numbers for winning at the gate 124 are both 0 and the first special pattern and the normal pattern are both displayed stopped in the normal game state, the decorative pattern 41, the first small pattern 54A and the third small pattern 54C are displayed stopped in a definite state.
Next, when the game ball enters the gate 124, the variable display of the normal symbol starts, and the variable display of the third small symbol 54C starts, as shown in Fig. 118 (2). At this time, the left hit image 702 is displayed, and a sound is output from the speaker 156 to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 111.

Then, as the normal symbol stops, the third small symbol 54C, "135", stops as shown in FIG. 118 (3). Also, when the time has elapsed since the first special symbol stops and no game ball has entered the first start hole 121, and the time measured by the performance control unit 300 since it received the customer waiting command reaches the time-up time (see S4305 in FIG. 43), the setting image 718 is displayed. In other words, regardless of the variable display of the normal symbol or the variable performance related to the normal symbol, the customer waiting performance starts based on the time from the first special symbol stops and no game ball has entered the first start hole 121.

Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting image 718 was displayed without a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 121, a customer waiting demo image 719 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 118(4).
Next, when the game ball enters the gate 124, the variable display of the normal symbol starts, and the variable display of the third small symbol 54C starts, as shown in Fig. 118 (5). At this time, the left hit image 702 is displayed, and a sound is output from the speaker 156 to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the play area 111. On the other hand, the customer waiting demo image 719 is not hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (6), the normal symbol display 223 is stopped and displayed in a lit state to indicate that the lottery result is a win. After that, the third small symbol 54C, "121", is confirmed and stopped. Meanwhile, the customer waiting demo image 719 is not hidden. At this time, the electric tulip 123 is opened for a predetermined time (opened for a short time) and then closed.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, even if a game ball enters the gate 124 or a variable effect based on the variable display of the normal symbol is started, the customer waiting effect is not limited. Therefore, the customer waiting effect can be performed at an appropriate timing according to the game situation, and it is possible to exert the intended appealing effect on the player. In addition, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by not making the player aware of the variable display of the normal symbol, which is not considered important in the normal game state.
In addition, a customer waiting effect may be started during the varying display (variable effect) of normal symbols in the normal gaming state.
As described above, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 during normal game play or when a variable effect related to the first special symbol is started, the customer waiting effect is restricted.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the variable presentation executed by winning the normal symbol lottery in the normal game state, the execution of the promotion teasing presentation and the promotion presentation is restricted. More specifically, in the variable presentation executed by winning the normal symbol lottery in the normal game state, the execution of the promotion presentation accompanied by the role presentation and the vibration of the presentation button 161 is restricted. In this case, in the normal game state where hitting from the left is advantageous for the player, the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is executed by the game ball entering the first starting hole 121, can be promoted, and the interest in the game can be increased.

(Example of change performance 6)
FIG. 119 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable presentation example 6) of the variable presentation will be described with reference to Fig. 119. The variable presentation shown in variable presentation example 6 is a variable presentation based on winning at gate 124 in the first time-saving gaming state. The variable presentation in variable presentation example 6 is a variable presentation executed when "EX1" is selected as the "variable presentation pattern" in Fig. 107(b). In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples will be mainly described, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable presentation examples may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 119(1), following the display of the previous normal symbol, decorative symbol 41 and third small symbol 54C "029" are fixed and stopped. Also, fourth small symbol 54D "246" is fixed and stopped. Also, "0" is displayed in third reserved number display 53C. Also, at this time, a stage image 701 corresponding to the first time-saving game state, a first right-hit image 712, and a time-saving remaining number image 714 are displayed.

Next, when the game ball enters the gate 124, as the normal symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the third small symbol 54C start to change as shown in FIG. 119 (2). Also, the changing image 51 is displayed. Also, the remaining time reduction number image 714 is updated to "89 more."

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(3), the decorative pattern 41 and the third small pattern 54C, "421", are fixed and stopped with the normal pattern being stopped. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed.
In the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), unlike the normal game state, when the decorative pattern 41 stops, the luminous image 703 corresponding to the stopped decorative pattern 41 may not be displayed. However, even in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), when the decorative pattern 41 stops, the luminous image 703 corresponding to the stopped decorative pattern 41 may be displayed as in the normal game state. In this case, in the normal game state, when three decorative patterns 41 are stopped and displayed, the luminous images 703 corresponding to each of the three stopped decorative patterns 41 are displayed simultaneously.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), the fourth small symbol 54D is displayed as the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the third small symbol 54C are displayed as the effect symbols corresponding to the normal symbol. That is, in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), there are more kinds of effect symbols corresponding to the normal symbol than kinds of effect symbols corresponding to the special symbol.
In this case, the player can be made to pay more attention to the variable presentation of the normal symbols that is mainly carried out during the time-saving game mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the normal game state, the display of the variable image 51 and reserved image 52 corresponding to the normal symbol is restricted, but the display of the variable image 51 and reserved image 52 corresponding to the first special symbol is possible, and during the first time-saving game state, the display of the variable image 51 and reserved image 52 corresponding to the first special symbol is restricted, but the display of the variable image 51 and reserved image 52 corresponding to the normal symbol is possible. Therefore, it is possible to realize the display of the variable image 51 and reserved image 52 according to the importance to the game state, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the first time-saving game state is described as a state that is controlled when a special symbol lottery is won in the normal game state, but this is not limited to the above. The first time-saving game state may be a state that is controlled when the special symbol changes the number of times required to reach the specific time-saving game state in the normal game state. In other words, the specific time-saving game state may be the first time-saving game state.

In addition, the decorative patterns 41 displayed in the first time-saving game state may be special patterns that suggest or notify that an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect will occur. In other words, in the first time-saving game state, the number of types of decorative patterns 41 corresponding to normal patterns may be greater than the number of types of fourth small patterns 54D corresponding to special patterns. In this case, the presentation effect in the first time-saving game state can be improved, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, even in the first time-saving game state, the first reserved number display 53A may be displayed on the image display unit 114, and if a game ball enters the first start gate 121 during the first time-saving game state, the first reserved number display 53A may be updated to "1." That is, if a game ball enters the first start gate 121 during the first time-saving game state, the presentation display according to the pre-judgment result command (for example, display of reserved image 52 or change presentation of reserved image 52, etc.) is limited, but the presentation display according to the reserved number increase command (updating of first reserved number display 53A) is executed, while if a game ball enters the gate 124 during the first time-saving game state, the presentation display according to the pre-judgment result command (for example, display of reserved image 52 or change presentation of reserved image 52, etc.) and the presentation display according to the reserved number increase command (updating of third reserved number display 53C) are executed. In this case, during the time-saving game mode, the presentation can be different depending on whether the first starting gate 121 or the gate 124 is won, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the first time-saving game state, a notification (display of the remaining time-saving number image 714) is given regarding the number of times that the normal pattern will change (change performance) based on winning at gate 124, which is also possible in the normal game state.

(Example of change performance 7)
120 to 122 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 7) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figs. 120 to 122. Variable performance example 14 is an example of a variable performance based on winning at the gate 124 in the first time-saving game state, a variable performance based on winning at the first start port 121 in the first time-saving game state, and a variable performance based on winning at the gate 124 in the normal game state. The variable performance based on winning at the gate 124 in the first time-saving game state in variable performance example 7 is a variable performance executed when "EW1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 107(b). Also, the variable performance based on winning at the first start port 121 in the first time-saving game state in variable performance example 7 is a variable performance executed when "ET1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 106(b). In addition, the variable performance based on winning at the gate 124 in the normal game state in the variable performance example 7 is a variable performance executed when "EQ1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 106 (a). In addition, in the following explanation, the points that differ from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 120(1), the decorative pattern 41, the third small pattern 54C, and the fourth small pattern 54D are fixed and stopped. At this time, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the third reserved number display 53C. In addition, the text "1 more" is displayed in the time-saving remaining number image 714.
Next, as shown in FIG. 120(2), as the next normal pattern starts to change, the decorative pattern 41 and the third small pattern 54C start to change. The third reserved number display 53C is updated to "0". At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the change performance of the variable image 51 is executed, and the variable image 51 is displayed in green. The time-saving remaining number image 714 is updated to "0 remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(3), a reach prompting effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 120(4), the left and right decorative symbols 41, "4", are temporarily stopped, and the reach effect starts. At this time, the light-emitting images 703 corresponding to the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed, respectively. Also, at this time, when the game ball enters the first start hole 121, the variable display of the fourth small symbol 54D starts with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(5), the SP reach image 705 is displayed with the start of the SP reach performance. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the variable image 51 and the stage image 701 are not displayed. At this time, the fourth small pattern 54D, "246", is fixed and stopped with the stop display of the first special pattern.
In the time-saving gaming state, the SP reach effect starts without displaying the transition image 704, but is not limited to this. Even in the time-saving gaming state, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect may start after the reach effect starts, via the transition image 704.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(6), the SPSP reach image 706 is displayed with the start of the SPSP reach performance. Also, at this time, when the game ball enters the gate 124, the third reserved number display 53C is updated to "1". Meanwhile, a new reserved image 52 is not displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (7), a button operation presentation is executed and a button operation image 707 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 707 is displayed, the middle decorative pattern 41 "5" is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 121 (8).
Next, as shown in Fig. 121(9), the decorative pattern 41 of the mismatched combination, "454", is temporarily stopped. At this time, the variable image 51 and the stage image 701 are redisplayed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (10), the normal symbol display 223 is stopped and displayed in a lighting state to notify that the lottery result is a win. After that, the decorative symbol 41 and the third small symbol 54C, "454", are fixed and stopped. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed. Then, with the stop display of the normal symbol, which is a short win, the electric tulip 123 opens for a predetermined time (short time opening) and then closes. Also, since the remaining number of variations of the normal symbol in the first time-saving game state becomes 0, the pachinko game machine 100 changes from the first time-saving game state to the normal game state.

Next, as shown in Fig. 121 (11), a second shutter image 724 and a result notification image 725 are displayed. At this time, the first right hit image 712 is not displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (12), the variable display of the third small pattern 54C starts with the start of the variable display of the next normal pattern. Meanwhile, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. Also, at this time, the third reserved number display 53C is updated to "0".
Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (13), along with the stopped display of the normal symbol, the third small symbol 54C, "246", is confirmed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (14), the second shutter image 724 and the result notification image 725 are hidden, and the stage image 701 corresponding to the normal game state is displayed again. In addition, the decorative pattern 41 and the first small pattern 54A, "246", are displayed in a fixed and stopped state.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, the main variable effect is the normal symbol variable effect. In particular, in the time-saving game state, it is possible to execute an expectation effect that makes the player expect that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a win. In addition, there are multiple expectation effects with different expectation levels of winning. Examples of expectation effects include reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects, and display of reserved images 52.
In addition, as the variation presentation patterns of the variation presentation related to the normal symbols in the first time-saving game state, a plurality of variation presentation patterns in which the lottery result is a win and a plurality of variation presentation patterns in which the lottery result is a miss are provided (see FIG. 107(b)). In addition, as the variation pattern in which the lottery result related to the normal symbols in the first time-saving game state is a win and the variation pattern in which the lottery result related to the normal symbols in the first time-saving game state is a miss, a plurality of variation patterns with different execution times are provided (see FIG. 99(c)).
In addition, in the first time-saving gaming state, a time-saving remaining number image 714 regarding the number of times the normal symbols change is displayed. Furthermore, in the first time-saving gaming state, a pre-determination effect based on a pre-determination result of the normal symbol lottery is executed (see FIG. 105).
In the first time-saving gaming state, the pre-determination effect for the normal symbol is more likely to be executed than the pre-determination effect for the second special symbol or the pre-determination effect for the first special symbol. In the first time-saving gaming state, the variable effect for the normal symbol that produces the reach effect is more likely to be executed than the variable effect for the first special symbol that produces the reach effect or the variable effect for the second special symbol that produces the reach effect.
In this case, in the time-saving game state, various variable effects related to normal symbols can be realized, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the first time-saving gaming state, a variable presentation in which an expectation presentation is performed is more likely to be executed if the lottery result is a short win than if the lottery result is a miss.
In addition, in the first time-saving gaming state, the variable presentation in which an expected presentation is performed may be more likely to be executed when the lottery result is a long win than when the lottery result is a short win.
Also, for example, when it is determined that the lottery result is a short win in the first time-saving gaming state, a variable performance in which the SP reach performance is performed and the SPSP reach performance is not performed may be more easily executed than a variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is performed. And, when it is determined that the lottery result is a long win in the first time-saving gaming state, a variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is performed may be more easily executed than a variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is performed and the SPSP reach performance is not performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the first time-saving game state, the pre-determination effect for the first special symbol and the pre-determination effect for the second special symbol are not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the first time-saving game state, while the pre-determination effect for the first special symbol and the pre-determination effect for the second special symbol are executed, the pre-determination effect for the normal symbol may be executed more easily than the pre-determination effect for the first special symbol and the pre-determination effect for the second special symbol. In addition, in the first time-saving game state, the pre-determination effect for the normal symbol is executed more easily than the pre-determination effect for the first special symbol and the pre-determination effect for the second special symbol, which includes the pre-determination effect for the first special symbol and the pre-determination effect for the second special symbol not being executed (0%) in the first time-saving game state.
In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the reach effect is not performed in the change performance related to the first special symbol or the change performance related to the second special symbol in the first time-saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the first time-saving game state, while the change performance related to the first special symbol in which the reach effect is performed and the change performance related to the second special symbol in which the reach effect is performed are performed, the change performance related to the normal symbol in which the reach effect is performed may be more easily executed than the change performance related to the first special symbol in which the reach effect is performed and the change performance related to the second special symbol in which the reach effect is performed. In addition, in the first time-saving game state, the change performance related to the normal symbol in which the reach effect is performed is more easily executed than the change performance related to the first special symbol in which the reach effect is performed and the change performance related to the second special symbol in which the reach effect is performed, which includes the fact that the change performance related to the first special symbol in which the reach effect is performed and the change performance related to the second special symbol in which the reach effect is performed are not executed (0%) in the first time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the fourth small symbol 54D when displaying the decorative symbol 41 and the third small symbol 54C in the time-saving game state. Here, the time-saving game state is regarded as the second mode. Also, the fourth small symbol 54D is regarded as the first performance symbol. Also, the decorative symbol 41 and the third small symbol 54C are both regarded as the second performance symbol.
In this case, in the second mode, the player can recognize each of the first presentation pattern corresponding to the special pattern and the second presentation pattern corresponding to the normal pattern, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the decorative pattern 41 and the third small pattern 54C when the fourth small pattern 54D is displayed in the time-saving game state. Here, the time-saving game state is regarded as the second mode. Also, the fourth small pattern 54D is regarded as the first performance pattern. Also, the decorative pattern 41 is regarded as the second performance pattern. Also, the third small pattern 54C is regarded as the third performance pattern.
In this case, while allowing the player to recognize each of the performance patterns corresponding to the special patterns and the normal patterns in the second mode, the player can be directed to the variable performance related to the normal patterns that is mainly being performed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is a short win in the first time-saving game state and a variable performance is executed because the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is a short win, a performance suggesting or notifying that the normal symbol lottery has been won is not executed. In other words, when the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is a short win in the first time-saving game state and a variable performance is executed because the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is a short win, the decorative symbol 41 of the losing eye and the third small symbol 54C of the losing eye are displayed.
In this case, although the player is pleased by executing the performance suggesting or informing that the normal symbol lottery has been won, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from excessively decreasing due to the absence of any advantageous game for the player thereafter. Also, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the case of a long win.

In the present embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the reserved image 52 corresponding to the reservation of the first special symbol in the normal game state without displaying the reserved image 52 corresponding to the reservation of the normal symbol. Also, in the first time-saving game state, the performance control unit 300 can display the reserved image 52 corresponding to the reservation of the normal symbol without displaying the reserved image 52 corresponding to the reservation of the first special symbol.
In this case, the gameplay can be varied depending on the game state, thereby making the game more entertaining.

In addition, in the variation performance example 7, even if the variation display of the normal pattern is newly executed after the result notification image 725 is displayed, the display of the result notification image 725 does not end. Here, even if the variation display of the normal pattern is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) consisting of multiple times after the result notification image 725 is displayed, the display of the result notification image 725 may not end. On the other hand, when the variation display (variation performance) of the first special pattern is started after the result notification image 725 is displayed, the display of the result notification image 725 may end, and the decorative pattern 41 and the stage image 701 shown in FIG. 122 (14) may be displayed. Also, when the variation display (variation performance) of the first special pattern is started a specific number of times (for example, once or twice) less than the predetermined number of times after the result notification image 725 is displayed, the display of the result notification image 725 may end, and the decorative pattern 41 and the stage image 701 shown in FIG. 122 (14) may be displayed.
In this case, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that, if right-handed play is still in progress when the display of the result notification image 725 starts, the display of the result notification image 725 ends immediately due to the start of a variable presentation based on a win at the gate 124, and the player is unable to check the result notification image 725. Also, when the player switches to left-handed play and a variable presentation based on a win at the first starting port 121 starts, the display of the result notification image 725 can be ended early to execute a presentation corresponding to the left-handed play, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, when a pre-determination result command relating to a normal pattern is sent to the performance control unit 300 during the time-saving game state, the performance control unit 300 displays a variable image 51 or a reserved image 52 relating to the normal pattern, or executes a change performance, but is not limited to this.
Even if the pre-determination result command is transmitted to the performance control unit 300 in the time-saving game state, the performance control unit 300 may limit (not execute) the change performance. In this case, the change image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be displayed but the change performance may be limited, or the change image 51 and the reserved image 52 may not be displayed at all and the change performance may be limited.
Also, even if a pre-determination result command for the second special symbol is sent to the performance control unit 300 during the time-saving game state, the change performance is not executed, but the performance control unit 300 may display reserved images 52 in a number corresponding to the reserved number U2 of the second special symbol during the time-saving game state, and execute a change performance for the second special symbol when a pre-determination result command for the second special symbol is sent to the performance control unit 300. On the other hand, the number of reserved images 52 corresponding to the reserved number U2 of the second special symbol may be displayed, but the change performance may not be executed.

In addition, in the time-saving game mode, it may be possible to make it easier for a variable effect to be executed in the case of a long win than in the case of a short win.

In addition, a promotion teasing effect may be less likely to be executed in a variable effect that is executed when the result of the first special pattern lottery is a win or a small win in a normal game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state) than in a variable effect that is executed when the result of the first special pattern lottery is a win or a small win in a normal game state.
In addition, a promotion effect (involving a role effect or vibration of the effect button 161) may be less likely to be executed in a variable effect that is executed when the result of the first special pattern lottery is a win or a small win in a normal game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state) than in a variable effect that is executed when the result of the first special pattern lottery is a win or a small win in a normal game state.
In addition, when a promotion teasing effect is executed, a variable effect executed when the result of the first special pattern lottery is a win in the time-saving play state (first time-saving play state, second time-saving play state) may be less likely to result in a promotion effect (involving a role effect or vibration of the effect button 161) than a variable effect executed when the result of the first special pattern lottery is a big win or a small win in the normal play state.
In this case, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, thereby making the game more entertaining.

In addition, a variable effect executed when the result of the normal pattern lottery in the first time-saving game state is a short win or long win may be less likely to result in a promotion teasing effect or a promotion effect (involving a role effect or vibration of the effect button 161) than a variable effect executed when the result of the first special pattern lottery in the normal game state is a jackpot.
In addition, a variable effect executed when the result of the normal pattern lottery in the first time-saving game state is a short win or a long win may be less likely to result in a promotion teasing effect or a promotion effect (involving a role effect or vibration of the effect button 161) than a variable effect executed when the result of the first special pattern lottery in the normal game state is a small win.
However, it may be arranged so that a promotion teasing effect or a promotion effect (accompanied by a role effect or vibration of the effect button 161) is more likely to be executed in a variable effect executed when the result of the normal pattern lottery in the first time-saving play state is a long win than in a variable effect executed when the result of the first special pattern lottery is a small win in the normal play state.

In addition, in the variable effects that are executed when the result of the normal pattern lottery in the first time-saving game state is a short win, the execution of both the promotion teasing effects and the promotion effects may be restricted.

In addition, when the result notification image 725 is displayed and a variable effect is executed because the normal pattern lottery result is a win, a variable effect may be executed in which the third small pattern 54C is variable displayed without variable displaying the decorative pattern 41. In this case, it is possible to make the player less aware that the variable display of the normal pattern is being executed in the normal game state after the time-saving game state ends, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the time-saving game state ends when the number of times J for the normal pattern becomes 0, if the time-saving game state to end is a specific time-saving game state, the display of the result notification image 725 may be restricted.

(Example of variation 8)
123 to 125-1 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 8) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figs. 123 to 125-1. The variable performance example 8 is an example of a variable performance based on winning at the gate 124 in the first time-saving game state, a variable performance based on winning at the second start port 122 in the first time-saving game state, and a variable performance based on winning at the gate 124 in the normal game state. The variable performance based on winning at the gate 124 in the first time-saving game state in the variable performance example 8 is a variable performance executed when "EW2" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 107(b). The variable performance based on winning at the second start port 122 in the first time-saving game state in the variable performance example 8 is a variable performance executed when "EU1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 107(a). In addition, the variable performance based on winning at the gate 124 in the normal game state in the variable performance example 8 is a variable performance executed when "EP1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 106 (a). In addition, in the following explanation, the points that differ from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 123(1), the decorative pattern 41, the third small pattern 54C, and the fourth small pattern 54D are fixed and suspended. At this time, one reserved image 52 is displayed in blue, and the third reserved number display 53C shows "1."

The first reserved image 52 may be displayed in blue from the start of display, or may be displayed in blue as a result of a change in the reserved image 52 that was displayed in the normal display mode. In other words, the reserved image 52 may have undergone either of the effects as long as it is displayed in blue as a result of a pre-determination effect.
In addition, when a change performance is performed, the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes, while the display mode (lighting mode) of the normal pattern reserved display 220 does not change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (2), as the display of the next normal pattern begins, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the third small pattern 54C begins. The third reserved number display 53C is updated to "0". At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the change performance of the variable image 51 is executed, and the variable image 51 is displayed in red. The remaining time-saving number image 714 is updated to "89 left".

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(3), a reach prompting effect is executed.
123(4), the left and right decorative symbols 41 of "7" are temporarily stopped, and the reach effect starts. At this time, light-emitting images 703 corresponding to the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(5), the SP reach image 705 is displayed with the start of the SP reach performance. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the variable image 51 and the stage image 701 are not displayed. At this time, when a game ball enters the gate 124, the third reserved number display 53C is updated to "1". On the other hand, a new reserved image 52 is not displayed. During the execution of the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance in the first time-saving game state, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 123(6), with the start of the SPSP reach performance, an SPSP reach image 706 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(7), a button operation presentation is executed and a button operation image 707 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 707 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 124 (8), the accessory effect is executed, and the movable accessory 115 moves so as to overlap with the image display unit 114. At this time, the effect button 161 vibrates. At this time, a sound effect is executed, and a third effect sound that suggests or notifies that the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is a win is output from the speaker 156. This third effect sound may be the same as the first effect sound that suggests or notifies that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a big win or a small win, or may be a different effect sound from the first effect sound. At this time, the first notification image 708 is displayed. At this time, each lamp emits light in rainbow colors.
In addition, as shown in Fig. 124 (8), the role effect in which the movable role object 115 moves so as to overlap with the image display unit 114 can be regarded as an effect that suggests or notifies that the normal symbol lottery result is a win. Also, as shown in Fig. 124 (8), the effect in which the effect button 161 vibrates can be regarded as an effect that suggests or notifies that the normal symbol lottery result is a win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(9), the doublet decorative symbol 41 "777" is temporarily stopped. At this time, the doublet decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a larger display size than when the SP reach performance is being performed. Also, at this time, light-emitting images 703 corresponding to each of the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed.
In addition, when the doublet decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in the time-saving gaming state, luminous images 703 corresponding to each of the doublet decorative patterns 41 may be displayed.

Then, as shown in Fig. 124 (10), the normal symbol display 223 is stopped and displayed in a lighting state to inform the player that the lottery result is a win. After that, the decorative symbol 41 and the third small symbol 54C, "777", are fixed and stopped. In addition, since the display shows the normal symbol (see Fig. 97-1 (b)), which is a long win, the electric tulip 123 is opened (opened for a long time).
Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (11), a winning promotion image 727 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. Meanwhile, the third small symbol 54C is maintained displayed.

When a game ball is launched to the right side of the game area 111 while the electric tulip 123 is open, the game ball enters the second starting hole 122. In this case, as shown in FIG. 124 (12), the variable display of the fourth small symbol 54D begins as the variable display of the second special symbol begins. At this time, a big win game notification image 709 and a second notification image 710 are also displayed. At this time, each lamp lights up in rainbow colors, and a first sound effect is output from the speaker 156, suggesting or notifying that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125-1 (13), the second special symbol display 222 is displayed (lighted) in a manner that indicates a jackpot. After that, the fourth small symbol 54D, "777", is fixed and stopped. At this time, the pachinko gaming machine 100 goes from the first time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. That is, in this embodiment, before the jackpot game starts, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to the normal gaming state. Therefore, regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the variable display of the special symbol is performed, the jackpot game starts in the normal gaming state.
Next, the big win game begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125-1 (14), the round image 711 is displayed with the start of the big win game. At this time, the fourth small symbol 54D is not displayed, while the third small symbol 54C remains displayed. At this time, the third small symbol 54C starts to be displayed with the start of the variable display of the normal symbol. The third reserved number display 53C is updated to "0".
Next, as the normal symbol stops, the third small symbol 54C, "121", stops as shown in Fig. 125-1 (15). Then, as the normal symbol stops, the electric tulip 123 opens for a predetermined time and then closes.

Next, when the jackpot game ends, a status notification image 713 is displayed as shown in FIG. 125-1 (16). In the illustrated example, the text "Start of second time-saving first mode!" is displayed, which suggests or notifies the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second time-saving game state, which is the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In other words, when the jackpot game ends, the pachinko gaming machine 100 changes from the normal game state to the second time-saving game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125-1 (17), in the second time-saving gaming state, the less decorative decorative pattern 41 "121" and the third small pattern 54C are fixed and stopped. Also, the fourth small pattern 54D "777" is fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, a stage image 701 corresponding to the first mode of the second time-saving gaming state is displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the third small symbol 54C is displayed in a manner that suggests or notifies that the normal symbol lottery result is a win, the performance control unit 300 can display the fourth small symbol 54D in a manner that suggests or notifies that the special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win. Here, the third small symbol 54C is regarded as the first performance symbol. Also, the fourth small symbol 54D is regarded as the second performance symbol. Also, the normal symbol lottery result being a win is regarded as the first game condition being established. Also, the special symbol lottery result being a big win or a small win is regarded as the second game condition being established.
In this case, the player can be made to recognize that the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win, and that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the case of a short win, a decorative pattern 41 with a missing number is displayed, while in the case of a long win, a decorative pattern 41 with a repeat number is displayed. In this case, the presentation effect in the case of a long win can be improved, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, in the case of a short win, which is not actually advantageous for the player, the player will not have excessive expectations, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, the execution of a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the decorative pattern 41 related to the normal pattern is restricted, and in the time-saving game state, a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the decorative pattern 41 related to the normal pattern can be executed. In this case, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, while the execution of specific effects is restricted in the variable effects related to normal symbols in the normal game state, specific effects can be executed in the variable effects related to normal symbols in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state). Specific effects include gimmick effects, vibration of the effect button 161, rainbow light emission of each lamp, output of the third effect sound, display of the third notification image 716, button operation effects, reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects, etc. In this case, it is possible to improve the effect of the effects in the time-saving game state, where it is important that the variable display of normal symbols is executed, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a variable effect related to a normal pattern is executed in the normal game state, the execution of an effect suggesting or notifying that the normal pattern lottery has been won is restricted, whereas when a variable effect related to a normal pattern is executed in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), an effect suggesting or notifying that the normal pattern lottery has been won is executed.
In this case, the presentation effect in the time-saving game state in which the electric tulip 123 is more likely to open than in the normal game state can be enhanced, and interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not cut off from the time when the normal pattern lottery result is a win in the first time-saving game state and the normal pattern variable display (variation presentation) starts until the second time-saving game state is entered, the decorative pattern 41 of a losing symbol is displayed before the first variation in the second time-saving game state begins (see FIG. 125-1 (17)).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a change performance is performed, the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes, while the display mode (lighting mode) of the normal pattern reserved display 220 does not change.
In this case, the control of the normal pattern reserve display 220 can be prevented from becoming complicated, while the presentation using the reserve image 52 can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the normal pattern lottery is a short win, the normal pattern display 223 is displayed in a display mode (lighting mode) that notifies the win, while the decorative pattern 41 and the third small pattern 54C are displayed in a miss (see FIG. 121 (10)). That is, when the result of the normal pattern lottery is a short win (see FIG. 121 (10)) and when it is a long win (see FIG. 124 (10)), the normal pattern display 223 is displayed in the same display mode (lighting mode), while the decorative pattern 41 and the third small pattern 54C are displayed in different display modes.
In this case, the control of the normal pattern display device 223 can be simplified, while it is possible to distinguish whether the normal pattern lottery result is a short win or a long win depending on the display mode of the performance image.

In this embodiment, the same movable role 115, that is, the middle movable role 115B (see FIG. 1), is operated in the role performance in the variable performance in which the special symbol lottery result is notified that it is a big win or a small win (see FIG. 115 (8)) and in the role performance in the variable performance in which the normal symbol lottery result is notified that it is a win (see FIG. 124 (8)). In addition, the performance button 161 vibrates in the same vibration mode (vibration time, vibration number, vibration strength) in the variable performance in which the special symbol lottery result is notified that it is a big win or a small win and in the variable performance in which the normal symbol lottery result is notified that it is a win. In addition, the first notification image 708, which is the same performance image, is displayed in the variable performance in which the special symbol lottery result is notified that it is a big win or a small win and in the variable performance in which the normal symbol lottery result is notified that it is a win. In addition, each lamp emits light in the same light emission mode (light emission color, light emission time, brightness) in the variable presentation that notifies the player that the special pattern lottery result is a big win or a small win, and in the variable presentation that notifies the player that the normal pattern lottery result is a win.
In this case, even if the variable presentation notifies the player that the result of the normal pattern lottery is a win, it can lift the player's spirits and increase the player's interest in the game, just like a variable presentation notifying the player that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win or a small win.

In this embodiment, the presentation format of the specific effect performed in the variable presentation related to the first special pattern in the normal game state and the specific effect performed in the variable presentation related to the normal pattern in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) is the same, but is not limited to this.
For example, the vibration time of the effect button 161 may be different between the variable effect related to the first special pattern in the normal game state and the variable effect related to the normal pattern in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), the movable part 115 operating in the part effect or the movement pattern of the movable part 115 may be different, the type of effect sound may be different, or the displayed image may be different.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the normal pattern is executed in the normal game state, a variable start command for the normal pattern is sent to the performance control unit 300, but the execution of the variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 associated with the normal pattern is restricted. On the other hand, when the variable display of the normal pattern is executed in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), a variable start command for the normal pattern is sent to the performance control unit 300, and the variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 associated with the normal pattern is executed. In this case, the performance effect in the time-saving game state can be improved, and the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, while specific effects can be executed in the variable effects related to normal symbols in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), the execution of specific effects is restricted in the variable effects related to the first special symbol in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state). Here, specific effects are, for example, the illumination of each lamp in rainbow colors, a role effect, vibration of the effect button 161, display of the first notification image 708, output of the first effect sound and the third effect sound, etc. In this case, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the time-saving game state, where the variable display of the normal symbols is important, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fluctuation start command may also include a reserved number designation command that designates the reserved number of normal symbols. Then, when multiple decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped in the fluctuation performance related to normal symbols during the first time-saving game state, it is possible to perform a performance operation on the stage image 701, and when the stage image 701 is temporarily stopping multiple decorative symbols 41 performing the performance operation and a specific number (e.g., three) of reserved images 52 related to normal symbols that are two more than the predetermined number (e.g., one) are displayed, if a state (missing) occurs in which multiple commands (normal symbol fluctuation start command, normal symbol fluctuation stop command, etc.) transmitted from the game control unit 200 cannot be normally received, and then a normal symbol fluctuation start command that causes the reserved number to be the predetermined number (e.g., one) is received, a fluctuation performance related to the normal symbols (a fluctuation performance accompanied by a fluctuation display of the decorative symbols 41 and the third small symbol 54C) may be started, and the reserved images 52 related to the number of normal symbols that is one less than the specific number (e.g., three) may be displayed before the predetermined number (e.g., one) of reserved images 52 is displayed.

In addition, the reserved image 52 may not be displayed even if the game ball enters the gate 124 when the SP reach performance is being executed in the first time-saving game state. In addition, the reserved image 52 may not be displayed even if the game ball enters the gate 124 when the SPSP reach performance is being executed in the first time-saving game state. In addition, in the first time-saving game state, the reserved image 52 may be displayed when the gate 124 is entered when the SP reach performance is being executed, while the reserved image 52 may not be displayed when the game ball enters the gate 124 when the SPSP reach performance is being executed. In addition, even if the first starting hole 121 is entered when the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is being executed in the first time-saving game state, the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 may not be displayed.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may output a winning sound to notify the winning to the speaker 156 when the game ball wins the first start port 121 or the gate 124 in the first time-saving game state. In addition, when the game ball wins the gate 124 when the SP reach performance is being executed in the first time-saving game state, the winning sound may be output (at this time, the reserved image 52 may be displayed, or the reserved image 52 may not be displayed). On the other hand, when the game ball wins the gate 124 when the SPSP reach performance is being executed in the first time-saving game state, the winning sound may not be output. In addition, even if the game ball wins the gate 124 when the SP reach performance is being executed in the first time-saving game state, the winning sound may not be output. In addition, when the game ball wins the first start port 121 when the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is being executed in the first time-saving game state, the winning sound may not be output. Also, in the first time-saving game state, when a winning jackpot is won at the first starting hole 121, the winning sound may not be output in any case (before the reach performance, during the reach performance, when the fluctuation has stopped, etc.).

(Modification)
Figure 125-2 is a diagram showing a modified example of variable performance example 8.
Next, a modified example of the variation presentation example 8 will be described with reference to Fig. 125-2. In this modified example, "EV1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 107(a) based on winning the second start hole 122 in the first time-saving game state. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation presentation examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 123(1) to (6) and Fig. 124(7) to (12) are performed, and as shown in Fig. 125-2(1), a big win game notification image 709 and a second notification image 710 are displayed. After the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the fourth small symbol 54D, "777", is fixed and stopped. Here, since the stopped and displayed second special symbol is a small win symbol, the second big winning hole door 126D is opened, and the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 126.
Next, as shown in FIG. 125-2(2), a prize promotion image 727 is displayed.

Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the winning promotion image 727 was displayed without a gaming ball winning into the second large winning opening 126, a countdown image 737 is displayed as shown in FIG. 125-2 (3). The countdown image 737 displays the text "3:00 seconds remaining." After this, the countdown image 737 continues to count down until there is no more time left until the second large winning opening door 126D transitions from an open state to a closed state.

Then, after that, when there is no time left until the second large prize opening door 126D transitions from an open state to a closed state, as shown in Fig. 125-2 (4), "0:00 seconds remaining" is displayed in the countdown image 737. Also, at this time, the second shutter image 724 and the end image 738 are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 125-2(5), the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 and the first small symbol 54A, "777", are fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. At this time, a stage image 701 corresponding to the normal game state is displayed. That is, the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to the normal game state without performing a jackpot game.

If a game ball enters the second large prize opening 126 between the time the second large prize opening door 126D is opened and the time it is closed, a large prize game will start as shown in FIG. 125-2 (6), and a round image 711 will be displayed accordingly. Then, when the large prize game ends, the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be controlled to the time-saving game state again.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a variable presentation is executed in which the result of the special symbol selection is a small win based on the winning of the second start opening 122, and the game ball does not win the second large winning opening 126 in the small win game, the large win game is not played, and the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to the normal game state. In particular, in this embodiment, the winning promotion image 727 and the countdown image 737 are displayed to promote the winning of the second large winning opening 126.
In this case, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is a time limit during which it is possible to win at the second large prize opening 126, thereby preventing the second large prize opening 126D from closing without a prize being won at the second large prize opening 126.

[What happens when a command is missed (cannot be received)]
125-3(a) and (b) are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the event when a command is missed and the timing of the light-emitting effect using a decorative pattern. Specifically, FIG. 125-3(a) is a timing chart showing the timing of the effect by the decorative pattern when a command is not missed (received), and FIG. 125-3(b) is a timing chart showing the timing of the effect by the decorative pattern when a command is missed (cannot be received). The light-emitting effect is an effect that displays a light-emitting image 703.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, commands are sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300 as the game progresses. Here, for example, if an event occurs between the game control unit 200 and the performance control unit 300, such as a disconnection of a connector or a communication error, the performance control unit 300 may miss a command sent by the game control unit 200. In other words, if certain conditions are met, the performance control unit 300 may not be able to receive a command from the game control unit 200.

Below, with reference to Figures 125-3(a) and (b), we will explain the change in the swing time of the decorative pattern when the performance control unit 300 misses a command. Specifically, with reference to Figure 125-3(a), we will explain the processing when no command is missed. Also, with reference to Figure 125-3(b), we will explain the processing when a command is missed.

In each of Figures 125-3 (a) and (b), an explanation is given using an example of a variation in which the result of the normal pattern lottery is a miss or a short win and a reach light-up effect is executed (see "reach miss or short win" in the figure), and an example of a variation in which the result of the normal pattern lottery is a win and a reach light-up effect and a win light-up effect are executed (see "long win" in the figure).
Here, the reach light-emitting effect is an effect in which light-emitting images 703 corresponding to the left and right decorative symbols 41 that are reach eyes are displayed when the reach effect starts (see Fig. 120(4) and Fig. 123(4)). Also, the winning light-emitting effect is an effect in which light-emitting images 703 corresponding to three decorative symbols 41 that are the same number are displayed (see Fig. 124(9)).

First, we will explain an example of "reach miss or short win" fluctuations when the command shown in Figure 125-3 (a) is not missed. In this example, when the performance control unit 300 receives a fluctuation start command, the performance control unit 300 starts fluctuating the decorative symbols (see t1 in the figure). Then, the performance control unit 300 executes a reach light-emitting performance at a specified timing (see t2 in the figure). Then, when the performance control unit 300 receives a fluctuation stop command, it fixes and stops the decorative symbols (see t4 in the figure). Here, the time from the timing when the reach light-emitting performance is executed (see t2 in the figure) to the timing when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped (see t4 in the figure) is defined as time T1.

Next, an example of the variation of a "long win" when no command is missed, as shown in FIG. 125-3(a), will be explained. In this variation example, as the performance control unit 300 receives a variation start command, the performance control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative pattern (see t1 in the figure). Then, the performance control unit 300 executes a reach light-up performance at a predetermined timing (see t2 in the figure), and then executes a win light-up performance (see t3 in the figure). Then, as the performance control unit 300 receives a variation stop command, it stops the decorative pattern (see t4 in the figure). Although not shown in the figure, after the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, the second special pattern is displayed to vary and stop, and then the big win game is executed.

Here, the time from when the winning light-emitting effect is executed (see t3 in the figure) to when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped (see t4 in the figure) is set to time T2. This time T2 is shorter than time T1 (T2<T1).

Next, an example of a "missed reach or short hit" fluctuation when the command shown in FIG. 125-3(b) is missed will be explained. In this example, the performance control unit 300 misses the fluctuation stop command for the next fluctuation (see t4 in the figure) due to an event in which the performance control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200. In addition, after the performance control unit 300 misses the fluctuation stop command for the next fluctuation (see t4 in the figure), the event in which the performance control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200 is resolved during the period until the timing of receiving the fluctuation stop command for the next normal pattern (see t5 in the figure), and the performance control unit 300 receives the next fluctuation stop command.

In the example shown in FIG. 125-3(b), when the performance control unit 300 receives the variation start command, the performance control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative pattern (see t1 in the figure). Then, the performance control unit 300 executes the reach light emission performance at a predetermined timing (see t2 in the figure).

Normally, the performance control unit 300 receives a fluctuation stop command and fixes and stops the temporarily stopped (swaying) decorative pattern, but in this example, an event occurs where the performance control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200, so the command is missed (see the cross in the figure). As a result, the performance control unit 300 does not fix and stop the swaying decorative pattern, but allows the decorative pattern to continue in its swaying state.

Then, the performance control unit 300, upon receiving the variation stop command for the next normal symbol, fixes and stops the decorative symbol (see t5 in the figure). Here, the time from the timing of executing the reach light emission performance (see t2 in the figure) to the timing of fixing and stopping the decorative symbol (see t5 in the figure) is set as time T3. This time is longer than time T1 (T1<T3).

Next, an example of the "long win" fluctuation when the command shown in FIG. 125-3(b) is missed will be explained. In this example, it is assumed that the performance control unit 300 misses the fluctuation stop command (see t4 in the figure) due to an event in which the performance control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200. Also, it is assumed that during the period from when the second special symbol is displayed and stopped to when it receives the fluctuation stop command for the next normal symbol (see t6 in the figure), the event in which the performance control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200 is resolved, and the performance control unit 300 receives the fluctuation stop command for the next normal symbol.

Although not shown in the figure, the big win game is actually executed after the performance control unit 300 receives the change stop command for the normal symbol and the second special symbol changes and stops being displayed. The timing at which the change stop command for the next normal symbol is received (see t6 in the figure) is the timing at which the change stop command for the first normal symbol change that starts after the big win game is received.

In the example shown in FIG. 125-3(b), when the performance control unit 300 receives the variation start command, the performance control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative pattern (see t1 in the figure). Then, the performance control unit 300 executes a reach light-up performance at a predetermined timing (see t2 in the figure), and then executes a winning light-up performance (see t3 in the figure).

Normally, the performance control unit 300 would receive a fluctuation stop command and then confirm and stop the temporarily stopped (oscillating) decorative pattern, but in this example, an event occurs that prevents the performance control unit 300 from receiving a command from the game control unit 200, causing the command to be missed (see the cross in the figure). Therefore, the performance control unit 300 does not confirm and stop the oscillating decorative pattern, but allows the decorative pattern to continue to oscillate. Then, upon receiving the next fluctuation stop command, the performance control unit 300 confirms and stops the decorative pattern (see t6 in the figure).

Here, the time from when the winning light-emitting effect is executed (see t3 in the figure) to when the decorative pattern is confirmed and stopped (see t6 in the figure) is taken as time T4. This time T4 includes the time to execute the big win game, for example, and is therefore longer than both time T1 and time T3 (T4>T1, T4>T3). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 125-3(a) above, when no command is missed, time T2 is shorter than time T1. In other words, the length of each time is reversed depending on whether or not a command is missed.

125-3 performed by the performance control unit 300 described above can be understood as follows. That is, the time T1 from when the reach light-emitting performance is performed until the performance control unit 300 receives the change stop command for the normal symbol change for which the reach light-emitting performance is performed is longer than the time T2 from when the winning light-emitting performance is performed until the performance control unit 300 receives the change stop command for the normal symbol change for which the winning light-emitting performance is performed, and is shorter than the time T4 from when the winning light-emitting performance is performed until the performance control unit 300 receives the change stop command for the normal symbol change next to the change stop command without receiving the change stop command for the normal symbol change for which the winning light-emitting performance is performed.
In addition, the time T1 from when a reach light-emitting performance is executed until the performance control unit 300 receives a change stop command for the normal pattern change for which the reach light-emitting performance is executed is longer than the time T2 from when a winning light-emitting performance is executed until the performance control unit 300 receives a change stop command for the normal pattern change for which the winning light-emitting performance is executed, and the time T3 from when a reach light-emitting performance is executed until the performance control unit 300 receives a change stop command for the normal pattern change next to the change stop command without receiving the change stop command for the normal pattern change for which the reach light-emitting performance is executed is shorter than the time T4 from when a winning light-emitting performance is executed until the performance control unit 300 receives a change stop command for the normal pattern change next to the change stop command without receiving the change stop command for the normal pattern change for which the winning light-emitting performance is executed.

Unlike the illustrated example, when a command is missed due to an event in which the performance control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200, for example, a mode in which the temporarily stopped (swaying) decorative pattern is hidden and an image informing of an error is displayed can be adopted. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 125-3(b) above, when a command is missed, the swaying decorative pattern is not stopped, and a performance in which the decorative pattern continues to sway is executed, thereby ensuring continuity with the performance that had been executed up to that point, such as a light-emitting performance. This can prevent the player from feeling strange. In addition, by continuing the swaying state of the decorative pattern, when the event in which the performance control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200 is resolved and a fluctuation stop command is received, it is possible to execute a continuous performance that does not feel strange to the player, in which the swaying decorative pattern is stopped.

In addition, in the case of a "long win" variation when a command is missed as shown in FIG. 125-3(b), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are displayed for a long period of time. This makes it possible to suggest to staff at the gaming establishment (pachinko parlor) where the pachinko gaming machine 100 is installed that an event has occurred in which the performance control unit 300 is unable to receive a command from the gaming control unit 200, while minimizing the player's sense of discomfort, as compared to, for example, a mode in which the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are hidden and an image informing of an error is displayed.

In the above explanation, the performance control unit 300 misses a change stop command, but this is not limited to the above. If the performance control unit 300 misses a specified command (specific command), the above processing may be performed. Here, specific commands include, for example, a change start command and an ending command.

(Example of variation 9)
FIG. 126 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable presentation example 9) of the variable presentation will be described with reference to Fig. 126. Variable presentation example 9 is an example of a variable presentation based on winning into the first starting hole 121 in the first time-saving gaming state. The variable presentation in variable presentation example 9 is executed when "ET1" is selected as the "variable presentation pattern" in Fig. 106(b). In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples will be mainly described, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable presentation examples may be omitted.

First, in the first time-saving game state, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the third small symbol 54C is displayed in a variable manner in the normal symbol-related variable manner, as shown in Fig. 126 (1). Also, at this time, the "7" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right are displayed in a reduced size, and the SPSP reach image 706 is displayed in conjunction with the execution of the SPSP reach performance.
Furthermore, since the variable display of the first special symbol has been repeated in the first time-saving game state, the number of remaining draws for the first special symbol in the first time-saving game state is now one.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 126(2), the variable display of the first special symbol starts, and the variable display of the fourth small symbol 54D starts. Also, at this time, the remaining number of times to draw the first special symbol in the first time-saving game state becomes 0.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(3), the fourth small symbol 54D "246" is fixed and stopped with the stop display of the first special symbol. At this time, the pachinko game machine 100 changes from the first time-saving game state to the normal game state. In this case, regardless of whether the normal symbol variation time has elapsed or not, the normal symbol variation display ends, and the third small symbol 54C "246" is fixed and stopped. In addition, the SPSP reach image 706 is not displayed, and the second shutter image 724 is displayed. On the other hand, the result notification image 725 is not displayed.
In addition, when the remaining number of times to draw the first special pattern in the first time-saving game state becomes 0 while the normal pattern is being displayed in a changing manner, and the game state is controlled to the normal game state, even if the lottery result for the normal pattern that was being displayed in a changing manner is a win, no presentation to notify of a win may be given, and the third small pattern 54C, which is a losing result, may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (4), the second shutter image 724 is hidden, and the decorative symbol 41 and the stage image 701 corresponding to the normal game state are displayed. Also, at this time, the fourth small symbol 54D is hidden, and the first small symbol 54A is displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), when any of the number of times J of the first special symbol is drawn, the number of times J of the second special symbol is drawn, and the number of times J of the normal symbol is drawn becomes 0, the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) can be ended. When the number of times J of the normal symbol is drawn becomes 0 and the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) ends, the variable presentation related to the normal symbol is not ended midway, whereas when the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) ends when the number of times J of the first special symbol is drawn becomes 0, the variable presentation related to the normal symbol is ended midway. In this case, when the number of times J of the first special symbol is drawn becomes 0, the time-saving game state can be ended in an innovative manner, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) ends because the number of times J of the selection of the normal symbol becomes 0, the result notification image 725 is displayed, whereas when the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) ends because the number of times J of the selection of the first special symbol becomes 0, the display of the result notification image 725 is restricted.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) ends because the number of times J of the selection of the normal pattern becomes 0 after the start of the variable performance related to the normal pattern, the variable performance related to the started normal pattern ends in the first period (when the execution time of the variable display of the normal pattern has elapsed), while when the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) ends because the number of times J of the selection of the first special pattern becomes 0 after the start of the variable performance related to the normal pattern, the variable performance related to the started normal pattern ends in the second period (when the execution time of the variable display of the special pattern has elapsed) different from the first period (shorter than the first period). In this case, the performance at the end of the time-saving game state can be made different when the number of times J of the selection of the normal pattern becomes 0 and when the number of times J of the selection of the first special pattern becomes 0, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, when the variable display (variable presentation) of the first special pattern, which is the trigger for the number of times J of selections for the first special pattern to become 0 in the time-saving play state, ends, the time-saving play state is switched to the normal play state, the variable display (variable presentation) of the normal pattern that was being executed ends midway, and when the variable display (variable presentation) of the next first special pattern starts, the presentation shown in Figure 126 (3) may be executed.

(Example of variation 10)
FIG. 127 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 10) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 127. Variable performance example 10 is an example of a variable performance that is executed twice based on two winnings at the first start port 121 in the first time-saving game state. Note that the two variable performances in variable performance example 10 are both variable performances that are executed when "ET1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 106(b). In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, in the first time-saving game state, both the special symbol and the normal symbol are displayed stopped, and as shown in FIG. 127(1), the decorative symbol 41, the third small symbol 54C and the fourth small symbol 54D are displayed stopped in a confirmed state.
Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the variable display of the first special symbol starts, and the variable display of the fourth small symbol 54D starts, as shown in Fig. 127 (2). At this time, the third right hit image 726 is displayed, and a sound is output from the speaker 156 to prompt the player to launch the game ball to the right side of the game area 111.

Then, when the time has elapsed since the normal symbol is displayed without a game ball entering the gate 124, and the time measured by the performance control unit 300 since receiving the customer waiting command reaches the time-up time (see S4305 in FIG. 43), the setting image 718 is displayed as shown in FIG. 127 (3). That is, regardless of the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable performance related to the first special symbol, the customer waiting performance starts based on the time from the normal symbol being displayed without a game ball entering the gate 124. Also, at this time, as the first special symbol is displayed, the fourth small symbol 54D, "246", is fixed and stopped. On the other hand, even if the first special symbol is displayed (even if the fourth small symbol 54D is fixed and stopped), the setting image 718 is not hidden.

Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting image 718 was displayed without any gaming ball entering the gate 124, a customer waiting demo image 719 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 127(4).
Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 122, the variable display of the first special symbol starts, and the variable display of the fourth small symbol 54D starts, as shown in Fig. 127 (5). At this time, the third right-hit image 726 is displayed, and a sound is output from the speaker 156 to prompt the player to launch the game ball to the right side of the game area 111. On the other hand, the customer waiting demo image 719 is not hidden.
After this, although not shown in the figure, the fourth small symbol 54D, "246", is fixed and stopped as the first special symbol is stopped. On the other hand, even if the first special symbol is fixed and displayed (even if the fourth small symbol 54D is fixed and stopped), the customer waiting demo image 719 is not hidden.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), even if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 or a variable effect based on the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the customer waiting effect is not restricted. Therefore, the customer waiting effect can be performed at an appropriate timing according to the game situation, and it is possible to exert the intended appealing effect on the player. In addition, it is not necessary for the player to be aware of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is not considered important in the time-saving game state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.
In addition, a customer waiting effect may be started during the varying display (variable effect) of the first special pattern in the time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state).
As described above, in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), if a game ball enters gate 124 or a variable effect related to a normal pattern is started, the customer waiting effect is restricted.

In addition, the execution of the customer waiting effect may be limited (the time until the customer waiting effect is executed may be longer) in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) compared to the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting effect appropriately according to the situation where the player is likely to have secured the gaming machine, that is, the time-saving game state advantageous to the player.
Furthermore, even in the normal game state, when the normal pattern is being displayed in a changing state or when the number of reserved balls is not "0", the customer waiting effect may not be executed, and during the time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state), the customer waiting effect may not be executed, and during the time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state), one of the setting image 718 and the customer waiting demo image 719 may not be displayed.
In addition, during the normal game state, the execution of the customer waiting effect may be restricted when the variable display of the normal pattern is being executed, and in the time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state), the customer waiting effect may be executable even if the variable display of the first special pattern is being executed.

(Example of variation 11)
FIG. 128 is a diagram showing one aspect of the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 11) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 128. The variable performance in variable performance example 11 is an example of a variable performance based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the first time-saving game state. The variable performance in variable performance example 11 is a variable performance executed when "ES1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 106(b). In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, in the first time-saving game state, both the special symbol and the normal symbol are displayed, and the third small symbol 54C and the fourth small symbol 54D are displayed as shown in Fig. 128(1). At this time, the customer waiting demo image 719 is displayed.
Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Fig. 128 (2), the variable display of the fourth small symbol 54D starts along with the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 are displayed. The third notification image 716 displays the text "Big chance approaching!".

Next, with the first special symbol being displayed, the fourth small symbol 54D, "444", is displayed and fixed, as shown in FIG. 128(3).
128(4), the first shutter image 715 and the third notification image 716 are hidden, and the big win game notification image 709 and the second notification image 710 are displayed. At this time, the lamps emit light in rainbow colors, and the speaker 156 outputs a second sound effect suggesting or notifying that the result of the special symbol selection is a big win or a small win.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 116 (15) to (18) and Figure 117 (19) are performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the first time-saving play state, when a variable presentation is executed based on the result of the first special pattern lottery being a miss, the customer waiting presentation is not restricted (see FIG. 127 (5)), but in the first time-saving play state, when a variable presentation is executed based on the result of the first special pattern lottery being a big win or a small win, the customer waiting presentation is restricted (see FIG. 128 (2)).

(Example of variation 12)
129 to 131 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 12) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 129 to 131. The variable performance example 12 is an example of a variable performance based on winning at the second start port 122 in the first mode of the second time-saving game state, four variable performances based on four winnings at the gate 124 in the first mode of the second time-saving game state, and a variable performance based on winning at the gate 124 in the first mode of the normal game state.
In addition, the variable performance based on winning the second starting gate 122 in the variable performance example 12 is a variable performance executed when "Ea1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 108(a). In addition, the four variable performances based on winning the gate 124 in the first mode of the second time-saving game state in the variable performance example 12 are all variable performances executed when "Ed1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 108(b). In addition, the variable performance based on winning the gate 124 in the normal game state in the variable performance example 12 is a variable performance executed when "EP1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 106(a). In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

In this embodiment, while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the second time-saving play state, the player can place a game ball in the gate 124, and the normal symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Also, if the normal symbol lottery is won, the electric tulip 123 opens, and it becomes possible to place a game ball in the second start gate 122. As described above, in the second time-saving play state, the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is always either a big win or a small win, so the entry of a game ball into the second start gate 122 means that the right to win a big win or a small win is stocked.

During the variable display of the second special symbol in the second time-saving game state, a win at the gate 124 can be executed multiple times, and every time a normal symbol lottery is won, the electric tulip 123 is opened, allowing a game ball to win at the second start hole 122. Therefore, the right to win a big or small prize in the special symbol lottery can be stocked up up to the upper limit of the reserved number for winning at the second start hole 122.
In addition, in this embodiment, a first mode and a second mode are provided as presentation modes in the second time-saving game state. Here, the first mode is a presentation mode that notifies whether or not a game ball has entered the second start hole 122 just before the variable presentation related to the second special symbol ends. In addition, the second mode is a presentation mode that executes a presentation that notifies the lottery result of the normal symbol for each variable presentation related to the normal symbol, and also notifies the winning when the game ball enters the second start hole 122. In this embodiment, for example, when the big win game ends, the player may be able to select either the first mode or the second mode in the second time-saving game state before being controlled to the second time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 129(1), in the first mode of the second time-saving play state, the decorative symbol 41, the third small symbol 54C "029", and the fourth small symbol 54D "777" are fixed and stopped. Also, a stage image 701 corresponding to the first mode of the second time-saving play state is displayed. Also, although not shown, there is "1" reserved for winning at the second starting hole 122.

Next, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 129(2), the variable display of the fourth small symbol 54D starts. At this time, a remaining time image 728 and a change effect image 729 are displayed. In the example shown, the remaining time image 728 displays the text "150 seconds remaining," which is the remaining time for the variable display of the second special symbol (the variable performance related to the second special symbol). In the example shown, the change effect image 729 is displayed in white.

Next, when the game ball enters gate 124, as shown in FIG. 129(3), the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the third small pattern 54C starts to change as the display of the normal pattern starts to change. In addition, as the display of the normal pattern change starts, the display color of the change effect image 729 changes from white to yellow. At this time, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "148 seconds remaining."

Next, as shown in Fig. 129(4), the decorative symbol 41 and the third small symbol 54C, "246", are fixed and stopped with the normal symbol being stopped. At this time, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "145 seconds remaining".
Next, when the game ball enters the gate 124, the decorative symbol 41 and the third small symbol 54C start to change as shown in FIG. 129(5). Meanwhile, the display color of the change effect image 729 does not change from yellow. At this time, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "141 seconds remaining."

Next, as shown in Fig. 129 (6), the decorative symbol 41 and the third small symbol 54C, "246", are fixed and stopped with the normal symbol being stopped. At this time, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "138 seconds remaining".
After this, during the variable display of the second special symbol, every time a gaming ball enters the gate 124, the variable display of the normal symbol (variable performance related to the normal symbol) is repeatedly executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (7), as the display of the next normal symbol begins, the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the third small symbol 54C begins. Also, because two game balls have entered the gate 124, the third reserved number display 53C displays "2" at this time. Also, as the display of the normal symbol-related change performance begins, the display color of the change effect image 729 changes from yellow to purple. Also, at this time, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "0 seconds remaining."

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(8), the third small symbol 54C, "246", is determined and stopped with the stop display of the normal symbol. At this time, the button operation performance is executed, and the button operation image 707 is displayed. At this time, the stock fanning image 730 is displayed.
When the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 707 is displayed, a failure image 731 is displayed as shown in FIG. 130(9). At this time, the third small symbol 54C starts to change as the next normal symbol starts to change. The third reserved number display 53C is updated to "1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(10), the fourth small symbol 54D "555" is fixed and stopped with the stop display of the second special symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol ends without a game ball entering the second starting hole 122 during the variable display of the second special symbol (without stocking the right to win a big win or a small win). At this time, the big win game notification image 709 and the second notification image 710 are displayed. At this time, each lamp emits rainbow light, and the second performance sound that suggests or notifies that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win is output from the speaker 156. On the other hand, the role performance and the vibration of the performance button 161 are not executed.
At this time, the pachinko gaming machine 100 changes from the second time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(11), the third small symbol 54C, "246", is fixed and stopped with the normal symbol stop display. At this time, the fourth small symbol 54D is not displayed.
Next, the big win game begins.
Next, as shown in FIG. 130(12), the round image 711 is displayed. At this time, the third small symbol 54C starts to change as the next normal symbol starts to change. The third reserved number display 53C is updated to "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (13), the normal symbol display 223 is stopped and displayed in a lighting state to notify that the lottery result is a win. After that, the third small symbol 54C, "121", is fixed and stopped. In addition, with the stop display of the short winning symbol, the electric tulip 123 opens for a predetermined time (opens for a short time) and then closes.
Next, when the jackpot game ends, a state notification image 713 is displayed as shown in FIG. 131 (14). In the illustrated example, the text "First time-saving start!" is displayed, which suggests or notifies the first time-saving game state, which is the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In other words, when the jackpot game ends, the pachinko gaming machine 100 goes from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (15), the decorative symbol 41 and the third small symbol 54C, "121", are fixed and stopped. Also, the fourth small symbol 54D, "555", is fixed and stopped. Also, a stage image 701 corresponding to the first time-saving game state is displayed. Also, a time-saving remaining number image 714 is displayed.

In addition, during the period from when the variable display of the second special symbol stops until the start of the jackpot game, even if a game ball enters the gate 124 or if there is a hold on the winning of the gate 124, the variable display of the normal symbol may not start. In this case, it is possible to prevent the electric tulip 123 from being opened due to a long win as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol being executed in the second time-saving game state before the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to the normal game state, even if the second special symbol is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can variably display the decorative pattern 41 and the third small pattern 54C when the fourth small pattern 54D is variably displayed in the second time-saving game state. Here, the second time-saving game state is regarded as the second mode. Also, the fourth small pattern 54D is regarded as the first performance pattern. Also, the decorative pattern 41 and the third small pattern 54C are both regarded as the second performance pattern.
In this case, the player can be made aware that the special symbols and the normal symbols are fluctuating simultaneously in the second mode, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 130 (10) and (11), the stopped and displayed fourth small symbol 54D is not displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 129 (1) and (2), the stopped and displayed third small symbol 54C is not displayed. The stopped and displayed third small symbol 54C is not displayed after the normal symbol variable display is executed multiple times, regardless of the contents of the variable performance related to the multiple normal symbols (even if the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is executed). That is, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can not display the stopped and displayed fourth small symbol 54D in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state). Here, the time-saving game state is regarded as the second mode. Also, the fourth small symbol 54D is regarded as the first performance pattern. Also, the third small symbol 54C is regarded as the second performance pattern.
In this case, the player can recognize each of the first performance pattern corresponding to the special pattern and the second performance pattern corresponding to the normal pattern in the second mode. In addition, when the special pattern is not displayed as in a jackpot game, the first performance pattern is hidden, so that the player can pay more attention to other performance images displayed when the first performance pattern is hidden. On the other hand, even during a jackpot game, the game ball is launched to the right side of the game area 111, and the gate 124 is entered, so that the normal pattern can be displayed as a variable. Therefore, by not hiding the second performance pattern, the player can be suggested that the second performance pattern can be displayed as a variable. In this way, by switching between display and non-display according to the performance pattern, it is possible to both focus attention on other performance patterns and suggest that the performance pattern can be displayed as a variable, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the fourth small symbol 54D at the display position of the first small symbol 54A in the normal game state in the second time-saving game state, and can display the third small symbol 54C at the display position of the third small symbol 54C in the normal game state. Here, the normal game state is regarded as the first mode. Also, the second time-saving game state is regarded as the second mode. Also, the first small symbol 54A is regarded as the first performance symbol. Also, the third small symbol 54C is regarded as the second performance symbol. Also, the fourth small symbol 54D is regarded as the third performance symbol.
In this case, the presentation pattern displayed at a position likely to be noticed by the player can be switched between being different depending on the mode or remaining the same regardless of the mode, depending on the presentation pattern, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, the fourth small symbol 54D is not displayed and only the first small symbol 54A is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
In the normal game state, the fourth small symbol 54D may be displayed instead of the first small symbol 54A in the same manner as in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state). That is, the first performance symbol may be the third performance symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the variable performance related to the second special symbol that is executed when the lottery result is a win, a performance related to the remaining time of the variable performance is executed (see FIG. 129 (2)). In particular, in this embodiment, a performance is executed in which the remaining time of the variable performance is updated (subtracted) and notified.
In this case, the player can be made aware of the remaining time of the variable presentation, so that the player can be prevented from feeling anxious about not knowing when the variable presentation related to the second special pattern will end.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the second time-saving game state, multiple variation patterns are provided, each with a different variation time of the second special symbol (see Fig. 100 (a) and (c)). Therefore, depending on the variation pattern selected, the number of times that the normal symbol variation display can be performed during the variation display of the second special symbol varies, and the expectation of winning the normal symbol lottery also varies. As an example, in the second time-saving game state, when the second pattern (variation patterns "Pa1", "Pa2", "Pe1", "Pe2") with a long variation time is selected, it is easier to win (higher expectation) because the number of times that the normal symbol variation display can be performed during the variation display of the second special symbol is greater than when the first pattern (variation patterns "Pb1", "Pb2", "Pb3", "Pf1", "Pf2", "Pf3") with a short variation time is selected.

In this embodiment, in the first time-saving play state or the second time-saving play state, neither the first reserved number display 53A nor the second reserved number display 53B is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
The first reserved number display 53A and the second reserved number display 53B may be displayed in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. Also, in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, the second reserved number display 53B may be displayed in the position where the first reserved number display 53A was displayed in the normal game state, while the first reserved number display 53A may not be displayed. Also, in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, the first reserved number display 53A may be displayed in the same position as in the normal game state, while the second reserved number display 53B may not be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 in a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), the execution of a variable presentation involving a variable display of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 54 is restricted.

In addition, when the execution period of the variable display of the second special symbol and the execution period of the variable display of the normal symbol overlap at least partially during the second time-saving game state, the game presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (such as the display of the remaining time image 728) and the game presentation corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol (such as the display of the change effect image 729) can be executed (can be executed in parallel) respectively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect during the time-saving game state, and to increase the interest in the game.
In particular, in the second time-saving game state, during the game presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the game presentation (variation presentation) corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to effectively appeal to the player that there are multiple chances to get a favorable result, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Example of variation 13)
132 to 134 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 13) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 132 to 134. The variable performance example 13 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the first mode of the second time-saving game state, and a three-time variable performance based on winning three times in the gate 124 in the first mode of the second time-saving game state.
In addition, the variable performance based on winning the second starting gate 122 in the variable performance example 13 is a variable performance executed when "Ea1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 108(a). In addition, the first variable performance based on winning the gate 124 in the second time-saving game state in the variable performance example 13 is a variable performance executed when "Ec1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 108(b). In addition, the second and third variable performances based on winning the gate 124 in the second time-saving game state in the variable performance example 13 are both variable performances executed when "Ed1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 108(b). In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 132(1), in the first mode of the second time-saving play state, the decorative symbol 41, the third small symbol 54C "029", and the fourth small symbol 54D "777" are fixed and stopped. Also, a stage image 701 corresponding to the first mode of the second time-saving play state is displayed. Also, although not shown, there is "1" reserved for winning at the second starting hole 122.

Next, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 132 (2), the variable display of the fourth small symbol 54D starts. At this time, a remaining time image 728 and a change effect image 729 are also displayed. In the example shown, the remaining time image 728 displays the text "150 seconds remaining," which is the remaining time for the variable display of the second special symbol (the variable performance related to the second special symbol). In the example shown, the change effect image 729 is displayed in white.

Next, when the game ball enters gate 124, as shown in FIG. 132 (3), the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the third small pattern 54C begins to change in conjunction with the start of the display of the normal pattern. In addition, as the display of the normal pattern change begins, the display color of the change effect image 729 changes from white to red. At this time, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "148 seconds remaining."

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(4), the normal symbol display 223 is displayed (lit) in a manner that notifies a win. After that, the decorative symbol 41 and the third small symbol 54C, "666", are fixed and stopped. Meanwhile, at this time, the rainbow-colored illumination of each lamp, the vibration of the effect button 161, the role effect, and the output of the effect sound that suggests or notifies that the normal symbol lottery has been won are not performed. Also, at this time, the third reserved number display 53C is updated to "1" due to the game ball entering the gate 124. Also, at this time, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "145 seconds remaining".
In addition, when the long winning symbol is displayed, the electric tulip 123 is opened (opened for a long time).

Next, as time passes, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "143 seconds remaining" as shown in FIG. 132(5). At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. The winning promotion image 727 is not displayed.
At this time, the game ball enters the second start hole 122. On the other hand, no effect is executed to suggest or notify that the game ball has entered the second start hole 122. When the game ball enters the second start hole 122, the electric tulip 123 closes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(6), as the next normal symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the third small symbol 54C start to change. As the normal symbol change performance starts, the display color of the change effect image 729 changes from red to gold. The third reserved number display 53C is updated to "0". At this time, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "141 seconds remaining".
After this, during the variable display of the second special symbol, every time a gaming ball enters the gate 124, the variable display of the normal symbol (variable performance related to the normal symbol) is repeatedly executed.

Next, with the normal symbols being displayed, the decorative symbol 41 and the third small symbol 54C, "246", are displayed as fixed symbols, as shown in FIG. 133 (7).
Next, as shown in Fig. 133(8), a button operation presentation is executed, and a button operation image 707 is displayed. At this time, a stock teasing image 730 is also displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 707 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 133 (9), a special feature effect is executed, and the movable special feature 115 moves so as to overlap the image display unit 114. At this time, the effect button 161 vibrates. At this time, a sound effect is executed, and a fourth effect sound that suggests or notifies that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 122 is output from the speaker 156. The fourth effect sound may be the same as the second effect sound, or may be a different effect sound from the second effect sound. At this time, the first notification image 708 is displayed. At this time, each lamp emits a rainbow of colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (10), a success image 732 is displayed. Also, at this time, if the game ball enters the gate 124, the variable display of the third small symbol 54C starts along with the variable display of the normal symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (11), the second special symbol display 222 is displayed (lighted) in a manner to notify a jackpot. After that, the fourth small symbol 54D, "555", is fixed and stopped. At this time, the jackpot game notification image 709 and the second notification image 710 are displayed. At this time, each lamp emits a rainbow light, and the second sound effect is output from the speaker 156, suggesting or notifying that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
At this time, the pachinko gaming machine 100 changes from the second time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(12), the fourth small symbol 54D is not displayed. At this time, the third small symbol 54C, "246", is fixed and stopped with the stop display of the normal symbol.
Next, the big win game begins.
Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (13), a round image 711 is displayed.

Next, when the jackpot game ends, a status notification image 713 is displayed as shown in FIG. 134 (14). In the illustrated example, the text "Starting second time-saving first mode!" is displayed, which suggests or notifies the second time-saving game state, which is the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and the first mode, which is the presentation mode. In other words, when the jackpot game ends, the pachinko gaming machine 100 goes from the normal game state to the second time-saving game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (15), the decorative pattern 41 and the third small pattern 54C, "246", are fixed and stopped. Also, the fourth small pattern 54D, "555", is fixed and stopped. Also, a stage image 701 corresponding to the first of the second time-saving play state is displayed. Also, at this time, there is "1" reserved for winning at the second start port 122.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start hole 122 during the variable display of the second special symbol in the second time-saving game state, the right to win a big win or a small win is stocked. In this case, after the big win game, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second time-saving game state is performed again. In other words, the big win game and the variable display of the second special symbol in the second time-saving game state are repeated as long as the stock of the right to win a big win or a small win is not exhausted.
In addition, if the game ball does not enter the second start hole 122 during the variable display of the second special symbol in the second time-saving game state, the stock of the right to win a big win or a small win will be lost. In this case, after the big win game ends, the game is controlled to the first time-saving game state (see FIG. 131 (15)).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124(8) and FIG. 133(9), it is possible to execute a specific effect such as the illumination of each lamp in rainbow colors, which is a specific effect that suggests or notifies that the special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win, or that the normal symbol lottery result is a win. In the first mode of the second time-saving game state, the effect control unit 300 can execute a specific effect in the variable effect related to the special symbol (see FIG. 133(9)), and can restrict the execution of a specific effect in the variable effect related to the normal symbol (see FIG. 132(4)). Here, the fact that the special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win is considered to mean that the first game condition has been established. In addition, the fact that the normal symbol lottery result is a win is considered to mean that the second game condition has been established. In addition, the first mode of the second time-saving game state is considered to be a specific mode. In addition, the variable effect related to the special symbol is considered to be a first variable effect. In addition, the variable effect related to the normal symbol is considered to be a second variable effect.
In this case, in the specific mode, the first variable presentation can be made more prominent than the second variable presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124(8) and FIG. 133(9), a specific performance can be executed in which the performance body is changed to a specific mode that suggests or notifies that the first game condition or the second game condition has been established. Here, examples of the performance body include the movable role object 115 and the performance button 161. Examples of the specific mode include the movement of the movable role object 115 downward, the vibration of the performance button 161, and the illumination of the movable role object 115 or the performance button 161 in rainbow colors. In the specific mode, the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance in the first variable performance (see FIG. 133(9)), and can restrict the execution of the specific performance in the second variable performance (see FIG. 132(4)).
In this case, in the specific mode, the first variable presentation can be made more prominent than the second variable presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124(8) and FIG. 133(9), a specific effect can be executed in which a specific sound is output from the speaker 156, indicating that the first game condition or the second game condition has been established. Here, examples of the specific sound include a first effect sound and a third effect sound. In the specific mode, the effect control unit 300 can execute the specific effect in the first variable effect (see FIG. 133(9)), and can restrict the execution of the specific effect in the second variable effect (see FIG. 132(4)).
In this case, in the specific mode, the first variable presentation can be made more prominent than the second variable presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124(8) and FIG. 133(9), a specific effect can be executed to display a specific image suggesting that the first game condition or the second game condition has been established. Here, the specific image can be the first notification image 708. In the specific mode, the effect control unit 300 can execute the specific effect in the first variable effect and display the fourth small pattern 54D in a manner suggesting the establishment of the first game condition (see FIG. 133(9)), and in the second variable effect, the effect control unit 300 can limit the execution of the specific effect and display the decorative pattern 41 and the third small pattern 54C in a manner suggesting the establishment of the second game condition (see FIG. 132(4)). Here, the fourth small pattern 54D is regarded as the first effect pattern. In addition, both the decorative pattern 41 and the third small pattern 54C are regarded as the second effect pattern.
In this case, in the specific mode, the first variable presentation can be made more prominent than the second variable presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, even in the second variation performance, a performance is performed that suggests or notifies that the result of the normal pattern lottery is a win (such as displaying the repeated number decorative pattern 41 or the third small pattern 54C). Also, in the second variation performance, the change effect image 729 may be displayed in rainbow colors to suggest or notify that the result of the normal pattern lottery is a win. In other words, in the second variation performance, it is sufficient that the execution of the specific performance executed in the first variation performance is restricted.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the decorative pattern 41 and the third small pattern 54C in a manner that suggests or notifies that the normal pattern lottery result is a win during the execution of the variable performance related to the special pattern in the second time-saving game state. Here, the second time-saving game state is regarded as a specific mode. Also, a manner that suggests that the normal pattern lottery result is a win includes a double number and the like. Also, the fact that the normal pattern lottery result is a win is regarded as the establishment of the second game condition. Also, the decorative pattern 41 is regarded as the first performance pattern. Also, the third small pattern 54C is regarded as the second performance pattern.
In this case, even during the fluctuation of the special symbols, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the result of the lottery for the normal symbols is a win, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 makes it possible to hide the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of the variable effect related to the special pattern in the second time-saving game state. Here, the second time-saving game state is regarded as a specific mode. Also, the variable effect related to the special pattern is regarded as the first variable effect.
In this case, in the specific mode, after the player has been attracted to the decorative pattern 41, the player can be attracted to other performance images that are displayed when the decorative pattern 41 is no longer displayed, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, in the second time-saving play state, if a variable presentation is executed based on the result of the normal pattern lottery being a win while the first variable presentation is being executed, the presentation control unit 300 can continue to display the third small pattern 54C when the decorative pattern 41 is made invisible.
In this case, even if the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed, the third small pattern 54C is displayed, so that the player can be prevented from forgetting that the result of the ordinary pattern lottery is a win, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, the time-saving game state includes a first time-saving game state and a second time-saving game state. Here, the time-saving game state is regarded as the second mode. The second time-saving game state is regarded as the first performance. The first time-saving game state is regarded as the second performance. When the normal symbol variable display is started, the performance control unit 300 can display a variable image 51, which is an information image suggesting the content of information related to the judgment of the special symbol lottery related to the started variable display. The performance control unit 300 can display an information image in the second performance without displaying the information image in the first performance.
In this case, even in the second mode, by varying whether an information image is displayed or not depending on whether the first or second presentation is being performed, the player's expectations regarding winning at gate 124 can be varied, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the reserved image 52 corresponding to a predetermined random number value stored in the RAM 203 based on the winning of the gate 124. The performance control unit 300 can display the reserved image 52 in the second performance without displaying the reserved image 52 in the first performance.
In this case, even in the second mode, by varying whether the pending image 52 is displayed or not depending on whether the first or second presentation is being performed, the player's expectations regarding winning at the first starting hole 121 can be varied, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the gate 124 after entering the second starting hole 122 in the first mode of the second time-saving game state (see FIG. 132(6)), the performance control unit 300 does not display the success image 732 until the variable display of the normal pattern starts, but starts displaying the success image 732 after the variable display of the normal pattern starts (see FIG. 133(10)). The display of this success image 732 is regarded as the execution of a specific performance.
In this case, the variable effects relating to the normal symbols become less noticeable, so that the player is prevented from paying attention to the variable effects relating to the normal symbols even when a specific effect is being performed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 in the first time-saving game state, the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 is not displayed.
In addition, in the second time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the second start hole 122, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed. In addition, in the second time-saving game state, even if a game ball enters the first start hole 121, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed.
In addition, in the second time-saving game state, even if the game ball enters the gate 124, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not cut off from the time when the normal symbol lottery result is a win in the second time-saving game state and the normal symbol variable display (variation presentation) starts until the pachinko gaming machine 100 enters the time-saving game state again (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), the decorative symbol 41 of a losing symbol is displayed before the first variation in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) begins (see Figure 131 (15), Figure 134 (15)).

It should be noted that the display form of the change effect image 729 is not limited to the above example.
The change effect image 729 may be displayed in rainbow colors. That is, the change effect image 729 may be displayed in rainbow colors to suggest or inform that the normal symbol lottery result is a long win.

(Example of variation 14)
135 and 136 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 14) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to Figs. 135 and 136. Variable performance example 14 is an example of a variable performance based on winning at the gate 124 in the first mode of the second time-saving game state. The variable performance in variable performance example 14 is a variable performance executed when "Ec1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 108(b). In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variable performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 135(1), during the display of the second special symbol in the first mode of the second time-saving play state, a button operation effect is executed, and a button operation image 707 is displayed. At this time, a stock teasing image 730 is displayed. Furthermore, the normal symbol is displayed as stopped, and the third small symbol 54C is fixed and stopped. Furthermore, a "2" is displayed in the third reserved number display 53C. Note that during the display of the second special symbol, the normal symbol lottery has not been won, and no game ball has entered the second starting hole 122.

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 707 is displayed, a failure image 731 is displayed as shown in FIG. 135(2). At this time, the third small symbol 54C starts to change as the next normal symbol starts to change. The third reserved number display 53C is updated to "1".
Next, as shown in FIG. 135(3), the second special symbol display 222 is displayed (lighted) in a manner to notify a jackpot. After that, the fourth small symbol 54D, "555", is fixed and stopped. At this time, the jackpot game notification image 709 and the second notification image 710 are displayed. At this time, each lamp emits a rainbow light, and the second performance sound that notifies the player that the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the pachinko game machine 100 changes from the second time-saving game state to the normal game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(4), the normal symbol display 223 is displayed (lighted) in a manner that notifies a win. After that, the third small symbol 54C, "666", is fixed and stopped. On the other hand, at this time, the rainbow-colored illumination of each lamp, the vibration of the performance button 161, the role performance, and the output of the performance sound that suggests or notifies a win in the normal symbol lottery are not performed to suggest or notify a win in the normal symbol lottery. In addition, the electric tulip 123 is opened (opened for a long time) with the stop display of the long winning symbol. In addition, the fourth small symbol 54D is not displayed.
Next, the big win game begins.

Next, as shown in Fig. 135 (5), a round image 711 is displayed. At this time, a winning promotion image 727 is displayed in a smaller display size than that shown in Fig. 124 (11). At this time, the game ball enters the second start hole 122. When the game ball enters the second start hole 122, the electric tulip 123 closes.
Next, during the execution of the big win game, as shown in FIG. 135(6), the accessory effect is executed, and the movable accessory 115 moves so as to overlap with the image display unit 114. At this time, the effect button 161 vibrates. At this time, a sound effect is executed, and a fourth effect sound that suggests or notifies that the game ball has entered the second start hole 122 is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the first notification image 708 is displayed. At this time, each lamp emits light in rainbow colors. The effect shown in FIG. 135(6) is an effect that is performed based on the entry into the second start hole 122.

Next, during the execution of the big win game, a success image 732 is displayed as shown in FIG. 136(7).
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 134 (14) and (15) are performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can display the success image 732 in the second time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 133 (10)), and can restrict the display of the success image 732 in the normal gaming state (see FIG. 131 (13)). Here, the second time-saving gaming state is regarded as the first mode. Also, the normal gaming state is regarded as the second mode. Also, the display of the success image 732 is regarded as the execution of a specific presentation.
In this case, compared to a case where the execution of a specific effect is not restricted regardless of the mode, the player can feel the unexpectedness of the execution of a specific effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 displays the success image 732 when the variable display of the normal pattern starts in the first mode, and restricts the display of the success image 732 when the variable display of the normal pattern starts in the second mode. Then, the performance control unit 300 can display the success image 732 in the second mode when the variable display of the normal pattern starts in the first mode and ends in the second mode (see FIG. 136 (7)). In other words, when the variable display of the normal pattern starts before the first mode ends (before the variable display of the final round (in this example, 1 round) of the special pattern in the second time-saving game state ends), the performance control unit 300 can display the success image 732 even if the variable display of the normal pattern ends after the first mode ends (after the variable display of the final round of the special pattern in the second time-saving game state ends).
In this case, the display of the success image 732 can be made to feel unexpected to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

(Modification)
Figure 137 shows a modified example of variable performance example 13.
Next, a modified example of the variation performance example 13 will be described. In the first mode of the second time-saving game state, the performance when the variation display of the normal symbol is executed due to winning the normal symbol lottery during the variation display of the second special symbol is not limited to the example shown in the variation performance example 13.
First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 132(1) to (3) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 137(1), the normal symbol display 223 is stopped and displayed in a lighting state to notify that the lottery result is a win. After that, the decorative symbol 41 and the third small symbol 54C, "666", are fixed and stopped. At this time, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "145 seconds remaining."
In addition, when the long winning symbol is displayed, the electric tulip 123 is opened (opened for a long time).

Next, as time passes, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "143 seconds remaining" as shown in FIG. 137 (2). At this time, the game ball enters the second start hole 122. When the game ball enters the second start hole 122, the electric tulip 123 closes. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(3), the role effect is executed, and the movable role object 115 moves so as to overlap with the image display unit 114. At this time, the effect button 161 vibrates. At this time, a sound effect is executed, and a fourth effect sound that suggests or notifies that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 122 is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the first notification image 708 is displayed. At this time, each lamp emits light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in FIG. 137(4), a success image 732 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(5), as the next normal symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the third small symbol 54C start to change. At this time, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "130 seconds remaining."
Thereafter, until the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, winning at the gate 124 and the variable display of the normal symbol are repeated.

As described above, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122 in the first mode of the second time-saving play state, a presentation may be given to suggest or notify that a game ball has entered the second starting hole 122 before the display of the next normal pattern begins to change.
In addition, even in the modified example, the effect shown in Fig. 130(8) may be performed just before the variable display of the second special symbol ends. Furthermore, depending on whether or not a second winning occurs in the second starting hole 122 during the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect shown in Fig. 133(9) or (10) or the effect shown in Fig. 130(9) may be performed.

(Example of variation 15)
138 to 140 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 15) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 138 to 140. The variable performance in the variable performance example 15 is an example of a variable performance based on winning at the second start port 122 in the second mode of the second time-saving game state, three variable performances based on three winnings at the gate 124 in the second mode of the second time-saving game state, and a variable performance based on winning at the gate 124 in the normal game state.
In addition, the variable performance based on winning the second starting gate 122 in the variable performance example 15 is a variable performance executed when "Ee1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 109(a). In addition, the first variable performance based on winning the gate 124 in the second time-saving game state in the variable performance example 15 is a variable performance executed when "Eh3" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 109(b). In addition, the second and third variable performances based on winning the gate 124 in the second time-saving game state in the variable performance example 15 are both variable performances executed when "Eh1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 109(b). In addition, the variable performance based on winning the gate 124 in the normal game state in the variable performance example 15 is a variable performance executed when "EP1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 106(a). In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 138(1), in the second mode of the second time-saving play state, the decorative symbol 41, the third small symbol 54C "029", and the fourth small symbol 54D "777" are fixed and stopped. Also, a stage image 701 corresponding to the second mode of the second time-saving play state is displayed. Also, although not shown, there is "1" reserved for winning at the second starting hole 122.

Next, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts, the variable display of the fourth small symbol 54D starts as shown in Fig. 138 (2). At this time, a remaining time image 728 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the remaining time image 728 displays the text "150 seconds remaining", which is the remaining time for the variable display of the second special symbol.
Next, when a game ball enters the gate 124, as shown in FIG. 138(3), the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the third small pattern 54C starts to change with the start of the display of the normal pattern. When four more game balls enter the gate 124, the third reserved number display 53C is updated to "4". At this time, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "149 seconds remaining".

Next, as shown in Fig. 138(4), an expected image 733 is displayed. At this time, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "141 seconds remaining."
138(5), a button operation presentation is executed, and a button operation image 707 is displayed. At this time, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "120 seconds remaining."

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 707 is displayed, the button operation image 707 is hidden as shown in FIG. 138(6). At this time, the decorative pattern 41 and the third small pattern 54C, "246", are fixed and stopped along with the display of the normal pattern. At this time, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "113 seconds remaining".
After this, during the variable display of the second special symbol, every time a gaming ball enters the gate 124, the variable display of the normal symbol (variable performance related to the normal symbol) is repeatedly executed.

Next, as time passes, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "0 seconds remaining" as shown in FIG. 139 (7). At this time, the digestion promotion image 734 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 and the third small pattern 54C are displayed in a variable manner, as the normal pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. Also, "2" is displayed in the third reserved number display 53C.
Next, as shown in FIG. 139(8), the button operation effect is executed, and the button operation image 707 is displayed. At this time, the remaining time image 728 is not displayed. At this time, the third small symbol 54C, "246", is fixed and stopped with the stop display of the normal symbol.

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 707 is displayed, a big win game notification image 709 and a second notification image 710 are displayed, as shown in FIG. 139 (9). At this time, the lamps light up in rainbow colors, and a second effect sound is output from the speaker 156, suggesting or notifying that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win or a small win. On the other hand, no special device effect is performed, and the effect button 161 does not vibrate. At this time, the third small pattern 54C starts to change as the next normal pattern starts to change. The third reserved number display 53C is updated to "1".

Next, as shown in Fig. 139 (10), the fourth small symbol 54D "555" is fixed and stopped with the stop display of the second special symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol ends without the game ball entering the second start hole 122 during the variable display of the second special symbol (without stocking the right to win a big or small prize).
Next, as shown in FIG. 139(11), the third small symbol 54C, "246", is stopped as a fixed symbol. At this time, the fourth small symbol 54D is not displayed. At this time, the pachinko game machine 100 goes from the second time-saving game state to the normal game state.
Next, the big win game begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (12), a round image 711 is displayed. At this time, the display of the third small symbol 54C begins to change as the display of the next normal symbol begins to change. The third reserved number display 53C is updated to "0."

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (13), the normal symbol display 223 is stopped and displayed in a lighting state to notify that the lottery result is a win. After that, the third small symbol 54C, "121", is fixed and stopped. In addition, with the stop display of the short winning symbol, the electric tulip 123 opens for a predetermined time (opens for a short time) and then closes.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 131 (14) and (15) are performed.

(Example of variation 16)
141 to 143 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 16) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 141 to 143. The variable performance in the variable performance example 16 is an example of a variable performance based on winning at the second start port 122 in the second mode of the second time-saving game state, three variable performances based on three winnings at the gate 124 in the second mode of the second time-saving game state, and a variable performance based on winning at the gate 124 in the normal game state.
In addition, the variable performance based on winning the second starting gate 122 in the variable performance example 15 is a variable performance executed when "Ee1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 109(a). In addition, the first variable performance based on winning the gate 124 in the second time-saving game state of the variable performance example 15 is a variable performance executed when "Eg2" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 109(b). In addition, the second and third variable performances based on winning the gate 124 in the second time-saving game state of the variable performance example 15 are both variable performances executed when "Eh1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 109(b). In addition, the variable performance based on winning the gate 124 in the normal game state of the variable performance example 15 is a variable performance executed when "EQ1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 106(b). In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 141 (1), in the second mode of the second time-saving play state, the decorative symbol 41, the third small symbol 54C "029", and the fourth small symbol 54D "777" are fixed and stopped. Also, a stage image 701 corresponding to the second mode of the second time-saving play state is displayed. Also, although not shown, there is "1" reserved for winning at the second starting hole 122.

Next, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts, the variable display of the fourth small symbol 54D starts as shown in Fig. 141 (2). At this time, a remaining time image 728 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the remaining time image 728 displays the text "150 seconds remaining", which is the remaining time for the variable display of the second special symbol.
Next, when a game ball enters the gate 124, as shown in FIG. 141(3), the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the third small pattern 54C starts to change with the start of the display of the normal pattern. When four more game balls enter the gate 124, the third reserved number display 53C is updated to "4". At this time, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "149 seconds remaining".

Next, as shown in Fig. 141(4), a high expectation image 735 is displayed. At this time, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "140 seconds remaining."
141(5), a button operation presentation is executed, and a button operation image 707 is displayed. At this time, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "120 seconds remaining."

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 707 is displayed, a special feature effect is executed, and the movable special feature 115 moves to overlap the image display unit 114, as shown in FIG. 141 (6). At this time, the effect button 161 vibrates. At this time, a sound effect is executed, and a third effect sound is output from the speaker 156, suggesting or notifying that the result of the normal pattern lottery is a win. At this time, the first notification image 708 is displayed. At this time, each lamp emits a rainbow of colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (7), the normal symbol display 223 is displayed (lighted) in a manner that notifies a win. After that, the decorative symbol 41 and the third small symbol 54C, "666", are fixed and stopped. At this time, the winning image 736 is displayed. At this time, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "113 seconds remaining". In addition, with the stop display of the long winning symbol, the electric tulip 123 is opened (opened for a long time).
Next, as shown in Fig. 142(8), a prize promotion image 727 is displayed. At this time, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "112 seconds remaining."

Then, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, a success image 732 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 142 (9).
Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (10), as the variable display of the next normal pattern begins, the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 and the third small pattern 54C begins.
After this, during the variable display of the second special symbol, every time a gaming ball enters the gate 124, the variable display of the normal symbol (variable performance related to the normal symbol) is repeatedly executed.

Next, as time passes, the remaining time image 728 is updated to "0 seconds remaining" as shown in FIG. 142 (11). At this time, the digestion indicator image 734 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 and the third small pattern 54C are displayed in a variable manner, as the normal pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. Also, "2" is displayed in the third reserved number display 53C.
Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (12), the button operation effect is executed, and the button operation image 707 is displayed. At this time, the remaining time image 728 is not displayed. At this time, the third small symbol 54C, "246", is fixed and stopped with the normal symbol stop display.

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 707 is displayed, a big win game notification image 709 and a second notification image 710 are displayed, as shown in FIG. 143 (13). At this time, the lamps light up in rainbow colors, and a second effect sound is output from the speaker 156, suggesting or notifying that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win or a small win. On the other hand, no special device effect is performed, and the effect button 161 does not vibrate. At this time, the third small pattern 54C starts to change as the next normal pattern starts to change. The third reserved number display 53C is updated to "1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (14), the second special symbol display 222 is displayed (lighted) in a manner to notify a big win. After that, the fourth small symbol 54D, "555", is fixed and stopped. At this time, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the second time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 143(15), the third small symbol 54C, "246", is fixed and stopped with the normal symbol stop display. At this time, the fourth small symbol 54D is not displayed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 134 (13) to (15) are performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 133 (11), when a variable performance is performed because the special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win, a suggestive performance that suggests or notifies the result of the special symbol lottery can be executed. The fact that the special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win is considered to mean that the first game condition is established. In addition, as an example of the suggestive performance, light emission in rainbow colors of each lamp can be given. In addition, as shown in FIG. 132 (3) and (4), when a variable performance is performed because the normal symbol lottery result is a win in the first mode of the second time-saving game state, a suggestive performance is not performed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 141 (6), when a variable performance is performed because the normal symbol lottery result is a win in the second mode of the second time-saving game state, a suggestive performance is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 does not execute a suggestive performance that suggests the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the second game information in the first mode, and can execute a suggestive performance that suggests the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the second game information in the second mode. Here, the second game information may be, for example, a random number value acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 based on the winning of the gate 124.
In this case, the result of the judgment based on the second game information can be suggested in a different suggestion manner for each mode, thereby making the game more interesting.

In particular, in the first mode, in this embodiment, the specific suggestive effect such as the display of the change effect image 729 that suggests or notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery is not performed as an effect that suggests or notifies that the special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win. That is, in the first mode, the specific suggestive effect that suggests the result of the judgment of the special symbol lottery based on the first game information is not performed, and the specific suggestive effect that suggests the result of the judgment of the normal symbol lottery based on the second game information is performed. Also, in the first mode, the suggestive effect that suggests the result of the judgment of the normal symbol lottery based on the second game information is not performed, and the suggestive effect that suggests the result of the judgment of the special symbol lottery based on the first game information is performed. As the first game information, for example, a random number value acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 based on the winning of the second start hole 122 can be mentioned.
In this case, it is possible to make the player easily recognize whether the presentation being executed in the first mode is a presentation suggesting either the normal pattern lottery result or the special pattern lottery result.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the normal symbol lottery result is a win and the variable performance is executed, a special image such as the winning image 736 can be displayed. Here, the normal symbol lottery result being a win is regarded as the establishment of the second game condition. Then, the performance control unit 300 can display the decorative symbol 41, the third small symbol 54C, and the special image during the execution of the variable performance related to the special symbol. The variable performance related to the special symbol is regarded as the first variable performance.
In this case, even during the changing display of the special symbols, the player can be directed to the presentation of the normal symbols which are selected as winning symbols, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the success image 732 can be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol. In addition, in the first mode of the second time-saving game state, the success image 732 is displayed just before the variable display of the second special symbol ends (see FIG. 133 (10)). On the other hand, in the second mode of the second time-saving game state, the success image 732 is displayed when the game ball enters the second start hole 122 (see FIG. 142 (9)). That is, the display start conditions of the success image 732 are different between the first mode and the second mode. Here, the display of the success image 732 is regarded as the execution of a specific performance.
In this case, the player can feel a sense of surprise at the start of a special effect, compared to when the conditions for starting the special effect are the same for each mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, in the first mode, the performance control unit 300 can start a special performance while the normal pattern is being displayed in a varying manner, and in the second mode, the performance control unit 300 can start a special performance while the normal pattern is being displayed in a stopped state.
In this case, the way in which the variable display of the normal symbols and the expectation for the specific performance can be made different for each mode, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, in the second mode of the second time-saving game state, when the game ball enters the second start hole 122, a success image 732 is displayed. The timing at which the game ball can enter the second start hole 122 is determined by the timing at which the variable display of the normal symbol, which is a winning lottery result, starts. In other words, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can vary the display start timing of the success image 732 depending on the start timing of the variable presentation related to the normal symbol in the second mode of the second time-saving game state.
In this case, the player can feel a sense of surprise that the special effect will begin, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the first mode, the performance control unit 300 starts displaying the success image 732 at a predetermined timing in the variable performance related to the second special pattern (just before the variable display of the second special pattern ends), and in the second mode, starts displaying the success image 732 at a timing different from the predetermined timing (when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122).
In particular, the timing at which the display of the success image 732 in the second mode starts is determined by the timing at which the display of the normal symbol changes when the lottery result is a win during the display of the second special symbol changes.
In this case, the player can feel a sense of surprise when the display of the success image 732 begins, compared to when the start timing of the specific effect is the same for each mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, in the second mode of the second time-saving game state, a specific effect is executed in the variable effect related to the normal symbol executed when the lottery result is a win. The specific effect is, for example, the illumination of each lamp in rainbow colors, the role effect, the vibration of the effect button 161, the display of the first notification image 708, the output of the first effect sound, etc. (see FIG. 141 (6)). On the other hand, in the first mode of the second time-saving game state, a specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect is restricted) in the variable effect related to the normal symbol executed when the lottery result is a win (see FIG. 132 (3), (4)).
In this case, even in the time-shortened play state, the presentation mode of the variable presentation related to the normal pattern that is executed when the lottery result is a win can be made different depending on whether the state is the first mode of the second time-shortened play state or the second mode of the second time-shortened play state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(Example of variation 17)
FIG. 144 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 17) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 144. The variable performance in variable performance example 17 is an example of a variable performance based on winning at gate 124 in the second mode of the second time-saving gaming state. The variable performance in variable performance example 17 is executed when "Eg1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 109(b). In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly described, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, in the second mode of the second time-saving gaming state, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 138 (1) to (6), Fig. 139 (7) and (8) are performed. That is, during the variable display of the second special symbol, the button operation image 707 is displayed without winning the normal symbol lottery.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 707 is displayed, a big win game notification image 709 and a second notification image 710 are displayed as shown in FIG. 144 (1). At this time, each lamp emits a rainbow light, and a second effect sound is output from the speaker 156, which suggests or notifies that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win or a small win. On the other hand, the role effect and the vibration of the effect button 161 are not executed. At this time, the variable display of the third small pattern 54C starts with the start of the variable display of the next normal pattern. Also, the third reserved number display 53C is updated to "1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(2), the second special symbol display 222 is displayed (lighted) in a manner that indicates a big win. After that, the fourth small symbol 54D, "555", is fixed and stopped. That is, the second special symbol variable display ends without a game ball entering the second start hole 122 during the variable display of the second special symbol (without stocking the right to win a big win or a small win). At this time, the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled from the second time-saving game state to the normal game state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 144(3), the normal symbol display 223 is displayed (lighted) in a manner to notify a win. After that, the third small symbol 54C, "666", is fixed and stopped. In addition, the electric tulip 123 opens (opens for a long time) with the stop display of the long winning symbol.
Next, the big win game begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(4), a round image 711 is displayed. At this time, a winning promotion image 727 is displayed. At this time, the fourth small symbol 54D is not displayed.
When the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 144(5), a special feature effect is executed, and the movable special feature 115 moves so as to overlap with the image display unit 114. At this time, the effect button 161 vibrates. At this time, a sound effect is executed, and a fourth effect sound that suggests or notifies that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 122 is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the first notification image 708 is displayed. At this time, each lamp emits a rainbow of colors.
Next, as shown in FIG. 144(6), a success image 732 is displayed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 134 (13) to (15) are performed.

In this embodiment, in the second time-saving game state, the effects suggesting or notifying that the lottery result for the second special pattern is a big win or a small win, such as the reel effect, vibration of the effect button 161, output of the first effect sound, and display of the first notification image 708, are restricted, but are not limited to this.
Even in the second time-saving game state, as an effect suggesting or notifying that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, a special effect, vibration of the effect button 161, output of the first effect sound, display of the first notification image 708, etc. may be executed. Even in this case, in the first mode of the second time-saving game state, in the variable effect executed when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win, the special effect, vibration of the effect button 161, output of the first effect sound, display of the first notification image 708, etc. may be restricted. Also, even in the first mode of the second time-saving game state, in the variable effect executed when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win, the special effect, vibration of the effect button 161, output of the first effect sound, display of the first notification image 708, etc. may be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the first presentation in which neither the variable image 51 nor the reserved image 52 is displayed is the second time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this.
The first presentation, which does not display the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52, may be an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation in a normal game state or a time-saving game state.

Also, in this embodiment, it has been explained that a mode (first mode or second mode) is provided in which, provided that there is a reservation for the second special pattern in the second time-saving game state, the variable display of the normal pattern can be executed multiple times while the variable display of the second special pattern is being performed, but this is not limited to this.
On the condition that there is a reservation for the first special symbol at the start of the time-saving game state, it may be possible to execute a mode effect that is executed over the variable display of a plurality of normal symbols until the number of times J of selections of the normal symbols becomes 0. In this case, the time-saving game state can be shown as a series of effects, which can increase the interest in the game.
In addition, when the execution period of the variable display of the first special symbol and the execution period of the variable display of the normal symbol overlap at least partially during the time-saving game state, the game presentation corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (such as the display of an image suggesting the remaining time of the variable presentation, such as the remaining time image 728) and the game presentation corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol (display of the change effect image 729 and the variable presentation) may be executed (executed in parallel) respectively. In this case, it is possible to improve the presentation effect during the time-saving game state, and to increase the interest in the game.
In addition, in the time-saving game state, during the game presentation corresponding to the first special symbol's variable display (such as the display of an image suggesting the remaining time of the variable display, such as the remaining time image 728), the game presentation corresponding to the normal symbol's variable display (display of the change effect image 729 or a variable display) may be executed multiple times. In this case, it is possible to effectively appeal to the player that there are multiple chances to get a favorable result, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the first presentation in which neither the variable image 51 nor the reserved image 52 is displayed is the second time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this.
The first presentation, which does not display the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52, may be an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation in the normal game state, the first time-saving game state, or the second time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that a first time-saving game state and a second time-saving game state are provided as time-saving game states. Here, the first time-saving game state may be the first special time-saving game state (specific time-saving game state) in the first embodiment. Also, the second time-saving game state may be the second special time-saving game state in the first embodiment.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display size of the decorative pattern 41 is the same in the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state, but this is not limited to this.
The display size of the decorative pattern 41 may be smaller in the second time-shortened game state than in the first time-shortened game state. Also, the display size of the decorative pattern 41 may be smaller in the first time-shortened game state than in the second time-shortened game state.
Also, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed on one side (upper side, lower side, left side, right side, etc., farther from the center) of the image display unit 114 in the second time-shortened game state than in the first time-shortened game state. Also, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed on one side of the image display unit 114 in the first time-shortened game state than in the second time-shortened game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first reserved number display 53A and the second reserved number display 53B are not displayed in the time-saving play state (first time-saving play state, second time-saving play state), but this is not limited to this. Even in the time-saving play state (first time-saving play state, second time-saving play state), the first reserved number display 53A and the second reserved number display 53B may be displayed. In addition, in the time-saving play state (first time-saving play state, second time-saving play state), the first reserved number display 53A may be displayed, while the second reserved number display 53B may not be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display manner of the success image 732 is the same in the first mode and the second mode of the second time-saving gaming state, but this is not limited to this.
The display manner of the success image 732 may be different between the normal gaming state and the first and second modes of the second time-saving gaming state, such as the decorative manner of the text in the success image 732 being different.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), the fourth small pattern 54D is displayed instead of the first small pattern 54A, but this is not limited to this.
In the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), the second small symbol 54B may be displayed instead of the first small symbol 54A. That is, in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), even if the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, neither the decorative symbol 41 nor the small symbol 54 may be displayed in a variable manner (variable performance).
Also, in any of the normal game state, the first time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state, the first reserved number display 53A, the second reserved number display 53B, the third reserved number display 53C, the first small symbol 54A, the second small symbol 54B, and the third small symbol 54C may be displayed. Also, in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, the first reserved number display 53A, the second reserved number display 53B, the third reserved number display 53C, the first small symbol 54A, the second small symbol 54B, and the third small symbol 54C may be displayed, and in the normal game state, the first reserved number display 53A, the third reserved number display 53C, the first small symbol 54A, and the third small symbol 54C may be displayed while the second reserved number display 53B and the second small symbol 54B may not be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display position of the third small pattern 54C is the same in the normal game state and the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), but is not limited to this.
The display position of the first small symbol 54 (fourth small symbol 54D) and the display position of the third small symbol 54C may be interchanged between the normal game state and the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state). Also, the display position of the first reserved number display 53A and the display position of the third reserved number display 53C may be interchanged between the normal game state and the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first small pattern 54A or the fourth small pattern 54D of a missing number is displayed in a stopped state in the normal game state, the first special time-saving game state, and the second special time-saving game state, the first small pattern 54A or the fourth small pattern 54D of the missing number that is displayed in a stopped state does not become hidden until the next variable performance starts, and when the first small pattern 54A or the fourth small pattern 54D of a double number is displayed in a stopped state, the first small pattern 54A or the fourth small pattern 54D of the double number that is displayed in a stopped state becomes hidden until the next variable performance starts (during the jackpot game), but this is not limited to this.
Even if the first small symbol 54A or the fourth small symbol 54D of a double number is displayed as stopped in the normal game state, the first special time-saving game state, and the second special time-saving game state, the first small symbol 54A or the fourth small symbol 54D of a double number that is displayed as stopped does not have to become invisible until the next variable performance is started (during a jackpot game).
In addition, even if the third small symbol 54C of the double numbers is displayed stopped in the normal game state, the first special time-saving game state, and the second special time-saving game state, the third small symbol 54C of the double numbers may become invisible until the next variable performance starts (during the jackpot game).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that in certain modes (normal game state, first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), it is possible to make the predetermined performance patterns (decorative pattern 41, first small pattern 54A, fourth small pattern 54A, etc.) invisible during the execution of the first variable performance (variable performance related to the first special pattern, variable performance related to the second special pattern, variable performance related to the normal pattern). Here, making it possible to make the predetermined performance patterns invisible during the execution of the first variable performance also includes the case where the predetermined performance patterns are invisible before the start of the first variable performance and are displayed during the execution of the first variable performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 54 are displayed as the performance patterns, but this is not limited to this.
The special symbol 55 may be displayed instead of the small symbol 54. Also, in addition to the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 54, the special symbol 55 may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first small pattern 54A, the fourth small pattern 54D, and the third small pattern 54C are all the same display size, but this is not limited to this.
In the normal game state, the first small symbol 54A (fourth small symbol 54D) may be displayed in a larger size than the third small symbol 54C. In the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), the third small symbol 54C may be displayed in a larger size than the first small symbol 54A (fourth small symbol 54D).

In addition, in this embodiment, the display size of the decorative pattern 41 is the same in the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state, but this is not limited to this.
The display size of the decorative pattern 41 may be larger in the second time-shortened game state than in the first time-shortened game state. Also, the display size of the decorative pattern 41 may be larger in the first time-shortened game state than in the second time-shortened game state.
In addition, the display size of the characters in the decorative pattern 41 may be larger in the first time-saving game state than in the normal game state. On the other hand, the display size of the characters in the decorative pattern 41 may be larger in the normal game state than in the second time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an SP reach performance is executed in a normal game state, the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily made invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see) (see FIG. 112 (4)), and in a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), the decorative pattern 41 is not made invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see) even when an SP reach performance is executed, but this is not limited to this.
Even in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is started, the decorative pattern 41 may be temporarily made invisible (difficult to see or invisible). Also, in the normal game state, even when the SP reach effect is executed, the decorative pattern 41 may not be made invisible (difficult to see or invisible).

In addition, in this embodiment, the third reserved number display 53C and the third small symbol 54C are displayed even during a jackpot game, but this is not limited to this.
During a jackpot game, the third reserved number display 53C and the third small symbol 54C may be made invisible (invisible or difficult to see).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the third small symbol 54C of the doublet is displayed in the first time-saving gaming state, the fourth small symbol 54D of the doublet may be displayed (see FIG. 125-1 (13)). After this, the fourth small symbol 54D of the doublet may be made non-displayable (not visible or difficult to see), while the third small symbol 54C of the doublet may be continued to be displayed for a predetermined period. Also, after the third small symbol 54C of the doublet and the fourth small symbol 54D of the doublet are displayed, the third small symbol 54C of the doublet may be made non-displayable (not visible or difficult to see), while the fourth small symbol 54D of the doublet may be continued to be displayed for a predetermined period.

In this embodiment, as the presentation based on the result of the lottery for the second special symbol in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), the role presentation, the vibration of the presentation button 161, the output of the first presentation sound, the display of the first notification image 708, etc. are not performed, but are not limited thereto. As the presentation based on the result of the lottery for the second special symbol in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), the role presentation, the vibration of the presentation button 161, the output of the first presentation sound, the display of the first notification image 708, etc. may be performed.
In particular, in this embodiment, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122 in the second time-saving game state, the special effect, the vibration of the effect button 161, the output of the effect sound, the display of the first notification image 708, the illumination of the lamps in the rainbow colors, etc. are performed (see Fig. 133(9), Fig. 135(6), Fig. 137(3), Fig. 141(6), Fig. 144(5)). In this case, the special effect, the vibration of the effect button 161, the output of the effect sound, the display of the first notification image 708, the illumination of the lamps in the rainbow colors, etc. are performed again as the effect based on the result of the second special symbol lottery.
Furthermore, if the second start hole 122 is won multiple times during the execution of the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol in the second mode of the second time-saving game state, the role effect, vibration of the effect button 161, output of the fourth effect sound, display of the first notification image 708, illumination of the lamps in rainbow colors, etc. are performed multiple times. Then, after that, as an effect based on the lottery result of the second special symbol, the role effect, vibration of the effect button 161, output of the effect sound, display of the first notification image 708, illumination of the lamps in rainbow colors, etc. are performed again.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the second time-saving game state, the variable display of the second special pattern is performed for a long period of time, and during the variable display of this second special pattern, the variable display (variable performance) of the normal pattern is performed multiple times, but this is not limited to this.
In the second time-saving game state, the first special symbol may be displayed for a long time. During the first special symbol display, the normal symbol may be displayed (displayed) multiple times. In this case, even in the time-saving game state, the interest in the first special symbol display can be increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display manner of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 relating to the special pattern (see Figures 111 (1) and (2)) and the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 relating to the normal pattern (see Figures 119 (2) and 120 (1)) is the same, but is not limited to this.
The display form of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 related to the special symbol and the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 related to the normal symbol may be different. For example, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 related to the special symbol may be spherical, whereas the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 related to the normal symbol may be triangular.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display positions of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 relating to the special pattern and the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 relating to the normal pattern are the same, but this is not limited to this.
The display manner of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 related to the special symbol and the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 related to the normal symbol may be different. For example, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 related to the special symbol may be displayed on the left side of the image display unit 114, whereas the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 related to the normal symbol may be displayed on the right side of the image display unit 114.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 relating to the normal pattern are not displayed in the second time-saving gaming state, but this is not limited to this.
The variable image 51 and reserved image 52 related to the normal symbol may be displayed in the second time-saving game state. In this case, the display mode of the variable image 51 and reserved image 52 related to the normal symbol may be the same or different between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. Also, the display positions of the variable image 51 and reserved image 52 related to the normal symbol may be the same or different between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. Also, the display modes of the variable image 51 and reserved image 52 related to the normal symbol may be the same or different between the first mode and the second mode of the second time-saving game state. Also, the display positions of the variable image 51 and reserved image 52 related to the normal symbol may be the same or different between the first mode and the second mode of the second time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the same movable device 115 operates in the device performance in the variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is notified that it is a big win or a small win (see Figure 115 (8)), and in the device performance in the variable performance in which the result of the normal pattern lottery is notified that it is a win (see Figure 124 (8)), but this is not limited to the above.
Different movable role pieces 115 may be operated in the role piece performance in the variable performance in which the special symbol lottery result is notified that it is a big win or a small win, and in the role piece performance in the variable performance in which the normal symbol lottery result is notified that it is a win. For example, in the role piece performance in the variable performance in which the special symbol lottery result is notified that it is a big win or a small win, the left movable role piece 115A (see FIG. 1) may be operated, whereas in the role piece performance in the variable performance in which the normal symbol lottery result is notified that it is a win, the right movable role piece 115C may be operated.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the effect button 161 vibrates in the same vibration manner in the variable effect in which the result of the special pattern lottery is notified that the result is a big win or a small win, and in the variable effect in which the result of the normal pattern lottery is notified that the result is a win, but this is not limited to this.
The effect button 161 may vibrate in different manners (vibration duration, number of vibrations, vibration strength) for a variable effect that notifies the player that the special pattern lottery result is a big win or a small win and a variable effect that notifies the player that the normal pattern lottery result is a win.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the same presentation image, the first notification image 708, is displayed in the variable presentation that notifies the player that the special pattern lottery result is a big win or a small win, and in the variable presentation that notifies the player that the normal pattern lottery result is a win, but this is not limited to the above.
The display mode of the presentation image for notifying that the special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win and the display mode of the presentation image for notifying that the normal symbol lottery result is a win may be different.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that each lamp emits light in the same lighting manner in the variable presentation that notifies the player that the special pattern lottery result is a big win or a small win, and in the variable presentation that notifies the player that the normal pattern lottery result is a win, but this is not limited to this.
Each lamp may emit light in a different manner (light color, light duration, brightness) for a variable presentation in which the result of a special pattern lottery is an indication that the result is a big win or a small win, and for a variable presentation in which the result of a normal pattern lottery is an indication that the result is a win.

Third Embodiment
Hereinafter, the third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. For convenience of description, the following description will be given with new reference numerals assigned to each component. That is, the same reference numerals may be assigned to different configurations in the first and second embodiments and the third embodiment. In addition, in the third embodiment, configurations different from the first and second embodiments will be described, and descriptions of the same configurations as the first or second embodiment may be omitted.

In addition, the above-mentioned configuration may correspond to a configuration described later. More specifically, the first special time-saving game state, the second special time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state described above correspond to a normal time-saving game state described later. In addition, the specific time-saving game state described above corresponds to a special time-saving game state described later. In addition, the above-mentioned decorative pattern 41 corresponds to a decorative pattern 700 described later. In addition, the above-mentioned speaker 156 corresponds to a sound output device 9 described later. In addition, the above-mentioned frame lamp 157 corresponds to a top lamp 10b described later. In addition, the above-mentioned board lamp 116 corresponds to a board lamp 74b described later. In addition, the above-mentioned movable role object 115 corresponds to a movable performance device 73 described later. In addition, the above-mentioned image display unit 114 corresponds to a first image display device 70 described later. In addition, the above-mentioned first special pattern display device 221 corresponds to a first special pattern display device 60 described later. In addition, the above-mentioned second special pattern display device 222 corresponds to a second special pattern display device 61 described later. The first special symbol reserved indicator 218 corresponds to the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 described later. The second special symbol reserved indicator 219 corresponds to the second special symbol reserved indicator 64 described later.
The reserved image 52 described above corresponds to the reserved image 702 described later. The variable image 51 described above corresponds to the variable image 701 described later. The reserved number display 53 described above corresponds to the reserved number display 703 described later. The reserved base described above corresponds to the reserved base 702P described later. The variable base described above corresponds to the variable base 701P described later. The small pattern 54 described above corresponds to the small pattern 704 described later. The status notification image 713 described above corresponds to the special time-saving start image 733 and the mode start image 736 described later. The customer waiting demo image 719 described above corresponds to the customer waiting image 710 described later. The stage image 701 described above corresponds to the stage image 706 described later. The first right hit image 712 described above corresponds to the second right hit image 725 described later. The return image 721 described above corresponds to the return image 742 described later. The second shutter image 724 described above corresponds to the first transition image 728 described later. The result notification image 725 described above corresponds to the result image 729 described later. The normal remaining number image 720 described above corresponds to the reached remaining number image 708 described later. The time-saving remaining number image 714 described above corresponds to the special time-saving remaining number image 738 described later. The left hit image 702 described above corresponds to the left hit image 730 described later. The SP reach image 705 described above corresponds to the SP reach image 712 described later. The SPSP reach image 706 described above corresponds to the SPSP reach image 713 described later. The button operation image 707 described above corresponds to the button operation image 714 described later. The transition image 704 described above corresponds to the first eye-catching image 715 described later. The setting image 718 described above corresponds to the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 described later. The first notification image 708 described above corresponds to the second emphasis image 718 described later. The big win game notification image 709 described above corresponds to the opening image 719 described later. The round image 711 described above corresponds to a during-round image 722 and a round number image 723 described later.
In addition, the corresponding configurations of one embodiment and another embodiment may be replaced, or a configuration included in one embodiment may be added to the configuration of another embodiment corresponding to this configuration. For example, each performance performed in the normal game state, such as a performance performed using the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 described later in the third embodiment, may be performed in the normal game state of the first embodiment or the second embodiment by using the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 described above. In addition, each performance performed in the normal time-saving game state, such as a performance performed using the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 described later in the third embodiment, may be performed in the first special time-saving game state, the second special time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state of the second embodiment by using the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 described above. In addition, each performance performed in a special time-saving game state, such as a performance performed using a variable image 701 and a reserved image 702 described later in the third embodiment, may be performed in the first special time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state of the first embodiment, and the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state of the second embodiment, by using the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 described above. More specifically, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 shown in the second and third embodiments may be displayed in the display mode of the variable image 701 and the display mode of the reserved image 702 described later in the third embodiment.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in this embodiment will be specifically described with reference to Fig. 145. Fig. 145 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, and a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs.
The audio output devices 9 are provided at two positions on the top at an interval, and perform a sound (music, voice) presentation by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. In addition, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided, and lighting presentation is performed by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of the light of each lamp (LED).

A light-emitting top lamp 10b is provided at the center of the upper portion of the frame member 150. The top lamp 10b emits light in a special light-emitting mode different from a normal light-emitting mode to perform a light-emitting effect at the time of winning that indicates the expectation of a special game being executed.
In addition, the effect button 161 is provided with a button lamp 17c for changing the effect button 161 between an off state and a lit state in which it emits light in a predetermined manner, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the pachinko game machine 100.

Outside the play area 111, there is provided a pattern display device having a first special pattern display 60 and a second special pattern display 61, and a reserve display device having a first special pattern reserve display 63 and a second special pattern reserve display 64.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a first special symbol, which is made based on the entry (sinking) of a game ball into the first starting hole 121, and the second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a second special symbol, which is made based on the entry (sinking) of a game ball into the second starting hole 122.

When a jackpot is determined based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 121, the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a varying manner, and after a predetermined time has passed, the first special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination. When a jackpot is determined based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 122, the second special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination, and after a predetermined time has passed, the second special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display blink at a predetermined interval or sequence when each special symbol changes. When the special symbol is displayed stationary, the LEDs light up in a manner that notifies the result of the big win determination (big win, small win, or miss).
An example of the display on the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 will be described. The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 display a losing special symbol with the leftmost LED lit as the first display mode after power-on. After that, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, the second LED from the leftmost is lit, and the LED lighting position changes to the right in sequence every 32 ms. After the rightmost LED is lit, the leftmost LED is lit again, and the display mode in which the LED lighting position changes in sequence is repeated thereafter.

The first special symbol reserved indicator 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the first reserved number (U1), which is the number of special symbol judgment information (first reserved) stored when a game ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 121, and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved. Note that, although a maximum of four first reserved symbols can be stored, the number may be less than or more than four.
An example of a display mode in the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 will be described. In the first special symbol reserved indicator 63, when the reserved number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the reserved number is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, when the reserved number is "2", the left LED flashes and the right LED is turned on when the reserved number is "3", and when the reserved number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The second special symbol reserved indicator 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the second reserved number (U2), which is the number of special symbol judgment information (second reserved) stored when the game ball enters (enters) the second starting hole 122, and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reserved. Note that, although a maximum of four second reserved pieces are stored, the number may be less than or more than four, or no second reserved pieces may be stored.
An example of a display mode in the second special symbol reserved indicator 64 will be described. In the second special symbol reserved indicator 64, when the reserved number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the reserved number is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, when the reserved number is "2", the left LED flashes and the right LED is turned on when the reserved number is "3", and when the reserved number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured with a seven-segment LED. For example, if a big win is determined in the big win determination, numbers such as "3" or "7" are displayed as static numbers, if a small win is determined, alphabets such as "A" or "C" are displayed as static numbers, and if a miss is determined, a static "-" is displayed, and during the variable display, the light is turned off and the "-" is alternately displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 is also provided with a first image display device 70 (main LCD) consisting of a liquid crystal display, a second image display device 71 (sub LCD) consisting of a liquid crystal display smaller in size and display area than the first image display device 70, and a movable presentation device 73 for executing action presentations.

The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 display various effects according to the progress of the game. The effects include a customer waiting demo effect that is performed when the variable display of the special pattern is not being executed, a variable effect that accompanies the variable display of the decorative pattern 700 that is executed when the variable display of the special pattern is being executed, and a jackpot effect that is executed during the execution of a jackpot game. In addition, the first image display device 70 is provided with multiple layers, and multiple images may be displayed on different layers.

The second image display device 71 can also perform a moving effect by moving using a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, motor, etc. while the first image display device 70 is performing a moving effect.

Specifically, the movement effect is achieved by vertical movement (rising and descending) between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and a performance position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70. Note that the movement direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD) may be left-right or front-back, or the movement effect may be achieved by operating the performance button 161.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) is formed with a variable display area for displaying three decorative patterns 700 (left pattern, center pattern, right pattern) and a mode display area showing the performance mode related to the execution of the variable performance.

The decorative pattern 700 is composed of patterns showing the numbers "1" to "9", for example, and starts to change in response to the start of the changing display of the special pattern executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61, and stops in response to the stop of the changing display of the special pattern. The decorative pattern 700 may be a pattern showing the alphabet such as "A" to "F".

The decorative pattern 700 is displayed stationary for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a mode that indicates the result of the jackpot determination (miss mode, jackpot mode, small jackpot mode). The jackpot mode and small jackpot mode are combinations of the same decorative pattern 700, such as "777" and "555," while the miss mode is any other mode.

The decorative pattern 700 is displayed in a vertical scroll mode, but it may also be displayed in a horizontal scroll mode, or may be switched on the spot or rotated (spinning).

In addition, while the decorative pattern 700 is being displayed in a changing state (changing effect), various effect images such as background images and characters, as well as movies, are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 depending on the result of the jackpot determination, thereby heightening the player's anticipation of the execution of the jackpot game (special game).

In this embodiment, the first image display device 70 displays the changing decorative pattern 700, but the changing decorative pattern 700 may be displayed by either the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71, or by both.

The movable performance device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that can be operated, and can perform a motion performance by making the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b perform a predetermined motion while the decorative pattern 700 is being displayed in a variable manner by the first image display device 70. The first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are also provided with a board lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and can emit light in a predetermined manner while the motion performance is being performed. The board lighting device 74 is provided with a board lamp 74b that illuminates the game board 110, and a movable member lamp 74c that illuminates the movable performance device 73.

Specifically, the first movable member 73a moves (rising and descending) between a standby position (first position) located toward the end (upper) of the first image display device 70 and a performance position (second position) located toward the center (lower) of the first image display device 70. The second movable member 73b moves between a standby position (first position) that covers a portion of the front of the first movable member 73a and a performance position where it retreats from the front of the first movable member 73a.

The result of the first special pattern change display (jackpot determination) may be notified by the combination of the stopped decorative pattern 700 and the first special pattern, and the result of the second special pattern change display (special play range) may be notified by the combination of the stopped decorative pattern 700 and the second special pattern. Also, the result of the first special pattern change display (jackpot determination) may be notified only by the stopped first special pattern, and the result of the second special pattern change display (jackpot determination) may be notified only by the stopped second special pattern.

(Explanation of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, there are a "normal game state (non-time-saving game state)" and a "time-saving game state" as states related to the ease of a game ball entering the second starting hole 122.

The initial game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is set to the "normal game state." In addition, even during a jackpot game, the game state is set to the "normal game state," but since a jackpot game is being played, the game state is different from the normal game state.

The "time-saving game state" includes a normal time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of a jackpot game (via a jackpot game), which will be described later, and a special time-saving game state that is controlled when the number of times the special symbol changes display after a specified condition is met (executing an RWM clear, clearing the number of changes based on the end of a jackpot game to 0) reaches a specified number (500 times in this embodiment).

The "time-saving game state" is set to be more favorable than the "normal game state" in terms of the average change time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start hole 122, and the probability of being determined to be a win, but it may be set to be more favorable in terms of only one of the average change time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start hole 122, and the probability of being determined to be a win.

[Production image]
FIG. 146 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70, etc.
Next, the performance image that the performance control unit 300 causes the first image display device 70 to display will be described.
146, the performance control unit 300 controls the first image display device 70 to display the performance image. In this embodiment, the performance image displayed on the first image display device 70 includes a decorative pattern 700, a variable image 701, a variable base 701P, a reserved image 702, a reserved base 702P, a reserved number display 703, a small pattern 704, an execution count image 705, and a stage image 706. In addition, the first image display device 70 displays a first front image 707, a remaining number of times reached image 708, a second front image 709, a clear negation image 744, a customer waiting image 710, a first emphasis image 711, an SP reach image 712, an SPSP reach image 713, a button operation image 714, a first eye-catching image 715, an adjustment image 716, a menu image 717, a second emphasis image 718, an opening image 719, a first right hit image 720, a promotion image 721, an in-round image 722, a number of rounds image 723, a normal time-saving selection image 745, a normal time-saving opening image 746, a normal time-saving opening image 747, a normal time-saving opening image 748, a normal time-saving opening image 749, a normal time-saving opening image 750, a normal time-saving opening image 751, a normal time-saving opening image 752, a normal time-saving opening image 753, a normal time-saving opening image 754, a normal time-saving opening image 755, a normal time-saving opening image 756, a normal time-saving opening image 757, a normal time-saving opening image 758, a normal time-saving opening image 759, a normal time-saving opening image 760, a normal time-saving opening image 761, a normal time-saving opening image 762, a normal time-saving opening image 763, a normal time-saving opening image 764, a normal time-saving opening image 765, a normal time-saving opening image 765, a normal time-saving opening image 766, a normal time-saving opening image 767, a normal time-saving opening image 768, a normal time-saving opening image 769, a normal time-saving opening image 770, a normal time- A start image 724, a card warning image 739, a game warning image 740, a second right hit image 725, a normal time-saving remaining number image 726, a switching image 727, a first transition image 728, a result image 729, a left hit image 730, a second eye-catching image 731, a countdown image 732, a special time-saving start image 733, a second transition image 734, a special time-saving selection image 735, a mode start image 736, a third right hit image 737, a special time-saving remaining number image 738, a magnetic error notification image 741, a recovery in progress image 742, and a zone notification image 743 may be displayed.

(Decorative design 700)
As shown in FIG. 146(1), three decorative patterns 700 are displayed on the first image display device 70. When the three patterns constituting the decorative pattern 700 are described individually, the pattern arranged on the left side may be referred to as the "left decorative pattern 700", the pattern arranged in the center as the "middle decorative pattern 700", and the pattern arranged on the right side as the "right decorative pattern 700". When the left decorative pattern 700 and the right decorative pattern 700 are described together, they may be referred to as the "left and right decorative patterns 700". When the left decorative pattern 700, the middle decorative pattern 700, and the right decorative pattern 700 are described together, they may be referred to as the "three decorative patterns 700". Furthermore, the three decorative patterns 700 with matching numbers may be referred to as the "double number decorative pattern 700".

In this embodiment, the display modes of the decorative pattern 700 include a highly decorative display mode (see FIG. 146(1)) in which character images and the like are displayed in addition to letters such as numbers, and a less decorative display mode (see FIG. 156(10), FIG. 161(23), etc.) in which letters such as numbers are the main display. The images of characters and the like provided in the highly decorative decorative pattern 700 are different for each letter of the decorative pattern 700, and the image of the characters and the like can also be used to identify which pattern it is.
Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern 700 is switched according to the change in the game state or the progress of the performance. Details will be described later, but for example, the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness is displayed in the SP reach performance, the SPSP reach performance, the normal time-saving game state, and the special time-saving game state, and the decorative pattern 700 with high decorativeness is displayed in other cases. In addition, the display mode and display size of the decorative pattern 700 may be different between the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state.
In addition, the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness may display images such as pictures and characters in addition to letters such as numbers. That is, the "decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness" shown in FIG. 156 (10) and FIG. 161 (23) may have a higher ratio of the area of the letters in the decorative pattern 700 than the "decorative pattern 700 with high decorativeness". The decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness may be a pattern consisting of letters only. The decorative pattern 700 is an example of a performance pattern.

In the decorative pattern 700 changing performance, the performance control unit 300 changes and displays the three decorative patterns 700, for example, by vertical scrolling (scrolling downwards), and then first temporarily stops the left decorative pattern 700 (for example, the number "0"), then temporarily stops the right decorative pattern 700 (for example, the number "9"), and then temporarily stops the center decorative pattern (for example, the number "2"). In this way, after all the decorative patterns 700 have been temporarily stopped, finally, all the decorative patterns 700 are fixed and stopped in accordance with the stopped display of the special patterns. Note that the combination "029" of the stopped decorative patterns 700 shown in Figure 146 (1) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss.

(Variation image 701)
As shown in FIG. 146(4), the first image display device 70 displays a variable image 701 indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed (the decorative symbol 700 is being variably displayed) by the CPU 201 of the game control unit 200. That is, the variable image 701 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbol during the variable display of the special symbol. The variable image 701 is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol starts, and disappears when the special symbol is displayed stationary. The details will be described later, but the variable image 701 is displayed in a display mode according to the stage, game state, etc., which will be described later. In the illustrated example, the variable image 701 is formed in a circular shape and has a cross-shaped mark.

Furthermore, the variable image 701 changes its display mode, such as its display color, to notify or suggest the likelihood of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, it is set so that a color with a higher likelihood of winning is displayed when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, rather than a miss. For example, when the colors of the variable image 701 are set to white, blue, green, red, and rainbow, it may be set so that the later the order, the higher the likelihood of winning. Furthermore, the likelihood of winning a rainbow-colored variable image 701 may be 100%.

(Variable pedestal 701P)
As shown in Fig. 146 (1), the variable pedestal 701P is an area where the variable image 701 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the variable pedestal 701P is displayed in the lower center of the display area of the first image display device 70. However, the variable pedestal 701P may be displayed at any position in the display area of the first image display device 70.
In the illustrated example, the variable pedestal 701P is displayed regardless of whether the variable image 701 is displayed or not, but this is not limited to the above. The variable pedestal 701P may be displayed when the variable image 701 is displayed, and may not be displayed when the variable image 701 is not displayed. Also, the variable pedestal 701P may not be displayed even when the variable image 701 is displayed. In other words, the variable pedestal 701P may not be used.

(Reserved image 702)
As shown in Fig. 146 (3), the first image display device 70 displays a reserved image 702 based on the current reserved information in the RAM 203 (RAM 303). In other words, the reserved image 702 is an image indicating that the right to judge a big win is reserved. In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 702 on the screen is determined based on the result of the pre-determination process.
The reserved image 702 has a smaller display size than the variable image 701. The reserved image 702 is displayed in a display mode according to the stage, game state, etc., which will be described later in detail. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is formed in a circular shape and has a cross-shaped mark. The reserved image 702 changes its display mode, such as a display color, to notify or suggest the expectation of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, the reserved image 702 is set to display a color of a type with a higher expectation when the judgment result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot than when it is a miss. For example, when white, blue, green, red, and rainbow are set as the colors of the reserved image 702, the expectation may be set to be higher the later the order. The expectation of the rainbow-colored reserved image 702 may be 100%. In the following, the display mode of the variable image 701, which is white, and the display mode of the reserved image 702, which is white, may be referred to as the normal display mode. In addition, in the following, the display mode of the variable image 701 which is a color other than white, i.e., a color which has a higher expectation than white, and the display mode of the pending image 702 which is a color which has a higher expectation than white, may be referred to as the expected color display mode.

As described above, a maximum of four pending images are generated by winning the first starting port 121. Therefore, a maximum of four pending images 702 are displayed on the first image display device 70 by winning the first starting port 121. In this embodiment, the multiple pending images 702 generated by winning the first starting port 121 are displayed in the area to the left of the variable image 701, in order from a position closer to the variable image 701 to a position farther away, that is, from the right side to the left side.

Although detailed description is omitted, a maximum of four reserved images are also generated by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 122. Therefore, a maximum of four reserved images 702 are displayed on the first image display device 70 by the entry into the second starting hole 122. In this embodiment, the multiple reserved images 702 generated by the entry into the second starting hole 122 are displayed in an area to the right of the variable image 701 in order from a position closer to the variable image 701 to a position farther away, that is, from the left side to the right side.
In addition, in this embodiment, the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 are basically configured with the same or similar display form (display size, form, transparency, etc.). However, the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 may be configured with different display forms. In addition, the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 displayed by winning the first start port 121 and the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 displayed by winning the second start port 122 may be the same display form or different display forms.

In addition, in the following description, the four pending images 702 displayed at maximum may be referred to as the "first pending image 702," the "second pending image 702," the "third pending image 702," and the "fourth pending image 702," in order of proximity to the variable image 701.

(Retention pedestal 702P)
As shown in FIG. 146(1), the reserved pedestal 702P indicates an area in which the reserved image 702 is displayed. The reserved pedestal 702P is displayed in a manner different from that of the variable pedestal 701P. However, the reserved pedestal 702P may be displayed in the same manner as the variable pedestal 701P. In addition, the reserved pedestal 702P corresponding to the reserved image 702 based on winning the first start port 121 is displayed on the lower side of the display area of the first image display device 70 and on the left side of the variable pedestal 701P (see FIG. 146(1)). In addition, the reserved pedestal 702P corresponding to the reserved image 702 based on winning the second start port 122 is displayed on the lower side of the display area of the first image display device 70 and on the right side of the variable pedestal 701P (see FIG. 161(23)).
In the illustrated example, the reserved pedestal 702P is displayed regardless of whether the reserved image 702 is displayed, but this is not limited to the above. The reserved pedestal 702P may be displayed when the reserved image 702 is displayed, and may not be displayed when the reserved image 702 is not displayed. Furthermore, the reserved pedestal 702P may not be displayed even when the reserved image 702 is displayed. In other words, the reserved pedestal 702P may not be used.
In addition, in the following description, the holding bases 702P may be referred to as the "first holding base 702P," the "second holding base 702P," the "third holding base 702P," and the "fourth holding base 702P," in order of proximity to the variable base 701P.

(Number of reserved calls displayed 703)
As shown in Fig. 146 (1), the first image display device 70 displays a reserved number display 703 based on the reserved information in the RAM 203 (RAM 303). This reserved number display 703 is an image showing the reserved number. Here, the number of reserved images 702 displayed on the first image display device 70 changes according to the reserved number for winning at the first start port 121 and the second start port 122. In the reserved number display 703, the reserved number for winning at the first start port 121 is displayed on the left side, and the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122 is displayed on the right side.

(Small design 704)
As shown in Fig. 146 (1), the first image display device 70 displays a small pattern 704 indicating that the special pattern is being variably displayed (the decorative pattern 700 is being variably displayed) based on the winning of the first start gate 121 or the second start gate 122. The small pattern 704 is controlled by the performance control unit 300, and is variably displayed in accordance with the variably displayed special pattern, and is stopped in accordance with the stopped display of the special pattern.

In the illustrated example, the small patterns 704 are three images each corresponding to the decorative pattern 700, and are displayed on the right side of the image display area of the first image display device 70. The small patterns 704 are displayed as images smaller in size than the decorative pattern 700. As described above, the decorative pattern 700 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode or a less decorative display mode, but the small patterns 704 are displayed only in a less decorative display mode that mainly consists of characters. However, the small patterns 704 may be displayed in a display mode in which images such as pictures and characters are displayed in addition to characters. The small patterns 704 may also be patterns consisting of only characters. The small patterns 704 are also considered to be performance patterns.

The small pattern 704 is displayed (e.g., scrolled vertically) in a manner that indicates that the special pattern is being displayed in a changing manner in response to a winning entry into the first starting gate 121 or the second starting gate 122. During scrolling, the small pattern 704 displays number images incrementing by one from "1" to "9," and then repeats the display incrementing by one from "1" again. Then, when the special pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the small pattern 704 is displayed in a stopped state. In the illustrated example, the number indicated by the stopped small pattern 704 matches the number indicated by the decorative pattern 700. To explain further, in the example of FIG. 146(1), a number corresponding to "029" of the decorative pattern 700 is displayed as the small pattern 704.

(Execution count image 705)
As shown in FIG. 146(1), the first image display device 70 displays an execution count image 705. This execution count image 705 is an image showing the number of newly performed variable displays (the number of variable performances of the decorative pattern 700) after the number of variable displays of the special pattern is reset. The display content of the execution count image 705 is updated every time a variable performance is performed. In the illustrated example, the execution count image 705 shows the text "99 GAME" including the number of times the variable performance has been performed. Note that the number of variable performances shown in the execution count image 705 may be the number of times that have been performed as a variable performance, or may be the number of variable performances including not only the number of times that have been performed but also the number of variable performances that are being performed. In addition, the timing at which the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated may be during the execution of the variable performance, or after the end of the variable performance. The execution count image 705 is displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 700. However, the execution count image 705 may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700.

(Stage image 706)
As shown in FIG. 146(1), a stage image 706 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The stage image 706 is an image that suggests or notifies the stage in which the player is staying in the currently executed performance. The stage is the stage in the performance of the pachinko game machine 100. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of stages are provided, and a stage image 706 having a display mode corresponding to the currently staying stage is displayed. The stage image 706 is displayed on a layer behind (lower than) the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, and the like, among the plurality of layers provided on the first image display device 70. That is, the stage image 706 is displayed as a background image on the first image display device 70. The stage image 706 may also be a moving image. In the illustrated example, a space-themed moving image is displayed as the stage image 706.
The stage image 706 is switched, for example, when a variation performance in one stage is performed a predetermined number of times. In addition, when a specific variation performance is performed, the stage image 706 may be switched in the variation performance next to the specific variation performance. Examples of the specific variation performance include a variation performance in which an SP reach performance is performed, and a variation performance in which an SPSP reach performance is performed. Furthermore, the stage image 706 is switched for each game state of the pachinko game machine 100. More specifically, the stage image 706 is displayed in a different display mode in the normal game state, the normal time-saving game state, and the special time-saving game state. The background of the stage image 706 can also be regarded as the performance mode of the pachinko game machine 100.

(First front image 707)
As shown in FIG. 146 (6), the first image display device 70 displays the first front image 707. The first front image 707 is displayed in a layer in front (higher) of the layer in which the decorative pattern 700 is displayed, among the multiple layers provided in the first image display device 70. The first front image 707 may be displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In this case, the first front image 707 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the execution count image 705, the stage image 7006, the remaining number of times reached image 708 described later, etc., and in a layer behind (lower) the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc. However, the first front image 707 may be displayed in a layer in front of the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702. The first front image 707 is displayed during the execution of the variable performance.

(Remaining number of times reached image 708)
As shown in FIG. 146 (5), the first image display device 70 displays a remaining number of times image 708. This remaining number of times image 708 is an image showing the number of times of change performance required until the special time-saving game state is reached. The display content of the remaining number of times image 708 is updated every time a change performance is performed. In the illustrated example, the remaining number of times image 708 shows the text "400 more", including the number of change performances required until the special time-saving game state is reached. Note that the number of change performances shown in the remaining number of times image 708 may include the change performance being performed, or may exclude the change performance being performed. In addition, the timing at which the display content of the remaining number of times image 708 is updated may be during the execution of the change performance, or after the end of the change performance. The remaining number of times image 708 is displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 700. However, the remaining number of times image 708 may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700.

(Second front image 709)
As shown in FIG. 151 (4), the first image display device 70 displays the second front image 709. The second front image 709 is displayed in a layer in front (higher) of the layer in which the decorative pattern 700 is displayed, among the multiple layers provided in the first image display device 70. The second front image 709 is displayed in a display mode different from that of the first front image 707. The second front image 709 may be displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In this case, the second front image 709 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and in a layer behind (lower) the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc. However, the second front image 709 may be displayed in a layer in front of the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702. In addition, the second front image 709 is executed in a variable performance of a variable performance pattern in which the first front image 707 is not executed.

(Clear Negative Image 744)
As shown in FIG. 151 (4), the first image display device 70 displays a clear negation image 744. The clear negation image 744 is displayed when a RWM clear negation effect is executed. The display of the clear negation image 744 suggests to the player that the RWM has not been cleared. In the illustrated example, a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed as the clear negation image 744.

(Customer waiting image 710)
As shown in FIG. 155(1), the first image display device 70 displays a customer waiting image 710. The customer waiting image 710 is an image for advertising the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the machine is in a customer waiting state. The customer waiting image 710 is displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. However, the customer waiting image 710 may be displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70 and not in the other part. In the illustrated example, a moving image related to the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed as the customer waiting image 710. The customer waiting image 710 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and in a layer behind (lower) the reserved number display 703, etc. However, the customer waiting image 710 may be displayed in a layer behind the variable image 701, the pending image 702, the small pattern 704, etc.

(First emphasized image 711)
As shown in FIG. 156 (9), the first image display device 70 displays a first emphasis image 711. The first emphasis image 711 is an image that emphasizes the performance by the first movable member 73a. The first emphasis image 711 is displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In the illustrated example, the first emphasis image 711 is a radial image. More specifically, the first emphasis image 711 is a radial image of a specific color centered on the position of the first movable member 73a. The specific color may be any color, for example, red. The first emphasis image 711 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc.

(SP reach image 712)
As shown in FIG. 156 (10), the first image display device 70 displays an SP reach image 712. This SP reach image 712 is an image indicating that the SP reach performance is being executed. The SP reach image 712 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini-game. In addition, in the SP reach image 712, a background different from that of the stage image 706 is displayed. In addition, the SP reach image 712 is displayed in a layer in front of the variable image 701, the variable base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and in a layer behind the decorative pattern 700, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc.

(SPSP reach image 713)
As shown in FIG. 156 (11), the first image display device 70 displays an SPSP reach image 713. This SPSP reach image 713 is an image indicating that the SPSP reach performance is being executed. The SPSP reach image 713 is, for example, a moving image in which characters appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko game machine 100 fight. In addition, in the SPSP reach image 713, a background different from the stage image 706 and the SP reach image 712 is displayed. In addition, the SPSP reach image 713 is displayed in a layer in front of the variable image 701, the variable base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and is displayed in a layer behind the decorative pattern 700, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc.

(Button operation image 714)
As shown in FIG. 156 (12), a button operation image 714 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The button operation image 714 is an image that is displayed when a promotion effect is being executed. By displaying this button operation image 714, the player can recognize that it is time to operate the effect button 161. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates the effect button 161 is displayed as the button operation image 714. In this embodiment, the button operation image 714 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and if the effect button 161 is operated before the predetermined period has elapsed since the button operation image 714 was displayed, a predetermined effect is executed. That is, in the promotion effect, the effective period for the operation of the effect button 161 is determined as the display period of the button operation image 714.

(First eye-catching image 715)
As shown in FIG. 157 (14), the first image display device 70 displays a first eye-catching image 715. The first eye-catching image 715 is an image showing a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The first eye-catching image 715 is displayed when the SPSP reach effect ends in a variation effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a miss or a revival variation is performed in a normal game state. In addition, when the SP reach effect is executed but not executed, the first eye-catching image 715 may be displayed when the SP reach effect ends. The first eye-catching image 715 is displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In addition, the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the changing image 701, the changing base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times to be reached image 708, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc.

(Adjusted image 716)
As shown in FIG. 158(1), an adjustment image 716 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The adjustment image 716 is an image for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the audio output device 9 and the light intensity of various lamps. When the player operates the cross key 19 while the adjustment image 716 is displayed, the volume and the light intensity of various lamps are adjusted. In the illustrated example, the adjustment image 716 shows an image imitating a speaker, an image imitating a lamp, and an image imitating the cross key 19. The adjustment image 716 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700.

(Menu image 717)
As shown in FIG. 158(1), a menu image 717 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The menu image 717 is an image for displaying a menu screen (not shown) for setting the pachinko game machine 100 on the first image display device 70. In other words, the menu image 717 is an image for notifying the player that the menu screen can be displayed. When the player operates the performance button 161 while the menu image 717 is displayed, the menu screen is displayed on the first image display device 70. In the illustrated example, an image imitating the performance button 161 and the text "display menu with button" are displayed as the menu image 717. In addition, the menu image 717 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700.

(Second emphasized image 718)
As shown in FIG. 160 (15), the first image display device 70 displays the second emphasis image 718. The second emphasis image 718 is an image that emphasizes the performance by the first movable member 73a. The second emphasis image 718 is displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In the illustrated example, the second emphasis image 718 is a radial image centered on the position of the first movable member 73a. The second emphasis image 718 is displayed in a color different from the first emphasis image 711. The color of the second emphasis image 718 may be any color, for example, rainbow color. The second emphasis image 718 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc.

(Opening image 719)
As shown in FIG. 160 (18), an opening image 719 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This opening image 719 is an image for notifying the player of the start of a big win game or a small win game. In the illustrated example, the opening image 719 displays the text "BIG Bonus! Congratulations," which indicates the start of a big win game. This opening image 719 indicates the type of big win (e.g., the total number of rounds) and the game status after the end of the big win game.

(First right-hit image 720)
As shown in FIG. 161 (19), the first right hit image 720 on the first image display device 70 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. The first right hit image 720 is displayed when a big win game is being executed. In the illustrated example, a mark of an arrow pointing to the right side is displayed as the first right hit image 720.

(Promotional image 721)
As shown in Fig. 161 (19), a promotion image 721 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The promotion image 721 is an image for encouraging the player to launch the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. In the illustrated example, the promotion image 721 includes the text "Aim to the right!!", an image imitating the game area 111, and an arrow mark pointing from the left side to the right side in the image imitating the game area 111.

(Round image 722)
As shown in Fig. 161 (20), a round-in-progress image 722 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This round-in-progress image 722 is a moving image of a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The round-in-progress image 722 is displayed during a round in a big win game.

(Round number image 723)
As shown in Fig. 161 (20), a round number image 723 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This round number image 723 is an image for notifying the player of the number of rounds currently being executed in the big win game. In the illustrated example, the text "Round 1" is displayed as the round number image 723.

(Normal time-saving selection image 745)
As shown in FIG. 161 (21), a normal time-saving selection image 745 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The normal time-saving selection image 745 is an image for allowing the player to select a mode of presentation in the normal time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, two modes, "A" and "B", are selectable in the normal time-saving selection image 745. When the normal time-saving selection image 745 is displayed, the player can select one of the modes by operating the presentation button 161. Also, in the illustrated example, the "A" mode is selected.

(Normal time-saving start image 724)
As shown in FIG. 161 (22), a normal time-saving start image 724 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This normal time-saving start image 724 is an image that notifies the start of a normal time-saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the text "Entering A mode!!" is displayed as the normal time-saving start image 724. The "A mode" displayed in the normal time-saving start image 724 is the mode selected in the normal time-saving selection image 745 (see FIG. 161 (21)).

(Card warning image 739)
161 (22), a card warning image 739 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The card warning image 739 is an image for warning a player not to forget to take a card whose remaining value can be identified from a lending device (not shown) that communicates with the pachinko gaming machine 100 to lend game balls. In the illustrated example, the card warning image 739 displays the text "Be careful not to forget to take your card."

(Game warning image 740)
As shown in Fig. 161 (22), a gaming warning image 740 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The gaming warning image 740 is an image for warning the player not to get addicted to the game. In the illustrated example, the gaming warning image 740 displays the text "Pachinko is a game that should be enjoyed in moderation. Be careful not to get addicted."

(Second right-hand shot image 725)
As shown in FIG. 161 (23), a second right-hit image 725 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This second right-hit image 725 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. The second right-hit image 725 is continuously displayed during the normal time-saving game state and during the special time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, a mark of an arrow pointing to the right and the text "right hit" are displayed as the second right-hit image 725.

(Normal time-saving remaining number image 726)
As shown in FIG. 161 (23), the first image display device 70 displays a normal time-saving remaining number image 726. This normal time-saving remaining number image 726 is an image showing the remaining number of times for the special symbol lottery in the normal time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the normal time-saving remaining number image 726 displays the text "100 times", which shows that the remaining number of times for the special symbol lottery in the normal time-saving game state is 100 times.

(Switching image 727)
As shown in FIG. 166 (9), the first image display device 70 displays a switching image 727. The switching image 727 is an image for switching the background displayed on the first image display device 70. The switching image 727 is displayed when the SPSP reach effect ends in a change effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a miss or a revival change is performed in a normal time-saving game state. In addition, when the SP reach effect is executed and the SPSP reach effect is not executed, the switching image 727 may be displayed when the SP reach effect ends. In the illustrated example, an image imitating darkness is shown as the switching image 727. In addition, the switching image 727 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the change image 701, the change base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the normal time-saving remaining count image 726, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc.

(First transition image 728)
As shown in FIG. 166 (12), the first image display device 70 displays a first transition image 728. The first transition image 728 is an image displayed when the stage image 706 is switched. In this embodiment, the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal time-saving game state is switched to the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state via the first transition image 728. Also, the stage image 706 corresponding to the special time-saving game state is switched to the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state via the first transition image 728. In the illustrated example, an image imitating a door is displayed as the first transition image 728. The first transition image 728 is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70. However, the first transition image 728 may be displayed on a part of the first image display device 70 and not on the other part. In addition, the first transition image 728 displayed when the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal time-saving game state is switched to the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state and the first transition image 728 displayed when the stage image 706 corresponding to the special time-saving game state is switched to the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state may have the same display mode or different display modes. The first transition image 728 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the variable base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, the remaining number of times of normal time-saving game image 726, etc., and in a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc.

(Result image 729)
As shown in FIG. 167 (13), the first image display device 70 displays a result image 729. The result image 729 is an image showing the result of a jackpot game. The result image 729 is displayed when the first transition image 728 is displayed in the case where a jackpot game is played. In addition, when multiple jackpot games are played before the first transition image 728 is displayed, the result image 729 shows the cumulative result of the multiple jackpot games. In the illustrated example, the result image 729 displays the text "A mode" indicating that the game was in a normal time-saving game state, the text "TOTAL 3 times" indicating that three jackpot games have been played, and the text "3024 points acquired" according to the prize balls in the jackpot game.

(Left-handed image 730)
As shown in FIG. 168 (20), a left-hit image 730 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The left-hit image 730 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area 111. In the illustrated example, an arrow mark pointing to the left and the text "left hit" are displayed as the left-hit image 730. The left-hit image 730 is displayed when the game state is switched from the normal time-saving game state to the normal game state or when the game state is switched from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state.

(Second eye-catching image 731)
As shown in FIG. 169 (29), the first image display device 70 displays the second eye-catching image 731. The second eye-catching image 731 is an image showing a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and is an image different from the first eye-catching image 715. However, the second eye-catching image 731 may be the same image as the first eye-catching image 715. The second eye-catching image 731 is displayed when switching the stage, that is, when changing the display mode of the stage image 706. More specifically, the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed when the variable performance is started when changing the display mode of the stage image 706. In addition, the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the variable base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and in a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc.

(Countdown image 732)
As shown in FIG. 176 (2), a countdown image 732 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The countdown image 732 is an image that notifies the remaining number of times (number of times of variable performance) of the variable display of the special pattern executed from the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of the number of times of variation) until the special time-saving game state is reached as a countdown. The countdown image 732 is started when the number of times of variable display until the special time-saving game state is reached reaches a specific number. The specific number may be any number, but is, for example, three times. The display content of the countdown image 732 is updated for each variable performance. In the illustrated example, an image of "1" is displayed as the countdown image 732, which indicates that the number of times of variable performance required until the special time-saving game state is reached is one.

(Special time-saving start image 733)
As shown in FIG. 177(7), the first image display device 70 displays a special time-saving start image 733. The special time-saving start image 733 is an image that notifies the start of a special time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the special time-saving start image 733 includes the text "TIME-SHORTENED PLAY START!" and an arrow mark pointing to the right.

(Second transition image 734)
As shown in FIG. 177 (9), the first image display device 70 displays a second transition image 734. The second transition image 734 is an image that is displayed when the stage image 706 is switched. In this embodiment, the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state is switched to the stage image 706 corresponding to the special time-saving game state via the second transition image 734. In the illustrated example, an image imitating a shutter is displayed as the second transition image 734. The second transition image 734 is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70. However, the second transition image 734 may be displayed on a part of the first image display device 70 and not on the other part. The second transition image 734 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the changing image 701, the changing base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times to be reached image 708, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc.

(Special time-saving selection image 735)
As shown in FIG. 177 (10), the first image display device 70 displays a special time-saving selection image 735. The special time-saving selection image 735 is an image for allowing the player to select a mode of presentation in the special time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the special time-saving selection image 735 allows the player to select one of two modes, "a" and "b." When the special time-saving selection image 735 is displayed, the player can select one of the modes by operating the presentation button 161. In the illustrated example, the "a" mode is selected.

(Mode start image 736)
As shown in Fig. 177 (11), a mode start image 736 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The mode start image 736 is an image that notifies the start of the performance of a mode in the special time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the text "Entering Chance Mode!!" is displayed as the mode start image 736.

(Third right-hand shot image 737)
As shown in FIG. 177 (12), a third right hit image 737 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This third right hit image 737 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. The third right hit image 737 is displayed in the first variable presentation in the special time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, a mark of an arrow pointing to the right and the text "right hit" are displayed as the third right hit image 737.

(Special time-saving remaining number image 738)
As shown in FIG. 177 (12), the first image display device 70 displays a special time-saving remaining number image 738. The special time-saving remaining number image 738 is an image that indicates the remaining number of times of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the special time-saving remaining number image 738 displays the text "749" indicating that the remaining number of times of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving game state is 749 times.

(Magnetic error notification image 741)
As shown in Fig. 195 (2), a magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The magnetic error notification image 741 is an image that notifies a magnetic error. When an abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 57a, the magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "Magnet detected" is displayed as the magnetic error notification image 741.

(Recovery image 742)
As shown in FIG. 205(4), the first image display device 70 displays a recovery image 742. The recovery image 742 is an image indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is recovering from a power-off state. In this embodiment, after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the recovery image 742 is displayed before the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, the stage image 706, and the like are displayed. The recovery image 742 is also displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. The recovery image 742 is also displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, and the like. In the illustrated example, the text "Recovering" is displayed as the recovery image 742.

(Zone notification image 743)
As shown in Fig. 215 (2), a zone notification image 743 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This zone notification image 743 is an image that notifies that a zone effect is being executed. Furthermore, the zone notification image 743 displays information for identifying which of a plurality of zone effects is being executed. In the illustrated example, the text "Chance Zone" is displayed as the zone notification image 743 for identifying the zone effect being executed.

(Example of variation 1)
Next, referring to Fig. 146 to Fig. 148, a detailed explanation will be given of the variation presentation (variation presentation example 1) of the decorative pattern 700 performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the first image display device 70, etc. The variation presentation example 1 is a variation presentation example of the decorative pattern 700 based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state. The variation presentation example 1 is also a variation presentation example in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 146(1), the highly decorative decorative pattern 700 is fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 as the previous special pattern is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable base 701P, the reserved base 702P, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, and the stage image 706 are displayed in the first image display device 70. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning the first start port 121, and the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning the second start port. In addition, the execution count image 705 shows the text "99 GAME". In addition, a background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The first stage is a stage corresponding to the normal game state.
In addition, the top lamp 10b in the frame lighting device 10, the board lamp 74b in the board lighting device 74, the movable member lamp 74c in the board lighting device 74, and the button lamp 17c are all in the first mode. The first mode is, for example, a mode of emitting light that lights up in white. Although not shown, the sound output device 9 continues to output background music according to the previous variable performance.

Then, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 146(2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the variable display of the special pattern. In this embodiment, the left decorative pattern 700, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, and the small pattern 704 display the numbers "1" to "9" in order, respectively. That is, in this embodiment, the left decorative pattern 700, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, and the small pattern 704 can change the numbers individually. Note that the left decorative pattern 700, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, and the small pattern 704 may display characters other than numbers, such as English letters. In addition, with the start of the variation, the decorative pattern 700 is displayed to vary slowly downward, while the small pattern 704 is displayed to vary quickly.
In addition, when the decorative pattern 700 or the small pattern 704 is displayed (scrolled) particularly quickly in the drawings, the target pattern is displayed with an arrow (↓) for easy understanding. The decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 that are displayed at high speed are more transparent than when they are not displayed. In addition, the target pattern that is displayed at high speed may be invisible or difficult to be seen by the player, or may be visible to the player. In addition, the operation of the decorative pattern 700 when the change starts, such as the display of the decorative pattern 700 at a low speed, may be referred to as the change start operation below.

In addition, as a result of the game ball entering the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 146 (2), a "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121. At this time, a step-by-step display effect of the reserved image 702 is started. The step-by-step display effect is an effect in which the reserved image 702 is displayed while the display mode of the reserved image 702 is changed step by step. The step-by-step display effect is executed when the display of the reserved image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the first reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above and away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. The step-by-step display effect will be described in detail later.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 146 (2), when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound to notify the player of the entry into the first starting hole 121. At this time, the light emission modes of the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c change to light emission modes corresponding to the variable presentation. More specifically, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all change from the first mode to the second mode. The second mode is a light emission mode in which the lights are lit in blue, and is different from the first mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (3), the decorative pattern 700 moves further downward due to the start of the fluctuation operation. At this time, the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed on the first reserved base 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 146 (2). The display mode of this reserved image 702 is a display mode corresponding to the first stage. The winning sound that notifies the winning of the first starting hole 121 continues to be output until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed.

Although not shown in the example shown in FIG. 146 (3), when the step-by-step display performance is completed, the action performance of the reserved image 702 starts. The action performance is a performance that displays the variable image 701 or the reserved image 702 in an action. The action performance is executed according to the progress of the performance. More specifically, the action performance is executed while the variable performance is being executed. Also, the action performance does not have to be executed when the variable performance is not being executed, and the action performance may be executed even when the variable performance is not being executed. By executing the action performance, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable image 701 or the reserved image 702. The action performance will be described in detail later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (4), the operation at the start of the change ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. The pending image 702 moves to the change base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 121 switches to "0". Although not shown in the figure, while the change performance is being performed, background music corresponding to the change performance being performed is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

In the example shown in Fig. 146 (1) to (4), the left decorative pattern 700, the center decorative pattern 700, and the right decorative pattern 700 are arranged in a left-right direction, and move (scroll) in a vertical direction when displayed in a variable manner, but this is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the left decorative pattern 700, the center decorative pattern 700, and the right decorative pattern 700 may be arranged in a left-right direction and each of them may move (scroll) in a left-right direction.
In addition, the state in which the decorative pattern 700 or the small pattern 704 is displayed by an arrow (↓) in the drawing is not limited to the state in which the target pattern is displayed. For example, the state in which the target pattern is displayed by an arrow (↓) in the drawing may be a state in which the target pattern is hidden and therefore cannot be seen by the player.

146(1) to (4), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 in a state where no reservation has been made for the winning of the first starting hole 121 and the special symbol has not changed, "1" is displayed in the reservation number display 703 of the first starting hole 121 and the reservation image 702 is displayed. Then, the reservation image 702 moves to the display position of the change image 701 and "0" is displayed in the reservation number display 703 of the first starting hole 121.
However, in a state where no reservation has been made for the winning of the first starting hole 121 and the special symbol has not changed, when a game ball wins the first starting hole 121, the reservation number display 703 of the first starting hole 121 may remain at "0". In this case, the reservation image 702 may be displayed, and then the reservation image 702 may move to display the variable image 701, or the variable image 701 may be displayed without displaying the reservation image 702.

Also, although not shown, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122 in a state where no reservation has been made for the winning of the second starting hole 122 and the special symbol has not changed, the reservation number display 703 of the second starting hole 122 may display "1" and the reservation image 702 may be displayed. Then, the reservation image 702 may move to the display position of the change image 701 and the reservation number display 703 of the second starting hole 122 may display "0".
However, in a state where no reservation has been made for the winning of the second start port 122 and the special symbol has not changed, when a game ball wins the second start port 122, the reservation number display 703 of the second start port 122 may remain at "0". In this case, the reservation image 702 may be displayed and then the reservation image 702 may move to display the variable image 701, or the variable image 701 may be displayed without displaying the reservation image 702.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (5), the display of the first front image 707 begins. When the display of the first front image 707 begins, the transparency of the first front image 707 is high, and the decorative pattern 700 displayed on the layer behind the first front image 707 is visible to the player. At this time, the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is also displayed. In the illustrated example, the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 displays the text "400 more."

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (6), the transparency of the first front image 707 is reduced, and the decorative pattern 700 displayed on the layer behind the first front image 707 becomes invisible or difficult to see by the player.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, a "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 147 (7). At this time, a step-by-step display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above and away from the first reserved base 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound.

Next, as shown in Fig. 147(8), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed on the first reserved pedestal 702P in a display size larger than the example shown in Fig. 147(7). Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 is started. The winning sound is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 147(9), the first front image 707 becomes invisible, and the decorative pattern 700, which is being displayed in a rapidly changing manner, becomes visible to the player again.
The display period of the first front image 707 is, for example, three seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(10), the left decorative pattern 700 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it had been fixed until the start of the fluctuation. More specifically, the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops.
In addition, when showing that the decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped in the drawings, in order to make it easier to understand, a mark similar to a double quotation mark is used around the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 700.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (11), as the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121 displays "2". At this time, a step-by-step display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above and away from the second reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the audio output device 9 starts to output a winning sound to notify the player of the entry into the first starting hole 121. This winning sound is a different sound from the winning sound that is output when the reserved image 702 (see FIG. 147 (8)) in the normal display mode is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (12), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a large display size in the expected color display mode on the second reserved pedestal 702P. In the illustrated example, the second reserved image 702 is displayed in blue. More specifically, the second reserved image 702 is displayed in a mode having a circular part made of blue and formed in a circular shape, and an aura part located above the circular part and imitating an aura. In addition, when the stage display performance is completed, the operation performance of the second reserved image 702 is started. In addition, the winning sound that notifies the winning of the first starting hole 121 is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the stage display performance is completed. This predetermined time is, for example, 1 second. In other words, the output time of the winning sound when the blue reserved image 702 is displayed is longer than the output time of the winning sound when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (13), the right decorative pattern 700 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it had been fixed until the start of the fluctuation. More specifically, the number "1" which is the right decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 148(14), the middle decorative pattern 700 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it was fixed and stopped until the start of the change. More specifically, the number "2" which is the middle decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops. Then, after the three decorative patterns 700 temporarily stop, as the special pattern stops changing, the three decorative patterns 700 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 148(15). The combination "421" of the decorative patterns 700 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss. In addition, as the special pattern stops changing, the three small patterns 704 are also fixed and stopped. In other words, all of the small patterns 704 are fixed and stopped without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the combination "421" of the small patterns 704 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 700. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "100 GAME". The execution time of this variable effect is, for example, 8 seconds.

(Step-by-step display of the circular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode)
Next, a step-by-step display effect using the circular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode will be described. Fig. 149 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step display effect using the circular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
The circular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode performs four stages as a stage display performance. When the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, first, as shown in FIG. 149(1), a highly transparent reserved image 702 is displayed in white as the first stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is semicircular. In addition, this reserved image 702 is displayed at a position above and away from the reserved base 702P. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 146(2) and FIG. 147(7).

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(2), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the first stage is displayed as the second stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is circular and has a cross mark. In addition, this reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the first stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the reserved base 702P than the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 149(3), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed as the third stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than the second stage and at a position closer to the reserved base 702P than the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(4), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the third stage is displayed as the fourth stage, i.e., the final stage, of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is displayed with a larger display size than the third stage. Also, this reserved image 702 is displayed at a position closer to the reserved pedestal 702P than the third stage. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 146(3) and FIG. 147(8). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 146(2) and FIG. 147(7) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the stage display performance is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the stage display performance is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 146(3) and FIG. 147(9) is displayed.

Hereinafter, the display mode of reserved image 702 in the final stage may be referred to as the completed display mode. In particular, the display size of reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be referred to as the completed display size. Furthermore, the form of reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be referred to as the completed form. Furthermore, the transparency of reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be referred to as the completed transparency. Furthermore, the display position of reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be referred to as the completed display position.
Moreover, the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first to third stages, i.e., not the final stage, may be referred to as an incomplete display mode hereinafter. In particular, the display size of the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be referred to as an incomplete display size. Furthermore, the form of the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be referred to as an incomplete form. Furthermore, the transparency of the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be referred to as an incomplete transparency. Furthermore, the operation mode of the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be referred to as an incomplete operation mode. Furthermore, the display position of the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be referred to as an incomplete display position.
In this embodiment, the time from when the step-by-step display performance is started to when the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed, i.e., the execution time of the step-by-step display performance using the reserved image 702 in the circular normal display mode, is 0.2 seconds.

When the stepwise display performance is completed, as shown in FIG. 149 (5), the motion performance of the reserved image 702 begins. The circular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically rotates in a clockwise direction as a motion performance. The rotation period in this motion performance is, for example, 2.0 seconds.

As described above, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a stepwise display performance while the display size is gradually changed. More specifically, the reserved image 702 is displayed so that the display size is gradually increased. Also, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a stepwise display performance while the display position is gradually changed. More specifically, the reserved image 702 is displayed so that it gradually moves toward the reserved pedestal 702P (completed display position). Also, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a stepwise display performance while the transparency is gradually changed. More specifically, the reserved image 702 is displayed so that the transparency is gradually decreased. Also, the reserved image 702 is displayed so that the form is gradually changed. More specifically, the reserved image 702 is displayed so that the form is gradually approaching the completed form.
When the reserved image 702 is displayed, if the reserved image 702 is switched from a non-display state to a completed display state without a step-by-step display effect, the player may feel uncomfortable with the display of the reserved image 702. Therefore, in this embodiment, the reserved image 702 is displayed step by step by a step-by-step display effect, thereby suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, the step-by-step display effect allows the player to enjoy the change in the display state of the reserved image 702.

(Step-by-step display of the blue reserved image 702)
Next, a description will be given of a step-by-step display effect using the blue reserved image 702. FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step display effect using the blue reserved image 702.
The blue reserved image 702 performs four stages of stage display performance. When the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, first, as shown in FIG. 150 (1), a highly transparent reserved image 702 is displayed in white as the first stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is semicircular. In addition, this reserved image 702 is displayed at a position above and away from the reserved base 702P. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 147 (11). In addition, the display mode (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) of the blue reserved image 702 in the first stage is the same display mode as the display mode of the first stage in the stage display performance by the circular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(2), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the first stage is displayed in blue as the second stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is displayed in a manner having a circular portion 702a made of blue and formed in a circular shape, and an aura portion 702b located on top of the circular portion 702a and imitating an aura. In addition, this reserved image 702 has a display size larger than that of the first stage, and is displayed in a position closer to the reserved base 702P than that of the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 150(3), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed as the third stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than the second stage and at a position closer to the reserved base 702P than the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(4), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the third stage is displayed as the fourth stage, i.e., the final stage, of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is displayed with a display size larger than that of the third stage. Also, this reserved image 702 is displayed at a position closer to the reserved pedestal 702P than that of the third stage. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 147(12). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 147(11) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the stage display performance is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the stage display performance is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 147(12) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from when the step-by-step display performance starts to when the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed, that is, the execution time of the step-by-step display performance by the blue reserved image 702, is 0.3 seconds. In other words, the execution time of the step-by-step display performance by the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is longer than the execution time of the step-by-step display performance by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.

Furthermore, when the step-by-step display performance is completed, the motion performance of the pending image 702 begins, as shown in FIG. 150 (5). As a motion performance, the blue circular pending image 702 periodically rotates in a clockwise direction at its circular portion 702a, and periodically swings its aura portion 702b from side to side. The rotation period in this motion performance is, for example, 2.0 seconds. The swing period in this motion performance is, for example, 1.5 seconds.

As described above, the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode have the same display mode in the first stage of the step-by-step display presentation. In this case, when the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the step-by-step display presentation is displayed, the player cannot distinguish whether the displayed reserved image 702 is in the normal display mode or the expected color display mode. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to which display mode the reserved image 702 will be displayed in.
It has been described that the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode have the same display mode in the first stage of the stage display performance, but this is not limited to the above. The reserved image 702 in the normal display mode and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode may have the same display mode in at least one of the display color, shape, display size, transparency, and display position in the first stage, while the other display modes may be different. Even in this case, when the reserved image 702 in the first stage is displayed, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the displayed reserved image 702 is in the normal display mode or the expected color display mode. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to which display mode the reserved image 702 will be displayed in.

In addition, in the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) in the expected color display mode, the display mode other than the display color (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) may be the same regardless of the display color, or may be different for each display color. In addition, in the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) in the expected color display mode, the display mode other than the display color (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) is the same for specific multiple colors (e.g., blue and red), and the display mode other than the display color (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) for a special color (e.g., rainbow color) may also be different from the specific multiple colors.
In addition, in the pending image 702 (variable image 701) in the expected color display mode, when the display mode other than the display color (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) differs depending on the display color, the display mode (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) of each stage in the step-by-step display performance may also be different. In addition, in the pending image 702 (variable image 701) in the expected color display mode, when the display mode other than the display color (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) is the same regardless of the display color, the display mode (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) of each stage in the step-by-step display performance may also be the same.

In addition, the action mode in the action presentation by the pending image 702 (variable image 701) in the expected color display mode may be the same regardless of the display color, or may be different for each display color. In addition, in the pending image 702 (variable image 701) in the expected color display mode, the action mode in the action presentation may be the same for certain multiple colors (e.g., blue and red), and the action mode in the action presentation for a special color (e.g., rainbow) may be different from the certain multiple colors.

(Example of variation 2)
FIG. 151 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 2) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 151. The variable performance example 2 is a variable performance example of the decorative pattern 700 based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state. The variable performance example 2 is also a variable performance example in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed. In the following explanation, the differences from the above variable performance example 1 will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as the variable performance example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 151(1), as the previous special symbol changes, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped by the performance control unit 300 in the first image display device 70. At this time, four reserved images 702, a number of executions image 705, and a stage image 706 are displayed. At this time, the number of executions display 703 of the first starting gate 121 displays "4". The number of executions image 705 displays the text "49 GAME". The background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second state. Although not shown, the sound output device 9 continues to output BGM corresponding to the previous change performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (2), as the display of the next special pattern begins to change, the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 begin to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 in the first starting port 121 switches to "3". Also, at this time, the second reserved image 702, the third reserved image 702, and the fourth reserved image 702 move toward the first reserved base 702P, the second reserved base 702P, and the third reserved base 702P, respectively. Also, the first reserved image 702 moves toward the variable base 701P and expands, causing the variable image 701 to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (3), the display of the second front image 709 begins. When the display of the second front image 709 begins, the transparency of the second front image 709 is high, and the decorative pattern 700 displayed on the layer behind the second front image 709 is visible to the player.

Next, as shown in Fig. 151 (4), the transparency of the second front image 709 is reduced, and the decorative pattern 700 displayed on the layer behind the second front image 709 becomes difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, a clear negation image 744 and a remaining number of times reached image 708 are displayed. The remaining number of times reached image 708 shows the text "200 more".
Next, as shown in FIG. 151(5), the second front image 709 becomes non-displayed, and the decorative pattern 700, which is being displayed in a rapidly changing manner, becomes visible to the player again.
The display period of the second front image 709 is, for example, two seconds.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "853", are displayed together and fixed as shown in Fig. 151 (6). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "50 GAMES".
The execution time of this variable effect is, for example, 4 seconds.

(Example of variation 3)
152 and 153 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 3) of the variation performance of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 152. Variable performance example 3 is a variation performance example of the decorative pattern 700 based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state. Also, variable performance example 3 is a variation performance example in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a reach performance is executed. Also, in the following explanation, differences from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 152(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the performance control unit 300 as the variation of the previous special pattern ends. At this time, "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 121. The execution number image 705 shows the text "200 GAMES". The remaining number of times reached image 708 shows the text "300 more". A background corresponding to the second stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The second stage is a stage corresponding to a normal game state and is different from the first stage.
In addition, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the first state. Although not shown, the sound output device 9 continues to output background music corresponding to the previous variable performance.

Next, when the game ball enters the first start hole 121, as shown in FIG. 152 (2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the small pattern 704 changes and is displayed at high speed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121 displays "1". At this time, the reserved image 702 starts to be displayed in a step-by-step manner. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserved base 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound as the game ball enters the first start hole 121. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the first state to the second state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (3), the operation at the start of the fluctuation progresses. At this time, the stage display performance is completed, and a star-shaped reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 152 (2). The display mode of this reserved image 702 is a display mode corresponding to the second stage. The winning sound is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed. Although not shown in the figure, when the stage display performance is completed, the operation performance of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (4), the operation at the start of the change ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. The pending image 702 moves to the change base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 121 switches to "0". Although not shown in the figure, while the change performance is being performed, background music corresponding to the change performance being performed is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(5), the left decorative pattern 700, "4", temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 152(6), the right decorative pattern 700 "4" temporarily stops, and the reach performance begins.
Next, as shown in FIG. 153(7), the middle decorative pattern 700 "3" temporarily stops.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three decorative symbols 700 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 153(8). The combination of decorative symbols 700 "434" is an example of a combination when the special symbol lottery result is a miss. Also, as the special symbols stop varying, the small symbols 704 "434" are also fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "201 GAME". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is updated to "299 more".

(Step-by-step display of the star-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode)
Next, a step-by-step display effect using the star-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode will be described. Fig. 154 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step display effect using the star-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
The reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is a star-shaped reserved image that performs a four-stage display performance. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, a highly transparent reserved image 702 is displayed in white as the first stage of the stage display performance, as shown in FIG. 154 (1). This reserved image 702 is a star-shaped image with the top part missing. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 152 (2).

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(2), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the first stage is displayed as the second stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is star-shaped. In addition, this reserved image 702 is displayed with a larger display size than the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 154(3), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed as the third stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than the second stage. Also, in the third stage, an action display using the reserved image 702 is performed. More specifically, in the third stage, an action display in which the reserved image 702 emits light is performed. In the illustrated example, an image simulating light is displayed moving from the center of the reserved image 702 toward the periphery of the reserved image 702.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(4), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the third stage is displayed as the fourth stage, i.e., the final stage, of the staged display performance. This reserved image 702 is displayed with a display size larger than that of the third stage. Note that the action display by the reserved image 702 performed in the third stage of the staged display performance is not performed in the final stage. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the staged display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 152(3). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 152(2) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the staged display performance is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the staged display performance is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 152(3) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from when the step-by-step display performance starts until the reserved image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode, i.e., the execution time of the step-by-step display performance by the reserved image 702 in the star-shaped normal display mode, is 0.2 seconds. In other words, the execution time of the step-by-step display performance by the reserved image 702 in the star-shaped normal display mode is the same as the execution time of the step-by-step display performance by the reserved image 702 in the circular normal display mode.

When the stepwise display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 starts, as shown in FIG. 154 (5). The star-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically rotates counterclockwise as a motion performance. The rotation period in this motion performance is, for example, 2.0 seconds.

(Example of variation 4)
155 to 157 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 4) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Figs. 155 to 157. The variable performance example 4 is a variable performance example of the decorative pattern 700 based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state. Also, the variable performance example 4 is a variable performance example in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss, and the reach performance, the SP reach performance, and the SPSP reach performance are executed. Also, in the following explanation, the points that differ from each of the above variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 155 (1), a customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Also, "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting gate 121. Also, at this time, the fluctuation of the special pattern has stopped, and no fluctuation performance is being performed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the third state. The third state is a state in which they are turned off. Also, at this time, no sound is being output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the game ball enters the first start gate 121, as shown in FIG. 155(2), the customer waiting image 710 becomes invisible as the display of the special pattern starts to change. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 become easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change. At this time, the start of the change of the decorative pattern 700 starts, and the small pattern 704 is displayed to change at high speed. Also, at this time, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start gate 121. Also, the execution count image 705 shows the text "250 GAMES", and the remaining number of times reached image 708 shows the text "250 more". Also, as the stage image 706, a background corresponding to the second stage is displayed. At this time, the staged display of the reserved image 702 begins. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the sound output device 9 begins to output a winning sound. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the third mode to the second mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (3), the operation at the start of the fluctuation progresses. At this time, the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved base 702P. The winning sound is also output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed. Although not shown in the figure, when the stage display performance is completed, the operation performance of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (4), the operation at the start of the change ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. In addition, the pending image 702 moves to the change base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 121 switches to "0". Although not shown in the figure, while the change performance is being performed, background music corresponding to the change performance being performed is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the game ball enters the first start hole 121, as shown in FIG. 155 (5), the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121 displays "1". At this time, the staged display performance of the reserved image 702 begins. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first start hole 121, the sound output device 9 begins to output a winning sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (6), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. The winning sound is also output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed. Although not shown in the figure, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156 (7), the left decorative pattern 700, "6", is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 156 (8), the right decorative pattern 700 "6" temporarily stops, and the reach performance begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156 (9), a development performance is executed. The development performance is a performance that notifies the player that the reach performance will progress to the SP reach performance. In the development performance, the movable performance is executed and the first emphasis image 711 is displayed. The movable performance is a performance that operates the first movable member 73a. In the illustrated example, as the movable performance, the first movable member 73a moves to a position where it overlaps with the first image display device 70. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 become difficult or impossible to see for the player. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be easily visible for the player. Also, when the development performance is executed, the state of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c is switched. More specifically, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second state to the fourth state. The fourth state is a light emission state in which the lamps are lit in green, and is different from any of the first to third states.
In addition, when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 while the development performance is being executed, the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121 switches to "2". Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 continues to be invisible to the player. In addition, at this time, the winning sound accompanying the winning in the first start hole 121 is not output.

Next, the development performance and the movable performance are finished, and the first movable member 73a is retreated to a position where it does not overlap with the first image display device 70, and then, as shown in FIG. 156 (10), the SP reach performance is executed. During the execution of the SP reach performance, the SP reach image 712 is displayed. At this time, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, and the reached remaining count image 708 are in a state where they are difficult or impossible to see for the player. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be in a state where they are easy to see for the player. Also, at this time, the first image display device 70 displays an image of the background according to the SP reach performance. Also, when the SP reach performance is executed, the left and right decorative patterns 700 are displayed in a smaller display size and in a less decorative display mode. Also, the left and right decorative patterns 700 are displayed on the upper side of the first image display device 70. In the illustrated example, the left decorative pattern 700 is displayed in the upper left corner of the first image display device 70, and the right decorative pattern 700 is displayed in the upper right corner of the first image display device 70. The display positions of the left and right decorative patterns 700 when the SP reach performance is being performed are not limited to the illustrated example. When the SP reach performance is being performed, the left and right decorative patterns 700 may be displayed in any position on the first image display device 70 as long as they are different from the display positions (see FIG. 156 (8)) before the execution of the SP reach performance.
In addition, when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 while the SP reach performance is being executed, the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121 switches to "3." In addition, a winning sound accompanying the winning of the first start hole 121 is output from the audio output device 9. Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 continues to be invisible to the player.

Next, as shown in Fig. 156 (11), the SPSP reach performance is executed. During the execution of the SPSP reach performance, the SPSP reach image 713 is displayed. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays a background image corresponding to the SPSP reach performance.
In addition, when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 while the SPSP reach performance is being executed, the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121 switches to "4". Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 continues to be invisible to the player. In addition, the winning sound accompanying the winning in the first start hole 121 is not output.
In addition, the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness displayed when the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is being executed may be displayed on a layer different from the decorative pattern 700 with high decorativeness (see FIG. 156 (8)). For example, the decorative pattern 700 with high decorativeness may be displayed on a layer behind the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702, whereas the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness may be displayed on a layer in front of the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156 (12), a promotion effect is executed and a button operation image 714 is displayed.
When the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, the number "5" of the center decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped as shown in Fig. 157 (13). At this time, the center decorative pattern 700 is displayed in a less decorative display mode and in a larger display size than the decorative patterns 700 on the left and right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (14), the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 become difficult or impossible for the player to see. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be easily visible to the player.
The time from when the variable effect starts to when the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed is, for example, 60 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (15), the display area of the first eye-catching image 715 in the first image display device 70 becomes smaller. More specifically, the display area of the first eye-catching image 715 becomes smaller by sliding the first eye-catching image 715 to the right. At this time, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the first eye-catching image 715 is not displayed, the third reserved image 702, the fourth reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 become easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the provisional stop display of the highly decorative left decorative pattern 700 becomes easily visible to the player. Also, the part of the second reserved image 702 that does not overlap with the first eye-catching image 715 becomes visible or easily visible to the player. Also, the part of the stage image 706 that does not overlap with the first eye-catching image 715 becomes easily visible to the player. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, and the first reserved image 702 continue to be in a state where they are difficult or impossible to see for the player. In addition, the part of the stage image 706 that overlaps with the first eye-catching image 715 continues to be in a state where they are difficult or impossible to see for the player. In addition, the part of the second reserved image 702 that overlaps with the first eye-catching image 715 continues to be in a state where they are difficult or impossible to see for the player. Also, at this time, the action presentation of the fourth reserved image 702, the third reserved image 702, and the second reserved image 702 is being executed, and the action display of the fourth reserved image 702, the third reserved image 702, and the second reserved image 702 becomes visible or easily visible for the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (16), the first eye-catching image 715 is not displayed. At this time, the provisional stop display of the three highly decorative decorative patterns 700 is easily visible to the player. Also, the variable image 701 and the first reserved image 702 are easily visible to the player. Furthermore, the entire stage image 706 and the entire second reserved image 702 are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, four reserved images 702 in the normal display mode are displayed in the completed display mode. That is, for the second reserved image 702, the third reserved image 702, and the fourth reserved image 702, the reserved images 702 in the completed display mode are displayed without the stage display performance being visible to the player.
The display time of the first eye-catching image 715 is, for example, 2.5 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (17), three decorative symbols 700 and small symbols 704 are fixed and stopped with the stop of the special symbol variation. The combination "656" of the decorative symbols 700 and small symbols 704 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a miss. Also, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "251 GAMES", and the display content of the remaining number of times reached image 708 is updated to "249 left". Also, at this time, the variable image 701 is not displayed. The execution time of this variable performance is, for example, 70 seconds.
In this variation performance, the time from when the left decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops to when the right decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops is, for example, 5 seconds. The time from when the right decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops to when the center decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops is, for example, 20 seconds.
The timing of updating the display contents when the execution count image 705 is redisplayed may be the same as the timing of updating the display contents when the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is redisplayed. In this case, both the execution count image 705 and the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 may be redisplayed with the updated display contents or with the display contents before the update.

As described above, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 during the execution of a development effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, etc., the reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode will not be visible to the player, but the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode will become visible.
In this way, the change in display mode of the reserved image 702 from the incomplete display mode is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 is prevented from drawing excessive attention from the player, and the player can be made to focus on the image unique to the performance being executed.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 during the execution of the notification effect, a winning sound is not output to notify the player of the entry into the first start hole 121. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by the entry into the first start hole 121 and losing attention to the notification effect.
In addition, sound effects for the notification performance may be output while the notification performance is being executed.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 while the SP reach performance is being executed, a winning sound is output to notify the player of the entry into the first start hole 121, whereas if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 while the SPSP reach performance is being executed, no winning sound is output.
This allows the priority between making the player aware of the winning of the first starting hole 121 and making the player pay attention to the presentation being executed when the player wins to be switched according to the progress of the presentation, thereby realizing a sharp presentation.

In addition, in both cases where a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while the notification performance is being executed and while the SP reach performance is being executed, a winning sound is output to notify of the entry into the first starting hole 121, and it is also possible to configure so that no winning sound is output when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while the SPSP reach performance is being executed.
In addition, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while the notification effect is being executed, a winning sound is output to notify of the entry into the first starting hole 121, and in either case, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while the SP reach effect is being executed or the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the winning sound may not be output.

In addition, as the display area of the first eye-catching image 715 gradually becomes smaller over time, some of the multiple reserved images 702 become visible or easily visible to the player, while the other parts become difficult or invisible to the player. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed across the entire surface of the first image display device 70 and then switched to a state in which the first eye-catching image 715 is hidden, it is possible to quickly make the player aware that the hidden reserved images 702 are still there, while minimizing the awkward feeling of the stage image 706 and the like being displayed again.

Also, when the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70, a part of the one reserved image 702 is visible to the player, and another part of the one reserved image 702 is difficult or impossible to see by the player (see FIG. 157 (15)). In this state, the action presentation by the one reserved image 702 is being executed.
In this case, even if only a part of the reserved image 702 is visible to the player, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the existence of the reserved image 702. Therefore, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the hidden reserved image 702 is still there.

In the case of a reach variation, after the middle decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops and the reach is lost, a first performance is performed in which a first predetermined image (first eye-catching image 715) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 appears again. In the case of a loss variation, a second predetermined image (first front image 707, second front image 709) appears during the scroll variation of the decorative pattern 700, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 appears again to notify a loss. The variation time is longer when the first performance is performed than when the second performance is performed.
In this case, in the first performance, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden by the display of the first predetermined image after the decorative pattern 700 stops in a losing mode, so that the player can have hope that the temporary loss may develop into some kind of performance. Also, in the second performance, the decorative pattern 700 is suddenly hidden during the variable display, which gives an element of surprise and makes the player excited. Although a common event of hiding the decorative pattern 700 occurs, the predetermined image appears from a different state. This makes it possible to diversify the variations in the performance and improve the interest.

Moreover, the small symbol 704 continues to be displayed while the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image are being displayed.
In this case, even when the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, the small pattern 704 is displayed, so that the changing state of the special pattern can be confirmed.

Furthermore, the display time of the first predetermined image is different from the display time of the second predetermined image. In particular, the display time of the second predetermined image is longer than the display time of the first predetermined image (second foreground image 709).
In this case, the transition from a missed reach to the next performance can be made smoother by shortening the display time of the first predetermined image, and the player can be made to have high expectations by lengthening the display time of the second predetermined image.

In addition, a reserved image 702 (variable image 701) can be displayed, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is hidden while the first specified image is being displayed, and is redisplayed together with the appearance of the decorative pattern 700, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is displayed (not hidden) while the second specified image is being displayed.
In this case, since neither the decorative pattern 700 nor the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is displayed while the first predetermined image is being displayed, the player can be more conscious of the first predetermined image. Since the decorative pattern 700 is not displayed while the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is displayed while the second predetermined image is being displayed, the player can be made aware of the current state (whether it is being varied, how many reserved images are present, etc.).

In addition, a specific performance (such as a SP reach performance) with a high expectation is executed before the first predetermined image is displayed, and no specific performance is executed before the second predetermined image is displayed.
In this case, the player's expectations can be increased by the special effects, and even if a special effect shows a loss, the player's expectations can be maintained by the appearance of the first predetermined image. On the other hand, the second predetermined image is displayed without going through the special effects, so that the player's expectations can be increased immediately.

When the first performance is performed, the background image is switched before and after the first predetermined image is displayed (in the order of background in the SP reach performance, first predetermined image, first stage or second stage). When the second performance is performed, the background image is not changed before and after the second predetermined image is displayed (in the order of first stage or second stage, second predetermined image, first stage or second stage).
In this case, when the first performance is performed, the first predetermined image is displayed when switching from the specific background to the normal background, so that the background transition can be made smoothly, whereas in the case of the second performance, the normal background is suddenly switched to the second predetermined image, so that the player's expectations can be heightened.

In addition, depending on the judgment result, it is possible to stop the multiple decorative patterns 700 in a predetermined order, and when the second performance (display of the second front image 709) is executed, the multiple decorative patterns 700 are not stopped in the predetermined order, and when the first performance is executed, the multiple decorative patterns 700 are stopped in a predetermined order, and the time from when the first pattern (left decorative pattern 700) stops to when the second pattern (right decorative pattern 700) stops is different from the time from when the second pattern (right decorative pattern 700) stops to when the third pattern (middle decorative pattern 700) stops.
In this case, when the first performance is executed, the decorative symbols 700 stop in order, and there is a time until the third decorative symbol 700 stops, so that the player can be excited. In addition, even if the third decorative symbol 700 stops, the first predetermined image is displayed, so that the player's disappointment can be reduced, and the possibility of development to further performance can be left. In addition, when the second performance is executed, the decorative symbols 700 do not stop in order, so that the performance can be unexpected, and the interest can be improved.

Furthermore, the appearance of the decorative pattern 700 is different before and after the first predetermined image appears, and the appearance of the decorative pattern 700 is the same before and after the second predetermined image appears.
In this case, when the first performance is performed, the appearance of the decorative pattern 700 changes via the first predetermined image, so that it is possible to smoothly change the appearance of the decorative pattern 700. Also, when the second performance is performed, although there is no change in the appearance of the decorative pattern 700 before and after the display of the second predetermined image, the second predetermined image suddenly appears, so that it is possible to provide an unexpected performance and improve interest.

In addition, in the variable performance example 4, it has been explained that the variable image 701 is displayed after the SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance end (see FIG. 157 (16)), but this is not limited to this. The variable image 701 does not have to be displayed after the SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance end.

(Example of variation 5)
158 to 161 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable presentation example 5) of the variable presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Figs. 158 to 161. Variable presentation example 5 is a variable presentation example of the decorative pattern 700 based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state. Also, variable presentation example 5 is a variable presentation example in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. Also, in the following explanation, differences from the above variable presentation examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable presentation examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 158(1), an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed. Also, "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting gate 121. Also, at this time, the special symbol is displayed as stopped, and no variable performance is being performed. Also, a background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as a stage image 706. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the fifth mode. The fifth mode is a light emission mode in which the lights are lit in yellow, and is a mode different from any of the first to fifth modes. Also, at this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 158 (2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the special pattern change display. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change and the small pattern 704 changes and displays at high speed. At this time, the winning light-emitting performance is executed. In the winning light-emitting performance, a notification sound of the winning light-emitting performance is output from the audio output device 9, which is different from the winning sound output when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode or the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed. The notification sound of the winning light-emitting performance can also be regarded as a winning sound that notifies the winning of the first starting hole 121. In addition, in the winning light-emitting performance, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become the sixth mode. The sixth mode is a mode in which the red light periodically flashes. The blinking period is, for example, 0.5 seconds. At this time, the hold number display 703 of the first starting port 121 displays "1." At this time, the staged display presentation of the hold image 702 begins. In the illustrated example, the hold image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first hold pedestal 702P.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (3), the operation at the start of the fluctuation progresses. At this time, the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed in a completed display mode on the first reserved base 702P. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed in blue. Although not illustrated, when the stage display performance is completed, the operation performance of the first reserved image 702 begins. The notification sound for the winning light-emitting performance is no longer output after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stage display performance is completed. This predetermined time is, for example, two seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (4), the operation at the start of the change ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. The pending image 702 moves to the change base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 121 switches to "0". Although not shown in the figure, while the change performance is being performed, background music corresponding to the change performance being performed is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the game ball enters the first start hole 121, as shown in FIG. 158 (5), the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121 displays "1". At this time, the staged display performance of the reserved image 702 also begins. In the example shown, the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first reserved base 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first start hole 121, the sound output device 9 begins to output a winning sound.

Next, when the stage display performance by the first reserved image 702 is completed and the game ball enters the first start hole 121, as shown in FIG. 158 (6), "2" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121. At this time, the stage display performance of the second reserved image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the second reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first start hole 121, the output of the winning sound from the sound output device 9 is started. More specifically, before the output of the winning sound corresponding to the first reserved image 702 is completed, the output of the winning sound corresponding to the second reserved image 702 is started. In addition, the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, although not illustrated, when the stage display performance is completed, the action performance of the first reserved image 702 is started.

If the output of the current winning sound starts before the output of the previous winning sound ends, the output of the previous winning sound may be stopped when the output of the current winning sound starts. Also, even if the output of the current winning sound starts before the output of the previous winning sound ends, the previous winning sound may be output until the end. In other words, the previous winning sound and the current winning sound may be output simultaneously. Also, if the output of the winning sound notifying the current winning start starts before the output of the previous winning sound ends, the current winning sound may not be output until the output of the previous winning sound ends.

Next, when the stage display performance of the second reserved image 702 is completed and the game ball enters the first start hole 121, as shown in FIG. 159 (7), "3" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121. At this time, the stage display performance of the third reserved image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the third reserved base 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first start hole 121, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound. In addition, the reserved image 702 in the normal game state is displayed in a completed display mode on the second reserved base 702P. In addition, although not illustrated, when the stage display performance is completed, the action performance of the second reserved image 702 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (8), the stage display performance of the third reserved image 702 is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the third reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the action performance of the third reserved image 702 begins. The winning sound continues to be output until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(9), the left decorative pattern 700, "4", temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (10), the right decorative pattern 700 "4" temporarily stops, and the reach performance begins.
Next, as shown in Fig. 159 (11), the development performance is executed. In the development performance, the movable performance is executed and the first emphasized image 711 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the sixth state to the fourth state.

Next, as shown in Fig. 159 (12), the SP reach effect is executed. During the execution of the SP reach effect, the SP reach image 712 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become the second mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 160 (13), the SPSP reach effect is executed. During the execution of the SPSP reach effect, the SPSP reach image 713 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (14), a promotion effect is executed and a button operation image 714 is displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, a jackpot notification effect is executed as shown in FIG. 160 (15). The jackpot notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. In the jackpot effect, a moving effect is executed and a second emphasis image 718 is displayed. In the illustrated example, as a moving effect, the first movable member 73a moves to a position overlapping with the first image display device 70. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 become difficult or impossible to see for the player. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be easily visible to the player. In addition, when the big win notification performance is executed, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c switch from the second mode to the seventh mode. The seventh mode is a light emission mode in which the lights are turned on in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple over time. In other words, the seventh mode is a light emission mode in which the lighting colors are switched to seven colors over time to light up in rainbow colors. The seventh mode can also be considered as a mode that suggests or notifies that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up in red, the board lamp 74b lights up in orange, the movable member lamp 74c lights up in yellow, and the button lamp 17c lights up in green. In addition, when the big win notification performance is executed, the sound effect of the big win notification performance is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the big win notification performance ends and the second emphasis image 718 is not displayed, the decoration pattern 700 of the double number is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 160 (16). In the illustrated example, the decoration pattern 700 is displayed in a combination of "444". At this time, the decoration pattern 700 is larger in display size than the display mode during the execution of the SPSP reach performance (see FIG. 160 (13)). On the other hand, the small pattern 704 continues to be in a variable display state. At this time, the execution count image 705 and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are redisplayed. On the other hand, the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 continue to be in a state that is difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c continue to be in the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up in orange, the board lamp 74b lights up in yellow, the movable member lamp 74c lights up in green, and the button lamp 17c lights up in blue. At this time, the first image display device 70 again displays a background corresponding to the SPSP reach performance.
In addition, the background of the first image display device 70 when the repeating number decorative pattern 700 is displayed may be a background corresponding to the stage currently being stayed in, i.e., a background corresponding to the first stage.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121 displays "4." Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 remains in a state where it is difficult or impossible for the player to see. In addition, no winning sound is output.

Then, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 700 is fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 160 (17). Also, "444" is fixed and stopped as the small symbol 704. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 matches the combination of "444". Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "351 GAMES". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of times reached image 708 is updated to "149 left". Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c continue to be in the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up yellow, the board lamp 74b lights up green, the movable member lamp 74c lights up blue, and the button lamp 17c lights up in indigo blue.

Next, as shown in Fig. 160 (18), an opening image 719 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all change from the seventh state to the second state. Although not shown, during the execution of the big win game, background music according to the progress of the big win game is output from the sound output device 9.
161(19), a first right hit image 720 and a promotion image 721 are displayed. The display time of the promotion image 721 is, for example, five seconds.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the promotion image 721, a round in progress image 722 and a round number image 723 are displayed, as shown in Fig. 161 (20). In the illustrated example, the round number image 723 displays the text "Round 1".
Next, when the final round is over, as shown in Fig. 161 (21), a normal time-saving selection image 745 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is set to the "A" mode in the normal time-saving selection image 745.
Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal time-saving selection image 745 was displayed, the normal time-saving start image 724 is displayed as shown in Fig. 161 (22). At this time, a card warning image 739 and a game warning image 740 are also displayed.

Next, when the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to the normal time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 161 (23), the first image display device 70 displays the less decorative decorative pattern 700, "444". The decorative pattern 700 displayed at this time corresponds to the sequence of numbers that was finally displayed before the big win game was executed, that is, when the big win was won. The small pattern 704 is also displayed as the sequence of numbers "444" like the decorative pattern 700. At this time, a background corresponding to the third stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The third stage is a stage corresponding to the normal time-saving game state. At this time, the second right-hit image 725 and the normal time-saving remaining number image 726 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "100 times" indicating the remaining number of times of the special pattern lottery in the normal time-saving game state is displayed as the normal time-saving remaining number image 726. Additionally, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 shows "4," and the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 shows "0." Note that neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. Note that the time from when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is displayed (see FIG. 160 (16)) until the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state is, for example, 150 seconds.

As described above, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is not visible to the player. In this case, by making the change in display mode of the reserved image 702 from the incomplete display mode difficult or impossible for the player to see, it is possible to prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the reserved image 702 while the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, and to allow the player to focus on the fact that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot.
In addition, if the game ball enters the first start hole 121 while the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, a winning sound is not output. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by the game ball entering the first start hole 121 and losing track of the fact that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
However, even if the game ball enters the first start hole 121 when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, the stage display performance may be executed and the reserved image 702 of each stage may be visible or easily visible to the player. Also, even if the game ball enters the first start hole 121 when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, a winning sound may be output.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute suggestive effects (display of execution count image 705, display of remaining number of times reached image 708, display of countdown image 732 described later) that suggest a time when a special time-saving game state may occur, and during a specified miss variation effect (miss without reach), there is an execution period during which the suggestive effect is executed, but there is no non-execution period during which the suggestive effect is not executed, and during a jackpot variation effect, there is an execution period during which the suggestive effect is executed (before the SP reach effect) and a non-execution period during which the suggestive effect is not executed (during the SP reach effect, during the SPSP reach effect). Therefore, while the suggestive effect makes the player hope that a special time-saving game state will occur, the non-execution period during the jackpot variation effect during which the suggestive effect is not executed allows the player to focus their attention on the variation effect, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to execute suggestive effects (display of the execution count image 705, display of the remaining number of times reached image 708, display of the countdown image 732 described later) that suggest a time when a special time-saving game state may occur, and during the first reach variation effect (reach effect), there is an execution period during which the suggestive effect is executed, but there is no non-execution period during which the suggestive effect is not executed, and during the second reach variation effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), which has a higher expectation than the first reach variation effect, there is an execution period during which the suggestive effect is executed (before the SP reach effect) and a non-execution period during which the suggestive effect is not executed (during the SP effect, during the SPSP reach effect). Therefore, while the suggestive effect makes the player expect that a special time-saving game state will occur, the non-execution period during the second reach variation effect, which has a higher expectation than the first reach variation effect, allows the player to focus on the variation effect, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, during a jackpot fluctuation performance in which a suggestive performance is executed, multiple periods during which the suggestive performance is not executed can occur (during a development performance, during an SPSP reach performance, etc.). In addition, during a jackpot fluctuation performance in which a suggestive performance is executed, multiple periods during which the suggestive performance is executed can occur (before an SP reach performance, after the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 700 of the double numbers, etc.).

In addition, during a specific reach with a miss variation performance in which a suggestive performance is executed, multiple periods in which the suggestive performance is not executed can occur (during a development performance, during an SPSP reach, etc.).In addition, during a specific reach with a miss variation performance in which a suggestive performance is executed, multiple periods in which the suggestive performance is executed can occur (before a reach performance, after the three decorative patterns 700 temporarily stop, etc.).

In addition, even during the execution of the development performance, the SP reach performance, and the SPSP reach performance, the display of the execution count image 705 and the reached remaining number image 708 may be continued. Even in this case, the reserved image 702 is not displayed during the execution of the development performance, the SP reach performance, and the SPSP reach performance. That is, it is possible to execute a suggestive performance (display of the execution count image 705, display of the reached remaining number image 708, display of the countdown image 732 described later, etc.) that suggests a time when a special time-saving game state may occur, and during a specific performance (development performance, SP/SPSP reach, etc.) that expects the execution of a jackpot game, the reserved icon is not displayed, but the b time-saving suggestive performance can be executed continuously. In this case, the suggestive performance makes the player expect the special time-saving game state to occur, and the player can be made aware of the occurrence of the special time-saving game state even during the specific performance, and even if the specific performance is executed and fails, the player's dissatisfaction can be reduced, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.
The suggestive effect is executed a predetermined period (a predetermined change) before the special time-saving game state occurs. There are a plurality of types of suggestive effects.

In addition, when the normal time-saving play state is entered, a suggestion effect (display of the normal time-saving start image 724) can be executed to confirm in advance that the normal time-saving play state will be entered.

(Example of variation 6)
162 and 163 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 6) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Figs. 162 and 163. Variation presentation example 6 is a variation presentation example of the decorative pattern 700 based on the game ball entering the second start hole 122 in the normal time-saving game state. Also, variation presentation example 6 is a variation presentation example in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed. Also, in the following explanation, differences from each of the above variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variation presentation examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 162(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 with low decorativeness are fixed and stopped by the performance symbol 130m in the first image display device 70. At this time, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the second right hit image 725, and the normal time reduction remaining number image 726 are displayed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121, and "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122. In addition, a background corresponding to the third stage is displayed as the stage image 706. In addition, the execution count image 705 shows the text "10 GAME", and the normal time reduction remaining number image 726 shows the text "90 times".
In addition, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the first state. Although not shown, the sound output device 9 continues to output background music corresponding to the previous variable performance.

Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 122, as shown in FIG. 162 (2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the display of the special pattern. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the small pattern 704 is displayed to change at high speed. At this time, the display content of the normal time reduction remaining number image 726 is updated to "89 times". At this time, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 122. At this time, the stage display performance of the reserved image 702 starts. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserved pedestal 702P. At the same time, as the game ball enters the second start hole 122, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound that notifies the winning of the second start hole 122. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the first state to the second state.

In addition, in the normal time-saving game state, the operation at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern 700 may not be performed. That is, in the normal time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 700 may be displayed to vary at high speed as soon as the variation starts.
In addition, the winning sound notifying the winning of a prize at the second starting port 122 may be the same as the winning sound notifying the winning of a prize at the first starting port 121, or it may be a different sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (3), the operation at the start of the fluctuation progresses. At this time, the stage display performance is completed, and a triangular reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. This reserved image 702 has a display size larger than the example shown in FIG. 162 (2). The display mode of this reserved image 702 is a display mode corresponding to the third stage. The winning sound that notifies the winning of the second starting hole 122 is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed. Although not shown in the figure, when the stage display performance is completed, the operation performance of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (4), the operation at the start of the change ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. In addition, the pending image 702 moves to the change base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the second start port 122 switches to "0."

Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 122, as shown in FIG. 162 (5), the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 122 displays "1". At this time, the staged display of the reserved image 702 begins. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserved base 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the second start hole 122, the sound output device 9 begins to output a winning sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (6), the stage display performance is completed, and a triangular reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 162 (5). The winning sound is also output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed. Also, although not shown in the figure, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (7), the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "412", are displayed together and are fixed. At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "11 GAMES."

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute suggestive effects (such as displaying the execution count image 705, displaying the remaining number of times reached image 708, and displaying the countdown image 732 described later) that suggest a time when a special time-saving game state may occur, and during the variable effects executed in the normal game state, there are execution periods (before the SP reach effect) during which suggestive effects are executed and non-execution periods (during the SP effect, during the SPSP reach effect, etc.) during which suggestive effects are not executed, and during the variable effects executed in the specific game state (time-saving game state), there are no execution periods during which suggestive effects are executed, but there are non-execution periods during which suggestive effects are not executed. Therefore, while the suggestive effects create anticipation that a special time-saving game state will occur, the suggestive effects are not executed in the specific game state, allowing the player to focus their attention on the effects in the specific game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Step-by-step display of the triangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode)
Next, a step-by-step display effect using the triangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode will be described. Fig. 164 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step display effect using the triangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
The triangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode performs four stages as a stage display performance. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, a highly transparent reserved image 702 is displayed in white as the first stage of the stage display performance, as shown in FIG. 164(1). This reserved image 702 is a triangle with the upper part missing. In addition, the upper part of this reserved image 702 is displayed on the reserved base 702P, and the lower part is displayed below the reserved base 702P. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 162(2) and FIG. 162(5).

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(2), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the first stage is displayed as the second stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 has a triangular shape. In addition, this reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the first stage and is displayed higher than the first stage.
Next, as shown in Fig. 164 (3), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed as the third stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the second stage and is displayed higher than the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(4), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the third stage is displayed as the fourth stage, i.e., the final stage, of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is displayed with a display size larger than that of the third stage. Also, the entire reserved image 702 is displayed on the reserved pedestal 702P. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 162(3) and FIG. 162(6). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 162(2) and FIG. 162(5) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the stage display performance is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the stage display performance is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 162(3) and FIG. 162(6) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from when the step-by-step display performance starts to when the reserved image 702 in the completed display state is displayed, i.e., the execution time of the step-by-step display performance using the reserved image 702 in the triangular normal display state, is 0.2 seconds.

Furthermore, when the step-by-step display presentation is completed, the motion presentation of the reserved image 702 begins, as shown in FIG. 164 (5). The triangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically moves up and down as a motion presentation. The period of the up and down movement in this motion presentation is, for example, 2.0 seconds. In other words, the period of the motion presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in the normal time-saving play state is the same period as the period of the motion presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in the normal play state.

(Example of change performance 7)
165 to 170 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 7) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 165 to FIG. 170. The variable performance example 7 includes a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the normal time-saving game state, a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the normal game state, and a variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state. In addition, in the variable performance example 7, six variable performances are performed. The first variable performance of these six variable performances is a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the normal time-saving game state. In addition, the second to fourth variable performances of the six variable performances are variable performances based on winning the second start port 122 in the normal game state. In addition, the fifth and sixth variable performances of the six variable performances are variable performances based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 165 (1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the performance control unit 300 as the variation of the previous special pattern ends. At this time, four reserved images 702, an execution count image 705, a stage image 706, a second right-hit image 725, and a normal time-saving remaining count image 726 are displayed. Also, "4" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the second starting hole 122. Also, a background corresponding to the fourth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The fourth stage is a stage corresponding to the normal time-saving game state and is a stage different from the third stage. The fourth stage is a stage that is set when the "B" mode is selected in the normal time-saving selection image 745 (see FIG. 161 (21)). Also, the display mode of the four reserved images 702 is a display mode corresponding to the fourth stage, and is the same display mode as the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode displayed in the third stage. Additionally, the execution count image 705 displays the text "99 GAMES," and the remaining normal time-saving count image 726 displays the text "1 time." Additionally, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all in the second state. Although not shown, the audio output device 9 continues to output background music that corresponds to the previous variable performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the change display of the next special pattern. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 switches to "3".
Next, as shown in FIG. 165(3), the left decorative pattern 700, "4", temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 165(4), the right decorative pattern 700 "4" temporarily stops, and the reach performance begins.

Next, as shown in Fig. 165 (5), the SP reach performance is executed. That is, in the normal time-saving gaming state, the SP reach performance is executed without executing the development performance. During the execution of the SP reach performance, the SP reach image 712 is displayed. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays a background corresponding to the SP reach performance, which is different from the background during the execution of the SP reach performance in the normal gaming state.
In addition, even in the normal time-saving game state, the SP reach effect may be executed after the development effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (6), the SPSP reach performance is executed. While the SPSP reach performance is being executed, the SPSP reach image 713 is displayed. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays a background corresponding to the SPSP reach performance, which is different from the background displayed while the SPSP reach performance is being executed in the normal game mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(7), a promotion effect is executed and a button operation image 714 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, the number "5", which is the middle decorative pattern 700, is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 166 (8).

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (9), a switching image 727 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, variable image 701, reserved image 702, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times for normal time reduction image 726 become difficult or impossible for the player to see. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703, small pattern 704, and second right hit image 725 continue to be easily visible to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(10), when the switching image 727 is hidden, the temporary stop display of the three decorative symbols 700, "454", becomes easily visible to the player. Also, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times of normal time reduction image 726 become easily visible to the player.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "454", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 166 (11). At this time, the variable image 701 is not displayed. The display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "100 GAMES". As the special symbols stop varying, the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to the normal game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (12), the first transition image 728 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, and the stage image 706 are difficult or impossible to see for the player. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be easily visible for the player. Also, the second right hit image 725 and the normal time reduction remaining count image 726 are not displayed.
Next, a result image 729 is displayed as shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (14), the small symbol 704 starts to change with the start of the change display of the next special symbol. This change is based on winning the second start port 122 in the normal game state. In addition, in this change, the decorative symbol 700 is not displayed. That is, in this change, the change performance is performed using the small symbol 704 without using the decorative symbol 700. In addition, in this change, the change image 701 and the reserved image 702 are not displayed. In addition, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 switches to "2".
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three small symbols 704, "721", are displayed in a line and are fixed, as shown in FIG. 167 (15).

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (16), the variation of the small symbol 704 starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 switches to "1".
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three small symbols 704 are displayed together and are fixed as shown in Fig. 167 (17). The combination of the small symbols 704, "658", is an example of a combination when the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (18), the variation of the small symbol 704 starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 switches to "0".
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three small symbols 704, "421", are displayed in a line and are fixed, as shown in FIG. 168 (19).

Then, when the variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 ends without any reserved balls based on winning the second start port 122, the highly decorative decorative pattern 700 "421" is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70 as shown in FIG. 168 (20). That is, the combination of the decorative pattern 700 and the combination of the small pattern 704 match. At this time, the background corresponding to the fifth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The fifth stage is a stage corresponding to the normal game state, and is different from any of the first stage to the fourth stage. At this time, the execution count image 705 and the left hit image 730 are displayed. The execution count image 705 displays the text "100 GAME" including the number of new variable performances performed since the number of times the special pattern variable display was reset. At this time, the number displayed in the execution count image 705 is the number of variable performances performed since the pachinko game machine 100 was controlled to the normal time-saving game state. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second state to the first state. At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a voice saying, "Please return to left hand hitting."

When a predetermined time has elapsed without any winnings in the first starting hole 121, the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed as shown in FIG. 168 (21). At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the first state to the fifth state.

Next, when the game ball enters the first start hole 121, as shown in FIG. 168 (22), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the special pattern change display. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change at the start of the change, and the small pattern 704 is displayed changing at high speed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121 displays "1". At this time, the reserved image 702 starts to be displayed in a stepwise manner. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above and away from the first reserved base 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound as the game ball enters the first start hole 121. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the fifth mode to the second mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168 (23), the operation at the start of the fluctuation progresses. At this time, the stage display performance is completed, and a square-shaped reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved base 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 168 (22). This reserved image 702 is in a display mode corresponding to the fifth stage. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the operation performance of the reserved image 702 begins. The winning sound continues to be output until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168 (24), the operation at the start of the change ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. The pending image 702 moves to the change base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 121 switches to "0". Although not shown in the figure, while the change performance is being performed, background music corresponding to the change performance being performed is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, a "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 169 (25). At this time, a step-by-step display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above and away from the first reserved base 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169 (26), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P in a display size larger than the example shown in FIG. 169 (25). Also, although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 begins. Also, the winning sound continues to be output until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed.

Next, after the three decorative symbols 700 have temporarily stopped, the special symbols stop varying, and the three decorative symbols 700 are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 169 (27). This combination of decorative symbols 700, "712", is an example of a combination that occurs when the special symbol lottery result is a miss. Also, as the special symbols stop varying, the three small symbols 704, "712", also stop and are fixed. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "101 GAME". Also, at this time, the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is displayed. The text "399 more" is displayed in the remaining number of times to be reached image 708.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169 (28), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the change display of the next special pattern. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 switches to "0".
Next, as shown in FIG. 169 (29), the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are in a state where they are difficult or impossible to see for the player. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be in a state where they are easy to see for the player. Also, at this time, when the game ball enters the first start hole 121, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121. On the other hand, the reserved image 702 continues to be in a state where it is difficult or impossible to see for the player. Also, as the game ball enters the first start hole 121, a winning sound that notifies the player of the entry into the first start hole 121 is output from the audio output device 9. Also, at this time, a sound effect that the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed is output from the audio output device 9. That is, the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound and the sound effects at the same time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169 (30), the second eye-catching image 731 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700, variable image 701, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 are easily visible to the player. The stage image 706 shows a background corresponding to the first stage. Also, at this time, the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode. In other words, the reserved images 702 of each stage in the stage display performance are not visible to the player, and the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is easily visible to the player.

Next, after the three decorative symbols 700 temporarily stop, the special symbols stop varying, and the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "412", stop for a certain period, as shown in FIG. 170 (31). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "102 GAMES", and the display content of the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is updated to "398 more".

As described above, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while the second eye-catching image 731 is being displayed, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is not visible to the player, and the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is easily visible to the player. In this way, by not allowing the player to see the change in display mode from the incomplete display mode of the reserved image 702, it is possible to prevent the player from focusing excessively on the reserved image 702 while the second eye-catching image 731 is being displayed, and to allow the player to focus on the change in stage.
Furthermore, if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 while the second eye-catching image 731 is being displayed, a winning sound is output to notify the player of the entry into the first start hole 121. Therefore, even if the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is not visible to the player, the player can be made to recognize that a game ball has entered the first start hole 121.

Note that, although it has been explained that in the normal time-saving game state, when the reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode, the display mode of the reserved image 702 is the same regardless of the stage, this is not limited to the above. Even in the normal time-saving game state, when the reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode, the display mode of the reserved image 702 may differ for each stage.

(Step-by-step display of the square-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode)
Next, a step-by-step display effect by the square-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode will be described. Fig. 171 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step display effect by the square-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
The square reserved image 702 in the normal display mode performs three stages as a stage display performance. When the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, a highly transparent reserved image 702 is displayed in white as the first stage of the stage display performance, as shown in FIG. 171 (1). This reserved image 702 is a rectangular shape extending to the left and right. In addition, this reserved image 702 is displayed at a position above and away from the reserved base 702P. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 168 (22) and FIG. 169 (25).

Next, as shown in FIG. 171(2), in the second stage of the stage display performance, a square reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the first stage is displayed in a square shape. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the first stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the reserved pedestal 702P than the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (3), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed as the third stage, i.e., the final stage, of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 has a display size larger than that of the second stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the reserved pedestal 702P than that of the second stage. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 168 (23) and FIG. 169 (26). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 168 (22) and FIG. 169 (25) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the stage display performance is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the stage display performance is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 168 (23) and FIG. 169 (26) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from when the step-by-step display performance starts to when the reserved image 702 in the completed display state is displayed, i.e., the execution time of the step-by-step display performance using the reserved image 702 in the square-shaped normal display state, is 0.2 seconds.

When the stepwise display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 starts, as shown in FIG. 171 (4). The square-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically rotates halfway in the clockwise direction and then halfway in the counterclockwise direction as a motion performance. The rotation period in this motion performance is, for example, 2.0 seconds.

(Example of variation 8)
172 to 174 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 8) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figs. 172 to 174. Variable performance example 8 is a variable performance example of the decorative pattern 700 based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 122 in the normal time-saving game state. Also, variable performance example 8 includes four variable performances. The first to third variable performances out of these four variable performances are variable performances in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss. Also, the fourth variable performance out of the four variable performances is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 172(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the performance control unit 300 as the variation of the previous special pattern ends. At this time, three reserved images 702 are displayed in the normal display mode. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 shows "3". The number of times of execution image 705 shows the text "50 GAMES", and the remaining number of times of normal time reduction image 726 shows the text "50 times". The background corresponding to the fourth stage is shown as the stage image 706. The top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Although not shown, the sound output device 9 continues to output BGM corresponding to the previous variation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (2), the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 start to change as the display of the next special pattern begins to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 in the second starting port 122 switches to "2." Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of times for normal time reduction image 726 is updated to "49 times."

Next, as the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 172 (3), the reserved number display 703 of the second starting hole 122 displays "3". At this time, a step-by-step display performance is started, and a reserved image 702 is displayed on the third reserved base 702P. This third reserved image 702 shows a triangular portion and a lightning bolt mark. At this time, the audio output device 9 starts to output a winning sound to notify the player of the entry into the second starting hole 122. This winning sound is different from any of the winning sounds mentioned above.

Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (4), the step-by-step display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed on the third reserved base 702P. This third reserved image 702 is composed of a triangular portion displayed in rainbow colors and a circular portion surrounding this triangular portion. This third reserved image 702 is the reserved image 702 that is displayed when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. Although not shown, when the step-by-step display performance is completed, the action performance of the third reserved image 702 begins. In addition, the winning sound that notifies the winning of the second starting hole 122 is no longer output when a predetermined time has passed since the step-by-step display performance was completed. This predetermined time is, for example, 2.5 seconds.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "412", are displayed together and fixed, as shown in FIG. 172 (5). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "51 GAME". Although not shown in the figure, during the execution of the varying performance, background music corresponding to the varying performance being executed is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 172(6), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the next special pattern starts to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 switches to "2". Also, the display content of the remaining number of times of the normal time reduction image 726 is updated to "48 times".
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "721", are displayed together and fixed, as shown in Fig. 173 (7). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "52 GAME".

Next, as shown in FIG. 173(8), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the change display of the next special pattern. In addition, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 switches to "1". In addition, the display content of the remaining number of times of the normal time reduction image 726 is updated to "47 times".
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "563", are displayed together and fixed, as shown in Fig. 173(9). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "53 GAME".

Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (10), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 start to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 in the second starting port 122 switches to "0". Also, the display content of the remaining number of times for normal time reduction image 726 is updated to "46 times". Also, the first reserved image 702 moves toward the changing base 701P and expands, causing the rainbow-colored changing image 701 to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (11), a reach prompting effect is executed. A reach prompting effect is an effect that prompts whether or not a reach effect will be executed. In the example shown, after the "7" which is the left decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops, the "7" which is the right decorative pattern 700 is swung up and down to prompt whether or not a reach effect will be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (12), the right decorative pattern 700 "7" temporarily stops, and the reach effect starts. At this time, a sound effect indicating that the left and right decorative patterns 700 "7" are lined up is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Fig. 174 (13), the SP reach effect is executed. During the execution of the SP reach effect, the SP reach image 712 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 174 (14), the SPSP reach effect is executed. During the execution of the SPSP reach effect, the SPSP reach image 713 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 174 (15), a promotion effect is executed and a button operation image 714 is displayed.

When the player operates the performance button 161 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, the big win notification performance is executed as shown in FIG. 174 (16). During the execution of this big win notification, the movable performance is executed and the second emphasis image 718 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the normal time reduction remaining count image 726 continue to be in a state where they are difficult or impossible to see for the player. In addition, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, and the second right hit image 725 continue to be in a state where they are easy to see for the player. In addition, when the big win notification performance is executed, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second mode to the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up red, the board lamp 74b lights up orange, the movable member lamp 74c lights up yellow, and the button lamp 17c lights up green. Also, when the big win notification performance is being executed, the sound effect of the big win notification performance is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the big win notification effect ends and the second emphasis image 718 goes off, the repeated number decorative pattern 700 "777" temporarily stops as shown in FIG. 174 (17). At this time, the execution count image 705 and the remaining number of times for normal time reduction image 726 are displayed again. At this time, the top lamp 10b lights up orange, the board lamp 74b lights up yellow, the movable member lamp 74c lights up green, and the button lamp 17c lights up blue.

As the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 700 is fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 174 (18). In addition, "777" is fixed and stopped as the small symbol 704. In other words, the display of the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 matches the combination of "777". At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "54 GAME". At this time, the top lamp 10b lights up yellow, the board lamp 74b lights up green, the movable member lamp 74c lights up blue, and the button lamp 17c lights up indigo blue.

Although not shown, the jackpot game is then executed in the same manner as in the variable presentation example 6. That is, an opening image 719 (see FIG. 160 (18)) is displayed, followed by a first right-hit image 720 and a promotion image 721 (see FIG. 161 (19)). After a predetermined time has elapsed, a round-in-progress image 722 and a round number image 723 (see FIG. 161 (20)) are displayed, and when the final round is completed, a normal time-saving selection image 745 (see FIG. 161 (21)) is displayed, followed by a normal time-saving start image 724 (see FIG. 161 (22)). The number of remaining times for the special symbol lottery in the normal time-saving game state becomes 100 (see FIG. 161 (23)).

(Step-by-step display of rainbow-colored reserved images 702)
Next, a description will be given of a step-by-step display effect using the rainbow-colored reserved image 702. FIG. 175 is a diagram showing a step-by-step display effect using the rainbow-colored reserved image 702.
The rainbow-colored reserved image 702 performs four stages of stage display performance. When the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, first, as shown in FIG. 175(1), a reserved image 702 with low transparency is displayed in white on the reserved base 702P as the first stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is triangular. In addition, in the first stage of the stage display performance, an action display using the reserved image 702 is performed. More specifically, an action display is performed such that a lightning bolt mark falls on the triangular part of the reserved image 702. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the third reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 172(3).

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(2), as the second stage of the stage display performance, a highly transparent circular image is newly displayed on the reserved image 702. This circular image is shown to surround a triangular portion of the reserved image 702.
Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (3), as the third stage of the stage display performance, a circular image in the pending image 702 is displayed with a lower transparency than the second stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 175(4), in the fourth stage, i.e., the final stage, of the staged display performance, the circular image in the reserved image 702 is displayed with a lower transparency than in the third stage. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the staged display performance is the display mode of the third reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 172(4). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 172(3) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the staged display performance is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the staged display performance is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 172(4) is displayed.
In this way, as the stages in the staged display performance progress, only the transparency of a portion of reserved image 702 may change. Such a change in the transparency of only a portion of reserved image 702 is also regarded as a change in the form of reserved image 702. In this embodiment, the time from the start of this staged display performance to the completion display state, i.e., the execution time of the staged display performance using rainbow-colored reserved image 702, is 0.5 seconds.

In addition, when the stepwise display performance is completed, as shown in FIG. 175 (5), the motion performance of the reserved image 702 is started. The rainbow-colored reserved image 702 periodically rotates in a clockwise direction as a motion performance. The rotation period in this motion performance is, for example, 3.0 seconds. In other words, the period of the motion performance by the rainbow-colored reserved image 702 is longer than the period of the motion performance by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
In addition, in the action presentation using the rainbow-colored reserved image 702, the triangular portion may periodically rotate in a clockwise direction, and the circular portion may periodically rotate in a counterclockwise direction. In this case, the period of each action may be the same or different.

As described above, in this embodiment, the execution time of the step-by-step display effect of the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is longer than the execution time of the step-by-step display effect of the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. In this case, by making the player feel the sense of expectation of the reserved image 702 with higher expectation than the normal display mode being displayed for a longer period of time, the player can be given a sense of elation when the reserved image 702 with high expectation is displayed.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is different depending on the stage. Here, the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode may also be different depending on the stage, like the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. On the other hand, the rainbow-colored reserved image 702 may have the same display mode regardless of the stage. In this case, the step-by-step display performance by the rainbow-colored reserved image 702 may include an action display that is not performed in either the step-by-step display performance by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in each stage or the step-by-step display performance by the blue reserved image 702 in each stage (see FIG. 175(1)). In this case, the step-by-step display performance allows the player to feel the rarity of the rainbow-colored reserved image 702 more strongly.
In addition, the rainbow-colored reserved image 702 may have more stages in which the display mode changes in the step-by-step display presentation than the reserved image 702 in a normal display mode and the reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode consisting of a specific color (blue, green, red, etc.).

(Example of change performance 9)
176 to 181 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 9) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figs. 176 to 181. The variable performance example 9 includes seven variable performances. The first of the seven variable performances is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state. The second variable performance is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving game state. The third and fourth variable performances are variable performances based on winning the second start hole 122 in the special time-saving game state. The fifth to seventh variable performances are variable performances based on winning the game ball in the second start hole 122 in the normal game state.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 176(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped by the performance control unit 300 in the first image display device 70 as the previous special pattern variation ends. At this time, four reserved images 702 are displayed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting gate 121 shows "4". The number of times played image 705 shows the text "499 GAMES", and the remaining number of times reached image 708 shows the text "1 more". The background corresponding to the first stage is shown as the stage image 706. The top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second state. Although not shown, the sound output device 9 continues to output BGM corresponding to the previous variation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (2), the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 start to change as the display of the next special pattern begins to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 121 switches to "3". Also, at this time, the countdown image 732, "1", is displayed.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "421", are displayed together and fixed, as shown in FIG. 176 (3). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "500 GAMES", and the display content of the remaining number of times reached image 708 is updated to "0 more". In other words, the number of variation effects that have been executed reaches the number of variation effects required to enter the special time-saving game state. As a result, the game state of the pachinko game machine 100, which was in the normal game state, is controlled to the special time-saving game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (4), the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 start to change as the display of the next special pattern begins to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 in the first starting port 121 switches to "2". Also, at this time, the second right-hit image 725 is displayed. Also, at this time, the countdown image 732, "0", is displayed.

Next, as the game ball enters the first start hole 121, as shown in FIG. 176 (5), the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121 displays "3". At this time, a step-by-step display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the third reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound.
Next, as shown in FIG. 176(6), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the third reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 is started. The winning sound is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (7), a special time-saving start image 733 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 177(8), the display of the second transition image 734 is started. More specifically, the second transition image 734 is displayed so as to slide from the right side to the left side on the first image display device 70, so that the second transition image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70. Also, at this time, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the second transition image 734 is not displayed, the left decorative pattern 700, the third reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, and the remaining number of times reached image 708, which are rapidly changing, continue to be visible or easily visible to the player. Also, the second reserved image 702 and the stage image 706 are in a state where the parts not overlapping with the second transition image 734 are visible or easily visible to the player, and the parts overlapping with the second transition image 734 are difficult or invisible to the player. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, the first reserved image 702, and the variable image 701 are in a state where they are difficult or impossible to see for the player. In addition, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the second transition image 734 is displayed, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, and the second right hit image 725 continue to be in a state where they are easy to see for the player. In addition, at this time, the action display by the second reserved image 702 and the third reserved image 702 is being executed, and the action display of the second reserved image 702 and the third reserved image 702 is in a state where it is visible or easy to see for the player. In addition, the time from the start of the variable display to the display of the second transition image 734 is, for example, 5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (9), the second transition image 734 is displayed on the entire first image display device 70. At this time, the left decorative pattern 700, the third reserved image 702, the second reserved image 702, the number of executions image 705, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are also difficult or impossible to see for the player. Also, at this time, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, "4" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121. On the other hand, the fourth reserved image 702 is difficult or impossible to see for the player. Also, at this time, the winning sound announcing the entry into the first starting hole 121 is not output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 177 (10), a special time-saving selection image 735 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on the "a" mode in the special time-saving selection image 735.
Next, as shown in FIG. 177(11), a mode start image 736 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (12), the second transition image 734 and the mode start image 736 are not displayed, and the low-decorative decorative pattern 700 "125" is temporarily stopped on the first image display device 70. At this time, the background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The sixth stage is a stage corresponding to the special time-saving game state. At this time, the third right-hit image 737 and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the special time-saving remaining number image 738 displays the text "749" indicating the remaining number of special pattern lotteries in the special time-saving game state. In addition, "4" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121, and "0" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122. Note that neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. At this time, a sound such as "Please hit to the right" encouraging the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 111 may be output from the sound output device 9.
Moreover, the display period of the second transitional image 734 is, for example, 10 seconds.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 stop as shown in FIG. 178 (13). The combination of the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704, "125," is an example of a combination that occurs when the special symbol lottery results in a losing combination.

Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 122, as shown in FIG. 178 (14), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the small pattern 704 changes and displays at high speed. At this time, the display content of the special time-saving remaining number image 738 is updated to "748". At this time, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 122. At this time, the stage display performance of the reserved image 702 starts. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above and away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. At the same time, as the game ball enters the second start hole 122, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound that notifies the player of the winning at the second start hole 122.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (15), the operation at the start of the fluctuation progresses. At this time, the stage display performance is completed, and a trapezoid reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved base 702P. This reserved image 702 has a display size larger than the example shown in FIG. 178 (14). This reserved image 702 is in a display mode corresponding to the sixth stage. The winning sound that notifies the winning of the second starting hole 122 is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed. Although not shown in the figure, when the stage display performance is completed, the operation performance of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (16), the operation at the start of the change ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. In addition, the pending image 702 moves to the change base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the second start port 122 switches to "0."

Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 122, as shown in FIG. 178 (17), the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 122 displays "1". At this time, the reserved image 702 starts to be displayed in a step-by-step manner. In the example shown, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above and away from the first reserved base 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the second start hole 122, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (18), the stage display performance is completed, and a trapezoidal reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 178 (17). The winning sound is also output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed. Also, although not shown in the figure, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "463" are displayed in a line and stopped as shown in FIG. 179 (19).
In this way, each time a variable presentation is executed in the special time-saving play state, the number of remaining times for special pattern selection in the special time-saving play state is reduced, and the value shown in the special time-saving remaining number image 738 is subtracted by one.

When the 750th variable performance starts in the special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 179 (20), the decorative pattern 700 and small patterns are displayed variable at high speed. At this time, the special time-saving remaining number image 738 shows the text "0". The reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 shows "4", and the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 shows "3". At this time, the variable image 701 and three reserved images 702 are displayed. The stage image 706 shows the background corresponding to the sixth stage.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "254", are displayed together and fixed, as shown in FIG. 179 (21). At this time, the varying image 701 is not displayed. When the special symbols stop varying, the game state of the pachinko game machine 100, which was in the special time-saving game state, is controlled to the normal game state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (22), the first transition image 728 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, and the stage image 706 are difficult or impossible to see for the player. The second right-hit image 725 and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 are not displayed. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be easily visible for the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (23), the small symbol 704 starts to change with the start of the change display of the next special symbol. This change is based on winning the second start port 122 in the normal game state. In addition, in this change, the decorative symbol 700 is not displayed. That is, in this change, the change performance is performed using the small symbol 704 without using the decorative symbol 700. In addition, in this change, the change image 701 and the reserved image 702 are not displayed. In addition, at this time, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 is switched to "2". In addition, at this time, the result image 729 (see FIG. 167 (13)) is not displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three small symbols 704 are displayed together and are fixed as shown in Fig. 180 (24). The combination of the small symbols 704, "755", is an example of a combination when the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (25), the variation of the small symbol 704 starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 switches to "1".
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three small symbols 704 are displayed together and are fixed as shown in Fig. 180 (26). The combination of the small symbols 704, "127", is an example of a combination when the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (27), the variation of the small symbol 704 starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 switches to "0".
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three small symbols 704, "421", are displayed in a line as shown in FIG. 180 (28) and are fixed.

Then, when the variable presentation based on winning at the second starting port 122 ends with no pending winning at the second starting port 122, the highly decorative decorative pattern 700 "421" is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70, as shown in FIG. 180 (29). In other words, the combination of decorative patterns 700 and the combination of small patterns 704 match. At this time, a background corresponding to the fifth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, the execution count image 705 and the left hit image 730 are also displayed. The execution count image 705 shows the text "1253 GAME" including the total value of the number of times of the variable performance newly performed after the number of times of the variable display of the special symbol was reset, that is, 500 times which is the number of times of the variable performance based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, 1 time which is the number of times of the variable performance based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving game state, 749 times which is the number of times of the variable performance based on the winning of the second start hole 122 in the special time-saving game state, and 3 times which is the number of times of the variable performance based on the winning of the second start hole 122 in the normal game state. Also, at this time, four reserved images 702 are displayed. These four reserved images 702 include three reserved images 702 (see FIG. 176 (3)) that were displayed just before the pachinko game machine 100 was controlled to the special time-saving game state. Also, although not shown, all of the four reserved images 702 are performing action performance. On the other hand, the variable image 701 is not displayed. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a voice saying, "Please return to left-handed hitting."

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (30), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the special pattern change. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 switches to "3". At this time, the second reserved image 702, the third reserved image 702, and the fourth reserved image 702 move toward the first reserved base 702P, the second reserved base 702P, and the third reserved base 702P, respectively. In addition, the first reserved image 702 moves toward the variable base 701P and expands, so that the variable image 701 is displayed. Although not shown, after that, as the special pattern stops changing, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped, and the variable image 701 is not displayed.
In this way, when the pachinko game machine 100 that was in the normal game state is controlled to the special time-saving game state and then controlled back to the normal game state, the reserved image 702 (see FIG. 176 (4)) that was displayed when it was controlled to the special time-saving game state is re-displayed when it is controlled back to the normal game state.

In the variation presentation example 9, it has been described that the second transition image 734 is displayed during the high-speed variation (scroll) of the decorative pattern 700 in the first variation presentation in the special time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, the second transition image 734 may be displayed when the first variation presentation in the special time-saving game state starts. Also, the second transition image 734 may be displayed just before the special time-saving game state, that is, when the final variation presentation in the normal game state stops. In this case, the time from when the second transition image 734 is displayed until the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to the special time-saving game state is, for example, 10 seconds.

In addition, in the variation performance example 9, it has been explained that the result image 729 (see FIG. 167 (13)) is not displayed when the first transition image 728 is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
Even if the result of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving game state does not result in a jackpot and the game state transitions to the normal game state, the result image 729 may be displayed while the first transition image 728 is being displayed.

(Step-by-step display of the trapezoidal reserved image 702 in the normal display mode)
Next, a step-by-step display effect using the trapezoidal reserved image 702 in the normal display mode will be described. Fig. 182 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step display effect using the trapezoidal reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
The trapezoid reserved image 702 in the normal display mode performs four stages as a stage display performance. When the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, first, as shown in FIG. 182 (1), a highly transparent reserved image 702 is displayed in white at a position above and away from the reserved base 702P as the first stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is square-shaped. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 178 (14) and FIG. 178 (17).

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(2), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed as the second stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is trapezoidal. In addition, this reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the first stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the reserved base 702P than the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 182(3), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed as the third stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the second stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the reserved base 702P than the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(4), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the third stage is displayed as the fourth stage, i.e., the final stage, of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 has a display size larger than that of the third stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the reserved pedestal 702P than that of the third stage. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 178(15) and FIG. 178(18). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 178(14) and FIG. 178(17) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the stage display performance is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the stage display performance is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 178(15) and FIG. 178(18) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from when the step-by-step display performance starts to when the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed, i.e., the execution time of the step-by-step display performance using the reserved image 702 in the trapezoidal normal display mode, is 0.2 seconds.

Furthermore, when the step-by-step display presentation is completed, the motion presentation of the reserved pedestal 702 begins, as shown in FIG. 182 (5). The trapezoid reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically moves left and right as a motion presentation. The period of the left and right movement in this motion presentation is, for example, 2.0 seconds. In other words, the period of the motion presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in the special time-saving play state is the same period as the period of the motion presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in the normal time-saving play state, and the period of the motion presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in the normal play state.

Figure 183 is an explanatory diagram of each effect in variable effect example 9.
As shown in FIG. 183, at time T1 of the variation performance example 9, the first variation performance in the special time-saving game state is started. At this time, the variation of the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 has started, and the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are in a state where they are easily visible to the player. At this time, the variation image 701 and the two reserved images 702 are performing an action performance, and the variation image 701 and the two reserved images 702 are in a state where they are easily visible to the player. At this time, the background corresponding to the first stage is shown as the stage image 706. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. At this time, the BGM corresponding to the variation performance being performed is output from the sound output device 9. The state at time T1 is the state shown in FIG. 176 (4).

After that, at time T2, the game ball enters the first starting hole 121.
After that, at time T3, the third reserved image 702 is displayed in the display mode in the first stage of the stage display performance, and the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes visible or easily visible to the player. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound that notifies the player of the winning of the first starting hole 121. The state at time T3 is the state shown in FIG. 176 (5).
After that, the staged display performance of the third reserved image 702 progresses, and at time T4, the staged display performance ends, and the third reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode. At this time, the action performance of the third reserved image 702 starts. The state at time T4 is the state shown in FIG. 176 (6).
After that, at time T5, the winning sound notifying the winning of the first starting hole 121 is no longer output from the audio output device 9.

Thereafter, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to a special time-saving gaming state, and at time T6, the display of the second transition image 734 begins.
After that, when the display area of the second transition image 734 on the first display device 70 becomes larger, at time T7, the left decorative pattern 700 is visible or easily visible to the player, while the middle decorative pattern 700 and the right decorative pattern 700 are difficult or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, the variable image 701 is difficult or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, the third reserved image 702 is visible or easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, a part of the second reserved image 702 is visible or easily visible to the player, while another part of the second reserved image 702 is difficult or invisible to the player. Also, the first reserved image 702 is difficult or invisible to the player. At this time, a part of the stage image 706 is visible or easily visible to the player, while another part of the stage image 706 is difficult or invisible to the player. The state at time T7 is the state shown in FIG. 177(8).

After that, when the second transition image 734 is displayed over the entirety of the first display device 70, at time T8, the three decorative patterns 700 become difficult or impossible to see for the player. At this time, the variable image 701 is not displayed. At this time, all three reserved images 702 become difficult or impossible to see for the player. At this time, the entire stage image 706 becomes difficult or impossible to see for the player. The state at time T8 is the state shown in FIG. 177 (9).

After that, at time T9, when the second transition image 734 is no longer displayed, the three decorative symbols 700 are temporarily stopped, and the three decorative symbols 700 are easily visible to the player. Also, the background corresponding to the sixth stage is shown as the stage image 706. The state at time T9 is the state shown in FIG. 177 (12).
After that, at time T10, the first variable presentation in the special time-saving game state ends. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped. The state at time T10 is the state shown in FIG. 178 (13).

Thereafter, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to the normal gaming state, at time T11, the first transition image 728 is hidden and the four reserved images 702 are easily visible. The four reserved images 702 include the reserved images 702 that were difficult to see or impossible to see at time T8. At this time, the reserved images 702 perform an action presentation. The state at time T11 is the state shown in FIG. 180 (29).
After that, at time T12, the next variation performance starts. The state at time T12 is the state shown in FIG. 181 (30).

As described above, in this embodiment, the game control board 200B can be controlled to a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode. For example, the first mode is a normal game state. For example, the second mode is a special time-saving game state. In this embodiment, when the first variable performance in the second mode is started while the reserved image 702 is displayed, the performance control board 300B makes the operation display of the reserved image 702 difficult to see or invisible, and does not make it easy to see, and makes the operation display of the decorative pattern 700 difficult to see or invisible, and then makes it easy to see. For example, the operation display of the reserved image 702 is an operation display in the operation performance. For example, the operation display of the decorative pattern 700 is a variable operation or a temporary stop operation display.
In this case, after the start of the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state, the performance of the reserved image 702 that was being executed before the start of the first variable performance is prevented from still being noticed by the player, and it is possible to make the player more likely to notice the action display of the decorative pattern 700 that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute a highly entertaining performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the first variable performance in the second mode is started while the pending image 702 is being displayed, the performance control board 300B can make the pending image 702 difficult to see or impossible to see after the start of the first variable performance, and start the next variable performance after the first variable performance before making the pending image 702 easily visible.
In this case, when the next variable performance after the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state starts, the performance of the reserved image 702 that was being executed before the start of the first variable performance is prevented from still being focused on by the player, and it is possible to make the player more likely to focus on the variable performance unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the first variable performance in the second mode is started while the pending image 702 is being displayed, the performance control board 300B makes the pending image 702 difficult to see or impossible to see in the first variable performance and does not make it easily visible, and makes the decorative pattern 700 difficult to see or impossible to see and then makes it easily visible.
In this case, after the start of the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state, the performance of the reserved image 702 that was being executed before the start of the first variable performance is prevented from still being noticed by the player, and it is possible to make the player more likely to notice the performance using the decorative pattern 700 that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute a highly entertaining performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the first variable performance in the second mode is started while the pending image 702 is being displayed, the performance control board 300B does not make the small pattern 704 difficult or impossible to see in the first variable performance, but makes the pending image 702 difficult or impossible to see.
In this case, even if the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state starts, the performance of the reserved image 702 that was being executed before the start of the first variable performance can still be prevented from being noticed by the player. On the other hand, since the small pattern 704 continues to be visible or easily visible, the player can be made to recognize that the variable performance is continuing even when the reserved image 702 becomes difficult or impossible to see, and it is possible to make the player easily pay attention to the variable performance unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute a highly entertaining performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first variable performance in the second mode is started while the reserved image 702 is displayed, the performance control board 300B does not make the reserved image 702 difficult or impossible to see in the first variable performance and then makes it easy to see, and when a special performance is executed while the reserved image 702 is displayed, the performance control board 300B makes the reserved image 702 difficult or impossible to see and then makes it easy to see. Examples of special performances include SP reach performances and SPSP reach performances.
In this case, even if the first variable effect in the special time-saving game state starts, the effect of the reserved image 702 that was being executed before the start of the first variable effect can still be prevented from being noticed by the player. On the other hand, when a special effect is executed, the first image display device 70 can execute an effect unique to the special effect using a wide display area including the display area of the reserved image 702, and the reserved image 702 can be made easily visible again, so that the player can recognize that the right to judge a big win has not been lost. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing an effect with high interest can be provided.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the first variable performance in the second mode is started while the reserved image 702 and the changing image 701 are displayed, the performance control board 300B makes the reserved image 702 and the changing image 701 difficult to see or impossible to see in the first variable performance, and does not make either of them easy to see, and when a special performance is executed while the reserved image 702 and the changing image 701 are displayed, the performance control board 300B makes the reserved image 702 and the changing image 701 difficult to see or impossible to see, and then makes both of the reserved image 702 and the changing image 701 easy to see.
In this case, even if the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state starts, the performance of the reserved image 702 that was executed before the start of the first variable performance can still be prevented from being noticed by the player. On the other hand, when the special performance is executed, the first image display device 70 can execute a performance unique to the special performance using a wide display area including the display area of the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702, and by making the reserved image 702 easily visible again, the player can be made to recognize that the right to judge the big win has not been lost, and by making the variable image 701 easily visible again, the player can be made to recognize that the next variable performance has not started when the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 are in a state where they are difficult to see or cannot be seen. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining performance can be provided.

In addition, when the display of the second transition image 734 begins, the display area of the second transition image 734 gradually becomes larger over time, so that some of the multiple reserved images 702 are easily visible to the player, while the other parts are not. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the state switches from one in which the second transition image 734 is not displayed to one in which the second transition image 734 is displayed over the entire first image display device 70, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the reserved image 702 existed, while reducing the sense of incongruity caused by the stage image 706 becoming hidden.

Furthermore, when the second transition image 734 is displayed in a portion of the display area of the first image display device 70, a portion of one of the reserved images 702 is visible to the player, and another portion of this one of the reserved images 702 is not visible to the player (see Figure 177 (8)).In this state, an action presentation is being executed using this one of the reserved images 702.
In this case, even if only a portion of the reserved image 702 is visible to the player, it is possible to make the player more easily aware of the existence of the reserved image 702.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 while the second transition image 734 is being displayed, the reserved image 702 is in a state where it is difficult or impossible for the player to see, and a winning sound that notifies the player of the entry into the first start hole 121 is not output. Therefore, in a special time-saving game state where a game ball is likely to enter the second start hole 122, the player is prevented from being overly aware that the game ball has entered the first start hole 121, and the player can be made to focus on the presentation that is unique to the special time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute suggestive effects (such as displaying the execution count image 705, the remaining number of times reached image 708, and the countdown image 732) that suggest when a special time-saving game state may occur, and in the case of a jackpot, suggestive effects that confirm a jackpot in advance (such as a look-ahead effect or a jackpot advance notice effect, such as displaying the rainbow-colored reserved image 702) can be executed, but in the case of a special time-saving game state, suggestive effects (look-ahead effects) that confirm the special time-saving game state in advance (two or more fluctuations in advance) are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the special time-saving game state not occurring even though a suggestive effect that confirms the special time-saving game state has been executed, while increasing the interest in the game by the confirmation effect of the jackpot.

In addition, a specific suggestive effect (display of countdown image 732) that indicates a time when a special time-saving game state may occur can be executed, and during the first period of the normal game state (before the countdown image 732 starts to be displayed), the probability of executing a suggestive effect that confirms a jackpot (such as displaying the rainbow-colored hold image 702) is higher than the probability of executing the specific suggestive effect, and during the second period of the normal game state (after the countdown image 732 starts to be displayed), the probability of executing the specific suggestive effect is higher than the probability of executing a suggestive effect that confirms a jackpot. Here, "the probability of executing a suggestive effect that confirms a jackpot is higher than the probability of executing a specific suggestive effect" includes the case where a specific suggestive effect is not executed (0%). Also, "the probability of executing a specific suggestive effect is higher than the probability of executing a suggestive effect that confirms a jackpot" includes the case where a specific suggestive effect is always executed (100%).

In the variable presentation example 9, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, it is set to the fifth stage, which is the same as when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the normal time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, but this is not limited to this. When the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, it may be controlled to the first stage. In other words, it is possible to set to multiple presentation modes, and it is possible to make the presentation mode set based on the end of the normal time-saving gaming state different from the presentation mode set based on the end of the special time-saving gaming state. In this case, by increasing the presentation variation at the end of the time-saving depending on the type of time-saving, it is possible to improve the presentation effect and increase the interest in the game.

Also, as described above, when either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends, after the end, the game mode transitions to a dedicated mode (fifth stage) and then to the normal mode (first stage).
When the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state, even when it is controlled to the first stage, the left hit image 730 may be displayed in the same display position as when it is controlled to the fifth stage. That is, the left hit notification when the game state transitions from either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state to the dedicated mode (fifth stage) after the end of the game, and the left hit notification when the game state transitions from either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state to the normal mode (first stage) are executed in the same notification manner.
When the normal time-saving game state ends, a result display (display of result image 729) is executed and then a transition to a dedicated mode (fifth stage) is made, and when the special time-saving game state ends, a transition to the normal mode (first stage) is made without executing a result display.
It has also been explained that the normal time-saving game state can be ended (transitioned to the normal game state) when the number of fluctuations reaches a specified number of times or when the number of small wins reaches a specified number of times (including 1 time). Here, the special time-saving game state may also be ended (transitioned to the normal game state) when the number of small wins reaches a specified number of times (including 1 time). Furthermore, when the special time-saving game state is controlled to the normal game state based on the number of fluctuations reaching a specified number of times, the state may be transitioned to the fifth stage, and when the special time-saving game state is controlled to the normal game state based on the number of small wins reaching a specified number of times, the state may be transitioned to the first stage. That is, the end of the special time-saving game state with the time-saving number and the end of the special time-saving game state with the small win number may be transitioned to different presentation modes.

In addition, in both cases where the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled from the normal time-saving game state to the normal game state and where it is controlled from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state, the left hit image 730 is displayed after the end of the variable presentation based on the reservation (remaining reservation) for the winning into the second start port 122, but this is not limited to the above. When the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled from the normal time-saving game state to the normal game state, the left hit image 730 may be displayed even before the end of the variable presentation based on the reservation (remaining reservation) for the winning into the second start port 122. That is, when the first time-saving (for example, the special time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left hit notification (display of the left hit image 730, audio notification of left hit) can be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed (remaining reservation has been consumed) from the end of the time-saving, and when the second time-saving (normal time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left hit notification (display of the left hit image 730, audio notification of left hit) can be executed before a predetermined period has elapsed (remaining reservation has been consumed) from the end of the time-saving. In this case, by changing the timing of the left hit notification depending on the type of time reduction, it is possible to vary the gameplay and increase the interest in the game.
In addition, when the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled from a special time-saving game state to a normal game state, the left-hit image 730 may be displayed even before the end of the variable presentation based on the reservation (remaining reservation) for a winning entry into the second starting port 122.

In addition, when the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, if the left-hit image 730 is displayed from when it is controlled to the normal game state until the end of the variable presentation based on the reservation (remaining reservation) for the winning in the second start port 122, the display period of the left-hit image 730 differs depending on the number of times the variable presentation based on the reservation (remaining reservation) for the winning in the second start port 122 is executed. In other words, when either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends, the length of the predetermined period for the left-hit notification changes (changes according to the number of remaining reservations).
In addition, when either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends, a left-hit notification may be issued even if the state after the end is a customer waiting state. In addition, when either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends, execution of a left-hit notification may be put on hold when the state after the end is a customer waiting state, and a left-hit notification may be issued when a variable display starts.
In addition, the left hit notification after the normal time-saving game state ends and the left hit notification after the special time-saving game state ends may be executed in the same notification mode (notification image, notification period).

In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the left hit image 730 is displayed after the end of the variation presentation based on the reservation (remaining reservation) for the winning to the second start port 122, and when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the normal time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the left hit image 730 is displayed at the time when it is controlled to the normal gaming state (the time when the final variation in the normal time-saving gaming state stops). In this case, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the display timing of the left hit image 730 differs depending on the number of remaining reservations, whereas when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the display timing of the left hit image 730 does not change. That is, when the first time-saving mode (e.g., a special time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left-hit notification (display of left-hit image 730, audio notification of left-hit) can be executed at one of multiple timings (timing corresponding to the number of remaining reserved balls), and when the second time-saving mode (e.g., a normal time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left-hit notification (display of left-hit image 730, audio notification of left-hit) can be executed at timing 1 (immediately after the stop time has elapsed). Therefore, by changing the timing of the left-hit notification depending on the type of time-saving mode, it is possible to change the playability and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, when either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends, the timing of the execution of the left-hit notification does not change depending on the number of remaining reserved balls for winning at the first start port 121 at the end of the time-saving game state, but changes depending on the number of remaining reserved balls for winning at the second start port 122 at the end of the time-saving game state.
In addition, the left hit notification when either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends is executed in the same notification mode regardless of the timing of execution.
In addition, the left hit notification after the normal time-saving game state ends and the left hit notification after the special time-saving game state ends are executed in the same notification mode.

In addition, when the time-saving feature (for example, a special time-saving game state) ends, a specified left-hit notification (display of left-hit image 730, audio notification of left-hit) can be executed after a specified period of time has passed since the end of the time-saving feature (consummation of remaining reserves), and during the period from the end of the time-saving feature until the specified left-hit notification is executed, the execution of a specified preview effect (pre-reading preview effect, jackpot preview effect) corresponding to the normal game state is restricted. This allows the player to bask in the afterglow of the end of the advantageous period, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, it can be set to multiple presentation modes (stages, modes that allow foresight presentation), and when the time-saving feature (for example, a special time-saving game state) ends, a specified left-hit notification (display of left-hit image 730, audio notification of left-hit) can be executed after a specified period of time has passed since the end of the time-saving feature (use of remaining reserves), and during the period from the end of the time-saving feature until the specified left-hit notification is executed, it is restricted from setting a specified presentation mode (a specific stage such as the first stage, a mode that allows for foresight presentation). This allows the player to bask in the afterglow of the end of the advantageous period, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from a time-saving gaming state (normal time-saving gaming state, special time-saving gaming state) to a normal gaming state, consider a configuration in which the left-hit image 730 is displayed after the end of a variable presentation based on the reserve (remaining reserve) for winning in the second starting port 122. In this case, the number of variable presentations executed before the left-hit image 730 is displayed differs depending on the number of remaining reserves. In other words, when either the normal time-saving gaming state or the special time-saving gaming state ends, the number of variable displays before the left-hit notification is made changes.

Furthermore, when the specified number of times is reached (when entering a special time-saving game state), a first predetermined image (second transition image 734, etc.) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 appears again in a first performance. Furthermore, in a normal state other than the specified number of times, in the case of a miss variation, a second predetermined image (first front image 707, second front image 709, etc.) appears during the variation of the pattern, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden (made difficult to see or impossible to see), and the decorative pattern 700 appears again in a second performance. When the first performance is performed, a transition is made to a special time-saving game state.
In this case, when the specified number of times is reached, the first predetermined image is displayed and the symbols are hidden, making the player look forward to a transition to a special mode (special time-saving game state), and improving the interest. Also, even if the specified number of times is not reached, a different second predetermined image is displayed and the symbols are hidden, making the player look forward to a special performance (jackpot). By suddenly hiding the symbols, an element of surprise is created, making the player excited. Although the common event of hiding the symbols occurs, it develops into a different performance and state. This makes it possible to diversify the variations in performance and improve interest.

Furthermore, while the first predetermined image is being displayed and while the second predetermined image is being displayed, the small pattern 704 (including the variation notification LED 59) continues to be displayed.
In this case, even when the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, the small pattern 704 is displayed, so that the changing state of the special pattern can be confirmed.

Furthermore, the display time of the first predetermined image is different from the display time of the second predetermined image. More specifically, the display time of the first predetermined image is longer than the display time of the second predetermined image.
In this case, by lengthening the display time of the first predetermined image, it is possible to impress a special effect when entering the special time-saving game state and to heighten the player's expectations, while by shortening the display time of the second predetermined image, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations.

In addition, the first predetermined image appears when the decorative pattern 700 starts to change or stops changing, and the second predetermined image appears while the decorative pattern is being scrolled.
In this case, by making the first predetermined image appear at the timing of starting or stopping the change of the decorative pattern 700, it is possible to ensure sufficient time to display the first predetermined image even if the change time is short. Also, by making the second predetermined image appear during the scrolling display of the decorative pattern 700, it is possible to improve the interest during scrolling.

Also, when the first performance is performed, the performance mode is switched from the first performance mode (for example, the first stage, normal game state) to the second performance mode (the sixth stage, special time-saving game state), but is not switched to the second performance mode even when the second performance is performed.
In this case, since the performance mode is switched by executing the first performance, a special value can be imparted to the first performance, and the entertainment value can be improved. The performance mode can be smoothly switched by executing the first performance.

In addition, when the first performance is performed, a right-hit notification is given, but even if the second performance is performed, no right-hit notification is given.
In this case, the execution of the first performance notifies the player of a right hit, so that the player can prepare for a right hit by the first performance.

Also, there are times when the first predetermined image and the decorative pattern 700 are displayed simultaneously, and there are times when the second predetermined image and the decorative pattern 700 are displayed simultaneously.
In this case, the decorative pattern 700 gradually disappears and gradually reappears, so that the screen can be switched smoothly without any sense of discomfort.

In addition, the second effect is not executed in the time-saving game state. That is, the execution rate of the second effect is higher in the first game state (normal game state) than in the second game state (time-saving game state). In this case, since the second effect is executed with a relatively high probability in the normal game state, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. In addition, since the execution probability of the second effect is low in the time-saving game state, it is possible to repeat the fluctuations one after another until the fluctuation with high expectation is reached without performing unnecessary effects.
In addition, if the execution rate of the second effect is higher in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state, the second effect may be executed in the time-saving game state.

Also, suggestive effects suggesting the first effect (display of the execution count image 705, display of the remaining number of times reached image 708, display of the countdown image 732) can be executed, and the execution probability of the suggestive effects is higher than the execution probability of the effect suggesting the second effect. Note that "the execution probability of the suggestive effects is higher than the execution probability of the effect suggesting the second effect" also includes the case where the effect suggesting the second effect is not executed (0%).
In this case, when the first performance is executed, a suggestive performance is executed, so that it is possible to increase the expectation for the first performance. Also, when the second performance is executed, it is difficult to execute a performance suggesting the second performance, so that it is possible to prevent excessive performances and not to have excessive expectations.

In addition, the appearance of the decorative pattern 700 is different before and after the first predetermined image appears (before and after entering the special time-saving game state).
In addition, in the variable performance example 9, the first predetermined image was displayed in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed. Here, in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a reach performance is executed, the first predetermined image does not have to be displayed. Also, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a variable performance in which the lottery result is a big win or a reach performance is executed, the first predetermined image may be displayed.

Also, in the variation performance example 4, it has been explained that the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed. Here, the first eye-catching image 715 does not have to be displayed in the time-saving game state. That is, when the specified number of times is reached (when entering the special time-saving game state), the first performance is performed in which the first predetermined image (second transition image 734, etc.) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 appears again. Also, in the normal game state other than the specified number of times, after the SP reach performance is performed, the second performance is performed in which the second predetermined image (first eye-catching image 715) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the first eye-catching image 715 appears again. And, the execution rate of the second performance is higher in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state.
In this case, when the specified number of times is reached, the first predetermined image is displayed and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, so that the player can expect a transition to a special mode (special time-saving game state), thereby improving the interest of the player. Also, even if the specified number of times is not reached, the second predetermined image is displayed and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden when the reach is missed, so that the disappointment when the reach is missed can be reduced.
In addition, if the execution rate of the second effect is higher in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state, the second effect may be executed in the time-saving game state.

In addition, even if a predetermined condition (reaching a predetermined number of times) is satisfied, if a reach fluctuation pattern is selected, the first eye-catching image 715 may be displayed. In other words, if a reach fluctuation pattern is selected in the fluctuation of the predetermined number of times, a reach performance is performed according to the reach fluctuation pattern, and the reach is missed and the second predetermined image is displayed.
In this case, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied (a predetermined number of fluctuations), if a reach fluctuation pattern is selected, the second predetermined image is displayed, thereby reducing disappointment when the reach is missed.

Also, a specific performance (reach performance) can be executed, and when it is determined that there is a miss, the second predetermined image is displayed and the miss symbol is stopped after the specific performance is executed, and when it is determined that there is a big win, the big win symbol is stopped without displaying the second predetermined image after the specific performance is executed.
In this case, in the case of a big win, the player can be satisfied by immediately displaying the decorative pattern 700 of the same number, and in the case of a loss, the second predetermined image is displayed to reduce the player's disappointment and to give the player hope that the performance may develop into another performance.

In addition, when the second transition image 734 is displayed, when the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed, and in the special time-saving game state, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode, but this is not limited to the above. When the second transition image 734 is displayed, when the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed, and in the special time-saving game state, the light emission modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may be different. That is, during the display period of the first predetermined image, the lamps emit light in the first specific mode, during the display period of the second predetermined image, the lamps emit light in the second specific mode, and during the second game state (special time-saving game state), the lamps emit light in the third specific mode.
In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the time-saving mode will be entered based on the lighting state of the lamp.

Moreover, the first predetermined image appears at a first time from the start of the fluctuation, and the second predetermined image appears at a second time from the start of the fluctuation, which is longer than the first time.
In this case, since the first predetermined image appears in a short time after the start of the pattern variation, the first predetermined image can be displayed even if the variation time of the specified number of variations is short. Also, since the second predetermined image appears after a relatively long time has passed after the start of the variation, the player's expectations can be heightened.

(Example of variation 10)
184 to 187 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 10) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figs. 184 to 187. Variable performance example 10 includes three variable performances. The first of the three variable performances is a variable performance based on winning at the first start port 121 in a normal game state. The second of the three variable performances is a variable performance based on winning at the first start port 121 in a special time-saving game state. The third of the three variable performances is a variable performance based on winning at the second start port 122 in a special time-saving game state.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 184(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped by the performance control unit 300 in the first image display device 70 as the previous special pattern variation ends. At this time, one reserved image 702 is displayed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting gate 121 shows "1". The number of times played image 705 shows the text "499 GAMES", and the remaining number of times reached image 708 shows the text "1 more". The background corresponding to the first stage is shown as the stage image 706. The top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Although not shown, the sound output device 9 continues to output BGM corresponding to the previous variation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184(2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the change display of the next special pattern. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 switches to "0". Also, at this time, the countdown image 732, "1", is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 184(3), the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "421", are fixed and stopped with the stop of the special symbol variation. At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "500 GAMES", and the display content of the remaining number of times reached image 708 is updated to "0 remaining". At this time, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to a special time-saving gaming state. When the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to a special time-saving gaming state, a second right-hit image 725 is displayed. On the other hand, the background corresponding to the first stage is still displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second mode to the first mode.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the special symbols stopped changing without a game ball entering the first starting hole 121, an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed as shown in FIG. 184 (4). This predetermined time is, for example, 20 seconds. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the first state to the fifth state. Although not shown, at this time, the sound output device 9 outputs background music corresponding to the previous changing performance at a lower volume than when the changing performance is being executed.

Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed without a game ball entering the first starting hole 121 after the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed as shown in FIG. 184 (5). This predetermined time is, for example, 60 seconds. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 become difficult or impossible to see for the player. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703 and the second right hit image 725 continue to be easily visible to the player. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the fifth mode to the eighth mode. The eighth mode is a mode of light emission that lights up in purple, and is different from any of the first mode to the seventh mode. At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a notification sound to notify the player that the special time-saving game state has been entered. As an example, the audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs a sound saying "The special time-saving game state has been entered" as the notification sound.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the manner of sound output by the sound output device 9 changes as shown in FIG. 184 (6). As an example, the sound output device 9 outputs a sound effect indicating that the pachinko game machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving game state. This sound effect is different from the notification sound that notifies the player that the game machine is in the special time-saving game state. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 continue to be in a state that is difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all continue to be in the eighth mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (7), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth state to the second state. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 remain in a state that is difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (8), a non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is executed. The non-display effect is an effect in which the transparency of the image is increased over time, and the image is finally hidden. In the illustrated example, the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 is increased as a result of the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 being started. Then, as the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 is increased, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are in a state in which they are not easily visible to the player, but are visible to the player. Meanwhile, at this time, neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (9), the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 progresses, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 becomes even higher. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change at the start of the change, and the small pattern 704 is displayed to change at high speed. Also, at this time, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 121. Also, at this time, the display of the reserved image 702 starts. Here, the step-by-step display performance is not executed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first image display device 70. Also, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are not easily visible to the player, but are in a state that is visible to the player. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (10), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends, and the customer waiting image 710 becomes non-displayed. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, reserved image 702, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 become easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the start of the fluctuation operation is in progress. Also, at this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (11), the start-of-variation operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. The pending image 702 moves to the variation base 701P and expands, causing the varying image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 121 switches to "0". At this time, the countdown image 732, "0", is displayed. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as the game ball enters the first start hole 121, as shown in FIG. 185 (12), the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121 displays "1". At this time, a step-by-step display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound.
Next, as shown in FIG. 186 (13), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 is started. The winning sound is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.

186(14), a special time-saving start image 733 is displayed. The display time of this special time-saving start image 733 is, for example, 3 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 186 (15), the display of the second transition image 734 is started. More specifically, the second transition image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70. At this time, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the second transition image 734 is not displayed, the left decorative pattern 700, the execution count image 705, and the remaining number of times reached image 708, which are changing at high speed, continue to be visible to the player. In addition, the part of the stage image 706 that does not overlap with the second transition image 734 is visible to the player, and the part that overlaps with the second transition image 734 is difficult or invisible to the player. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, the changing image 701, and the reserved image 702 are difficult or invisible to the player. In addition, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the second transition image 734 is displayed, the pending number display 703, small pattern 704, and second right-hit image 725 continue to be visible or easily visible to the player.

Next, as shown in Fig. 186 (16), the second transition image 734 is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70. At this time, the left decorative pattern 700, the execution count image 705, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 also become difficult or impossible for the player to see.
Next, as shown in FIG. 186 (17), when the game ball enters the first start hole 121, the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121 displays "2". On the other hand, the reserved image 702 is difficult or impossible for the player to see. Also, at this time, the winning sound is not output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 186 (18), a special time-saving selection image 735 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on the "a" mode in the special time-saving selection image 735.
Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (19), a mode start image 736 is displayed. At this time, as the game ball enters the second start hole 122, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 122. Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 is difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, a winning sound that notifies the player of the winning of the second start hole 122 is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (20), the second transition image 734 and the mode start image 736 are not displayed, and the low-decorative decorative pattern 700 "125" is temporarily stopped on the first image display device 70. At this time, the background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, the third right-hit image 737 and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 are displayed. Also, "2" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121, and "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122. Also, one reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode. On the other hand, the variable image 701 is not displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "125", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 187 (21).

Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (22), as the display of the special pattern begins to change, the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 start to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 in the second starting port 122 switches to "0". Also, the first reserved image 702 moves to the changing base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. Although not shown, after that, as the special pattern stops and is displayed, the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 stop and are fixed, and the changing image 701 is no longer displayed.

Figure 188 is an explanatory diagram of each effect in variable performance example 10.
As shown in FIG. 188, at time T1 of the variation performance example 10, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are in a state where they are difficult or impossible for the player to see. Also, at this time, the reserved image 702 is not displayed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the eighth mode. Also, at this time, an alarm sound that notifies that the special time-saving game state is being performed is output from the sound output device 9. The state at time T1 is the state shown in FIG. 184 (5).

After that, at time T2, the game ball enters the first starting hole 121.
After that, at time T3, the sound output device 9 starts to output a sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state. That is, the sound output from the sound output device 9 switches from the notification sound to the sound effect. The state at time T3 is the state shown in FIG. 184 (6).
Thereafter, at time T4, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c switch from the eighth position to the second position. The state at time T4 is the state shown in FIG. 185(7).

After that, at time T5, the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are visible to the player. On the other hand, the reserved image 702 is not displayed. The state at time T5 is the state shown in FIG. 185 (8).
After that, at time T6, the change presentation starts. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 changes slowly, and the small pattern 704 changes quickly. At this time, the display of the reserved image 702 starts, and the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player. At this time, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode. At this time, the action presentation of the reserved image 702 starts. The state at time T6 is the state shown in FIG. 185 (9).

After that, at time T7, the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, and the small pattern 704 are all easily visible to the player. The state at time T7 is the state shown in FIG. 185 (10).
After that, at time T8, the sound output device 9 stops outputting the sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.
After that, at time T9, the speed of the decorative pattern 700 changes. At this time, the reserved image 702 moves to the change base 701P. The state at time T9 is the state shown in FIG. 185 (11).

In this way, the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) can be displayed, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) based on winning at the first starting port 121 is not displayed while the first predetermined image (second transition image 734) is displayed, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) based on winning at the second starting port 122 is also displayed together with the appearance of the decorative pattern 700, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is displayed while the second predetermined image (first front image 707, second front image 709) is displayed.
In this case, since both the decorative pattern 700 and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) are not displayed while the first predetermined image is being displayed, the player can be more conscious of the first predetermined image. In addition, since the game state is changed, by making the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) invisible, the player can smoothly switch to another reserved image 702 (variable image 701) with the change to a different game state. In addition, while the second predetermined image is being displayed, the decorative pattern 700 is not displayed, while the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is displayed, so the player can be made aware of the current state (whether it is changing, how many reserved images are there, etc.).

In addition, a reserved image 702 (changing image 701) can be displayed, and the reserved image 702 (changing image 701) is not displayed while the first specified image (second transitional image 734) is being displayed, and another reserved image 702 (changing image 701) is also displayed when the decorative pattern 700 appears, and the reserved image 702 (changing image 701) is not displayed while the second specified image (first eye-catching image 715) is being displayed, and the reserved image 702 (changing image 701) is also re-displayed when the decorative pattern 700 appears.
In this case, since both the decorative pattern 700 and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) are displayed while the first predetermined image is being displayed, the first predetermined image can draw attention. Also, since the game state is changed, by hiding the reserved image 702 (variable image 701), it is possible to smoothly switch to another reserved image 702 (variable image 701) in a different game state. Also, by hiding the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) while the second predetermined image is being displayed, it is possible to smoothly switch from a reach miss to the next screen.

(Example of variation 11)
189 to 191 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 11) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 189 to 191. The variable performance example 11 is a variable performance example of the decorative pattern 700 based on winning the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving game state.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 189(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the performance control unit 300 as the variation of the previous special pattern ends. Also, the execution count image 705 shows the text "500 GAMES", and the remaining number of times reached image 708 shows the text "0 more". Also, the background corresponding to the first stage is shown as the stage image 706. Also, the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 is a special time-saving game state, and the second right-hit image 725 is displayed. Also, at this time, the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed. Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the fifth mode. Also, at this time, the sound output device 9 outputs BGM corresponding to the previous variation performance at a volume lower than that during the execution of the variation performance. The state shown in Figure 189 (1) is the same as the state shown in Figure 184 (4).

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Fig. 189 (2), the sound output device 9 starts to output a sound effect indicating that the pachinko game machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving game state. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all continue to be in the fifth mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 189 (3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the fifth mode to the second mode. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (4), a non-display effect of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 is started. In the illustrated example, the non-display effect is started, and as a result, the transparency of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 is increased. Then, as the transparency of the adjustment image 716 is increased, the portions of the center decorative pattern 700 and the right decorative pattern 700 that overlap with the adjustment image 716 are not easily visible to the player, but are still visible to the player. At this time, a sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (5), the non-display effect of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 ends, and the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are no longer displayed. As a result, the middle decorative pattern 700 and the right decorative pattern 700 are in a state where they are easily visible to the player as a whole. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change at the start of the change, and the small pattern 704 is displayed to change at high speed. Also, at this time, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 121. Also, at this time, the display of the reserved image 702 starts. On the other hand, the step-by-step display effect is not executed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first image display device 70. This reserved image 702 is in a state where it is easily visible to the player. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (6), the start-of-variation operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. The pending image 702 moves to the variation base 701P and expands, causing the varying image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 121 switches to "0". At this time, the countdown image 732, "0", is displayed. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as the game ball enters the first start hole 121, as shown in Fig. 190 (7), "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121. At this time, a step-by-step display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound.
Next, as shown in FIG. 190(8), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 is started. The winning sound is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (9), a special time-saving start image 733 is displayed.
190(10), the display of the second transitional image 734 begins. More specifically, the second transitional image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70.
Next, as shown in FIG. 190 ( 11 ), a second transitional image 734 is displayed over the entire first image display device 70 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (12), when a game ball enters the first start hole 121, the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121 displays "2". On the other hand, the reserved image 702 is difficult or impossible for the player to see. Also, at this time, a winning sound that notifies the player of the entry into the first start hole 121 is not output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 191 (13), a special time-saving selection image 735 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on the "a" mode in the special time-saving selection image 735.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (14), a mode start image 736 is displayed. At this time, as the game ball enters the second start hole 122, a "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 122. Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 is difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, a winning sound that notifies the player of the entry into the second start hole 122 is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (15), the second transition image 734 and the mode start image 736 are not displayed, and the low-decorative decorative pattern 700 "125" is temporarily stopped on the first image display device 70. At this time, the background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, the third right-hit image 737 and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the special time-saving remaining number image 738 displays the text "749". In addition, "2" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121, and "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122. In addition, one reserved image 702 is displayed. On the other hand, the variable image 701 is not displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "125", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 191 (16).

As described above, in this embodiment, in the second mode, the performance control board 300B can display a specific image before the start of the special performance, and if a prize is won while a specific image is displayed in the second mode, the reserved image of the specific mode is made difficult to see or invisible. Examples of the special performance include the display of the special time-saving start image 733, the display of the second transition image 734, and the display of the mode start image 736. Examples of the specific image include the customer waiting image 710, the adjustment image 716, and the menu image 717. Examples of the specific mode include the incomplete display mode.
In this case, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. Also, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 in the specific mode is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state is prevented from drawing the player's excessive attention, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing an effect that is highly entertaining can be provided.

In this embodiment, the performance control board 300B can display a specific image before the start of the special performance in the second mode, and when a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the second mode, the reserved image of the specific operation mode is made difficult to see or invisible. An example of the specific operation mode is an incomplete operation mode.
In this case, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. In addition, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 of the specific action mode is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state is prevented from drawing the player's attention too much, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing an effect that is highly entertaining can be provided.

In this embodiment, the performance control board 300B can display the reserved image 702 on the first image display device 70 in the first form and then in the second form, and in the second mode, a specific image can be displayed before the start of the special performance, and if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the second mode, the reserved image 702 in the first form is made difficult to see or impossible to see. An example of the first form is an incomplete form. An example of the second form is a completed form.
In this case, the player can be entertained by the change in the form of the reserved image 702. Also, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. Furthermore, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the change in the form of the reserved image 702 is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 is prevented from drawing the player's excessive attention in the special time-saving game state, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing an effect that is highly entertaining can be provided.

In this embodiment, the performance control board 300B can display a specific image before the start of the special performance in the second mode, and when a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the second mode, the reserved image 702 with a specific transparency is made difficult to see or invisible. An example of the specific transparency is an incomplete transparency.
In this case, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. Also, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 with a specific transparency is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 is prevented from drawing the player's excessive attention in the special time-saving game state, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In this embodiment, the performance control board 300B can display the reserved image 702 at the first position on the first image display device 70 and then at the second position, and in the second mode, a specific image can be displayed before the start of the special performance, and if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the second mode, the reserved image 702 at the first position is made difficult to see or impossible to see. An example of the first position is an incomplete display position. An example of the second position is a completed display position.
In this case, the change in the display position of the reserved image 702 can entertain the player. Also, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. Furthermore, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the change in the display position of the reserved image 702 is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 is prevented from drawing excessive attention from the player in the special time-saving game state, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing an effect that is highly entertaining can be provided.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the second mode, the performance control board 300B is capable of displaying a specific image before the start of a special performance, and is capable of setting the sound output to a first mode when a variable performance is being executed, and is capable of setting the sound output to a second mode when a specific image is being displayed in the second mode.
In this case, even before the start of the special effect, the special image can attract the player's interest. Also, by outputting a sound in a manner that corresponds to the display of a special image in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made aware that a special image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining effect can be provided.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the second mode, the performance control board 300B is capable of displaying a specific image before the start of the special performance, and is capable of setting the top lamp 10b to the second state, etc., when a variable performance is being executed, and is capable of setting the top lamp 10b to the eighth state, etc., when a specific image is being displayed in the second mode.
In this case, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. Also, by changing the state of the top lamp 10b according to the display of the specific image in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made to recognize that the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the second mode, the performance control board 300B is capable of displaying a specific image before the start of the special performance, and is capable of setting the board lamp 74b to the second state, etc., when a variable performance is being executed, and is capable of setting the board lamp 74b to the eighth state, etc., when a specific image is being displayed in the second mode.
In this case, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. Also, by changing the state of the board lamp 74b according to the display of the specific image in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made to recognize that the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the second mode, the performance control board 300B is capable of displaying a specific image before the start of a special performance, and is capable of setting the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c to the second state, etc., when a variable performance is being executed, and is capable of setting the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c to the eighth state, etc., when a specific image is being displayed in the second mode.
In this case, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. Also, by changing the state of the movable member lamp 74c and the state of the button lamp 17c according to the state in which the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made to recognize that the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the second mode, the performance control board 300B is capable of displaying a specific image before the start of the special performance, and if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the second mode, the display of the decorative pattern 700 can begin before the display of the reserved image 702 begins.
In this case, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. Also, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the effect pattern 700 is displayed earlier than the reserved image 702, so that the player can be drawn to the variable effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the second mode, when a prize is won before the start of the special effect and while the special pattern is stopped and no pending information is stored in the RAM 203, the performance control board 300B makes the pending image 702 of a specific aspect difficult to see or impossible to see.
In this way, if a win occurs before the start of the special effect and while the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved, the reserved image 702 of the specific mode is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state is prevented from drawing the player's attention too much, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the second mode, if a prize is won before the start of the special performance and while the special pattern is stopped and no pending information is stored in the RAM 203, the performance control board 300B makes the pending image 702 of a specific operating mode difficult to see or impossible to see.
In this way, if a win occurs before the start of the special effect and while the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved, the reserved image 702 of the specific operation mode is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state is prevented from drawing the player's attention too much, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In this embodiment, the performance control board 300B makes the reserved image 702 of a specific form difficult to see or impossible to see when a prize is won before the start of the special performance in the second mode, while the special symbol is stopped, and reserved information is not stored in the RAM 203. An example of the specific form is an incomplete form.
In this way, if a win occurs before the start of the special effect and while the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved, the reserved image 702 of a specific form is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state is prevented from drawing the player's attention too much, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In this embodiment, the performance control board 300B can display the reserved image 702 at the first transparency by the first image display device 70, and then at the second transparency, and when a prize is won before the start of the special performance in the second mode and when the special symbol is stopped and reserved information is not stored in the RAM 203, the reserved image 702 at the first transparency is made difficult to see or impossible to see. An example of the first transparency is an incomplete transparency. An example of the second transparency is a completed transparency.
In this case, the player can be entertained by the change in transparency of the reserved image 702. Furthermore, if a win occurs before the start of the special effect and while the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved ball, the change in transparency of the reserved image 702 is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 is prevented from drawing excessive attention from the player in the special time-saving game state, and the player can be made to focus on the effects that are unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In this embodiment, in the second mode, if a prize is won before the start of the special effect and while the special symbol is stopped and no reserved information is stored in the RAM 203, the performance control board 300B makes the reserved image 702 in a specific position difficult to see or impossible to see. An example of the specific position is an incomplete display position.
In this way, if a win occurs before the start of the special effect and while the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved, the reserved image 702 at the specific position is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state is prevented from drawing the player's attention too much, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In this embodiment, the performance control board 300B can display the reserved image 702 on the first image display device 70 in the first mode and then display it in the second mode, and can display the special image in a display mode corresponding to the controlled mode of the first mode and the second mode. If a prize is won when the special pattern is stopped and the special image corresponding to the first mode is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 in the first mode is made difficult to see or cannot be seen, and the special image corresponding to the second mode is displayed. Examples of the first mode include an incomplete display mode, etc. Examples of the second mode include a completed display mode, etc. Examples of the special image include the decorative pattern 700 and the stage image 706. Examples of the specific notification include the display of the second right hit image 725 and a sound that encourages the launch of the game ball to the right side in the game area 111.
In this case, the player can be entertained by the change in the state of the reserved image 702. In addition, even when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the specific notification is started, so that the player can be made to recognize that a prize can be won by shooting a game ball into the second game area. Furthermore, if a prize is won when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed while a special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification, the change in the state of the reserved image 702 is not made visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 is prevented from being excessively focused on by the player in the special time-saving game state, and the player can be made to focus on the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining presentation can be provided.

In this embodiment, the performance control board 300B can display the reserved image 702 on the first image display device 70 in the first operation mode and then in the second operation mode, and if a win occurs when the special image corresponding to the first mode is displayed while the special pattern is stopped after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 in the first operation mode is made difficult to see or cannot be seen, and a special image corresponding to the second mode is displayed. An example of the first operation mode is an incomplete operation mode. An example of the second operation mode is an operation mode in an operation performance.
In this case, the player can be entertained by the change in the operation mode of the reserved image 702. In addition, even when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the specific notification is started, so that the player can be made to recognize that a prize can be won by shooting a game ball into the second game area. Furthermore, if a prize is won when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed while a special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification, the change in the operation mode of the reserved image 702 is not made visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 is prevented from being excessively focused on by the player in the special time-saving game state, and the player can be made to focus on the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining presentation can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won when the special pattern is stopped after the start of the specific notification and a special image corresponding to the first mode is being displayed, the performance control board 300B makes the reserved image 702 of a specific form difficult to see or impossible to see, and displays a special image corresponding to the second mode.
In this case, even when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the specific notification is started, so that the player can recognize that a prize can be won by shooting the game ball into the second game area. Furthermore, if a prize is won when the special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed after the specific notification is started, the reserved image 702 of a specific form is not made visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state is prevented from drawing the player's attention excessively, and the player can be made to pay attention to the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining presentation can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won when the special pattern is stopped after the start of the specific notification and a special image corresponding to the first mode is displayed, the performance control board 300B makes the reserved image 702 of the first transparency difficult to see or impossible to see, and displays a special image corresponding to the second mode.
In this case, the change in the transparency of the reserved image 702 can entertain the player. In addition, even when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the specific notification is started, so that the player can recognize that a prize can be won by launching a game ball into the second game area. Furthermore, if a prize is won when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed while a special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification, the change in the transparency of the reserved image 702 is not made visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 is prevented from being excessively focused on by the player in the special time-saving game state, and the player can be made to focus on the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining presentation can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won when the special pattern is stopped after the start of the specific notification and a special image corresponding to the first mode is displayed, the performance control board 300B makes the reserved image 702 at the first position difficult to see or impossible to see, and displays a special image corresponding to the second mode.
In this case, the change in the display position of the reserved image 702 can entertain the player. In addition, even when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the specific notification is started, so that the player can recognize that a prize can be won by shooting a game ball into the second game area. Furthermore, if a prize is won when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed while a special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification, the change in the display position of the reserved image 702 is not made visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 is prevented from being excessively focused on by the player in the special time-saving game state, and the player can be made to focus on the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining presentation can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the performance control board 300B is able to change the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before the display of the pending image 702 is completed.
In this case, when a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the sound output mode is switched earlier than the display of the reserved image 702, so that the player can easily recognize that the special time-saving game state is in progress even if the player has taken his/her eyes off the pachinko gaming machine 100. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed in the second mode before the start of the special effect, the performance control board 300B is able to change the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before the specific image is no longer displayed.
In this case, when a win is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, by switching the sound output mode more quickly than by hiding the specific image, the player can be made to quickly recognize that the special time-saving game state is in effect, regardless of the display content of the first image display device 70. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining performance can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the performance control board 300B is able to change the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before the decorative pattern 700 becomes easily visible.
In this case, when a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the sound output mode is switched more quickly than when the decorative pattern 700 is in a state where it is easily visible to the player, so that the player can easily recognize that the special time-saving game state is in progress even if the player has taken his eyes off the pachinko game machine 100. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining performance can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the performance control board 300B is able to change the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before the small pattern 704 becomes easily visible.
In this case, when a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the sound output mode is switched more quickly than when the small symbol 704 is in a state where it is easily visible to the player, so that the player can easily recognize that the special time-saving game state is in progress even if the player has taken his eyes off the pachinko game machine 100. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining performance can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the performance control board 300B is capable of changing the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before changing the top lamp 10b from the first light-emitting mode to the second light-emitting mode.
In this case, when a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the sound output mode is switched more quickly than the switching of the light emission mode of the top lamp 10b, so that the player can easily recognize that the special time-saving game state is in progress even if the player has taken his eyes off the pachinko gaming machine 100. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the performance control board 300B is able to change the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before changing the board lamp 74b from the first light-emitting mode to the second light-emitting mode.
In this case, when a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the sound output state is switched more quickly than the switching of the light emission state of the board lamp 74b, so that the player can easily recognize that the special time-saving game state is in progress even if the player is looking away from the pachinko gaming machine 100. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining performance can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the performance control board 300B is able to change the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before the movable member lamp 74c or the button lamp 17c is changed from the first light-emitting mode to the second light-emitting mode.
In this case, when a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, by switching the sound output state more quickly than switching the light emission state of the movable member lamp 74c or the button lamp 17c, the player can easily recognize that the special time-saving game state is in progress even if the player is looking away from the pachinko gaming machine 100. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining performances can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the sound output mode is switched before the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player. Therefore, regardless of the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that he or she has won.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the sound output mode is switched before the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 begins. Therefore, even if the customer waiting image 710 prevents the player from recognizing the game situation from the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that he or she has won.

In addition, if a win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the state of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched before the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player. Therefore, regardless of the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that he or she has won.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the state of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched before the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 begins. Therefore, even if the customer waiting image 710 prevents the player from recognizing the game situation from the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that he or she has won.

In addition, if a win occurs when a specific image is displayed in a special time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 700 is made visible to the player before the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player. Therefore, even if the reserved image 702 is not visible, it is possible to quickly indicate to the player that a variable performance will be performed.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 700 is made visible to the player before the customer waiting image 710 is hidden. Therefore, even if the information displayed on the first image display device 70 regarding the game is blocked by the customer waiting image 710, the player can be quickly informed that a variable performance will be performed.

In addition, if a win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the step-by-step display effect is not executed, whereas if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 between the start of the variable effect based on this win and the display of the second transition image 734, the step-by-step display effect is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy not only the effects unique to the special time-saving game state, but also the changes in the display mode of the reserved image 702, and can give the player a sense of exclusivity from the reserved image 702 that is displayed based on a win when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state.

In addition, if a win occurs while the second transition image 734 is being displayed, the reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode is not visible to the player. This prevents the player from focusing too much on the reserved image 702, and allows the player to focus on the change from the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state to the stage image 706 unique to the special time-saving game state.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 while the second transition image 734 is being displayed, a winning sound announcing the entry into the first start hole 121 is not output. Therefore, in a special time-saving game state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start hole 122, the player is prevented from being overly aware that the game ball has entered the first start hole 121, and the player can focus on the change from the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state to the stage image 706 unique to the special time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, even when the second transition image 734 is displayed, if a game ball enters the second start hole 122, a winning sound is output to notify the player of the entry into the second start hole 122. This allows the player to recognize that the game is in a special time-saving game state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second start hole 122.

In addition, even when the second transition image 734 is displayed, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, a winning sound may be output to notify the player of the entry into the first starting hole 121. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the entry into the first starting hole 121 is invalid.
Also, when the second transition image 734 is displayed and the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 122, the winning sound notifying the entry into the second starting hole 122 may not be output. In this case, the player is prevented from being overly aware of the gaming ball's entry, and the player can be made to pay attention to the change from the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state to the stage image 706 unique to the special time-saving gaming state.

(Variation of variation example 10)
Figures 192 to 194 are figures showing modified examples of variation performance example 10.
In the variation presentation example 10, a variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 is described as the first variation presentation in the special time-saving game state, but the first variation presentation in the special time-saving game state is not limited to the above example.
In the following, a modified example of the variation presentation example 10 will be described with reference to Figures 192 to 194. This modified example is an example in which a variation presentation based on a game ball entering the second start hole 122 is performed as the first variation presentation in the special time-saving game state. In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation presentation examples may be omitted.

First, in the same manner as in the variation performance example 10, in the normal game state, the final variation performance among the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to enter the special time-saving game state. Also, when a predetermined time has passed since the final variation performance ended without a game ball entering either the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed as shown in FIG. 192 (1). Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all enter the eighth mode. Also, at this time, the sound output device 9 outputs a notification sound to notify that the special time-saving game state is entered. The state shown in FIG. 192 (1) is the same state as the state shown in FIG. 184 (5) in the variation performance example 10.

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 192 (2), the audio output device 9 starts to output a sound effect indicating that the pachinko game machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving game state. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 continue to be difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all continue to be in the eighth mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 192 (3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth state to the second state. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 continue to be difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 192 (4), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 increases. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 are in a state where they are visible to the player, although they are not easily visible to the player. Meanwhile, neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. Also, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 192 (5), the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 progresses, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 becomes even higher. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the small pattern 704 changes and is displayed at high speed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 122 remains showing "0". At this time, neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 continue to be visible to the player, although they are not easily visible to the player. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the pachinko game machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving game state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 192(6), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends, and the customer waiting image 710 becomes non-displayed. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 become easily visible to the player. At this time, the variation start operation ends, and the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes high speed. At this time, the countdown image 732, "0", is displayed. On the other hand, neither the variation image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed on the first image display device 70. At this time, the sound effect that the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to the special time-saving game state is no longer output from the sound output device 9.
In addition, at this time, when the game ball enters the second start hole 122, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 122. In addition, a winning sound that notifies the winning of the second start hole 122 is output from the audio output device 9. On the other hand, the reserved image 702 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 193 (7), a special time-saving start image 733 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 193 ( 8 ), the display of the second transitional image 734 is started, and the second transitional image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 193 ( 9 ), a second transitional image 734 is displayed over the entire first image display device 70 .
Next, as shown in Fig. 193 (10), a special time-saving selection image 735 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on the "a" mode in the special time-saving selection image 735.
Next, as shown in FIG. 193(11), a mode start image 736 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 193 (12), the second transition image 734 and the mode start image 736 are not displayed, and the low-decorative decorative pattern 700 "125" is temporarily stopped on the first image display device 70. At this time, the background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, the third right-hit image 737 and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 are displayed. Also, "0" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121, and "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122. Also, one reserved image 702 is displayed. On the other hand, the variable image 701 is not displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "125", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 194 (13).

As described above, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 is displayed (see FIG. 185(10)), and then the variable image 701 is displayed (see FIG. 185(11)). On the other hand, if a game ball enters the second start hole 122 while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, neither the reserved image 702 nor the variable image 701 is displayed (see FIG. 192(6)).
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the reserved image 702 and the variable image 701 based on winning at the first start gate 121 are not displayed even though the stage image 706 having a background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the reserved image 702 and the variable image 701 based on winning at the second start gate 122, which is difficult to win at in the normal game state, are displayed even though the stage image 706 having a background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a reservation is made for a winning entry into the first starting port 121 during the first variable presentation in the special time-saving game state, the reservation image 702 is displayed when a stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed (see FIG. 176 (6)), and the reservation image 702 is not displayed when a stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the special time-saving game state is displayed (see FIG. 177 (12)).
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the reserved image 702 based on winning at the first start port 121 is not displayed even though the stage image 706 made of a background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the reserved image 702 based on winning at the first start port 121, which is difficult to win in the special time-saving game state, is displayed even though the stage image 706 made of a background corresponding to the special time-saving game state is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a reservation is made for a winning entry into the second starting port 122 during the first variable presentation in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 is not displayed when a stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed (see FIG. 192 (6)), and the reserved image 702 is displayed when a stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the special time-saving game state is displayed (see FIG. 193 (12)).
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the reserved image 702 based on winning at the second start port 122, which is difficult to win in the normal game state, is displayed even though the stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the reserved image 702 based on winning at the second start port 122, which is easy to win in the special time-saving game state, is not displayed even though the stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the special time-saving game state is displayed.

(Other examples of variation performance example 10)
Figure 195 is a diagram showing another presentation example in variable presentation example 10.
In the variation performance example 10, an example is described in which the first variation performance in the special time-saving game state starts when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, but the performance that is performed when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed is not limited to the above example.
In the following, other examples of the variation performance example 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 195. In the following description, the differences from the above-mentioned variation performance examples and modified examples will be mainly described, and the explanation of the points that match the variation performance examples and modified examples may be omitted.

First, as in the case of the variation performance example 10, the final variation performance among the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to enter the special time-saving game state. Also, when a predetermined time has passed since the final variation performance ended without a game ball entering either the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed as shown in FIG. 195 (1). Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all enter the eighth mode. Also, at this time, an alarm sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify that the special time-saving game state is entered. The state shown in FIG. 195 (1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 184 (5) in the variation performance example 10.

If an abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 57a while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, a magnetic error occurs, and as shown in FIG. 195 (2), a magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth state to the ninth state. The ninth state is a light emission state in which the light periodically flashes in orange, and is a state different from any of the first state to the eighth state. The ninth state is also considered to be a state that suggests or notifies the occurrence of an error. The flashing period in the ninth state is, for example, 1.5 seconds. That is, the flashing period in the ninth state is longer than the flashing period in the light emission performance when a winning prize is won. At this time, a warning sound is output from the audio output device 9 along with the voice "Magnet detected."

As described above, in this embodiment, if an error occurs while a specific image is being displayed in a special time-saving game state, the sound output mode is switched to a mode corresponding to the occurrence of the error. Therefore, even if the player takes his/her eyes off the pachinko game machine 100 while the specific image is being displayed, the player can be made aware that an error has occurred.

In the example shown in FIG. 195(2), if a magnetic error occurs when the customer waiting image 710 and the second right hit image 725 are displayed, neither the customer waiting image 710 nor the second right hit image 725 is displayed, and the magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed. However, this is not limited to this. If a magnetic error occurs when the customer waiting image 710 or the second right hit image 725 is displayed, the customer waiting image 710 and the right hit image 725 may continue to be displayed, and the magnetic error notification image 741 may be displayed on a layer in front of the customer waiting image 710.

In addition, regardless of the game status, if an error occurs when a specific image is displayed, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched to the ninth mode, the sound output mode is switched to a mode corresponding to the occurrence of the error, and further, a magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed.
In addition, not only when an error occurs while a specific image is being displayed, but in any case, when an error occurs, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched to the ninth state, the sound output state is switched to a state corresponding to the occurrence of the error, and further, a magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed.

(Variation of variation example 11)
Figures 196 to 198 are figures showing modified examples of variable performance example 11.
In the variable performance example 11, as the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state, a variable performance in which the result of the lottery for the special pattern based on winning at the first starting port 121 is a miss has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.
In the following, a modified example of the variation presentation example 11 will be described with reference to Figures 196 to 198. This modified example is an example in which a variation presentation is performed in which the result of the special symbol lottery based on winning the second start port 122 is a big win as the first variation presentation in the special time-saving game state. In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and modified examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that match the variation presentation examples and modified examples may be omitted.

First, in the same manner as in the variation performance example 11, in the normal game state, the final variation performance among the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to enter the special time-saving game state. Also, when a predetermined time has passed since the final variation performance ended without a game ball entering either the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122, an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed as shown in FIG. 196 (1). Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the fifth mode. Also, although not shown, at this time, the sound output device 9 outputs background music according to the previous variation performance at a lower volume than during the execution of the variation performance. The state shown in FIG. 196 (1) is the same state as the state shown in FIG. 189 (1) in the variation performance example 11.

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in Fig. 196 (2), a sound effect indicating that the pachinko game machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving game state is output from the sound output device 9. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all continue to be in the fifth mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 196 (3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the fifth mode to the second mode. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

196(4), the non-display effect of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 is started, and the transparency of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 increases. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 196(5), the non-display effect of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 ends, and the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are hidden. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the small pattern 704 is displayed to change at high speed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 still shows "0", and neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. At this time, the sound effect that the pachinko game machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving game state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 196(6), the change start operation ends, and the change of the decorative pattern 700 becomes high speed. At this time, the countdown image 732 "0" is displayed. At this time, neither the change image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the pachinko game machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving game state is no longer output from the sound output device 9.
Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 122, as shown in FIG. 197 (7), the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 122 displays "1". In addition, a winning sound that notifies the winning of the second start hole 122 is output from the audio output device 9. On the other hand, the reserved image 702 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 197 ( 8 ), the display of the second transitional image 734 begins, and the second transitional image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70 .
Next, as shown in Fig. 197(9), the second transition image 734 is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70. That is, the second transition image 734 is displayed without displaying the special time-saving start image 733 (see Fig. 190(9)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (10), the second transition image 734 is hidden and the repeated number decorative pattern 700 "444" is temporarily stopped. At this time, the stage image 706 is displayed again. In the illustrated example, the background corresponding to the first stage is shown as the stage image 706. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c switch from the second state to the seventh state. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up orange, the board lamp 74b lights up yellow, the movable member lamp 74c lights up green, and the button lamp 17c lights up blue. At this time, the execution count image 705 and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are not displayed.

Then, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "444", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 197 (11). At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c continue to be in the seventh mode. In the example shown, the top lamp 10b lights up yellow, the board lamp 74b lights up green, the movable member lamp 74c lights up blue, and the button lamp 17c lights up in indigo.

Next, as shown in Fig. 197 (12), an opening image 719 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the seventh position to the second position.
Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (13), a first right hit image 720 and a promotion image 721 are displayed.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the promotion image 721, a round in progress image 722 and a round number image 723 are displayed, as shown in Fig. 198 (14). In the illustrated example, the round number image 723 displays the text "Round 1".
Next, when the final round is over, as shown in Fig. 198 (15), a normal time-saving selection image 745 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is set to the "A" mode in the normal time-saving selection image 745.
Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal time-saving selection image 745 was displayed, the normal time-saving start image 724 is displayed as shown in Fig. 198 (16). At this time, a card warning image 739 and a game warning image 740 are also displayed.

Next, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 198 (17), the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness, "444", is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70. And, like the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704 is also fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "444". Also, at this time, a background corresponding to the third stage is displayed as the stage image 706. Also, at this time, the second right-hit image 725 and the normal time-saving remaining number image 726 are displayed. Also, "0" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121, and "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122. Also, one reserved image 702 is displayed.

In this modified example, the variable presentation based on winning when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed before the start of the first variable presentation in the special time-saving game state is described. Here, the variable presentation described in this modified example may be executed based on winning at the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed before the start of the first variable presentation in the special time-saving game state (see FIG. 184 (5)).

In this way, when the specified number of times is reached (when entering the special time-saving game state), the first predetermined image (second transition image 734, etc.) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the first performance is performed in which the decorative pattern 700 appears again. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, a second performance is performed in which the decorative pattern 700 indicating a jackpot is displayed. In addition, both when the first performance is performed and when the second performance is performed, a transition to the time-saving game state occurs. The performance mode of the second performance in the case of a jackpot differs between when the specified number of times is reached and when the specified number of times is not reached.
In this case, when the specified number of times is reached, the first predetermined image is displayed and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, making the player expect a transition to a special mode (special time-saving game state), and improving the interest. Also, if a jackpot occurs outside the specified number of times, the game transitions to the time-saving game state. Also, by making the presentation mode different when the specified number of times is reached and when the jackpot occurs outside the specified number of times, the presentation can be diversified, and the interest can be improved.

Furthermore, when the specified number of times is reached (when entering a special time-saving game state), a first performance is performed in which a first predetermined image (second transition image 734, etc.) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 appears again. In the case of a jackpot, a second performance is performed in which the decorative pattern 700 indicating a jackpot is displayed. In both cases, the first performance and the second performance are performed, and the game moves to a time-saving game state. When the specified number of times is reached, the performance mode of the first performance differs between a jackpot and a miss.
In this case, when the specified number of times is reached, the presentation mode of the first presentation can be made different in the case of a big win and in the case of a miss, thereby diversifying the presentation and improving interest.

In addition, the right-hit notification effect when the first effect is performed (display of special time-saving start image 733) and the right-hit notification effect when the second effect is performed (display of first right-hit image 720 and promotion image 721) have different presentation styles.
In this case, the presentation can be diversified by making the presentation mode of the right-hit notification presentation different when the first presentation is performed and when the second presentation is performed.

Furthermore, when the first performance is performed, a transition is made to a specific mode indicating the second game state (time-saving game state) without displaying the card warning image 739 (game warning image 740), and when the second performance is performed, a transition is made to a specific mode indicating the second game state (time-saving game state) after displaying the card warning image 739 (game warning image 740).
In this case, in the event of a jackpot, a card warning image 739 (game warning image 740) can be displayed to alert the player, and when entering a special time-saving game state, these images can be not displayed, allowing an immediate transition to a presentation mode showing the special time-saving game state.

In addition, the first time from when the first predetermined image is displayed until when the game state transitions to the second game state (time-saving game state) is shorter than the second time from when the second predetermined image is displayed until when the game state transitions to the second game state (time-saving game state).
In this case, when the first predetermined image is displayed, the game state can be shifted to the second game state in a short time, thereby improving the interest of the player.

(Example of variation 12)
199 and 200 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation performance example 12) of the variation performance will be described with reference to Fig. 199 and Fig. 200. Variation performance example 12 includes two variation performances. The first of these two variation performances is a variation performance based on a game ball winning the first start hole 121 in a special time-saving game state. The second variation performance is a variation performance based on a game ball winning the second start hole 122 in a special time-saving game state.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned various variable presentation examples and modified examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the various variable presentation examples and modified examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 199(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the performance control unit 300 when the previous special pattern variation ends. At this time, the text "700" is displayed in the special time-saving remaining number image 738. A background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 and the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 both show "0". The top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the first mode. Although not shown, the BGM corresponding to the previous variation performance is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the game ball enters the first start hole 121, as shown in FIG. 199(2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the variable display of the special pattern. Meanwhile, the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121 still shows "0". Also, neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. Also, the display content of the special time-saving remaining number image 738 is updated to "699". Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the first state to the second state.
Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 122, as shown in FIG. 199(3), the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 122 displays "1". At this time, a step-by-step display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 199(4), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the operation performance of the reserved image 702 is started. On the other hand, even when the stage display performance is completed, the reserved image 702 does not move to the variable pedestal 701P, but continues to be displayed on the first reserved pedestal 702P. The winning sound is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.
Also, at this time, when the game ball enters the second start hole 122, "2" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 122. Also, at this time, a step-by-step display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the second reserved pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 199(5), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the second reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the second reserved image 702 is started. Also, the winning sound that notifies the winning of the second starting hole 122 is continuously output until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "364", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 199(6).

Next, as shown in FIG. 200(7), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the display of the next special pattern. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 122 switches to "1". At this time, the second reserved image 702 moves toward the first reserved base 702P. The first reserved image 702 moves toward the variable base 701P and expands, thereby displaying the variable image 701. The display content of the special time-saving remaining number image 738 is updated to "698".
Next, as shown in FIG. 200(8), the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "712", are fixed and stopped with the special symbols being stopped. Also, the variable image 701 is not displayed.

(Example of variation 13)
201 to 203 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 13) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 201 to 203. The variable performance example 13 is a variable performance based on the game ball entering the second start hole 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned various variable presentation examples and modified examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the various variable presentation examples and modified examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 201(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the performance control unit 300 when the variation of the previous special pattern ends. Also, at this time, the text "600" is displayed in the special time-saving remaining number image 738. Also, the background corresponding to the 7th stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The 7th stage is the stage that is set when the "b" mode is selected in the special time-saving selection image 735 (see FIG. 177(10)). Also, "0" is displayed in both the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 and the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122. Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the first mode. Also, although not shown, the BGM corresponding to the previous variation performance is continuously output from the sound output device 9.

Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 122, as shown in FIG. 201 (2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the small pattern 704 changes and is displayed at high speed. Also, the display content of the special time-saving remaining number image 738 is updated to "599". Also, at this time, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 122. Also, at this time, a step-by-step display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserved base 702P. Also, at this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output the winning sound. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the first state to the second state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 201 (3), the operation at the start of the fluctuation progresses. At this time, the stage display performance is completed, and a rectangular reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. This reserved image 702 has a display size larger than the example shown in FIG. 201 (2). The display mode of this rectangular reserved image 702 is a display mode corresponding to the seventh stage. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the operation performance of the reserved image 702 begins. The winning sound is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 201(4), the start-of-variation operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. Also, the reserved image 702 moves to the variable base 701P and expands, so that the variable image 701 is displayed. Also, at this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 switches to "0".
Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 122, as shown in FIG. 201 (5), the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 122 displays "1". At this time, the stage display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output the winning sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 201 (6), the stage display performance is completed, and the rectangular reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 begins. The winning sound continues to be output until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 202(7), the left decorative pattern 700 "4" temporarily stops, and then the right decorative pattern 700 "4" temporarily stops, and the reach performance begins.
Next, as shown in FIG. 202(8), the "4" which is the middle decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, and the "444" which is the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped. That is, the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped without performing either the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched from the second mode to the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b is lit in orange, the board lamp 74b is lit in yellow, the movable member lamp 74c is lit in green, and the button lamp 17c is lit in blue.

Then, as the special symbol stops varying, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "444", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 202 (9). At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c continue to be in the seventh mode. In the example shown, the top lamp 10b lights up yellow, the board lamp 74b lights up green, the movable member lamp 74c lights up blue, and the button lamp 17c lights up indigo blue.

Next, as shown in Fig. 202(10), an opening image 719 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the seventh position to the second position.
Next, as shown in FIG. 202 (11), a first right hit image 720 and a promotion image 721 are displayed.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the promotion image 721, a round in progress image 722 and a round number image 723 are displayed, as shown in Fig. 202 (12). In the illustrated example, the round number image 723 displays the text "Round 1".
Next, when the final round is over, as shown in Fig. 203 (13), a normal time-saving selection image 745 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is set to the "A" mode in the normal time-saving selection image 745.
Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal time-saving selection image 745 was displayed, the normal time-saving start image 724 is displayed as shown in Fig. 203 (14). At this time, a card warning image 739 and a game warning image 740 are also displayed.

Next, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 203 (15), the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness, "444", is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70. Then, the small pattern 704 is also fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "444" like the decorative pattern 700. At this time, a background corresponding to the third stage is displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, the second right-hit image 725 and the normal time-saving remaining number image 726 are displayed. Also, "0" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121, and "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122. Also, one reserved image 702 is displayed.

(Step-by-step display of the rectangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode)
Next, a step-by-step display effect using the rectangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode will be described. Fig. 204 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step display effect using the rectangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
The rectangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode performs four stages as a stage display performance. When the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, a highly transparent reserved image 702 is displayed in white as the first stage of the stage display performance, as shown in FIG. 204(1). This reserved image 702 is a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 201(2) and FIG. 201(5).

Next, as shown in FIG. 204(2), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the first stage is displayed in white as the second stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is formed by arranging a plurality of images each having a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. In the illustrated example, in the reserved image 702, four rectangular images are arranged at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. This reserved image 702 is displayed with a display size larger than that of the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 202(3), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed in white as the third stage of the stage display performance. In the illustrated example, in the reserved image 702, six images each having a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction are displayed side by side at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. This reserved image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 202(4), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the third stage is displayed as the fourth stage, i.e., the final stage, of the staged display performance. This reserved image 702 is a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction. This reserved image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than the third stage. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the staged display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 201(3) and FIG. 201(6). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 201(2) and FIG. 201(5) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the staged display performance is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the staged display performance is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 201(3) and FIG. 201(6) is displayed.

In this way, the change from a stage where lines are formed on the reserved image 702 (see FIG. 204(3)) to a stage where lines are not formed on the reserved image 702 (see FIG. 204(4)) can also be regarded as a change in the form of the reserved image 702. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time from when the staged display performance begins to when the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed, i.e., the execution time of the staged display performance of the rectangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode, is 0.2 seconds.

When the stepwise display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 starts, as shown in FIG. 204 (5). The rectangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically swings up and down as a motion performance. The period of the swing in this motion performance is, for example, 2.0 seconds.

(Example of variation 14)
205 and 206 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 14) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Fig. 205 and Fig. 206. The variable performance example 14 is a variable performance example based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state, and is a variable performance example when the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off during the execution of the variable performance and then returns. In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples and each modified example will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as the variable performance examples and each modified example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 205(1), the first special pattern display 60 stops the display of the previous special pattern. Also, the first special pattern reserve display 63 displays the number of reserved balls for the first starting hole 121 as "3". Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70. Also, "3" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121, and three reserved images 702 are displayed. Also, the execution count image 705 displays the text "150 GAMES", and the remaining number of times reached image 708 displays the text "350 more". Also, the background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as the stage image 706. Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second state. Also, although not shown in the figure, background music corresponding to the previous variable performance continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 205 (2), the first special pattern display 60 starts to display the next special pattern. Also, the first special pattern reserve display 63 displays the number of reserved prizes for the first starting port 121 as "2". Also, as the display of the special pattern starts to change, the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 start to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 121 switches to "2".

Next, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the LEDs in the first special symbol display 60 and the first special symbol reserved display 63 go out, as shown in FIG. 205 (3). At this time, the first image display device 70, top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all go out. Additionally, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is restored, as shown in Fig. 205 (4), the variation of the special symbols in the first special symbol display 60 is resumed. Also, in the first special symbol reserve display 63, the number of reserved symbols for the winning in the first starting hole 121 is displayed as "2".
Thereafter, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all enter the tenth mode. The tenth mode is a light emission mode in which the lamps are lit in yellow-green, and is different from any of the first to ninth modes.
After that, a restoration in progress image 742 is displayed on the first image display device 70 .
On the other hand, since the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been restored, no sound has been output from the audio output device 9.

After that, as shown in FIG. 205 (5), the special pattern continues to change on the first special pattern display device 60. Also, on the first image display device 70, the recovery in progress image 742 continues to be displayed. Also, at this time, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the first special pattern reserve display device 63 displays the number of reserved balls for the entry into the first starting hole 121 as "3". On the other hand, neither the reserved image 702 nor the reserved number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70.

Next, as shown in FIG. 205 (6), the varying display of the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 60 stops.
After that, the non-display performance of the image 742 during the recovery is started, and the transparency of the image 742 during the recovery is increased. Then, by increasing the transparency of the image 742 during the recovery, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are in a state where they are not easily visible to the player, but are visible to the player. Also, at this time, all three reserved images 702 are displayed in a completed display mode. That is, the third reserved image 702 is displayed without being visible to the player in an incomplete display mode. Also, no sound is output from the sound output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 206(7), the non-display effect of the image 742 during recovery ends, and the image 742 during recovery becomes non-display. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the small pattern 704, the number of times of execution image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are all in a state where they are easily visible to the player. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704, "135", are fixed and stopped. Also, "3" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121. Also, the text "151 GAME" is displayed on the number of times of execution image 705, and the text "349 remaining" is displayed on the remaining number of times reached image 708. Meanwhile, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.
At this time, the motion presentation of the three pending images 702 is being executed, and all three pending images 702 are rotating clockwise from their initial positions before the motion presentation started.

Next, as shown in Fig. 206 (8), a warning sound notifying the start of the next variable performance is output from the audio output device 9. As an example, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound saying "Variable performance will start soon."
At this time, the motion presentation of the three pending images 702 continues, and the three pending images 702 further rotate in the clockwise direction.

Next, as shown in Fig. 206 (9), the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the next special symbol. Also, the first special symbol reserved display 63 displays the number of reserved symbols for the winning of the first starting hole 121 as "2".
After that, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 121 switches to "2". Also, the first reserved image 702 moves to the changing base 701P, and the changing image 701 is displayed. Also, BGM corresponding to the changing performance being performed is output from the audio output device 9. Although not shown in the figure, after that, as the special pattern stops changing, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped, and the changing image 701 is not displayed.

Figure 207 is an explanatory diagram of each effect in variable performance example 14.
As shown in FIG. 207, at time T1 of the variation performance example 14, the variation performance in the normal game state is started. At this time, the variation of the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 is started, and the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are in a state where they are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the action performance of the variable image 701 and the two reserved images 702 is executed, and the variable image 701 and the two reserved images 702 are in a state where they are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Also, at this time, the BGM according to the variation performance being executed is output from the sound output device 9. The state at time T1 is the state shown in FIG. 205 (2).

After that, at time T2, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, and the small pattern 704 are no longer displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all turned off. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9. The state at time T2 is the state shown in Figure 205 (3).

After that, at time T3, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored.
After that, at time T4, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all assume the tenth mode.
After that, at time T5, a recovery in progress image 742 is displayed. The state at time T5 is the state shown in FIG.
After that, at time T6, the game ball enters the first starting hole 121.

After that, at time T7, the variable effect that started before the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 was cut off ends. At this time, the non-display effect of the recovery image 742 starts. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped, and the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 become visible to the player. At this time, the display of the third reserved image 702 starts. This third reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode. At this time, the action effect of the three reserved images 702 is being executed. At this time, all three reserved images 702 become visible to the player. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the tenth mode to the second mode. The state at time T7 is the state shown in FIG. 205 (6).

After that, at time T8, the non-display effect of the image 742 during recovery ends, and the image 742 during recovery is no longer displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the three reserved images 702, and the small pattern 704 are all easily visible to the player. The state at time T8 is the state shown in FIG. 206 (7).
After that, at time T9, a warning sound notifying the start of the next variable performance is output from the sound output device 9. The state at time T9 is the state shown in FIG. 206(8).

After that, at time T10, the next change performance starts. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change. At this time, background music corresponding to the change performance being executed is output from the sound output device 9.
After that, at time T11, the first reserved image 702 moves to the variable stage 701P, and the display of the variable image 701 starts. The state at time T11 is shown in FIG.
This is the state shown in FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, if a prize is won after the power to the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off and the special pattern that was being executed at the time of power cut is changing, i.e., while the recovery image 742 is being displayed, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed without the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode being visible to the player.
In this case, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is quickly visible to the player after the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and then restored. Therefore, the player can quickly recognize that a reservation will occur due to a win in the first starting hole 121 while the restoration image 742 is being displayed, that is, when the decorative pattern 700 and the stage image 706 are not being displayed, and the player can be given a sense of security.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power to the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off and then restored while there is a hold, the hold image 702 is displayed in an action before the next variation of the variation being executed when the power is restored is started (see Figure 206 (7)).
In this case, the reserved image 702 becomes more noticeable than when no action is displayed on the reserved image 702. Therefore, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the reserved image has not been lost when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power to the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off and then restored while there is a hold, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are displayed as still images when they are redisplayed, but the hold image 702 is displayed as an animated image.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused when the decorative pattern 700 or the small pattern 704 is redisplayed and the player is unable to recognize which variation the action display corresponds to. Also, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the reserved balls that were reserved when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 100 was cut off have not been lost due to the power cut off.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the reserved image 702 that was hidden is gradually redisplayed (see FIG. 157 (15) and FIG. 157 (16)). On the other hand, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored while there is a reserved image, the reserved image 702 that was hidden is displayed all at once (see FIG. 206 (7)).
In this case, when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the player can be made to recognize that the hidden reserved image 702 has not disappeared while suppressing the sense of incongruity caused by the re-display of the stage image 706, etc. Also, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored, the player can be made to recognize immediately that the reserved image at the time of the cut off has not been lost due to the cut off of the power supply, and the player can be made to feel at ease. In other words, by changing the manner in which the reserved image 702 is redisplayed depending on whether the reserved image 702 has been hidden by the effect or not, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, both the hidden variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 are redisplayed (see FIG. 157 (16)). On the other hand, when the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off and then restored while there is a reserved image, the hidden variable image 701 is not redisplayed, but the reserved image 702 is redisplayed (see FIG. 206 (9)).
In this case, when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the player can be made to recognize that the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed in the variable effect based on the variable image 701. In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and then restored while there is a reserved ball, the variable image 701 is redisplayed, which can cause the player to mistakenly believe that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 was turned off will be executed again.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored while there is a hold, the hold image 702 is displayed before the sound effect is output (see Figures 206 (7) and 206 (8)).
In this case, the player can be made aware of the reserved number before the variable presentation starts after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored.

In particular, in this embodiment, when a prize is won in a special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the mode of sound output is switched before the display of the reserved image 702 is completed. On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored while there is a reserved ball, the display of the reserved image 702 is completed before the effect sound is output. In other words, the chronological relationship between the sound output timing and the display timing of the reserved image 702 is reversed depending on whether the reserved image 702 is not displayed because there is no reserved ball, or the reserved image 702 is not displayed despite there being a reserved ball.
In this case, by making the player quickly aware that a special time-saving game state presentation will begin or by making the player quickly aware of the number of reserved balls depending on the state of the pachinko game machine 100, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing regardless of the state of the pachinko game machine 100.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored, a sound effect is output after the restoration image 742 is no longer displayed.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the output sound effect for a sound related to the power being restored, and to make the player aware that the performance will resume.

In particular, in this embodiment, when a prize is won while a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output mode is switched before the specific image is hidden. On the other hand, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the restoration image 742 is hidden. In other words, the chronological relationship between the sound output timing and the image non-display timing is reversed depending on whether an image is displayed based on the change in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100.
In this case, depending on whether an image is displayed based on a change in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, the player is made to recognize the effects while suppressing misinterpretation by the player, or the player is made to recognize the effects as soon as possible, thereby making it possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing regardless of the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and then restored, a sound effect is output after the decorative pattern 700 is displayed.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the output sound for a sound related to the power being restored, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is a sound related to a variable presentation.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in a special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output mode is switched before the decorative pattern 700 becomes easily visible. On the other hand, if the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the decorative pattern 700 becomes easily visible. In other words, depending on whether the decorative pattern 700 has become unvisible based on a change in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, the effect is made visible to the player while suppressing the player's misconception, or the effect is made visible to the player as soon as possible, thereby making it difficult for the player's interest to decrease regardless of the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and then turned back on, a sound effect is output after the small symbol 704 is displayed.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the output sound for a sound related to the power being restored, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is a sound related to a variable presentation.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in a special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output mode is switched before the small symbols 704 become easily visible. On the other hand, if the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the small symbols 704 become easily visible. In other words, depending on whether the small symbols 704 have become invisible based on a change in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, the effect is made visible to the player while suppressing the player's misconception, or the effect is made visible to the player as soon as possible, thereby making it difficult for the player's interest to decrease regardless of the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and then restored, a sound effect is output after the top lamp 10b emits light.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the output sound for a sound related to the power being restored, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is a sound related to the presentation.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in a special time-saving game state before the start of a special effect, the sound output mode is switched before switching the mode of the top lamp 10b. On the other hand, if the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the top lamp 10b switches from an off state to an illuminating state. In other words, depending on whether the top lamp 10b has entered a specific state based on a change in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, the effect is made to be recognized by the player while suppressing the player's misconception, or by making the player recognize the effect as soon as possible, thereby making it difficult for the player's interest to decrease regardless of the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and then restored, the board lamp 74b lights up and then a performance sound is output.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the output sound for a sound related to the power being restored, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is a sound related to the presentation.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output state is switched before the state of the board lamp 74b is switched. On the other hand, if the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the board lamp 74b switches from an off state to an illuminating state. In other words, depending on whether the board lamp 74b has entered a specific state based on the change in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, the effect is made to be recognized by the player while suppressing the player's misconception, or by making the player recognize the effect as soon as possible, thereby making it difficult for the player's interest to decrease regardless of the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and then restored, the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c are illuminated and then a performance sound is output.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the output sound for a sound related to the power being restored, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is a sound related to the presentation.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output state is switched before the state of the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c is switched. On the other hand, if the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c switch from the off state to the lit state. In other words, depending on whether the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c have entered a specific state based on the change in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, the effect is made to be recognized by the player while suppressing the player's misconception, or by making the player recognize the effect as soon as possible, thereby making it difficult for the player's interest to decrease regardless of the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

(Example of variation 15)
208 and 209 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 15) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Fig. 208 and Fig. 209. Variation presentation example 15 is a variation presentation example based on winning the second start hole 122 in a special time-saving game state, and is a variation presentation example when the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off during the execution of the variation presentation and then returned. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and each modified example will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation presentation examples and each modified example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 208(1), the second special symbol display 61 stops the display of the previous special symbol. Also, the first special symbol reserved display 63 displays the reserved number for the winning entry into the first starting gate 121 as "0", that is, it is turned off. Also, the second special symbol reserved display 64 displays the reserved number for the winning entry into the second starting gate 122 as "3". Also, at this time, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70. Also, "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting gate 121, and "3" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the second starting gate 122. Also, three reserved images 702 are displayed. Also, the text "700" is displayed in the special time-saving remaining number image 738. Also, as the stage image 706, a background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed. Additionally, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second state. Although not shown in the figure, the background music corresponding to the previous variable performance is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 208 (2), the second special pattern display 61 starts displaying the next special pattern. Also, the second special pattern reserve display 64 displays the number of reserved prizes for the second starting port 122 as "2". Also, as the display of the special pattern starts, the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 start to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 122 switches to "2". Also, the display content of the special time-saving remaining number of times image 738 is updated to "699".

Next, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the LEDs in the second special symbol display 61, the first special symbol reserved display 63, and the second special symbol reserved display 64 go out, as shown in FIG. 208 (3). At this time, the first image display device 70, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all go out. Also, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is restored, as shown in Fig. 208 (4), the variation of the special symbols in the second special symbol display 61 is resumed. Also, in the second special symbol reserve display 64, the number of reserved symbols for the winning in the second starting hole 122 is displayed as "2".
Thereafter, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all assume the tenth position.
After that, the return in progress image 742 and the second right hit image 725 are displayed on the first image display device 70.
On the other hand, since the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been restored, no sound has been output from the audio output device 9.

After that, as shown in FIG. 208 (5), the special symbol continues to change on the second special symbol display device 61. Also, on the first image display device 70, the recovery image 742 continues to be displayed. Also, at this time, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the first special symbol reserve display device 63 displays the number of reserved balls for the winning ball in the first starting hole 121 as "1". On the other hand, on the first image display device 70, neither the reserved image 702 nor the reserved number display 703 is displayed. Also, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 208 (6), the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays the reserved number for the winning at the first starting hole 121 as "2". On the other hand, the first image display device 70 does not display either the reserved image 702 or the reserved number display 703. In addition, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 209 (7), the second special symbol reserved display 64 displays the reserved number for the entry into the second starting hole 122 as "3". On the other hand, neither the reserved image 702 nor the reserved number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70.

Next, as shown in FIG. 209 (8), the variable display of the special pattern stops on the second special pattern display device 61.
After that, the non-display effect of the recovery image 742 is started, and when the transparency of the recovery image 742 is increased, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, the stage image 706, and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 are in a state where they are not easily visible to the player, but are visible to the player. Also, at this time, the third reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode without a step-by-step display effect. Also, at this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

209(9), the non-display effect of the recovery image 742 ends, and the recovery image 742 becomes non-display. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 become easily visible to the player. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704, "135", are fixed and stopped. The reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 shows "2", and the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 shows "3". The text "699" is displayed on the special time-saving remaining number image 738. At this time, the action effect of the reserved image 702 is being executed, and all three reserved images 702 have moved to the right from their initial positions before the action effect was started. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 209 (10), a warning sound is output from the audio output device 9 to warn that the next change performance will start. At this time, the motion performance of the reserved images 702 continues, and all three reserved images 702 have moved to the left from their initial positions before the motion performance started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 209 (11), the second special symbol display 61 starts to display the next special symbol. Also, the second special symbol reserve display 64 displays the number of reserved symbols for the winning of the second starting hole 122 as "2".
After that, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 122 switches to "2". Also, the first reserved image 702 moves to the changing base 701P, and the changing image 701 is displayed. Also, BGM corresponding to the changing performance being performed is output from the audio output device 9. Although not shown in the figure, after that, as the special pattern stops changing, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped, and the changing image 701 is not displayed.

(Example of variation 16)
210 to 212 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 16) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Figs. 210 to 212. Variation presentation example 16 is an example of the first variation presentation based on winning the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of variation presentation when the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off during the execution of the variation presentation and then returned. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and each modified example will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation presentation examples and each modified example may be omitted.

First, in the normal game state, the final variable performance among the predetermined times required to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to enter the special time-saving game state. Also, when a predetermined time has passed since the final variable performance was completed without a game ball entering either the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed as shown in FIG. 210(1). Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become the eighth mode. Also, at this time, a notification sound that notifies that the special time-saving game state is entered is output from the sound output device 9. The state shown in FIG. 210(1) is the same state as the state shown in FIG. 184(5) in the variable performance example 10.
In addition, the second special symbol reserved display 64 displays the reserved number for the winning in the second starting hole 122 as "0." In other words, the LED in the second special symbol reserved display 64 is turned off.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 210 (2), the audio output device 9 begins to output a sound effect indicating that the pachinko game machine 100 has been controlled to a special time-saving game state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 210(3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth position to the second position.
Next, as shown in FIG. 210(4), the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 is started, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 is increased, so that the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are in a state where they are not easily visible to the player, but are visible to the player. Also, as the stage image 706, a background corresponding to the first stage is shown. Also, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 210(5), the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 progresses, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 becomes even higher. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the small pattern 704 is displayed to change at high speed. At this time, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 121. At this time, the display of the reserved image 702 starts. Meanwhile, the step display performance is not executed, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the pachinko game machine 100 has been controlled to a special time-saving game state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 210 (6), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends, and the customer waiting image 710 becomes non-display. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, reserved image 702, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 become easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the start of the fluctuation operation is in progress. Also, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 211 (7), the start-of-variation operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. The pending image 702 moves to the variation base 701P and expands, causing the variable image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 121 switches to "0". At this time, the countdown image 732, "0", is displayed. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9. Although not shown in the figure, background music corresponding to the variation performance being performed is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the first image display device 70, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all go out, as shown in FIG. 211 (8). In addition, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored, the variable display of the special symbols is resumed. After that, as shown in FIG. 211(9), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become the tenth mode.
After that, a recovery in progress image 742 is displayed on the first image display device 70. On the other hand, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.
In addition, when the recovery image 742 is displayed, if a game ball enters the second start hole 122, the second special symbol reservation display 64 displays the reservation number for the entry into the second start hole 122 as "1." On the other hand, neither the reservation image 702 nor the reservation number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70.

Next, when the special symbol stops fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 211 (10), the non-display effect of the recovery image 742 starts, and the transparency of the recovery image 742 increases. Then, by increasing the transparency of the recovery image 742, the decorative symbol 700, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small symbol 704, the stage image 706, and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 become visible to the player, although they are not easily visible to the player. At this time, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode without a step-by-step display effect. Also, as the stage image 706, a background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the tenth mode to the second mode. Also, no sound is output from the sound output device 9.

211 (11), the non-display effect of the recovery image 742 ends, and the recovery image 742 becomes non-display. As a result, the decorative symbol 700, the reserved image 702, the small symbol 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 become easily visible to the player. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "135", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 shows "0", and the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 shows "1". In addition, the text "749" is displayed in the special time-saving remaining number image 738. In addition, the action effect of the reserved image 702 is being executed at this time, and the reserved image 702 has moved to the left from the initial position before the action effect was started. In addition, no sound is output from the audio output device 9 at this time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 211 (12), a warning sound is output from the audio output device 9 to warn that the next change performance will start. At this time, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 continues, and the reserved image 702 moves to the right from its initial position before the motion performance started.

Next, when the display of the special symbol changes starts, as shown in FIG. 212 (13), the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 start changing. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 122 switches to "0". Also, the first reserved image 702 moves to the changing base 701P, and the changing image 701 is displayed. Also, the display content of the special time-saving remaining number image 738 is updated to "748". Also, background music according to the changing performance being performed is output from the audio output device 9. Although not shown in the figure, after this, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped, and the changing image 701 is no longer displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the power to the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off and then restored while the special time-saving game state is fluctuating and a special image corresponding to the normal game state is being displayed, a special image corresponding to the special time-saving game state is displayed.
In this case, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the player can be made to quickly recognize that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the special time-saving gaming state.

When the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored while the fluctuations in the special time-saving gaming state are stopped and the decorative pattern 700 and stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state are displayed, the decorative pattern 700 and stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state are displayed again. In this case, the special image corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state will not be displayed unless a win occurs in the first start port 121 or the second start port 122.

(Example of variation 17)
213 and 214 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 17) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Fig. 213 and Fig. 214. The variable performance example 17 is a variable performance example based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state, and is a variable performance example when the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off during the execution of the variable performance and then returned. In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples and each modified example will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as the variable performance examples and each modified example may be omitted.

First, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state, and then the final variable presentation in the special time-saving gaming state ends, so that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to the normal gaming state again without being controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 213 (1), the highly decorative decorative pattern 700 "421" is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70. Also, at this time, a background corresponding to the fifth stage is displayed as a stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state. Also, at this time, four reserved images 702, an execution count image 705, and a left hit image 730 are displayed. Also, the execution count image 705 displays the text "1253 GAME". Also, on the first special pattern display 60, the variable display of the previous special pattern is stopped. Also, on the first special pattern reservation display 63, the number of reserved prizes for the first start hole 121 is displayed in a manner in which "4" is displayed. The state shown in Figure 213 (1) is the same as the state shown in Figure 180 (29) in Variation Presentation Example 9.

Next, as the special symbol stops changing, the first special symbol display 60 starts changing and displaying the next special symbol, as shown in FIG. 213 (2). Also, the first special symbol reserved display 63 displays the number of reserved winnings in the first starting hole 121 as "3". Also, as the special symbol starts changing and displaying, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 start changing. Also, background music according to the changing performance being performed is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the LEDs in the first special symbol display 60 and the first special symbol reserved display 63 go out, as shown in FIG. 213 (3). At this time, the first image display device 70, top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all go out. Additionally, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is restored, as shown in Fig. 213 (4), the variation of the special symbols in the first special symbol display 60 is resumed. Also, in the first special symbol reserve display 63, the number of reserved symbols for the winning of the first starting hole 121 is displayed as "3".
Thereafter, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all go to the 10 mode.
After that, a restoration in progress image 742 is displayed on the first image display device 70 .
On the other hand, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

After that, as shown in FIG. 213 (5), the special pattern continues to change on the first special pattern display device 60. Also, on the first image display device 70, the recovery in progress image 742 continues to be displayed. Also, at this time, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the first special pattern reserve display device 63 displays the number of reserved balls for the winning ball in the first starting hole 121 as "4". On the other hand, neither the reserved image 702 nor the reserved number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70.

Next, as shown in FIG. 213 (6), the varying display of the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 60 stops.
After that, the non-display performance of the image 742 during the recovery is started, and the transparency of the image 742 during the recovery is increased, so that the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, and the stage image 706 are in a state where they are not easily visible to the player, but are visible to the player. At this time, the fourth reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode without a stage display performance. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the tenth mode to the second mode. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 214(7), the non-display effect of the image 742 during recovery ends, and the image 742 during recovery becomes non-display. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, and the stage image 706 become easily visible to the player. In addition, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704, "135", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121 shows "4". In addition, the background corresponding to the first stage is shown as the stage image 706. In addition, at this time, the action effect of the reserved image 702 is being executed, and all of the four reserved images 702 are rotating in a clockwise direction from the initial position before the action effect is started. In addition, at this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9.
Here, the execution count image 705 displays content different from the display content (see FIG. 213(2)) immediately before the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 was cut off. In the illustrated example, the execution count image 705 displays the text "???."

Next, as shown in FIG. 214 (8), a warning sound is output from the audio output device 9 to warn that the next variable performance will start. At this time, the motion performance of the reserved images 702 continues, and the four reserved images 702 continue to rotate in the clockwise direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 214(9), the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the next special symbol. Also, the first special symbol reserved display 63 displays the number of reserved symbols for the winning of the first starting hole 121 as "3".
After that, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121 is switched to "3". Also, BGM according to the change performance being executed is output from the audio output device 9. Also, at this time, a through performance is executed. The through performance is a performance that notifies that the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to the normal game state again without executing a change performance in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot in the special time-saving game state. In the through performance, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become the 11th mode. The 11th mode is a mode of light emission that periodically flashes in purple, and is a mode different from any of the 1st mode to the 10th mode. Also, the period of flashing in the 11th mode is, for example, 2.0 seconds. In other words, the blinking period in the eleventh mode is longer than the blinking period in the light-emitting performance when a win occurs and the blinking period indicating or notifying the occurrence of an error.

In this way, the special time-saving game state can be executed only once between jackpots, and if the power is cut off during normal game mode after the special time-saving game state ends and then restored, a specific notification can be issued (displaying "???" on the execution count image 705, lighting the lamp in a specific manner) to indicate that the special time-saving game state has been executed. This allows for a friendly notification to be given to the player, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the special time-saving game state can be executed only once between jackpots, and if the power is cut off during normal game mode after the special time-saving game state ends and then restored, a first notification can be executed to notify the player that the power has been restored (display of restoration image 742) and a second notification can be executed to suggest that the special time-saving game state has been executed (display of execution count image 705 "???" and lighting of the lamp in a specific mode). This allows for friendly notifications to be given to the player, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if power is cut off and then restored during normal game mode after the special time-saving game mode ends, the error lamp is flashed with a specific notification, but the lamp is flashed in a different manner from when an error (magnetic error, etc.) occurs.
In addition, a specific notification is made by making the information (the execution count image 705) displayed during the normal game state into a specific display mode ("???").
In addition, when control is performed from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state without going through a jackpot game, regardless of whether the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off or not, the execution count image 705 may display "???." In other words, during the normal game state after the special time-saving game state ends and before the power supply is restored after being cut off, a first specific notification (the execution count image 705 "???") may be performed, and after the power supply is restored after being cut off, the first specific notification and the second specific notification (light emission of the lamp in a specific mode) may be performed.

In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off in a state controlled from a normal time-saving gaming state to a normal gaming state and then returns, it is set to the first stage, but even in this case, the clear negation image 744 is displayed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off in a state controlled from a special time-saving gaming state to a normal gaming state without going through a jackpot game and then returns, the clear negation image 744 is not displayed. In other words, when the power is cut off in the second presentation mode (fifth stage) after the end of the normal time-saving gaming state and then returns, even if it is controlled to the first presentation mode (first stage) after the return, it is possible to execute a specific notification (such as displaying the clear negation image 744) regarding the presence or absence of RAM clearing, and when the power is cut off in the second presentation mode (fifth stage) after the end of the special time-saving gaming state and then returns, even if it is controlled to the first presentation mode (first stage) after the recovery, it is not executed to execute a specific notification (such as displaying the clear negation image 744) regarding the presence or absence of RAM clearing. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of useful information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, it has been explained that when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to a special time-saving gaming state, and then is controlled to the normal gaming state again without being controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored, the text "???" is displayed in the execution count image 705, but this is not limited to the above.
When the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to the special time-saving game state and then controlled to the normal game state again without being controlled to the normal time-saving game state, the text "???" may be displayed in the execution count image 705 when the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state is displayed (see FIG. 213 (1)), regardless of whether the power to the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off or not.

(Example of variation 18)
FIG. 215 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 18) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 215. The variable performance example 18 is a variable performance example when a game ball enters the second start hole 122 while a pre-reading performance based on a winning entry into the first start hole 121 is being executed. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples and each modified example will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable performance examples and each modified example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 215(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped by the performance control unit 300. At this time, two reserved images 702 are displayed. The second reserved image 702 is displayed in green. The display of this green reserved image 702 is an example of a look-ahead performance. A background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as a stage image 706. The top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second state. Although not shown, the BGM corresponding to the previous variation performance is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 215 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change. At this time, the zone performance begins, and the zone notification image 743 is displayed. During the execution of the zone performance, the display content of the stage image 706 changes. In the illustrated example, the background corresponding to the eighth stage is displayed as the stage image 706.

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, the reserved number display 703 of the second starting hole 122 displays "1", as shown in FIG. 215 (3).
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "412", temporarily stop and then stop as shown in FIG. 215(4). At this time, the display mode of the first reserved image 702 switches from the green display mode to the normal display mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 215 (5), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 start to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 122 switches to "0". In other words, the change presentation being performed at this time is a change presentation based on winning at the second starting port 122. Also, at this time, the zone notification image 743 is hidden. Also, a background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as the stage image 706.

Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "721", stop as shown in FIG. 215 (6). After this, the first reserved image 702 moves to the changing base 701P, and a changing performance based on winning at the first starting hole 121 is executed. In this changing performance, the changing image 701 is displayed in the normal display mode, and when the changing performance ends, the changing image 701 is hidden.

In this way, in cases where a change based on winning at the second start port 122 is prioritized over a change based on winning at the first start port 121, when a win at the second start port 122 occurs during normal gameplay and a look-ahead presentation based on winning at the first start port 121 is being executed, the look-ahead presentation based on winning at the first start port 121 is terminated. This prevents the inconvenience of the look-ahead presentation based on winning at the first start port 121 being disrupted by a win at the second start port 122, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the special 1 pre-reading effect (display of the green reserved image 702) is ended at the timing of confirmation (end timing) of the change based on the winning at the first starting port 121.
In addition, when a look-ahead performance in which the background is changing is in progress, the look-ahead performance is ended at the timing when the change starts based on winning at the second starting port 122.
Also, for example, in a case where a look-ahead performance is being executed based on a winning entry into the first start port 121, a game ball may win into the second start port 122 while a variable performance based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 is stopped. In this case, the look-ahead performance is ended at the timing of the winning entry into the second start port 122.

(Example of variation 19)
FIG. 216 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 19) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 216. The variable performance example 19 is a variable performance example based on winning the second starting hole 122 in the normal game state. In addition, in the following explanation, the points different from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state, and then the final variable presentation in the special time-saving gaming state ends, whereby the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to the normal gaming state again, without being controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state. Then, as shown in FIG. 216 (1), the first image display device 70 displays the first transition image 728. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 121 shows "0", and the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 122 shows "1". Also, at this time, the small pattern 704, "254", is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 216(2), the small symbol 704 starts to change with the start of the change display of the next special symbol. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 switches to "0". Also, at this time, if a game ball enters the first start port, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 displays "1". On the other hand, the reserved image 702 is not displayed, and the winning sound that notifies the winning of the first start port 121 is not output.
However, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while the first transition image 728 is displayed, a winning sound may be output.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three small symbols 704, "421", are displayed together and fixed, as shown in FIG. 216 (3). Also, at this time, if the game ball enters the first starting hole, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121 displays "2". On the other hand, the reserved image 702 is not displayed, and the winning sound announcing the entry into the first starting hole 121 is not output.

When the variable presentation based on winning at the second start port 122 ends without any pending winning at the second start port 122, the highly decorative decorative pattern 700 "421" is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70, as shown in FIG. 216 (4). At this time, a background corresponding to the fifth stage is displayed as a stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state. At this time, two pending images 702 are displayed. These two pending images 702 are displayed in a completed display mode without a stepwise display presentation. Although not shown, both of the two pending images 702 are performing an action presentation. Also, the variable image 701 is not displayed.

Next, as the special pattern stops changing, the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 start changing, as shown in FIG. 216 (5). At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 121 displays "1". At this time, the second reserved image 702 moves toward the first reserved base 702P. Furthermore, the first reserved image 702 moves toward the changing base 701P, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. Although not shown in the figure, after this, as the special pattern stops changing, the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 20)
Figures 217 to 223 are figures showing an example of variable performance 20.
Next, another specific example of the variation presentation example (variation presentation example 20) will be described with reference to Figures 217 to 223. The variation presentation example 20 is a variation presentation example when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state. In the following description, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and each modified example will be mainly described, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation presentation examples and each modified example may be omitted.

First, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped with the previous special pattern stopping. Next, when a predetermined time has passed without a game ball winning in either the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 with no reserved balls for winning in the first start port 121, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed as shown in FIG. 217 (1). At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 become difficult or impossible for the player to see. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703 continues to be easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become the eighth mode. Also, at this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 217 (2), the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 continue to be difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all continue to be in the eighth mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 217 (3), the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth state to the second state. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 continue to be difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output the winning sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 217 (4), a non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is executed, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 increases, so that the decorative pattern 700, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 are visible to the player, although they are not easily visible to the player. On the other hand, neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. Also, at this time, the winning sound continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 217(5), the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 progresses, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 becomes even higher. Also, at this time, as the special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 start to change. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 starts to change at the start of the change, and the small symbol 704 is displayed to change at high speed. Also, at this time, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 121. Also, at this time, the display of the reserved image 702 starts. More specifically, the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode without the step-by-step display performance. This reserved image 702 is not easily visible to the player, but is visible to the player. Also, at this time, the sound of winning is continuously output from the sound output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 217 (6), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends, and the customer waiting image 710 becomes non-displayed. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, reserved image 702, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 become easily visible to the player. In addition, the operation at the start of the fluctuation is in progress. Also, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 218 (7), the operation at the start of the change ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. In addition, the pending image 702 moves to the change base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 121 switches to "0". Also, at this time, the winning sound is no longer output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as the game ball enters the first start hole 121, as shown in FIG. 218(8), the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121 displays "1". At this time, the stage display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output the winning sound.
Next, as shown in FIG. 218(9), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 is started. The winning sound is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 218 (10), the left decorative pattern 700, "4", temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 218 (11), the right decorative pattern 700 "4" temporarily stops, and the reach performance begins.
Next, as shown in Fig. 218 (12), the development performance is executed. In the development performance, the movable performance is executed and the first emphasized image 711 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second state to the fourth state.

Next, as shown in Fig. 219 (13), the SP reach effect is executed. During the execution of the SP reach effect, the SP reach image 712 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become the second mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 219 (14), the SPSP reach effect is executed. During the execution of the SPSP reach effect, the SPSP reach image 713 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (15), a promotion effect is executed and a button operation image 714 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, the middle decorative pattern 700 "3" is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 219 (16).
Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (17), a first eye-catching image 715 is displayed.
Next, when the first eye-catching image 715 is no longer displayed, as shown in FIG. 219 (18), the three decorative patterns 700 "434" are temporarily stopped in a state where they are easily visible to the player.

Then, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "434", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 220 (19). The display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "201 GAMES", and the display content of the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is updated to "299 more". At this time, the varying image 701 is also hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (20), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the small symbol 704 begins to change. Meanwhile, the decorative symbol 700 has not yet started to change. Also, the reserved image 702 has not moved toward the change base 701P, but is displayed on the reserved base 702P.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 220 (21), a staged display performance of the reserved image 702 is started. In the example shown, the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first reserved base 702P. This reserved image 702 is displayed in the first stage display mode (see FIG. 149 (1)) in the staged display performance. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound.

Next, as the stage display performance of the reserved image 702 progresses, a reserved image 702 having a display mode of the third stage (see FIG. 149 (3)) in the stage display performance is displayed on the first reserved base 702P, as shown in FIG. 220 (22). At this time, two reserved images 702 are displayed on the first reserved base 702P so as to overlap each other. More specifically, a reserved image 702 having a display mode of the third stage in the stage display performance and a reserved image 702 having a completed display mode are displayed so as to overlap each other. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the operation at the start of the change is started. At this time, the winning sound continues to be output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (23), the stage display performance of the reserved image 702 is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, the reserved image 702 displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P in the example shown in FIG. 220 (22) moves to the variable pedestal 701P, and the variable image 701 is displayed. Also, at this time, the variable start operation is in progress. Also, the winning sound is continuously output until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (24), the start-of-change operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at high speed.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 221 (25), a winning sound announcing the entry into the first starting hole 121 is output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121 displays "2". Also, for the second reserved image 702, no stepwise display performance is performed, that is, the incomplete display mode is not visible to the player, and the image is displayed on the second reserved pedestal 702P in the completed display mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (26), the left decorative pattern 700, "7", temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (27), the right decorative pattern 700, "1", temporarily stops.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 221 (28), the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound to notify the winning of the first starting hole 121. Also, at this time, "3" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121. Also, at this time, the staged display performance of the third reserved image 702 starts, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the third reserved pedestal 702P.
Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (29), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the third reserved pedestal 702P. Also, the winning sound is continuously output until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.

Then, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "721", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 221 (30). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "202 GAMES", and the display content of the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is updated to "298 more".

Next, as shown in FIG. 222 (31), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 start to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 switches to "2".
Then, with the stop of the variation of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "483", are fixed and stopped as shown in Fig. 222 (32). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "203 GAMES", and the display content of the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is updated to "297 more".

Next, as shown in FIG. 222 (33), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 start to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 switches to "1".
Then, with the stop of the variation of the special symbols, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "532", are fixed and stopped as shown in Fig. 222 (34). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "204 GAMES", and the display content of the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is updated to "296 more".

Next, as shown in FIG. 222 (35), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 start to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 switches to "0".
Then, with the stop of the variation of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "327", are fixed and stopped as shown in Fig. 222 (36). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "205 GAMES", and the display content of the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is updated to "295 more".

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed without a game ball entering either the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 after the special symbols have stopped fluctuating, an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed as shown in Fig. 223 (37). At this time, sound is no longer output from the sound output device 9.
Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed without a game ball entering either the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 after the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed as shown in FIG. 223 (38). At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are in a state where they are difficult or impossible to see for the player. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second state to the eighth state. Also, the state where no sound is output from the sound output device 9 continues. The state shown in FIG. 223 (38) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 217 (1).

As described above, in the variable performance example 20, when a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal game state, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is made visible or easily visible. Here, even if a prize is won when the stage image 706, adjustment image 716, and menu image 717 corresponding to the first stage are displayed in the normal game state, the same performance as the example shown in the variable performance example 20 may be executed. In other words, when a prize is won when the stage image 706, adjustment image 716, and menu image 717 corresponding to the first stage are displayed in the normal game state, the stage display performance may not be executed, and the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be easily visible while the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode remains invisible.

As described above, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display size is made difficult to see or impossible to see.
Even if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, if the player is made to view the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display size before the reserved image 702 of the completed display size is made visible to the player, it is necessary to start displaying the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display size after starting the non-display effect of the specific image. In this case, the display timing of the reserved image 702 of the completed display size is delayed by the amount of the non-display effect when a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, compared to when a prize is won when a specific image is not displayed. Therefore, when a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display size is made difficult or impossible to view, and the reserved image 702 of the completed display size is displayed without delay, thereby preventing the display timing of the reserved image 702 of the completed display size from being shifted depending on whether or not the specific image is displayed at the time of winning.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the incomplete reserved image 702 is made difficult to see or impossible to see.
Even if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, if the player is made to view the reserved image 702 in an incomplete form before the reserved image 702 in a completed form is made visible to the player, it is necessary to start displaying the reserved image 702 in an incomplete form after starting the non-display effect of the specific image. In this case, the display timing of the reserved image 702 in a completed form is delayed by the amount of the non-display effect when a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, compared to when a prize is won when a specific image is not displayed. Therefore, when a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, the reserved image 702 in an incomplete form is made difficult or impossible to view, and the reserved image 702 in a completed form is displayed without delay, thereby preventing the display timing of the reserved image 702 in a completed form from being shifted depending on whether or not the specific image is displayed at the time of winning.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 with incomplete transparency is made difficult to see or impossible to see.
Even if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, if the player is made to view the reserved image 702 of the incomplete transparency before the reserved image 702 of the completed transparency is made visible to the player, it is necessary to start displaying the reserved image 702 of the incomplete transparency after starting the non-display effect of the specific image. In this case, the display timing of the reserved image 702 of the completed transparency is delayed by the amount of the non-display effect when a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, compared to when a prize is won when a specific image is not displayed. Therefore, when a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete transparency is made difficult or impossible to view, and the reserved image 702 of the completed transparency is displayed without delay, thereby preventing the display timing of the reserved image 702 of the completed transparency from being shifted depending on whether or not the specific image is displayed at the time of winning.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete action mode is made difficult to view or impossible to view.
Even if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, if the player is made to view the reserved image 702 of an incomplete action mode before the reserved image 702's action presentation is made visible to the player, it is necessary to start displaying the reserved image 702 of the incomplete action mode after starting the non-display presentation of the specific image. In this case, the execution timing of the action presentation of the reserved image 702 is delayed by the execution of the non-display presentation when a specific image is displayed compared to when a prize is won when a specific image is not displayed. Therefore, when a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete action mode is made difficult or impossible to view, and the action presentation of the reserved image 702 is performed without delay, thereby preventing the execution timing of the action presentation by the reserved image 702 from being shifted depending on whether or not the specific image is displayed at the time of winning.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display position is made difficult to see or impossible to see.
Even if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, if the player is made to view the reserved image 702 at the incomplete display position before the reserved image 702 at the completed display position, it is necessary to start displaying the reserved image 702 at the incomplete display position after starting the non-display effect of the specific image. In this case, the display timing of the reserved image 702 at the completed display position is delayed by the amount of the non-display effect when a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, compared to when a prize is won when a specific image is not displayed. Therefore, when a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, the reserved image 702 at the incomplete display position is made difficult or impossible to view, and the reserved image 702 at the completed display position is displayed without delay, thereby preventing the display timing of the reserved image 702 at the completed display position from being shifted depending on whether or not the specific image is displayed at the time of winning.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed, the sound output mode is switched before the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player. Therefore, regardless of the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that he or she has won.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off while there is a reserved ball and then restored, the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player before the effect sound is output. That is, the chronological relationship between the output timing of the sound and the display timing of the reserved image 702 is reversed depending on whether the reserved image 702 is not displayed because there is no reserved ball, or the reserved image 702 is not displayed despite there being a reserved ball.
In this case, by making the player aware either that a performance is about to begin or that the number of reserved balls is about to be recognized depending on the state of the pachinko game machine 100, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing regardless of the state of the pachinko game machine 100.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed, the sound output mode is switched before the specific image is completely hidden. This makes it easier for the player to quickly recognize that he or she has won, even if the player has taken their eyes off the pachinko gaming machine 100.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the sound output mode is switched before the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 begins. Therefore, even if the customer waiting image 710 prevents the player from recognizing the game situation from the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that he or she has won.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed, the state of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched before the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player. Therefore, regardless of the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that he or she has won.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the next variable performance after a variable performance in which an SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance has been executed, if a win occurs within a specified period, the pending image 702 in its completed display mode is displayed without the player being able to see the incomplete display mode of the pending image 702 (see FIG. 221 (25)). In this way, by not allowing the player to see a specific performance in the next variable performance after a variable performance in which an SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance has been executed, the player can enjoy the sense of accomplishment of having executed the SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance for a long time.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed in the normal game state and the game is in the first stage, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) is made difficult to see or invisible (see FIG. 217 (6)). On the other hand, if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed in the normal game state and the game is in the second stage, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is made visible or easily visible (see FIG. 155 (2)).

In this embodiment, when a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the chronological relationship between the timing for switching the sound output mode, the timing for switching the modes of the various lamps, and the timing for displaying or hiding the image differs depending on whether the background of the stage image 706 is the first stage or the second stage, but this is not limited to this.
Even if a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed and it is the second stage, the chronological relationship between the timing of switching the sound output mode, the timing of switching the various lamp modes, and the timing of displaying or hiding the image may be the same as that when a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed and it is the first stage. That is, when a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed and it is the second stage, first, the state in which no sound is output is switched to the state in which the winning sound is output (see FIG. 217 (2)), and then, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may all be switched from the eighth state to the second state (see FIG. 217 (3)). After that, after starting the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the stage image 706, etc. may be made visible to the player (see FIG. 217 (4)). Furthermore, after that, the reserved image 702 may be made visible to the player, and then the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 may be completed (see Figures 217(5) and 217(6)).

(Example of variation 21)
Figures 224 and 225 are figures showing an example of variable performance 21.
Next, another specific example of the variation performance example (variation performance example 21) will be described with reference to FIG. 224 and FIG. 225. In the variation performance example 21, two variation performances are executed. The first of these two variation performances is a variation performance when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 in a normal time-saving game state. The second of the two variation performances is a variation performance when a game ball enters the second start hole 122 in a normal time-saving game state. In the following description, differences from the above-mentioned variation performance examples and each modified example will be mainly described, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation performance examples and each modified example may be omitted.

First, the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to the normal time-saving game state, and as shown in FIG. 224(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704, "444", are fixed and stopped. At this time, the background corresponding to the third stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The text "100 times" is displayed in the normal time-saving remaining number image 726. The reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 shows "1", and the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 shows "0". Neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. The top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Although not shown, background music corresponding to the normal time-saving game state is continuously output from the sound output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 224(2), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 start to change. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 switches to "0".
Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 122, as shown in FIG. 224 (3), the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 122 displays "1". At this time, the staged display performance of the reserved image 702 starts. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound that notifies the winning of the second start hole 122.

Next, as shown in FIG. 224(4), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 is started. The winning sound is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "853", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 224(5).

Next, as shown in FIG. 224(6), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the change display of the next special pattern. At this time, the display content of the normal time reduction remaining number image 726 is updated to "99 times". At this time, the reserved image 702 moves to the change base 701P, and the change image 701 is displayed. At this time, when the game ball enters the first start hole 121, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121. On the other hand, the reserved image 702 is not displayed, and the step display performance is not executed. At this time, the winning sound that notifies the winning of the first start hole 121 is not output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 225(7), with the stopping of the variation of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "421", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 701 is not displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the second start port 122 while a variable presentation based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 is being executed, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes visible or easily visible to the player. On the other hand, if a game ball enters the first start port 121 while a variable presentation based on a winning entry into the second start port 122 is being executed, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode does not become visible to the player.

(Example of variation 22)
Figure 226 is a diagram showing an example of variable performance 22.
Next, another specific example of the variable performance example (variable performance example 22) will be described with reference to FIG. 226. The variable performance example 22 is an example in which a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 is performed as the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state. In the following description, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples and each modified example will be mainly described, and explanations of points that match each variable performance example and each modified example may be omitted.

First, in the normal game state, the final variable performance among the predetermined times required to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to enter the special time-saving game state. Also, when a predetermined time has passed since the final variable performance is completed without a game ball entering either the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed as shown in FIG. 226 (1). Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become the eighth mode. Also, at this time, an alarm sound that notifies that the special time-saving game state is being entered is output from the sound output device 9. The state shown in FIG. 226 (1) is the same state as the state shown in FIG. 184 (5) in the variable performance example 10.
Although not shown, a background corresponding to the second stage is shown as the stage image 706 until the customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Then, as a result of the customer waiting image 710 being displayed, the stage image 706 is in a state where it is difficult or impossible for the player to see.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 226 (2), the audio output device 9 begins to output a sound effect indicating that the pachinko game machine 100 has been controlled to a special time-saving game state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 226(3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth position to the second position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (4), the customer waiting image 710 is hidden. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the small pattern 704 is displayed changing at high speed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 121 displays "1". At this time, a step-by-step display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (5), the operation at the start of the fluctuation progresses. At this time, the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved base 702P. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

226(6), the start of the change operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. The reserved image 702 moves to the change base 701P and expands, so that the change image 701 is displayed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 in the first starting hole 121 switches to "0". At this time, the countdown image 732, "0", is displayed. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9. Although not shown, after this, the second transition image 734 (see FIG. 186(16)) is displayed, and the stage image 706 switches to the background corresponding to the sixth stage (see FIG. 187(20)), and the change performance ends.

As described above, in the variation performance example 22, when a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving game state and the player is in the second stage, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is made visible or easily visible. Here, even if a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the first variation performance and when the stage image 706, adjustment image 716, and menu image 717 corresponding to the second stage are displayed, the same performance as the example shown in the variation performance example 22 may be executed. In other words, in the special time-saving game state, when a prize is won when the stage image 706, adjustment image 716, and menu image 717 corresponding to the second stage are displayed before the start of the first variation performance, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be made visible or easily visible.

As described above, even if a prize is won at the first starting port 121 when a specific image is displayed in a special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible to the player.
In particular, in this embodiment, when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state and the game ball enters the first start hole 121 when the game is in the first stage, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) is made difficult or impossible for the player to see (see FIG. 185 (10)). On the other hand, when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state and the game ball enters the first start hole 121 when the game is in the second stage, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode is made visible or easily visible for the player. When a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state and the game ball enters the second start hole 122 when the game is in the first stage or the second stage, the reserved image 702 may not be displayed in any display mode. However, when a specific image is being displayed in a special time-saving game state and the game ball enters the second starting hole 122 when the game is in the first or second stage, the reserved image 702 may be displayed.

In addition, in a special time-saving game state, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 when the special pattern is stopped before the start of the special performance and in the first stage and there are no reserved symbols, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, in the case where a game ball enters the first start port 121 when the special pattern is stopped and there is no reserved ball when the special effect is before the start of the special effect and the game is in the second stage in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. Also, in the case where a game ball enters the second start port 122 when the special pattern is stopped and there is no reserved ball when the special effect is before the start of the special effect and the game is in the first or second stage in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 may not be displayed in any display mode. However, even if the game ball enters the second start hole 122 during the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance and during the first or second stage when the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 may be displayed.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 when a special pattern is stopped after the start of a specific notification and a special image corresponding to the first stage is being displayed, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 when a special image corresponding to the second stage is displayed while a special pattern is stopped after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. Also, if a game ball enters the second start hole 122 when a special pattern is stopped after the start of the specific notification and a special image corresponding to the first stage or the second stage is displayed, the reserved image 702 may not be displayed in any display mode. However, even if a game ball enters the second start hole 122 when a special pattern is stopped after the start of the specific notification and a special image corresponding to the first stage or the second stage is displayed, the reserved image 702 may be displayed.

In addition, regardless of the game state, when a game ball enters the first start opening 121 while a specific image is displayed in the first stage, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, regardless of the game state, when a game ball enters the first start opening 121 while a specific image is displayed in the second stage, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. Furthermore, regardless of the game state, if a game ball enters the second start hole 122 when a specific image is displayed in the first or second stage, the reserved image 702 may not be displayed in any display mode. However, regardless of the game state, even if a game ball enters the second start hole 122 when a specific image is displayed in the first or second stage, the reserved image 702 may be displayed.

In addition, regardless of the game state, when a game ball enters the first start port 121 while a special pattern is stopped in the first stage and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, regardless of the game state, when a game ball enters the first start port 121 while a special pattern is stopped in the second stage and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In addition, regardless of the game state, if a game ball enters the second start hole 122 when a special symbol is stopped in the first stage or the second stage and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 may not be displayed in any display mode. However, regardless of the game state, even if a game ball enters the second start hole 122 when a special symbol is stopped in the first stage or the second stage and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 may be displayed.

In addition, regardless of the stage, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 (second starting hole 122) while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.
In addition, regardless of whether the game is in a normal game state, a normal time-saving game state, or a special time-saving game state, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 (second starting hole 122) when a special pattern is stopped and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 of a specific uncompleted display mode (uncompleted size, uncompleted form, uncompleted operation mode, uncompleted transparency, uncompleted display position) may be made difficult to see or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.
Furthermore, regardless of which image is displayed on the first display device 70, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 (second starting hole 122) when a special pattern is stopped and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 of a specific uncompleted display mode (uncompleted size, uncompleted form, uncompleted operation mode, uncompleted transparency, uncompleted display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.

Also, for example, the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode may be in a state in which the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is visible. In other words, when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on a winning entry into the first starting hole 121 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, if a reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode is displayed based on a winning entry into the first starting hole 121 while a specific image is being displayed in a special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible before the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) is made visible or easily visible.

In addition, in a special time-saving game state, when a reserved image 702 in a normal display mode is displayed based on a winning entry into the first starting port 121 before the start of a special performance and while the special pattern is stopped and there are no reserved symbols, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, in a special time-saving game state, if a reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode is displayed based on a winning entry into the first starting port 121 before the start of a special performance, while the special pattern is stopped and there are no reserved symbols, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.

In addition, when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on winning when the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed while the special pattern is stopped after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, when the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on winning when the special pattern is stopped after the start of the specific notification and the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.

In addition, regardless of the game state, when a reserved image 702 in a normal display mode is displayed based on a winning entry into the first starting port 121 (second starting port 122) when a specific image is displayed, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, if a reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode is displayed based on winning at the first starting port 121 (second starting port 122) when a specific image is displayed, the reserved image 702 in a specified incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible before the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) is made visible or easily visible.

In addition, regardless of the game state, when a reserved image 702 in a normal display mode is displayed based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 (second start port 122) when a special pattern is stopped and no reserved symbols exist, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, if a reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode is displayed based on a winning entry into the first starting port 121 (second starting port 122) when a special pattern is stopped and no reserved symbols exist, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible before the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) is made visible or easily visible.

(Example of variation 23)
Figures 227 and 228 are figures showing an example of variable performance 23.
Next, another specific example of the variation performance example (variation performance example 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 227 and Fig. 228. Variation performance example 23 is an example in which a variation performance based on winning the first start hole 121 is performed as the first variation performance in the special time-saving game state. In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation performance examples and each modified example will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that match each variation performance example and each modified example may be omitted.

First, in the normal game state, the final variable performance among the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving game state ends, and the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to enter the special time-saving game state. Also, when a predetermined time has passed since the final variable performance ended without a game ball entering either the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122, an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed as shown in FIG. 227 (1). Also, a background corresponding to the second stage is shown as the stage image 706. Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the fifth mode. Also, at this time, the sound output device 9 outputs background music corresponding to the previous variable performance at a lower volume than during the execution of the variable performance.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 227 (2), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the fifth state to the second state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (3), the audio output device 9 starts to output a sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (4), the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are hidden. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the small pattern 704 is displayed changing at high speed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121 displays "1". At this time, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode without a step-by-step display performance. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (5), the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. The pending image 702 moves to the changing base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting hole 121 switches to "0". At this time, the countdown image 732, "0", is displayed. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the game ball enters the first start hole 121, as shown in FIG. 227(6), the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121 displays "1". At this time, a step-by-step display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound that notifies the winning of the first start hole 121.
Next, as shown in Fig. 228 (7), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 is started. Also, the winning sound that notifies the winning of the first starting hole 121 is continuously output until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.

Next, after the display of the second transition image 734 (see FIG. 186(16)), as shown in FIG. 228(8), a background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. In addition, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704, "125", are fixed and stopped.
After this, each time a variable presentation is executed in the special time-saving game state, the number of remaining times for special pattern selection in the special time-saving game state is reduced, and the value shown in the special time-saving remaining number image 738 is subtracted by one.

When the final variable presentation in the special time-saving game state ends, the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled back to the normal game state, and after the first transition image 728 (see FIG. 179 (22)) is displayed, the background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, the reserved image 702 is also displayed. This reserved image 702 is the reserved image 702 (see FIG. 228 (7)) that was displayed when the background corresponding to the second stage was displayed as the stage image 706.

In addition, the variable presentations described in each of the variable presentation examples and modified examples are not limited to the variable presentations based on the reserved numbers shown in the figures.
The change presentation described in each change presentation example and variant example may be a change presentation based on the reserved number being 0, a change presentation based on the reserved number being 1, a change presentation based on the reserved number being 2, a change presentation based on the reserved number being 3, or a change presentation based on the reserved number being 4.

In addition, in this embodiment, a change presentation based on a winning combination when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in a special time-saving game state has been described as a change presentation in which the result of the lottery for the special pattern is a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this.
As a variable presentation based on winning at the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving game state, a variable presentation in which the result of the lottery for a special pattern is a jackpot may be executed, as in a modified example of variable presentation example 11 (see Figures 196 to 198).

In addition, in the variable performance example 20, a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and an SPSP reach performance is executed is described, but the present invention is not limited to this.
As in the variation performance example 20, as a variation performance based on winning at the first start gate 121 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal game state, the "variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed" shown in the variation performance example 1 and the variation performance example 2 may be executed, or the "variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot" shown in the variation performance example 5 may be executed. Also, as a variation performance based on winning at the first start gate 121 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal game state, any of the variation performances described in the first embodiment and the second embodiment may be executed.

In addition, in the variable performance example 20, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal game state and a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, it is explained that the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes difficult or impossible for the player to see, and the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode becomes easily visible to the player.
Here, the case where the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes difficult or impossible for the player to see is not limited to the case where a game ball enters the first start opening 121 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal game state. As an example, even if a game ball enters the first start opening 121 when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed in the normal game state (see FIG. 158(1) and FIG. 158(2)), the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may become difficult or impossible for the player to see, and the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may become easily visible to the player. In this case, as a variable performance based on winning at the first starting hole 121 when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed in the normal game state, the "variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed" shown in the variable performance example 1 and the variable performance example 2 may be executed, or the "variable performance in which the reach performance is executed" shown in the variable performance example 3 and the variable performance example 4 may be executed, or the "variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot" shown in the variable performance example 5 may be executed. Also, as a variable performance based on winning at the first starting hole 121 when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed in the normal game state, any of the variable performances described in the first embodiment and the second embodiment may be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, a winning sound is output to notify the player of the winning, but this is not limited to the above.
A winning sound may be output when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, whereas no winning sound may be output when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that a specific image becomes difficult to see or cannot be seen. Examples of specific images include decorative pattern 700, variable image 701, reserved image 702, reserved number display 703, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, remaining number of times reached image 708, etc. Here, the state in which a specific image is difficult to see or cannot be seen may be a state in which a specific image is displayed but the specific image is difficult to see or cannot be seen because the specific image is hindered from being seen by other images displayed in a layer in front of the specific image. Examples of other images include customer waiting image 710, first emphasis image 711, SP reach image 712, SPSP reach image 713, first eye-catching image 715, second emphasis image 718, first transition image 728, second eye-catching image 731, second transition image 734, and recovery image 742. Furthermore, a state in which a particular image is not visible may be a state in which a particular image is not visible because the particular image is not displayed in the first place.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be difficult to see or may be impossible to see. Here, an example of a case in which the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes difficult to see or may be impossible to see is when the step-by-step display performance is not executed and the reserved image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode from the start of displaying the reserved image 702, so that the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes difficult to see or may be impossible to see. Also, an example of a case in which the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes difficult to see or may be impossible to see is when the step-by-step display performance is executed to display the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode, but the reserved image 702 is prevented from being seen by another image displayed in a layer in front of the reserved image 702, so that the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes difficult to see or may be impossible to see. Also, when reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode is difficult or impossible to see because another image is displayed on a layer in front of reserved image 702, the step-by-step display performance may or may not be executed. In this way, making reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) difficult or impossible to see includes both the case where reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode is not displayed and the case where reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode is displayed but difficult or impossible to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when the pending image 702 of an incomplete display mode becomes difficult to see or impossible to see, the pending image 702 of an incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) at any stage of the staged display performance also becomes difficult to see or impossible to see, but this is not limited to the above.
For example, when the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode is made difficult or impossible to see, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) in the first stage of the staged display performance may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) in the second stage of the staged display performance may be made visible or easily visible. In other words, when the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode is made difficult or impossible to see, it is sufficient to make the reserved image 702 of the completed display mode in at least one stage of the staged display performance difficult or impossible to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state and the game ball enters the first starting hole 121 during the first stage, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible for the player to see. In this case, the reserved image 702 of the specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible for the player to see may be the reserved image 702 of any display mode in the stage presentation.
In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state and the game ball enters the first starting hole 121 during the second stage, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode may be made visible or easily visible to the player. In this case, the reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in a display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.

In addition, in the special time-saving game state, when the game ball enters the first start hole 121 before the start of the special performance and in the first stage, while the special pattern is stopped and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of a display mode of any stage in the stage performance.
In addition, in the special time-saving game state, when the game ball enters the first start hole 121 while the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved ball when the special effect is before the start of the special effect and in the second stage, the reserved image 702 of a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode that is made visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 of any stage of display mode in the stage performance.

Also, it has been explained that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while the special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of a display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.
In addition, it has been explained that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while the special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the second stage is being displayed after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 of a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode that is made visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of the display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.

In addition, it has been explained that, regardless of the game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while a specific image is displayed in the first stage, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of a display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.
In addition, it has been explained that, regardless of the game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while a specific image is being displayed in the second stage, the reserved image 702 of a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode that is made visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of a display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.

In addition, it has been explained that, regardless of the game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while a special symbol is stopped in the first stage and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of a display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.
In addition, regardless of the game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while a special symbol is stopped in the second stage and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 of a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode that is made visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 of any display mode in the stage performance.

In addition, in the case where the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on winning the first starting port 121 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of a display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.
In addition, when a specific image is displayed in a special time-saving game state and the reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode is displayed based on winning at the first starting port 121, it is possible to make the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) visible or easily visible, and then make the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any stage of display mode in the stage presentation.

In addition, in the special time-saving game state, when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on winning the first start port 121 before the start of the special performance and while the special pattern is stopped and there is no reserved, it is possible to make the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) difficult to see or invisible, and then make the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode that is difficult to see or invisible to the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of a display mode of any stage in the stage performance.
In addition, in the special time-saving game state, when the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on winning the first start port 121 before the start of the special performance and while the special pattern is stopped and there is no reserved, it is explained that the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible before the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is made visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of the display mode of any stage in the stage performance.

In addition, when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on a winning result when the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed while the special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of a display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.
In addition, when the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on the winning when the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed while the special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is made visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any display mode in the stage performance.

In addition, regardless of the game state, when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on winning at the first start port 121 (second start port 122) when a specific image is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of a display mode at any stage in the stage presentation.
Also, when the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on winning the first start port 121 (second start port 122) when a specific image is displayed, it is possible to make the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) visible or easily visible, and then make the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any stage of display mode in the stage presentation.

In addition, regardless of the game state, when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on winning the first start port 121 (second start port 122) when the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of the display mode of any stage in the stage performance.
In addition, when the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on winning the first start port 121 (second start port 122) when the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved, it is possible to make the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) visible or easily visible, and then make the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any stage of display mode in the stage performance.

In addition, when making the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) difficult to see or impossible to see, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode in one of the multiple stages in the staged display performance may be made difficult to see or impossible to see, while the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode in the other stages may be made visible or easily visible. As an example, when making the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) difficult to see or impossible to see, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode in the first stage of the staged display performance may be made difficult to see or impossible to see, while the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode in both the second and third stages may be made visible or easily visible.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that in the staged display presentation, the pending image 702, which is an incomplete display mode, has multiple stages, but this is not limited to this.
The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the staged display performance needs to have at least one stage of the reserved image 702 being an incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) and one stage of the reserved image 702 being a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the winning sound is continuously output until the stage display performance is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The winning sound may be stopped from being output before the stage display performance is completed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable presentation is performed in which the result of the special pattern lottery in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot, the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 are displayed when the double-digit decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops or when the double-digit decorative pattern 700 is fixedly stopped (see Figure 202 (8) and Figure 202 (9)), but this is not limited to this.
In the case where a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot, when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped or when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is fixed and stopped, the variable image 701 may not be displayed and the reserved image 702 may be displayed. In addition, in the case where a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot, when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped or when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is fixed and stopped, the variable image 701 may be displayed without the reserved image 702. In addition, in the case where a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot, when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped or when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is fixed and stopped, neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first reserved image 702 moves to the variable pedestal 701P to display the variable image 701, but the variable image 701 may not be used. More specifically, when the variable performance ends while the first reserved image 702 is displayed, the first reserved image 702 may become hidden when the next variable performance starts. In this case, the first reserved image 702 may become hidden while moving, or may become hidden at the position displayed on the first reserved pedestal 702P without moving. In addition, when a prize is won when there is no reserved image, the reserved image 702 may be hidden after the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed on the first reserved pedestal 702P.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a stage corresponding to a normal game state is switched to a stage corresponding to a special time-saving game state while a reserved image exists, the variable image 701 is not displayed and the reserved image 702 is displayed (see FIG. 187 (20)). In other words, it has been described that the reserved image 702 moves to the variable pedestal 701P after the stage is switched, but is not limited to this.
When a stage corresponding to a normal game state is switched to a stage corresponding to a special time-saving game state in a state where a reserved game exists, the variable image 701 may be displayed. In other words, the movement of the reserved image 702 to the variable base 701P may be completed before the stage switching is completed. Also, when a stage corresponding to a normal game state is switched to a stage corresponding to a special time-saving game state in a state where a reserved game exists, the movement of the reserved image 702 to the variable base 701P may be started and may not be completed. Also, when the variable image 701 is not used, when a stage corresponding to a normal game state is switched to a stage corresponding to a special time-saving game state in a state where a reserved game exists, the first reserved image 702 may already be hidden.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start gate 121 (second start gate 122) while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the reserved image 702 moves after the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 ends, but this is not limited to the above.
When a game ball enters the first start gate 121 (second start gate 122) while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the reserved image 702 may move during the execution of the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710. In this case, the movement of the reserved image 702 may be started after the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 starts, and the movement of the reserved image 702 may be completed after the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends. In addition, the movement of the reserved image 702 may be started before the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 starts. Further, after that, the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is executed, and the movement of the reserved image 702 may be completed after the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends.

Furthermore, the chronological relationship between the timing at which the pending image 702 moves, the timing at which the pending image 702 changes to the display mode of the varying image 701, and the timing at which the decorative pattern 700 starts to vary is not limited to the example described above.
A change from the display mode of the first reserved image 702 to the display mode of the variable image 701 may be started and completed between the start of the movement of all the displayed reserved images 702 and the arrival of the next reserved pedestal 702P (variable pedestal 701P) (the completion of the movement). Also, after the start of the movement of all the displayed reserved images 702 and the start of the change from the display mode of the first reserved image 702 to the display mode of the variable image 701, the change of the decorative pattern 700 may be started. Then, after the start of the change of the decorative pattern 700, the movement of all the displayed reserved images 702 and the change from the display mode of the first reserved image 702 to the display mode of the variable image 701 may be completed.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a variable performance in which an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is executed is performed, the next variable performance may be a variable performance in which the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed (see Figures 169 (28) to 169 (30) and 170 (31)). Then, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 (second starting hole 122) while this second eye-catching image 731 is displayed, the second eye-catching image 731 may block the view of the reserved image 702, making it difficult or impossible to view the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode. Furthermore, after the second eye-catching image 731 is hidden, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may become easily visible.

Also, in this embodiment, even if a win occurs when the SPSP reach performance is being executed, a winning sound is not output (see FIG. 156 (11)). Here, in a variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, if the game ball wins in the first start hole 121 (second start hole 122) when the stage image 706 is displayed again after this SPSP reach performance (see FIG. 157 (16)), a stage display performance may be executed and a winning sound may be output.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 (second start hole 122) when the number of reserved balls stored is the upper limit (four), no winning sound is output, the stage display effect is not executed, and a new reserved image 702 is not displayed, regardless of the time at which the winning ball enters the first start hole 121 (second start hole 122).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the customer waiting image 710 is displayed even in the special time-saving game state. Here, in the special time-saving game state, before the start of the first variable performance, the customer waiting image 710 is displayed when the special pattern is stopped and there is no reserved ball and no winning occurs for a predetermined time, while after the start of the first variable performance, the customer waiting image 710 may not be displayed even if there is no reserved ball and no winning occurs for a predetermined time. That is, in the special time-saving game state, whether or not the customer waiting image 710 is displayed may be switched between before the start of the first variable performance and after the start of the first variable performance. However, even after the start of the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state, if the game ball wins in the second start hole 122 (first start hole 121) when the special pattern is stopped and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be made difficult to see or impossible to see, and the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be made easily visible. In addition, in the special time-saving game state, even after the first variable performance has started, if the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved and no winning occurs for a predetermined time, the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the adjustment image 716 or the menu image 717 is displayed, the state of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, the button lamp 17c, and the state of the sound output are switched, but this is not limited to the above.
When the adjustment image 716 or the menu image 717 is displayed, the states of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched, but the state of the sound output does not have to be switched. And, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the states of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c, and the state of the sound output may be switched.
Also, when the adjustment image 716 or the menu image 717 is displayed, the state of the sound output may be changed, but the states of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may not be changed. And, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the states of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may be changed. Also, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the state of the sound output may or may not be changed.
Furthermore, the states of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c, and the sound output state do not need to be changed when the adjustment image 716 or the menu image 717 is displayed. And, the states of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c, and the sound output state may be changed when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power to the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off while there is a reserved ball and then restored, a warning sound is output to notify the user that the next variable performance after the variable performance that was being executed when the power was cut off will begin, and then the next variable performance begins, but this is not limited to the above.
When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off while there is a reserved ball and then restored, sound may be prevented from being output until the next variable performance of the variable performance being executed when the power supply was cut off is started. Then, when the next variable performance of the variable performance being executed when the power supply was cut off is started, output of background music corresponding to the variable performance may be started.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movement of the decorative pattern 700 at the start of its movement is described as a slow movement of the decorative pattern 700 downward, but this is not limited to this.
The movement at the start of the change may be, for example, a movement of the decorative pattern 700 upward at a low speed. In this case, when the movement at the start of the change is completed, the decorative pattern 700 may be caused to move downward at a high speed.
The movement at the start of the movement may be, for example, a specific movement by the character shown in the decorative pattern 700. Examples of the specific movement include a movement in which the character raises its hand, a movement in which the character's facial expression changes, a movement in which the character's hair or the clothes worn by the character move, etc. When the specific movement is performed, the decorative pattern 700 may move upward or downward at a low speed, or may remain in the position where it was fixed and stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, in both cases where a prize is won when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, and where a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the sound output mode is switched before switching the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c, but this is not limited to the above.
For example, if a prize is won when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, the sound output mode may be switched when the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched. Also, if a prize is won when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, the sound output mode may be switched after the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched. That is, if a prize is won when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, the sound output mode may be switched after the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched. Then, after the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c and the sound output mode are all switched, the fluctuation start operation and the display of the reserved image 702 may be started.

In addition, in this embodiment, if there are no reserved symbols when the special symbols stop changing, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the second state to the first state (see FIG. 184 (3)), but this is not limited to this. Even if there are no reserved symbols when the special symbols stop changing, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may continue to be in the second state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decorative pattern 700 changes at high speed while the change performance is being performed, but when the second transition image 734 is displayed, the decorative pattern 700 that is changing at high speed becomes difficult or impossible to see. That is, the decorative pattern 700 at the display size when changing at high speed becomes difficult or impossible to see. In other words, the decorative pattern 700 at the transparency during high speed change becomes difficult or impossible to see. In yet another way, the decorative pattern 700 in the form during high speed change becomes difficult or impossible to see. In yet another way, the decorative pattern 700 at the position during high speed change becomes difficult or impossible to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that as the staged display performance progresses, the display state of the pending image 702 approaches the completed display state, but this is not limited to this.
In the staged display performance, a stage may be provided in which the reserved image 702 is displayed in a display mode (display size, transparency, display position, form, etc.) that is farther away from the completed display mode. As an example, a stage may be provided in which the reserved image 702, which has a display size smaller than the completed display mode, is displayed in an even smaller display size. Also, a stage may be provided in which the reserved image 702, which has a higher transparency than the completed display mode, is displayed in an even higher transparency. Also, a stage may be provided in which the reserved image 702, which is displayed in a position farther away from the display position in the completed display mode, is displayed in a position even farther away from the display position in the completed display mode.

The number of stages provided in the stage display presentation may differ depending on the display mode of the reserved images 702, such as reserved images 702 displayed for each stage or reserved images 702 for each display color. In this case, for reserved images 702 in normal display mode, blue reserved images 702, red reserved images 702, and rainbow reserved images 702, the later the order, the more stages may be provided in the stage display presentation. In other words, the higher the expected reserved image 702, the more stages may be provided in the stage display presentation.

In addition, when the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed, in the first stage of the stage display performance, the reserved image 702 may be displayed in the same color as the completed display mode, or the reserved image 702 may be displayed in a color different from the completed display mode. In addition, for example, when a blue reserved image 702 is displayed, the reserved image 702 may be displayed in a color different from blue in the first stage of the stage display performance, whereas when a reserved image 702 in a specific color (red, rainbow, etc.) that has a higher expectation than blue is displayed, the reserved image 702 may be displayed in the specific color in the first stage of the stage display performance.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that one reserved image 702 periodically displays two different action images in the action presentation (see FIG. 150 (5)). Here, the periods of the two different action images may be the same as each other, or may be different. Furthermore, any period of the two different action images may be the same as the period of the action image in the action presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. Furthermore, the period of one of the two different action images may be the same as the period of the action image in the action presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode, and the period of the other may be different from the period of the action image in the action presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. Furthermore, any period of the two different action images may be different from the period of the action image in the action presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
In addition, the hold image 702 in the normal display mode may periodically display two different actions.

In addition, the period of the action display in the action presentation may differ depending on the degree of expectation. For example, the blue reserved image 702 is displayed in the first period by the first action mode and in the second period by the second action mode different from the first action mode. Then, the reserved image of a specific color (red, rainbow, etc.) having a higher expectation than blue is displayed in the third period by the third action mode and in the fourth period by the fourth action mode different from the third action mode. In this case, the third period may be shorter or longer than the first period. The fourth period may be shorter or longer than the second period. The first period and the third period may be the same period, or the second period and the fourth period may be the same period. Furthermore, the third period and the fourth period may be the same period or different periods. The first to fourth action modes may be any of the above-mentioned actions (rotation in the clockwise direction, rotation in the counterclockwise direction, movement in the up and down direction, movement in the left and right direction, swinging, etc.), or may be actions different from the above-mentioned actions.

Also, in this embodiment, an example has been described in which sound may not be output from the audio output device 9 when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, or when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Here, when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, or when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, sound may be output from the audio output device 9 at a volume that is not audible to the player. In other words, it is sufficient that no sound is audibly output from the audio output device 9 when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, or when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all blink in the winning light-emitting performance. Here, in the winning light-emitting performance, the blinking period of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may become longer over time. As an example, in the winning light-emitting performance, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may blink in a second period longer than the first period after blinking in a first period. In this case, the color of the light emitted in the blinking in the first period and the color of the light emitted in the blinking in the second period may be the same color or different colors. In addition, the first period and the second period may be shorter than the period of the blinking (blinking in the 9th mode) that suggests or notifies the occurrence of an error and the period of the blinking in the through performance (blinking in the 11th mode).

In the present embodiment, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c emit light of a single color in the first, second, fourth to sixth, and eighth to eleventh modes, but this is not limiting. In the illumination of these modes, the color of the emitted light may change as the performance progresses.
In the first, second, fourth to sixth, eighth to eleventh aspects, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are described as emitting light of the same color, but this is not limited thereto. In the first, second, fourth to sixth, eighth to eleventh aspects, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may be emitting light of different colors.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the light emission of the seventh aspect, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are described as emitting light in different colors, but this is not limited to the above. In the light emission of the seventh aspect, at least two or more light emitters (e.g., the top lamp 10b and the board lamp 74b, etc.) among the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may emit light in the same color, and the other light emitters may emit light in different colors. In addition, in the light emission of the seventh aspect, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may all emit light in the same color.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the reserved number display 703 is hidden during the execution of a jackpot game (see Figure 161 (20)), but this is not limited to this.
The reserved number display 703 may be displayed even during the execution of a jackpot game. In this case, if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 (second start hole 122) during the execution of a jackpot game, the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121 (second start hole 122) may be displayed in an increased manner. The reserved image 702 corresponding to this winning may be displayed in a completed display mode when the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state (time-saving game state) is displayed, without being displayed in an incomplete display mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that, depending on the stage, the image being displayed, whether or not there is a hold, the state of the pachinko game machine 100, etc., when the hold image 702 is displayed, the hold image 702 in the completed display state is easily visible without the hold image 702 in the incomplete display state being visible, but this is not limited to the above.
For example, in the normal time-saving game mode, regardless of the stage, the image being displayed, whether or not there is a reserve, the state of the pachinko game machine 100, etc., when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be made easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be made easily visible.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that a specific sound effect is output when the "7" decorative patterns 700 on the left and right are lined up (see FIG. 173 (12)).
Here, a sound effect may be output when a number other than "7" is aligned as the left and right decorative patterns 700. Furthermore, this sound effect may be a sound different from the specific sound effect output when "7" is aligned as the left and right decorative patterns 700.
In addition, the sound effect when a reach is achieved may be different in each of the normal game state, the normal time-saving game state, and the special time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when the first transition image 728 is displayed, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to the normal gaming state, whether the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state or the special time-saving gaming state, but this is not limited to the above.
When the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to the normal time-saving game state, the normal time-saving game state may continue when the first transition image 728 is displayed (see FIG. 166 (12)). Then, when the special symbol stops fluctuating with no reserved balls for the second start hole 122, the game machine may be controlled to the normal game state. On the other hand, when the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to the special time-saving game state, the game machine may be controlled to the normal game state when the first transition image 728 is displayed (before the reserved balls for the second start hole 122 are gone). However, even when the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to the special time-saving game state, the special time-saving game state may continue when the first transition image 728 is displayed (when the reserved balls for the second start hole 122 are present), just like when the game machine is controlled to the normal time-saving game state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the customer waiting image 710 is hidden after the transparency is increased in stages, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The customer waiting image 710 may be switched from a displayed state to a hidden state without gradually changing the transparency. In this case, when the customer waiting image 710 becomes hidden, the reserved image 702 may not be displayed, and after the customer waiting image 710 becomes hidden, the display of the reserved image 702 may start.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the action presentation starts when the stage display presentation is completed, but this is not limited to this.
The action presentation may be started even before the completion of the staged display presentation. In this case, the action presentation may be started in the middle of the staged display presentation, that is, when the reserved image 702 is displayed in the incomplete display mode.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that a winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 in response to a win. Here, the winning sounds notifying that the gaming ball has won the first starting hole 121 in the first stage, the second stage, and the fifth stage may be different sounds or the same sound.
In addition, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 122 in the third stage and the fourth stage may be different sounds or the same sound.
In addition, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 122 in the sixth stage and the seventh stage may be different sounds or the same sound.
In addition, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 122 in the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state may be different sounds or the same sound.
In addition, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 122 may be different or the same in the first stage, the sixth stage, and the seventh stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 or the second starting hole 122, a winning sound is output and the display of the reserved image 702 begins, but this is not limited to this.
For example, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 or the second starting hole 122, the display of the reserved image 702 may start after the sound output device 9 starts to output the winning sound.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sound output based on winning in the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state is described as a sound effect indicating that the pachinko game machine 100 has been controlled to the special time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. The sound output based on winning in the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state may be a winning sound that notifies of a win. Furthermore, regardless of the game state, the sound output based on winning in the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 when a specific image is displayed may be background music corresponding to the variable presentation, and may be a sound output without reducing the volume.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the small symbols 704 are difficult or impossible for the player to see, but this is not limited to the above.
By displaying the small symbols 704 on a layer in front of the customer waiting image 710, the small symbols 704 may be easily visible to the player even when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the display of the reserved image 702 begins after the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 begins (see Figure 185 (9), Figure 210 (5), Figure 217 (5)), but this is not limited to this.
In the case where a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the display of the reserved image 702 may be started before the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 is started. In addition, in the case where a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be displayed without the step-by-step display performance being executed before the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 is started, so that the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be visible or easily visible without the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becoming visible. In addition, in the case where a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the step-by-step display performance may be started and completed before the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 is started, so that the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be visible or easily visible without the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becoming visible.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the menu image 717 is displayed, a menu screen (not shown) is displayed on the first image display device 70. In addition, the menu screen is an image displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In addition, in this embodiment, an example of an effect when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed has been described. Here, each of the above-mentioned examples of an effect when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed may be an effect that is executed when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 while the menu screen is displayed. In other words, even if a prize is won when the menu screen is displayed instead of the customer waiting image 710, the same effect as when a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed may be executed. In this case, the menu screen is also regarded as a specific image.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first change performance is executed in the special time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 700 changes at high speed, and then the special time-saving start image 733, the second transition image 734, the mode start image 736, etc. are displayed, but this is not limited to this.
When the first variation performance in the special time-saving game state is executed, before the decorative pattern 700 varies at high speed, that is, during the execution of the variation start operation, the special time-saving start image 733, the second transition image 734, the mode start image 736, etc. may be displayed. Also, before the variation start operation starts, the special time-saving start image 733, the second transition image 734, the mode start image 736, etc. may be displayed. Also, before the reserved image 702 is displayed, the special time-saving start image 733, the second transition image 734, the mode start image 736, etc. may be displayed. That is, in the first variation performance in the special time-saving game state, the display start timing of the reserved image 702 and the display start timing of the special time-saving start image 733, the second transition image 734, the mode start image 736, etc. may be displayed first.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first change performance is executed in the special time-saving play state, the decorative pattern 700 changes at high speed, and then the decorative pattern 700 and stage image 706, etc., having a display mode corresponding to the special time-saving play state, are displayed, but this is not limited to this.
When the first change performance in the special time-saving game state is executed, before the decorative pattern 700 changes at high speed, that is, during the execution of the change start operation, the decorative pattern 700 and the stage image 706, etc., having a display mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state may be displayed. Also, before the change start operation starts, the decorative pattern 700 and the stage image 706, etc., having a display mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state may be displayed. Also, before the reserved image 702 is displayed, the decorative pattern 700 and the stage image 706, etc., having a display mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state may be displayed. That is, in the first change performance in the special time-saving game state, the display start timing of the reserved image 702 and the display start timing of the decorative pattern 700 and the stage image 706, etc., having a display mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state may be either first.

Furthermore, the combination of the stage and the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is not limited to the above example.
Any combination of the above-mentioned stages and the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode may be used. For example, the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in the first stage may be a star-shaped display mode (see FIG. 154).

In addition, although it has been described that the special time-saving game state of this embodiment corresponds to the specific time-saving game state of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, it is not limited thereto. The special time-saving game state of this embodiment may correspond to the first special time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state of the first embodiment, or the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state of the second embodiment.
As an example, the second special time-saving game state of the first embodiment may correspond to the special time-saving game state of the third embodiment. Then, each performance performed in the special time-saving game state, such as the performance performed using the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 of the third embodiment, may be performed in the second special time-saving game state by using the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 of the first embodiment. More specifically, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 in the second special time-saving game state of the first embodiment may be displayed by the display mode of the variable image 701 and the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state of the third embodiment.
As another example, the first time-saving game state of the second embodiment may correspond to the special time-saving game state of the third embodiment. And each effect performed in the special time-saving game state, such as the effect performed using the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 related to the special symbol of the third embodiment, may be performed in the first time-saving game state by using the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 related to the normal symbol of the second embodiment.
Moreover, each effect performed based on winning at the second start gate 122 in the time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state, special time-saving game state) of the third embodiment may be performed as an effect based on winning at the gate 124 in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) of the second embodiment. Moreover, each effect performed using the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 related to the second special symbol in the time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state, special time-saving game state) of the third embodiment may be performed as an effect using the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 related to the normal symbol in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) of the second embodiment. More specifically, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 relating to the normal pattern in the time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state) of the second embodiment may be displayed in the display manner of the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 relating to the second special pattern in the time-shortened game state (normal time-shortened game state, special time-shortened game state) of the third embodiment.

Although multiple embodiments have been described above, the configuration included in one embodiment may be interchanged with the configuration included in another embodiment, or the configuration included in one embodiment may be added to another embodiment.

41...decorative symbol, 51...variable image, 52...reserved image, 53A...first reserved number display, 53B...second reserved number display, 54A...first small symbol, 54B...second small symbol, 55A...first special symbol, 55B...second special symbol, 100...pachinko game machine

Claims (1)

A first control means for controlling the progress of a game;
A second control means for controlling the performance,
The first control means is
When the start condition is satisfied, judgment information is obtained,
A determination regarding a special game can be made according to the determination information,
The second control means is
A plurality of rendering modes including at least a first rendering mode can be controlled;
It is possible to execute a variable performance in which the performance pattern is changed and then stopped according to the result of the judgment,
When the start condition is satisfied , an information display can be displayed;
When the variable performance is not being performed, a specific image that can be displayed in an action can be displayed,
When the specific image is being displayed, the specific image can be made invisible in response to the establishment of the start condition,
A first information display can be displayed in the first presentation mode,
The first information display can be displayed in a specific manner,
When the first information display is displayed in response to the establishment of the start condition, the first information display in a specific display mode can be displayed before the first information display in the specific mode is displayed,
When the start condition is satisfied during the display of the specific image and the first information display is displayed , the first information display in the specific display mode can be made difficult to view or its display can be restricted ,
The first information display in the specific manner corresponds to the determination information,
A gaming machine having a second presentation mode in which, when the start condition is met while the specific image is being displayed, a second information display different from the first information display is displayed in a predetermined display mode different from the specific display mode, and then the second information display is displayed in a predetermined mode corresponding to the judgment information .

Images